80
Portland State University Portland State University PDXScholar PDXScholar Dissertations and Theses Dissertations and Theses 1974 A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words Words Ingrid T. Hanna Portland State University Follow this and additional works at: https://pdxscholar.library.pdx.edu/open_access_etds Part of the Linguistic Anthropology Commons Let us know how access to this document benefits you. Recommended Citation Recommended Citation Hanna, Ingrid T., "A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words" (1974). Dissertations and Theses. Paper 2138. https://doi.org/10.15760/etd.2136 This Thesis is brought to you for free and open access. It has been accepted for inclusion in Dissertations and Theses by an authorized administrator of PDXScholar. Please contact us if we can make this document more accessible: [email protected].

A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    1

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Portland State University Portland State University

PDXScholar PDXScholar

Dissertations and Theses Dissertations and Theses

1974

A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia

Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC

Words Words

Ingrid T Hanna Portland State University

Follow this and additional works at httpspdxscholarlibrarypdxeduopen_access_etds

Part of the Linguistic Anthropology Commons

Let us know how access to this document benefits you

Recommended Citation Recommended Citation Hanna Ingrid T A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words (1974) Dissertations and Theses Paper 2138 httpsdoiorg1015760etd2136

This Thesis is brought to you for free and open access It has been accepted for inclusion in Dissertations and Theses by an authorized administrator of PDXScholar Please contact us if we can make this document more accessible pdxscholarpdxedu

AN ABSTRACT OF THE THESIS OF Ingrid T Hanna for the Master

of Arts in Anthropology presented May 13 1974

Title A Spectrographic Analysis of Eahasa Indonesia

Vowel Phonemes Under Primary 5tr3ss in evc Words

APPROVED BY MEMBERS OF THE THESIS COMMITTEE

__ Doe E Pierce Chairma n

Daniel J Schsa

This study is an investigation into the natureof the

vowel phonemes of Bahasa Indonesia in monosyllabic words

under primary stress and consisting of a consonant followshy

ed by a vowel followed by a consonant Bahasa Indonesia is

-the national language of the Republic of Indonesia All of

the material in the literature relating to the vowel quality

of this language is highly impressionistic Some of the

descriptions are comparisons with vowels in various modern

Indo-European languages rather than scientific descriptions

of strictly Indonesian vowel quality_

In order to derive a more accurate picture of the

phonetic qualities of Bahasa Indonesian vowels the acousshy

2

tic spectrograph was utilized This instrument analyzes

a complex human speech wave and produces a visual image

of the frequencies in the wave which are not filtered out

by the articulators The data consisted of recordings of

eighty-eight words as produced by a native speaker Every

phoneme was contrasted with every other middotvowel phoneme in

identical environments Spectrograms were then made of

every phoneme in every environment that it occurred The

information derived from these spectrograms was then charted

These charts show the approximate range of sound quality

which native speakers recognize as a particular phoneme in

the specified environment

The results of the study show that Bahasa Indonesia

has three front vowels contrasting high mid and low tongue

positions and two back vowels contrasting high and mid

tongue positions The three front vowels have slightly overshy

lapping distributions this may partially be due to the fact

that the words in which the phonemes were found had no conshy

trasting word containing a neighboring phoneme This differs

markedly with the back vowels where the distributions are

sharply separated

The aforementioned charts of vowels have a distinct

resemblance to the traditional vowel charts Thus after

all the evidence was gathered and analyzed a traditional

vowel diagram was drawn for thes~ particular vowels of

Bahasa Indonesia

TO THE OFFICE OF GRADUATE STUDIES AND RESEARCH

The members of the Committee approve the thesis of

Ingrid T Hanna presented May 13 1974

e E Pierce Chairman

Studies

of Anthropology

May 13 1974

A SPECTROGRAPHIC ANALYSIS

OF

BAHASA INDONESIA VOWEL PHONEMES

UNDER PRIMARY STRESS IN eve WORDS

by

INGRID T HANNA

A thesis submitted in partialfulfillment of the requirements for th~ degree of

MASTER OF ARTS in

ANTHROPOLOGY

Portland State University 1974

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

I would like to thank the faculty members on my

thesis committee for their help and contributions

am especially grateful to Prof Joe E Pierce for his

continual advise and mor~l support

Mostly I would like to thank my husband withoutmiddot

whose understanding constant encouragement and proshy

fessional advise I could not have survived the entire

effort

I

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS iii

CHAPTERi r I INTRODUCTION 1

Language Justification for Study Statement of the Problem Delimitations of the Study

II THEORETICAL BACKGROUND 7

PhoneticsPhonemics Acoustic Theory FundamentalsHarmonics Acoustics vs Articulation Spectrograph

I I I METHODOLOGY bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull 1 5 I

Phoneme Identification Spectrograms

IV FINDINGS I 24

V SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 67

EIBLIOGRAPHY ~ bullbull _bullbull _ __ bull __ 690 __ bull _

Sources Sources

Cited Consulted

APPENDIX A 71

List of Words

APPENDIX B bull --- bull bull - bull bull bull bull bull bull I bull bull bull Linguistic Symbolization Used

73

CHAPTER I

INTRODUCTION

Language

Bahasa Indonesia the official name applied to the

Indonesian language is a member of the Malayo-Polyrresian

language family The term Bahasa Indonesia is often used

synonymously with modern Malay or Malay dialect (Uhlenbeck

1967) References to a similar form of this Malay based

language are found as early as the 16th cent~ry by traders

such as th~ Chinese the Hindu and the Arabs (Woodman 1955)

Words were added to the language known as Melaju Pasar or

Bazaar Malay as trade with foreigners increased (Woodman

1955) These foreign elements in Melaju Pasar formed the

essential differences between it and the Malay spoken on the

Ma~ay Peninsula (Woodman 1955) Bahasa Indonesia differs

little from the standard dialect of the Malay Peninsula and

daes so mainly in its relatively large and growing vocabulashy

ry borrowed from European and indigenous languages (Amerishy

can University 1970) Bahasa Indonesia is then an adaptashy

tion of Malay inasmuch as it has been changed by the origishy

nal regional languages and modern European languages (Alisshy

jahbana 1949)

2

Today Bahasa Indonesia is the official language of the

Republic of Indonesia It has been estimated that over 200I

region~l languages are spoken in this country of wide cul-

I tural diversity (Wo~dman 1955) When Indonesia beganto

I strive for independence from Dutch colonialists a common

language seemed eSsential in an effort to unify the nationI Indonesian political leaders desirous of revitalizing r th people br9ught (to bare) the most effective means of

organizing them in the greatest numbers (Alisjahbana 1949)

Attention was focused upon the Malay language which was the

lingua Franca for most of Southeast Asia Javanese was

rejected although it possessed a thousand-year-old literary

tradition and was the language of the largest ethnic group

in the islands (American University 1970) The Javanese

language has a fairly ~igid system of vo~abulary differshy

ences based on social class Thus Malay became the basis

of the national language At the 1928 conference of the

pertemuan Muda (Meeting of Youth) Malay was chosen to be

the basis of the national language (American University

1970) By 1930 then the term Malay Language was officshy

ially changed to the Indonesian language (Uhlenbeck 1967)

It became the language for scholarly endeavors and the langshy

uage of leaders and officials During the Japanese occupashy

tion in 1942 the language made further gains In an effort

to combat Dutch cultural influence it was made the compulshy

3

sory language uied in schools from elementary and up

Bahasa Indonesia became the official national language

when the Republic of Indonesia was farmed in 1945

Justification For Study

Phonemic descriptions of Bahasa Indonesia are almost

non-existent and very limited f from a linguistic point of

view Most descriptions of the sounds of Indonesian are

of a comparative nature i e Bahasa Indonesian sounds are

likened to sounds of modern Indo-European languages Echols

and Shadilys An Indonesian-English Dictionary describes

Indonesian sounds in relation to the similar sounds in

English For instance they argue that the e in the Indoshy

nesian word sen is like the e in the English word make n

only shorter Statements such as the aforementionedmay

be practical for most purposes but are not necessarily

linguistically sound and almost certainly inaccurate

Another deficiency which seems to be present in phonshy

emic analyses not only in Indonesian is the impressionistic

nature of these analyses When dealing with a lang~ag8

the linguist must attempt to remove all linguistic biases

and comparisons because phonetic details may escape the

ear of the analyst f especially in a foreign language upon

which he is likely to impose depending upon the degree of

his skill any of the few prejudices of his native phonemic

scale (Pulgram 1965) Even when the investigator does nat

4

I

rely on comparative methods of description he cannot compshy

letely remove all the sounds in his linguistic memory when

describing a new language He will invariably hear sounds

that are very similar to those he knows and may not be able

to discern certain minor although perhaps crucial differshy

ences Phonemic descriptions are most often of this impresshy

sionistic variety

Spectrographic analyses of the sounds of a language

provide an objective measure of the quality of the sounds

of a language Spectrographs record precise sound qualities

produced by a speaker particuiarly vowels This mode of

description will delete the impressions of the investigator

and will map precise quality for sounds in question what

shows on a spectrogram is an acous~ic reality whether the

analyst hears it or not (Pulgram 1965) It is these

precise sound qualities of Bahasa Iridonesian vowel phonemes

that this investigation will attempt to ascertain Instrushy

mentaltesting of hypotheses has been a part of scientific

study for many years but very little has been done to

date in linguistics (Pierce 1963) The acoustic specshy

trograph can provide definite answers as to the phonetic

quality of vowels

The science of phonemics developed out of the realizashy

tion that some phoneti6 features of a language differentiate

one word from another while others do not Edward Sapir

(1921) argues

5

Back of the purely objective system of sounds that is peculiar to a language and which can be arrived at only by a painstaking phonetic analysis there is -a more restricted inner or ideal system which perhaps equally unconscious as a system to the naive speaker can far more readily than the other be brought to his consciousness as a finished pattern a psychological mechanism The inner sound system overlaid though it may be by the mechanical or the irrelevant is a real important principle in the life of a language

Once it was accepted that language had a definite phonologshy

ical structure a method was devised to describe this undershy

lying system This method became the science of phonemics

The phonemic structure of a language represents the minimal

number of sound signals which make transmission of informashy

tion possible Spectrographic analyses of t~ese minimal

sound signals provide objective and empirical measurements

of the quality of these minimal sound features

Statement of the Problem

This investigation will determine the range of free

variation of Bahasa Indonesian vowel phonemes in a given

phonemic environment and types of conditioned variation

from one environment to another The nature and ra~ge of

the vowel quality for each phoneme will be determined by

spectrographic measurements

Delimitations of the Study

This study will only deal with Bahasa Indonesian

vowels sounds produced with vibration of the vocal cords

6

by unobstructed passage of air through the oral cavity

and not constricted enough to cause audible friction

Pei 1966) They will be the vowels found in monoshy

syllabic Indonesian wo~ds under primary stress and in a

consonant~vowel-cDnsonant pattern Each word will also

be part of a minimal pair ie every word must be conshy

trasted with another word in which only the medial vowel

is different andto which a different semantic meaning is

attached

CHAPTER II

THEORETICAL BACKGROUND

PhoneticsPhonemics

Phonetics is the branch of linguistics which deals

with the actual speech sounds of a language When dealing

with the phonetic level of linguistic analysis one describes

the sounds of a language in terms of articulation or acoustic

features In articulatory phonetics one describes sounds

in middotterms 9f manner of articulation ie whether it is a

stop fricat~ve etc point of articulation ie) bilabial

(be~ween the lips) dental etc or vowel quality ie

high-front-close (the highest part of the tongue-is very

high in the front of the mouth for producing this particular

sound) etc In acoustic phonetics sounds are described in

terms of the distributions of frequencies characteristic of

the sounds of a language The relationship generally acshy

cepted as existing between artic~latory and ~coustic phonetshy

ics is that certain articulations produce certain distinctive

patterns of frequency distributions It must be emphasized

at this point that both of the aforementioned types of deshy

scriptians deal with all human speech sounds not necessarily

those which perform a signalling function in a particular I

aspect of the language

I I

f

8

Distinctlve features are used to denote signalling

functions The label distinctive feature is used in the

literature to mean two quite different things Bloomfield

describes the categorization with examples which imply

that distinctive sound feature means any feature of the vocal

sound which when changed changes the meaning of a given

word eg pill and bill sin and sing etcri (Pierce 1965)

There Bloomfi~ld labels p as a distinctive sound feature

and b as a different sound feature Later Roman Jakobson

Gunnar M Fant and Morris Halle in their Preliminaries of

sectpeech Analysis take the phonemes of a language and break

them down into their component phonetic features some of

which are distinctive eg voicing in English b vs p

while others are not eg aspiration in English p~ in pin

as opposed to p in spin Anyone language code has a

finite set of distinctive features bullbullbull (Jakobson Fant and

Halle 1961) In English the feature of voicing in the b

of bill as opposed to the absence of voicing for the p

in pill is the phonetic feature which distinguishes these

two sounds A similar presence vs absence of aspiration

does not alter the meaning of any English utterance in fact

it is difficult to make English speakers aware of the fact

that aspiration is or is not present Implicit in this

theoretical approach is the concept that the variation in

human speech for the most part re~resents presence vs

9

1

absence of non-distinctive features of sound

One theoretical approach to linguistic structures

views the phoneme as concurrent bundles of distinctive

features (Jakobson Fant and Halle 1961) Each language

has a finite set of rules for grouping them (distinctive

features) into phQnemes (Jakobson Fant and Halle 1961)

Every phoneme in the language then is composed of a unique

set of distinctive features such that it is different from

any other phoneme by at least one of such distinctive feashy

tures This manner of linguistic signalling has important

implicat~ons toward phonemic analysis of sound systems As

previously mentioned a phoneme is a bundle of distinctive

features which when altered changes meaning In order

to verify whether a sound is a phoneme or not one must

show a word in which the replacement of at least one disti~c-

tive feature makes another word ie a minimal pair difshy

ferentiated by only a single distinctive feature and having

two distinct grammatical or semantical meanings

Phonemics the study of phonem~s is the level of lingushy

istic analysis which answers the question of how language

utilizes sound matter selecting certain of its elements and

adapting them for various ends The prima~y functions of

sound in a language is to distinguish one utterance from anshy

other in normal conversation Phonemic analysis as an opshy

eration examines a~ailable data in order to discover an unshy

derlying structure bullbullbull not an operation which forces a mass

1 0

of data into a structure (Pulgram 19~5) The nature of

each feature is of the essence Thus the composition of

each phoneme becomes of primary importance in a language

The phoneme can only be defined in reference to the larger

frame whi~h is the language of which it is a structured

feature (Pulgram 1965) It is the shortest stretch of

sound which serves a signalling function

Acoustic Theory

I Distinctive feature theory as previously describedI I seems to handle such phonemes s stops fricatives and

I nasals quite well eg the airflow out of the mouth is I

either stopped or it is allowed to escape On the other

1 hand vowels seem to be ranges of phonetic quality whichI

are extremely difficult if not impossible to distinguish

in terms of presence vs ab~~nce of distinctive features

Since this study will not be concerned with consonants but

only w~th vowels it is only necessary to discuss the acousshy

tic nature of vowel qualities from this point on

FundamentalsHarmonics

Vowel quality is determined by a combination of a fundashy

mental and its harmonics A vowel quality displayed on an

oscilloscope shows a very complex single wave form This

wave form is in reality the mathematical sum of a number

of simple wave forms or at least for theoretical purposes

1 1

can be treated as such These wave forms are generated

in the oral tract by the opening and closing of the glotshy

tis The fundamental wave is a sine wave with a frequency

equal to the number of times the glottis opens and closes

each second and an amplitude which is directly pro~ortion-

al to air pressure in the lungs Because of the nature

of sound waves a harmonic is generated at every multiple

of this fundamental eg if the fundamental is 100 cycles

per second then a harmonic is generated at 200 300

400 bullbullbull CO As soon as the complex wave leaves the vocal

chords harmoni6s are filtered out by the nature of the

tissue surrounding the oral tract as well as the cavities

in and adj o 1ning the oral tract The complex wave emerging

from the mouth is the mathematical sum of fundamental and

the harmonics which have not been filtered out by the oral

tract cf Martin Joos Acoustic Phonetics (1 948) chapshy

ters 1 and 2 for a fuller explanation of this process

Acoustics vs Articulation

In the last century far too much energy has b~en exshy

pended in attempts to relate acoustic features to specific

articulatory movements Bloch (1942) illustrates this by

stating qualities are identified by ear but in linguisshy

tic works they are traditionally defined in terms of their

assumed production by the vocal organs This type ofmiddotstudy

is misdirected because the only things that impinge on the

I I

- I

12

human ear are the harmonics which were not filtered out

The articulatory movements which cause the filtration ie

movement of the tongue from front to back creating a series

of filters each of which removes different harmonics

from the complex waves are irrelevant Pike (1943) argues

one should analyze and describe the sounds (or sound waves)

themselves rather than the movements ~roducing them

It has long been noted by acousticians that a variety

of articulatory movements remove the same harmonics and

r~sult in the production of very similar sounds Pierce

(1962) illustrates this by saying

As long as the formants are in their praper positions ie the proper frequencies are passed through the speech mechanism it does not matter whether the unwanted frequencies are filtered out by rounding the lips or moving the tongue to the back ThuQ when Holbrook and Carmody give one front-back position for the tongue for a given English vowel and IPA (International Pho~etic Alphabet) gives another it is quite probable that both are completely correct and that the formant shift is made by compensating for the lack of tongue movement in the speech of some speakers by additional lip rounding bullbullbullbull

Since the hearer of a stream of speech can hear 9nly those harmonics which emerge from the mouth as componshyents of the final complex wave the placement of the formant is of primary importance not the articulation which produced the sound

Therefore a study of the phonetic quality of vowels

demands an instrument which is capable of making an accurate

record of the presence or absence of all the harmonics

having sufficient amplitude to significantly alter the final

wave form The acoustic spectrograph is such an instrument

13

it was the first instrument to make large scale acoustic

a n a ly s e sapr act i c a I po s sibiIi t Y n ( Lad e fog ed 1 967 ) bull

Spectrograph

The acoustic spectrograph is a device ~hich records a

stream of speech 2~4 seconds or less in length This

recording is then fed into the analyzing part of the specshy

trograph where at each successive playing ne frequency

or rather one frequency band is lifted outof the total by

the variable filter (Pulgram 1965) A black ma~king is

made on a piece ofmiddot electro-sensitive paper each time there

is a harmonic present within the frequency band being anashy

lyzed Since the articulators are constantly moving and

changing the filtration characteristics of thevocal tract

the black markings ma~e by a stylus reflect the movements

of the articula~ors in a very broad sense More important

however it makes a precise record of the stimulus ie

the harmonics which reach the ear of the listener Dunn

(1950) says the vowels have asso~iated with them different

frequency regions in which the sound is more intense than

elsewhere in the spectrum The name formant has been apshy

plied to these regions

The next problem then is to relate the concentrations

of power mentioned above ie the formants to human pershy

ception of speech sounds The most widely utilized techshy

nique in this area is one devised by Martin Joos (1948)

~______________________________________~S___________________________________________________shy1

14

generally referred to as his 2 Formant Theory This techshy

nique represents the plotting of formant 1 and formant 2

in a specific wayan a particular chart cf Chart 1 on

p~ 23 This technique is clearly described by Ladefoged

(1967)

The relations between the formant structures of the vowels in a number of words can be conveniently represented by means of formant charts which show the frequency of the firs~ formant at a time in the word when the formant structure is changing at a minimum rate plotted against the frequency of the second formant at the same time

When making these kinds of plots a charting is derived of

vowels for any language which is remarkably like the tradishy

tional impressionistic vowel charts of the 19th century

Esner (1947) illustrated that if the frequency of the first

formant was plotted against the frequency of the second

formant it seemed to equal the relation between formant

frequency and the traditional vowel diagram

Basically this study will reproduce such vowel charts

for a number of examples of each sound in Bahasa Indonesia

Formant 1 will be platted against formant 2 for each vowel

phoneme in a variety of phonemic environments -The purpose

of this will be to determine the range of variation for

every vowel in each e~vironment as produced by a single native

speaker

CHAPTER III

METHODOLOGY

Phoneme Identification

In order to assess the phonetic quality of vowel phoshy

nemes one must first ascertain the number and relationshy

ship of sound contrasts in a language ie the phonemes

The visual representation of the actualization of the phoshy

neme ie the spectrogram can only be made on the basis

of a preceding decision of the linguist on the types and

number of phonemes in the l~nguage to be anaiyzed (Pulgram

1965)~ Phonemic analysis cannot be made with phonetic

data alone it must be made with phonetic data plus a sershy

ies of phonemic premises and procedures (Pike 1947) A

spectrogram conveys phonetic information which aids the

linguist in determining which phonetic features are consisshy

tently present in order to reach the most accurate phonetic

description

There are a variety of premises and procedures which

the investigator may utilize in order to discover the phoshy

nemic structure of a language Pike (1947) argues that the

investigator must have at hand observable native reaction

to native sounds andor know structural facts pertaining to

the phonetic nature of the sounds and their distribution

As stated before a phoneme is a bundle of sound f~atures

1

j

16

which when substituted for another bundle creates a difshy

ference in meaning Since the creation of a different morshy

pheme is the result of the substitution of a different sound

feature these sound features are said to be phonemes

A pair of words in which the first word is the same as the second except for the fact that one segment is replaced by a different but phonetic~lly similar segment in the second word constitutes proof that the two similar segments are phonemically distinct~ bullbullbull Word pairs of this type are said to be MINIMALshyLY DIFFERENJ because no smaller difference in the language can make a differ~nce in meahing in words (Pike 1947)

Hence minimal pairs of words were used to find phonemes

Minimal~y different word pairs prove to be the beginners

single most important tool for the analysis of phonemic difshy

ferences (Pike 1947)

Thus Echols and Shadilys An Indonesian-English Dicshy

tionarv (1968) was ut~lized to find three-phoneme words

containing two consonant sounds with a vowel in medial poshy

sition The process was simply to go through all the words

beginning with consonants and find minimally different t~ree

phoneme words This was done on a purely anthr~poscopic

basis on the part of the investigator If a different letshy

ter was employed to distinguish a different meaning it was

assumed to be a different phoneme The following ~ord pairs

and their meanings are examples of the words found in the

dictionary

ban--tire bin--son of

das-- a shot dos--small box carton

I

1 7

pal--pole pel--field

rang--rank position ring--ring

teh--tea toh--yet nevertheless

After having obtained the words from the dictionary

a native informant was called upon to verify ~he differshy

ance in meaning in the minimal pairs and to pronounce

them so that ~hey could be phonetically transcribed in

al1 impressionistic manner The informant employed was Kok

Djen Su a student at Portland State University from Yogshy

jakartai Indonesia He has been a student in the United

States for approximately two years and speaks broken al shy

though very understandable English Mr Su was horn to Mr

and Mrs Su Hendry Su who both speak Bahasa Indonesia Jashy

vanese and a small amount of Chinese Since his birth the

informant was exposed to a mixture of Javanese and Bahasa

Indonesia but has employed the national language of Indoshy

nesia since the age of three at school His bilingual upshy

bringing it seems to the author does not craate a subshy

stantial difference in the competence of Mr Su in Bahasa

Indonesia In fact he was able to distinguish the proshy

nunciation Qf words in both Javanese and in Bahasa Indoshy

nesia The utilization of one informant deletes any reshy

gional variation or individual variation between informshy

ants Since here we are attempting to ascertain the relashy

tive range of phonetic quality of vowel phonemes in Bahashy

sa Indonesia the informants bilingualism ahould cause

none or very few phonetic distortions

After-having verified the difference in meaning of

the word pairs Kok Djen ~u pronounced the word The

following impressionistic version of the Ihdonesian voshy

wel system was described

front central back

high

mid 1 I

I I low j

i I I

I

u-

E 0

A

1 Spectrograms

The phonemic entities symbolized in the preceding

section represent range-units of phonetic quality The

symbols and their position on the chart are based on the

aural perceptions of the investigator The purpose of the

spectrographic analysis of this data is to determine as

accurately as possible the actual phonetic range represenshy

ted by each of thephonemic symbols

I

i

1 9

In order to make spectrograms from which meani~gful

conclusions can be drawn one must have a native informant

of the language to be studied Spectrograms were made of

the speech of Mr Su the informant described earlier

In order to conserve the time of the informant a

sample of three-phoneme words were recorded The three-

phoneme words begin and end with consonants ahd contain a

vowel in medial position The list appears in Appendix A

The list of words was specifically selec~ed to eliminate

in so far as possible all variatiqn other than that which

is specifically caused by the preceding and following consoshy

nants This is true because by utilizing a single informant

the influence of dialects both regional and social are eshy

liminated and by utilizing one sy~lable words under primary

1stress sequential influences such as the Markov Process

are eliminated since there is no sequence beyond one phoshy

neme preceding and following the vowel This being the case

one should be able to derive from a series of spectrograms

of those vowels both the range of free variation and the

specific influence of each particular consonant on the voshy

weI quality of each medial phoneme

The n~xt st~p in the procedure was to play the tape-

recordings into the spectrograph two or three wo~ds at a

1The Markoy Process is a mechanical way of handling enshytropy in sequential operations IQ linguistics this is stashyted in terms ofthe probability of the occurrence of a parshyticular phoneme morpheme etc in a precise sequence

20

time The machine can handle 24 seconds of speech on one

spectrogram thus two or three words could be analyzed at

the same time as one with no loss in quality or precision

Unfortunately the recordings had to be played into a

microphone which picks up some background noise but by

placing the microp~one of the spectrograph very close to

the loudspeaker of the tape recorder and turning the volume

up slightly this background was eliminated for all pracshy

tical purposes middotIt would have been better to have had a

direct connection between the recordar and the spectrograph

but unfortunately no such devce was available Background

noise shows up as very small specks scattered more or less

at random and unless the volume of such noise is exceedshy

ingly strong does not interfere with the reading of the

spectrograms

Once the machine had completed the analys~s and produced

the graphic record of the list of words a frequency measur~

ing device was produced by the machine cf example below

1 11amp II~ill c=

- n- HE to

11r -shy

bull b mmiddot 1 bull bull L

-

gIl F Jamp u

n _ If

bull III

21

This measuring device is in reality a spectrogram with horishy

zontal markings The first line on the chart represents a

frequency of 0 hertz (hz) Each line above the first repshy

resents a multiple of 500 hz The device is used to locate

th~ center of formants 1 and 2 Since it is graduated in

500 hz it is necessary to interpolate when the center ofmiddot

power for a particular formant falls between two of these

lines This is done by dividing the area between the two

lines in half then dividing one of the halves in half which

gives a range of 125 hz within which the measurement falls

and an estimate is made of the precise measurement within

the 125 hz range This should give formant positions with

an accuraci of greater than plusmn25 hz

When visual location of the formant centers becprnes

difficult a section of the formant can be made cf exshy

ample below Such difficulties with visual location usually

arise when two weak formants overlap Such overlapping

produc~s what appears to the naked eye to be a band of modeshy

rately dark grey bands The sectioner is a built in mech-

IshyfL__---

tete we tt

~

I

1 I

22

anism capable of handling such problems In the preceding

I example the amplitude of each harmonic is proportional

to the length of the line representing that harmonic I

This makes it possible to locate formant centers when vi-

I sual location is difficult

The measurements were then transferred to formant

charts cf Chart 1 on the following page

6

23

CHART I

~

t

1+

t5

1amp

Ie

z~ 2t 2p 16 12 la 8 Iii

I ~

~

I S

l I

I I

~

V V

V T

l( FORMANT V CHART

Vi ~ CcdiOrate4 ift luutdnM I V ~ cycle ~ concf

V 10 eeentl~rsI~ V

V U 5millimctcrs - I $milton

2 zk2 lis ty

I

FOlWAlfT CHART

Placing a single point on this cha-t is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one fOrrUlt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant atmiddotthe frequency named along the top or bottom edge

ex Martin Joos~ Acoustic Phonetics (1948)

CHAPTER IV

FINDINGS

The data provided by the preceding methodology conshy

sisted of a series of scatter patterns on the vowel charts

Each of the dots within the pattern represented one occurshy

rence of a particular vowel To determine the range ofmiddot each

phoneme f the most divergent points in each pattern were con-

nected by a line These lines then circumscribe an area

which included the range of all the vowels in the sample

recognized ~y the informantmiddotas a particular phoneme

Verbal descriptions the actual charts of the phonemes

and the spectrograms utilized willbe found on the followshy

ing pages

25

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 1 range~ on the

vowel chart in a broad scattering from 300-500 hz for forshy

mant 1 and 1500-2100 hz for formant 2

CHART II

1

lid

13

bull

~

It

iA

Ml

ztr Zit zp 1 S lIZ middot1 I a r 8 6

I

f

I I

Ii 3

[7l I I V 1 I

) ~I I i I bull

V I I i bull r J

I V t I I I I I

i tt I

Kl7 I I I iI ~

I I I I I I I I I i I

I I I i I f I ltII

I I l7 I VI

I [7 1

1 I I I Va FORMANTc7 CHART

I

I I I I 173 CaEiIw-atd icw~[7 rf ltfer C0ItdI I I

j I I I i 7 10 e centlCMta1 oct4v

I V 5miU~ bull itonI

r I f 711 t14 j I I I Ik IV

FoiUlAhT CHRT

Placing asinge point on this chart is an assertion that fortcants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at tn(l frequerlcy nameu Slong the right or eft cdampe the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

26

l 1I I - -~

I I iI I

I

[bIs] [bIn]

lt-- -_- -1I

lt i

1 ~ i1_ -shy Ir ~ tmiddotmiddot lt

-- - - ---~--- - - - ----- --

-i -_~ ~ shyI 1

i I I

I I bullbullq_-

I ~~~-~--shyr ~~~~~ -~- I------------------------shy

-----I

[dIm] [sIh]

27

I -[blr]

i1 1 I I

i Ii I

I i I I

ii ___ -J

rmiddot I i

I 1 j

-~ ~~~ ~-~IIlIr~~~

I

1 ____~~l_~~--=~ _ ~--~~~~~~~~~- -

51 hI$ PiiB PD~ii~i

-~ - -- -- ----- ~------- - --- _-- - _ - shy [rIll) [klr]

28

1 I I I

---~S~ -~~~fi~ ~~~~~-~

~l_ middot~ ___

[klk]

I I I

r [dlk]

29

-------- --

-~- shy~--I~~

[tIll]

30

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lEI ranged on the

vowel chart in a thin oval shaped distribution from 400-625

hz for formant 1 and from 1400-2000 hz for formant 2

CHART III

lEI

i

I

1 I

1

1middot

II~~ 5 I~ I lOa I ~--~~~I-+--+-4-+--+---+--++-+-+-+-+--r--t-t--r--t--r--1

I

I I I I

t I

4

I I 1 I ~ I I I I

I t I ~

I I ~

-r--- r--- I V~~~-r~+-+-~~~+-+-~~~~~~~--T-~-r~-r~-r~-T---T--r~

V~~~++4-~~~-4-+-+~~~~~+-~-T-rV~7

~iA~~~~~I+-~~~~~I--~~~-r~~~~~8 FORMANT HHHH~~r+~~-r~+-~+-~I~-I~~rl7V CHART

I II 11I I V9 CaZiLrww 1ft huncirccLJ

-+-f-+-II-f-+-+-+-+--+-+--+--+----+-+--+-1--t-+-1---t---t--7 rtf eye 04 ~ I 11 V pq-+-+-I~-+--i--+I-t-t--+~i-I---t--+--tr -t--t-Tj-ri~middotltJ ecentimeters 1octGy

I V 5miU~ - aemiton ~~~~I~~+-~~l~-~-T~I~~~r~

t i lt~ I I IS I I liV

FolUlAn C1LBT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion T hat rormants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency namfu along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

AN ABSTRACT OF THE THESIS OF Ingrid T Hanna for the Master

of Arts in Anthropology presented May 13 1974

Title A Spectrographic Analysis of Eahasa Indonesia

Vowel Phonemes Under Primary 5tr3ss in evc Words

APPROVED BY MEMBERS OF THE THESIS COMMITTEE

__ Doe E Pierce Chairma n

Daniel J Schsa

This study is an investigation into the natureof the

vowel phonemes of Bahasa Indonesia in monosyllabic words

under primary stress and consisting of a consonant followshy

ed by a vowel followed by a consonant Bahasa Indonesia is

-the national language of the Republic of Indonesia All of

the material in the literature relating to the vowel quality

of this language is highly impressionistic Some of the

descriptions are comparisons with vowels in various modern

Indo-European languages rather than scientific descriptions

of strictly Indonesian vowel quality_

In order to derive a more accurate picture of the

phonetic qualities of Bahasa Indonesian vowels the acousshy

2

tic spectrograph was utilized This instrument analyzes

a complex human speech wave and produces a visual image

of the frequencies in the wave which are not filtered out

by the articulators The data consisted of recordings of

eighty-eight words as produced by a native speaker Every

phoneme was contrasted with every other middotvowel phoneme in

identical environments Spectrograms were then made of

every phoneme in every environment that it occurred The

information derived from these spectrograms was then charted

These charts show the approximate range of sound quality

which native speakers recognize as a particular phoneme in

the specified environment

The results of the study show that Bahasa Indonesia

has three front vowels contrasting high mid and low tongue

positions and two back vowels contrasting high and mid

tongue positions The three front vowels have slightly overshy

lapping distributions this may partially be due to the fact

that the words in which the phonemes were found had no conshy

trasting word containing a neighboring phoneme This differs

markedly with the back vowels where the distributions are

sharply separated

The aforementioned charts of vowels have a distinct

resemblance to the traditional vowel charts Thus after

all the evidence was gathered and analyzed a traditional

vowel diagram was drawn for thes~ particular vowels of

Bahasa Indonesia

TO THE OFFICE OF GRADUATE STUDIES AND RESEARCH

The members of the Committee approve the thesis of

Ingrid T Hanna presented May 13 1974

e E Pierce Chairman

Studies

of Anthropology

May 13 1974

A SPECTROGRAPHIC ANALYSIS

OF

BAHASA INDONESIA VOWEL PHONEMES

UNDER PRIMARY STRESS IN eve WORDS

by

INGRID T HANNA

A thesis submitted in partialfulfillment of the requirements for th~ degree of

MASTER OF ARTS in

ANTHROPOLOGY

Portland State University 1974

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

I would like to thank the faculty members on my

thesis committee for their help and contributions

am especially grateful to Prof Joe E Pierce for his

continual advise and mor~l support

Mostly I would like to thank my husband withoutmiddot

whose understanding constant encouragement and proshy

fessional advise I could not have survived the entire

effort

I

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS iii

CHAPTERi r I INTRODUCTION 1

Language Justification for Study Statement of the Problem Delimitations of the Study

II THEORETICAL BACKGROUND 7

PhoneticsPhonemics Acoustic Theory FundamentalsHarmonics Acoustics vs Articulation Spectrograph

I I I METHODOLOGY bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull 1 5 I

Phoneme Identification Spectrograms

IV FINDINGS I 24

V SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 67

EIBLIOGRAPHY ~ bullbull _bullbull _ __ bull __ 690 __ bull _

Sources Sources

Cited Consulted

APPENDIX A 71

List of Words

APPENDIX B bull --- bull bull - bull bull bull bull bull bull I bull bull bull Linguistic Symbolization Used

73

CHAPTER I

INTRODUCTION

Language

Bahasa Indonesia the official name applied to the

Indonesian language is a member of the Malayo-Polyrresian

language family The term Bahasa Indonesia is often used

synonymously with modern Malay or Malay dialect (Uhlenbeck

1967) References to a similar form of this Malay based

language are found as early as the 16th cent~ry by traders

such as th~ Chinese the Hindu and the Arabs (Woodman 1955)

Words were added to the language known as Melaju Pasar or

Bazaar Malay as trade with foreigners increased (Woodman

1955) These foreign elements in Melaju Pasar formed the

essential differences between it and the Malay spoken on the

Ma~ay Peninsula (Woodman 1955) Bahasa Indonesia differs

little from the standard dialect of the Malay Peninsula and

daes so mainly in its relatively large and growing vocabulashy

ry borrowed from European and indigenous languages (Amerishy

can University 1970) Bahasa Indonesia is then an adaptashy

tion of Malay inasmuch as it has been changed by the origishy

nal regional languages and modern European languages (Alisshy

jahbana 1949)

2

Today Bahasa Indonesia is the official language of the

Republic of Indonesia It has been estimated that over 200I

region~l languages are spoken in this country of wide cul-

I tural diversity (Wo~dman 1955) When Indonesia beganto

I strive for independence from Dutch colonialists a common

language seemed eSsential in an effort to unify the nationI Indonesian political leaders desirous of revitalizing r th people br9ught (to bare) the most effective means of

organizing them in the greatest numbers (Alisjahbana 1949)

Attention was focused upon the Malay language which was the

lingua Franca for most of Southeast Asia Javanese was

rejected although it possessed a thousand-year-old literary

tradition and was the language of the largest ethnic group

in the islands (American University 1970) The Javanese

language has a fairly ~igid system of vo~abulary differshy

ences based on social class Thus Malay became the basis

of the national language At the 1928 conference of the

pertemuan Muda (Meeting of Youth) Malay was chosen to be

the basis of the national language (American University

1970) By 1930 then the term Malay Language was officshy

ially changed to the Indonesian language (Uhlenbeck 1967)

It became the language for scholarly endeavors and the langshy

uage of leaders and officials During the Japanese occupashy

tion in 1942 the language made further gains In an effort

to combat Dutch cultural influence it was made the compulshy

3

sory language uied in schools from elementary and up

Bahasa Indonesia became the official national language

when the Republic of Indonesia was farmed in 1945

Justification For Study

Phonemic descriptions of Bahasa Indonesia are almost

non-existent and very limited f from a linguistic point of

view Most descriptions of the sounds of Indonesian are

of a comparative nature i e Bahasa Indonesian sounds are

likened to sounds of modern Indo-European languages Echols

and Shadilys An Indonesian-English Dictionary describes

Indonesian sounds in relation to the similar sounds in

English For instance they argue that the e in the Indoshy

nesian word sen is like the e in the English word make n

only shorter Statements such as the aforementionedmay

be practical for most purposes but are not necessarily

linguistically sound and almost certainly inaccurate

Another deficiency which seems to be present in phonshy

emic analyses not only in Indonesian is the impressionistic

nature of these analyses When dealing with a lang~ag8

the linguist must attempt to remove all linguistic biases

and comparisons because phonetic details may escape the

ear of the analyst f especially in a foreign language upon

which he is likely to impose depending upon the degree of

his skill any of the few prejudices of his native phonemic

scale (Pulgram 1965) Even when the investigator does nat

4

I

rely on comparative methods of description he cannot compshy

letely remove all the sounds in his linguistic memory when

describing a new language He will invariably hear sounds

that are very similar to those he knows and may not be able

to discern certain minor although perhaps crucial differshy

ences Phonemic descriptions are most often of this impresshy

sionistic variety

Spectrographic analyses of the sounds of a language

provide an objective measure of the quality of the sounds

of a language Spectrographs record precise sound qualities

produced by a speaker particuiarly vowels This mode of

description will delete the impressions of the investigator

and will map precise quality for sounds in question what

shows on a spectrogram is an acous~ic reality whether the

analyst hears it or not (Pulgram 1965) It is these

precise sound qualities of Bahasa Iridonesian vowel phonemes

that this investigation will attempt to ascertain Instrushy

mentaltesting of hypotheses has been a part of scientific

study for many years but very little has been done to

date in linguistics (Pierce 1963) The acoustic specshy

trograph can provide definite answers as to the phonetic

quality of vowels

The science of phonemics developed out of the realizashy

tion that some phoneti6 features of a language differentiate

one word from another while others do not Edward Sapir

(1921) argues

5

Back of the purely objective system of sounds that is peculiar to a language and which can be arrived at only by a painstaking phonetic analysis there is -a more restricted inner or ideal system which perhaps equally unconscious as a system to the naive speaker can far more readily than the other be brought to his consciousness as a finished pattern a psychological mechanism The inner sound system overlaid though it may be by the mechanical or the irrelevant is a real important principle in the life of a language

Once it was accepted that language had a definite phonologshy

ical structure a method was devised to describe this undershy

lying system This method became the science of phonemics

The phonemic structure of a language represents the minimal

number of sound signals which make transmission of informashy

tion possible Spectrographic analyses of t~ese minimal

sound signals provide objective and empirical measurements

of the quality of these minimal sound features

Statement of the Problem

This investigation will determine the range of free

variation of Bahasa Indonesian vowel phonemes in a given

phonemic environment and types of conditioned variation

from one environment to another The nature and ra~ge of

the vowel quality for each phoneme will be determined by

spectrographic measurements

Delimitations of the Study

This study will only deal with Bahasa Indonesian

vowels sounds produced with vibration of the vocal cords

6

by unobstructed passage of air through the oral cavity

and not constricted enough to cause audible friction

Pei 1966) They will be the vowels found in monoshy

syllabic Indonesian wo~ds under primary stress and in a

consonant~vowel-cDnsonant pattern Each word will also

be part of a minimal pair ie every word must be conshy

trasted with another word in which only the medial vowel

is different andto which a different semantic meaning is

attached

CHAPTER II

THEORETICAL BACKGROUND

PhoneticsPhonemics

Phonetics is the branch of linguistics which deals

with the actual speech sounds of a language When dealing

with the phonetic level of linguistic analysis one describes

the sounds of a language in terms of articulation or acoustic

features In articulatory phonetics one describes sounds

in middotterms 9f manner of articulation ie whether it is a

stop fricat~ve etc point of articulation ie) bilabial

(be~ween the lips) dental etc or vowel quality ie

high-front-close (the highest part of the tongue-is very

high in the front of the mouth for producing this particular

sound) etc In acoustic phonetics sounds are described in

terms of the distributions of frequencies characteristic of

the sounds of a language The relationship generally acshy

cepted as existing between artic~latory and ~coustic phonetshy

ics is that certain articulations produce certain distinctive

patterns of frequency distributions It must be emphasized

at this point that both of the aforementioned types of deshy

scriptians deal with all human speech sounds not necessarily

those which perform a signalling function in a particular I

aspect of the language

I I

f

8

Distinctlve features are used to denote signalling

functions The label distinctive feature is used in the

literature to mean two quite different things Bloomfield

describes the categorization with examples which imply

that distinctive sound feature means any feature of the vocal

sound which when changed changes the meaning of a given

word eg pill and bill sin and sing etcri (Pierce 1965)

There Bloomfi~ld labels p as a distinctive sound feature

and b as a different sound feature Later Roman Jakobson

Gunnar M Fant and Morris Halle in their Preliminaries of

sectpeech Analysis take the phonemes of a language and break

them down into their component phonetic features some of

which are distinctive eg voicing in English b vs p

while others are not eg aspiration in English p~ in pin

as opposed to p in spin Anyone language code has a

finite set of distinctive features bullbullbull (Jakobson Fant and

Halle 1961) In English the feature of voicing in the b

of bill as opposed to the absence of voicing for the p

in pill is the phonetic feature which distinguishes these

two sounds A similar presence vs absence of aspiration

does not alter the meaning of any English utterance in fact

it is difficult to make English speakers aware of the fact

that aspiration is or is not present Implicit in this

theoretical approach is the concept that the variation in

human speech for the most part re~resents presence vs

9

1

absence of non-distinctive features of sound

One theoretical approach to linguistic structures

views the phoneme as concurrent bundles of distinctive

features (Jakobson Fant and Halle 1961) Each language

has a finite set of rules for grouping them (distinctive

features) into phQnemes (Jakobson Fant and Halle 1961)

Every phoneme in the language then is composed of a unique

set of distinctive features such that it is different from

any other phoneme by at least one of such distinctive feashy

tures This manner of linguistic signalling has important

implicat~ons toward phonemic analysis of sound systems As

previously mentioned a phoneme is a bundle of distinctive

features which when altered changes meaning In order

to verify whether a sound is a phoneme or not one must

show a word in which the replacement of at least one disti~c-

tive feature makes another word ie a minimal pair difshy

ferentiated by only a single distinctive feature and having

two distinct grammatical or semantical meanings

Phonemics the study of phonem~s is the level of lingushy

istic analysis which answers the question of how language

utilizes sound matter selecting certain of its elements and

adapting them for various ends The prima~y functions of

sound in a language is to distinguish one utterance from anshy

other in normal conversation Phonemic analysis as an opshy

eration examines a~ailable data in order to discover an unshy

derlying structure bullbullbull not an operation which forces a mass

1 0

of data into a structure (Pulgram 19~5) The nature of

each feature is of the essence Thus the composition of

each phoneme becomes of primary importance in a language

The phoneme can only be defined in reference to the larger

frame whi~h is the language of which it is a structured

feature (Pulgram 1965) It is the shortest stretch of

sound which serves a signalling function

Acoustic Theory

I Distinctive feature theory as previously describedI I seems to handle such phonemes s stops fricatives and

I nasals quite well eg the airflow out of the mouth is I

either stopped or it is allowed to escape On the other

1 hand vowels seem to be ranges of phonetic quality whichI

are extremely difficult if not impossible to distinguish

in terms of presence vs ab~~nce of distinctive features

Since this study will not be concerned with consonants but

only w~th vowels it is only necessary to discuss the acousshy

tic nature of vowel qualities from this point on

FundamentalsHarmonics

Vowel quality is determined by a combination of a fundashy

mental and its harmonics A vowel quality displayed on an

oscilloscope shows a very complex single wave form This

wave form is in reality the mathematical sum of a number

of simple wave forms or at least for theoretical purposes

1 1

can be treated as such These wave forms are generated

in the oral tract by the opening and closing of the glotshy

tis The fundamental wave is a sine wave with a frequency

equal to the number of times the glottis opens and closes

each second and an amplitude which is directly pro~ortion-

al to air pressure in the lungs Because of the nature

of sound waves a harmonic is generated at every multiple

of this fundamental eg if the fundamental is 100 cycles

per second then a harmonic is generated at 200 300

400 bullbullbull CO As soon as the complex wave leaves the vocal

chords harmoni6s are filtered out by the nature of the

tissue surrounding the oral tract as well as the cavities

in and adj o 1ning the oral tract The complex wave emerging

from the mouth is the mathematical sum of fundamental and

the harmonics which have not been filtered out by the oral

tract cf Martin Joos Acoustic Phonetics (1 948) chapshy

ters 1 and 2 for a fuller explanation of this process

Acoustics vs Articulation

In the last century far too much energy has b~en exshy

pended in attempts to relate acoustic features to specific

articulatory movements Bloch (1942) illustrates this by

stating qualities are identified by ear but in linguisshy

tic works they are traditionally defined in terms of their

assumed production by the vocal organs This type ofmiddotstudy

is misdirected because the only things that impinge on the

I I

- I

12

human ear are the harmonics which were not filtered out

The articulatory movements which cause the filtration ie

movement of the tongue from front to back creating a series

of filters each of which removes different harmonics

from the complex waves are irrelevant Pike (1943) argues

one should analyze and describe the sounds (or sound waves)

themselves rather than the movements ~roducing them

It has long been noted by acousticians that a variety

of articulatory movements remove the same harmonics and

r~sult in the production of very similar sounds Pierce

(1962) illustrates this by saying

As long as the formants are in their praper positions ie the proper frequencies are passed through the speech mechanism it does not matter whether the unwanted frequencies are filtered out by rounding the lips or moving the tongue to the back ThuQ when Holbrook and Carmody give one front-back position for the tongue for a given English vowel and IPA (International Pho~etic Alphabet) gives another it is quite probable that both are completely correct and that the formant shift is made by compensating for the lack of tongue movement in the speech of some speakers by additional lip rounding bullbullbullbull

Since the hearer of a stream of speech can hear 9nly those harmonics which emerge from the mouth as componshyents of the final complex wave the placement of the formant is of primary importance not the articulation which produced the sound

Therefore a study of the phonetic quality of vowels

demands an instrument which is capable of making an accurate

record of the presence or absence of all the harmonics

having sufficient amplitude to significantly alter the final

wave form The acoustic spectrograph is such an instrument

13

it was the first instrument to make large scale acoustic

a n a ly s e sapr act i c a I po s sibiIi t Y n ( Lad e fog ed 1 967 ) bull

Spectrograph

The acoustic spectrograph is a device ~hich records a

stream of speech 2~4 seconds or less in length This

recording is then fed into the analyzing part of the specshy

trograph where at each successive playing ne frequency

or rather one frequency band is lifted outof the total by

the variable filter (Pulgram 1965) A black ma~king is

made on a piece ofmiddot electro-sensitive paper each time there

is a harmonic present within the frequency band being anashy

lyzed Since the articulators are constantly moving and

changing the filtration characteristics of thevocal tract

the black markings ma~e by a stylus reflect the movements

of the articula~ors in a very broad sense More important

however it makes a precise record of the stimulus ie

the harmonics which reach the ear of the listener Dunn

(1950) says the vowels have asso~iated with them different

frequency regions in which the sound is more intense than

elsewhere in the spectrum The name formant has been apshy

plied to these regions

The next problem then is to relate the concentrations

of power mentioned above ie the formants to human pershy

ception of speech sounds The most widely utilized techshy

nique in this area is one devised by Martin Joos (1948)

~______________________________________~S___________________________________________________shy1

14

generally referred to as his 2 Formant Theory This techshy

nique represents the plotting of formant 1 and formant 2

in a specific wayan a particular chart cf Chart 1 on

p~ 23 This technique is clearly described by Ladefoged

(1967)

The relations between the formant structures of the vowels in a number of words can be conveniently represented by means of formant charts which show the frequency of the firs~ formant at a time in the word when the formant structure is changing at a minimum rate plotted against the frequency of the second formant at the same time

When making these kinds of plots a charting is derived of

vowels for any language which is remarkably like the tradishy

tional impressionistic vowel charts of the 19th century

Esner (1947) illustrated that if the frequency of the first

formant was plotted against the frequency of the second

formant it seemed to equal the relation between formant

frequency and the traditional vowel diagram

Basically this study will reproduce such vowel charts

for a number of examples of each sound in Bahasa Indonesia

Formant 1 will be platted against formant 2 for each vowel

phoneme in a variety of phonemic environments -The purpose

of this will be to determine the range of variation for

every vowel in each e~vironment as produced by a single native

speaker

CHAPTER III

METHODOLOGY

Phoneme Identification

In order to assess the phonetic quality of vowel phoshy

nemes one must first ascertain the number and relationshy

ship of sound contrasts in a language ie the phonemes

The visual representation of the actualization of the phoshy

neme ie the spectrogram can only be made on the basis

of a preceding decision of the linguist on the types and

number of phonemes in the l~nguage to be anaiyzed (Pulgram

1965)~ Phonemic analysis cannot be made with phonetic

data alone it must be made with phonetic data plus a sershy

ies of phonemic premises and procedures (Pike 1947) A

spectrogram conveys phonetic information which aids the

linguist in determining which phonetic features are consisshy

tently present in order to reach the most accurate phonetic

description

There are a variety of premises and procedures which

the investigator may utilize in order to discover the phoshy

nemic structure of a language Pike (1947) argues that the

investigator must have at hand observable native reaction

to native sounds andor know structural facts pertaining to

the phonetic nature of the sounds and their distribution

As stated before a phoneme is a bundle of sound f~atures

1

j

16

which when substituted for another bundle creates a difshy

ference in meaning Since the creation of a different morshy

pheme is the result of the substitution of a different sound

feature these sound features are said to be phonemes

A pair of words in which the first word is the same as the second except for the fact that one segment is replaced by a different but phonetic~lly similar segment in the second word constitutes proof that the two similar segments are phonemically distinct~ bullbullbull Word pairs of this type are said to be MINIMALshyLY DIFFERENJ because no smaller difference in the language can make a differ~nce in meahing in words (Pike 1947)

Hence minimal pairs of words were used to find phonemes

Minimal~y different word pairs prove to be the beginners

single most important tool for the analysis of phonemic difshy

ferences (Pike 1947)

Thus Echols and Shadilys An Indonesian-English Dicshy

tionarv (1968) was ut~lized to find three-phoneme words

containing two consonant sounds with a vowel in medial poshy

sition The process was simply to go through all the words

beginning with consonants and find minimally different t~ree

phoneme words This was done on a purely anthr~poscopic

basis on the part of the investigator If a different letshy

ter was employed to distinguish a different meaning it was

assumed to be a different phoneme The following ~ord pairs

and their meanings are examples of the words found in the

dictionary

ban--tire bin--son of

das-- a shot dos--small box carton

I

1 7

pal--pole pel--field

rang--rank position ring--ring

teh--tea toh--yet nevertheless

After having obtained the words from the dictionary

a native informant was called upon to verify ~he differshy

ance in meaning in the minimal pairs and to pronounce

them so that ~hey could be phonetically transcribed in

al1 impressionistic manner The informant employed was Kok

Djen Su a student at Portland State University from Yogshy

jakartai Indonesia He has been a student in the United

States for approximately two years and speaks broken al shy

though very understandable English Mr Su was horn to Mr

and Mrs Su Hendry Su who both speak Bahasa Indonesia Jashy

vanese and a small amount of Chinese Since his birth the

informant was exposed to a mixture of Javanese and Bahasa

Indonesia but has employed the national language of Indoshy

nesia since the age of three at school His bilingual upshy

bringing it seems to the author does not craate a subshy

stantial difference in the competence of Mr Su in Bahasa

Indonesia In fact he was able to distinguish the proshy

nunciation Qf words in both Javanese and in Bahasa Indoshy

nesia The utilization of one informant deletes any reshy

gional variation or individual variation between informshy

ants Since here we are attempting to ascertain the relashy

tive range of phonetic quality of vowel phonemes in Bahashy

sa Indonesia the informants bilingualism ahould cause

none or very few phonetic distortions

After-having verified the difference in meaning of

the word pairs Kok Djen ~u pronounced the word The

following impressionistic version of the Ihdonesian voshy

wel system was described

front central back

high

mid 1 I

I I low j

i I I

I

u-

E 0

A

1 Spectrograms

The phonemic entities symbolized in the preceding

section represent range-units of phonetic quality The

symbols and their position on the chart are based on the

aural perceptions of the investigator The purpose of the

spectrographic analysis of this data is to determine as

accurately as possible the actual phonetic range represenshy

ted by each of thephonemic symbols

I

i

1 9

In order to make spectrograms from which meani~gful

conclusions can be drawn one must have a native informant

of the language to be studied Spectrograms were made of

the speech of Mr Su the informant described earlier

In order to conserve the time of the informant a

sample of three-phoneme words were recorded The three-

phoneme words begin and end with consonants ahd contain a

vowel in medial position The list appears in Appendix A

The list of words was specifically selec~ed to eliminate

in so far as possible all variatiqn other than that which

is specifically caused by the preceding and following consoshy

nants This is true because by utilizing a single informant

the influence of dialects both regional and social are eshy

liminated and by utilizing one sy~lable words under primary

1stress sequential influences such as the Markov Process

are eliminated since there is no sequence beyond one phoshy

neme preceding and following the vowel This being the case

one should be able to derive from a series of spectrograms

of those vowels both the range of free variation and the

specific influence of each particular consonant on the voshy

weI quality of each medial phoneme

The n~xt st~p in the procedure was to play the tape-

recordings into the spectrograph two or three wo~ds at a

1The Markoy Process is a mechanical way of handling enshytropy in sequential operations IQ linguistics this is stashyted in terms ofthe probability of the occurrence of a parshyticular phoneme morpheme etc in a precise sequence

20

time The machine can handle 24 seconds of speech on one

spectrogram thus two or three words could be analyzed at

the same time as one with no loss in quality or precision

Unfortunately the recordings had to be played into a

microphone which picks up some background noise but by

placing the microp~one of the spectrograph very close to

the loudspeaker of the tape recorder and turning the volume

up slightly this background was eliminated for all pracshy

tical purposes middotIt would have been better to have had a

direct connection between the recordar and the spectrograph

but unfortunately no such devce was available Background

noise shows up as very small specks scattered more or less

at random and unless the volume of such noise is exceedshy

ingly strong does not interfere with the reading of the

spectrograms

Once the machine had completed the analys~s and produced

the graphic record of the list of words a frequency measur~

ing device was produced by the machine cf example below

1 11amp II~ill c=

- n- HE to

11r -shy

bull b mmiddot 1 bull bull L

-

gIl F Jamp u

n _ If

bull III

21

This measuring device is in reality a spectrogram with horishy

zontal markings The first line on the chart represents a

frequency of 0 hertz (hz) Each line above the first repshy

resents a multiple of 500 hz The device is used to locate

th~ center of formants 1 and 2 Since it is graduated in

500 hz it is necessary to interpolate when the center ofmiddot

power for a particular formant falls between two of these

lines This is done by dividing the area between the two

lines in half then dividing one of the halves in half which

gives a range of 125 hz within which the measurement falls

and an estimate is made of the precise measurement within

the 125 hz range This should give formant positions with

an accuraci of greater than plusmn25 hz

When visual location of the formant centers becprnes

difficult a section of the formant can be made cf exshy

ample below Such difficulties with visual location usually

arise when two weak formants overlap Such overlapping

produc~s what appears to the naked eye to be a band of modeshy

rately dark grey bands The sectioner is a built in mech-

IshyfL__---

tete we tt

~

I

1 I

22

anism capable of handling such problems In the preceding

I example the amplitude of each harmonic is proportional

to the length of the line representing that harmonic I

This makes it possible to locate formant centers when vi-

I sual location is difficult

The measurements were then transferred to formant

charts cf Chart 1 on the following page

6

23

CHART I

~

t

1+

t5

1amp

Ie

z~ 2t 2p 16 12 la 8 Iii

I ~

~

I S

l I

I I

~

V V

V T

l( FORMANT V CHART

Vi ~ CcdiOrate4 ift luutdnM I V ~ cycle ~ concf

V 10 eeentl~rsI~ V

V U 5millimctcrs - I $milton

2 zk2 lis ty

I

FOlWAlfT CHART

Placing a single point on this cha-t is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one fOrrUlt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant atmiddotthe frequency named along the top or bottom edge

ex Martin Joos~ Acoustic Phonetics (1948)

CHAPTER IV

FINDINGS

The data provided by the preceding methodology conshy

sisted of a series of scatter patterns on the vowel charts

Each of the dots within the pattern represented one occurshy

rence of a particular vowel To determine the range ofmiddot each

phoneme f the most divergent points in each pattern were con-

nected by a line These lines then circumscribe an area

which included the range of all the vowels in the sample

recognized ~y the informantmiddotas a particular phoneme

Verbal descriptions the actual charts of the phonemes

and the spectrograms utilized willbe found on the followshy

ing pages

25

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 1 range~ on the

vowel chart in a broad scattering from 300-500 hz for forshy

mant 1 and 1500-2100 hz for formant 2

CHART II

1

lid

13

bull

~

It

iA

Ml

ztr Zit zp 1 S lIZ middot1 I a r 8 6

I

f

I I

Ii 3

[7l I I V 1 I

) ~I I i I bull

V I I i bull r J

I V t I I I I I

i tt I

Kl7 I I I iI ~

I I I I I I I I I i I

I I I i I f I ltII

I I l7 I VI

I [7 1

1 I I I Va FORMANTc7 CHART

I

I I I I 173 CaEiIw-atd icw~[7 rf ltfer C0ItdI I I

j I I I i 7 10 e centlCMta1 oct4v

I V 5miU~ bull itonI

r I f 711 t14 j I I I Ik IV

FoiUlAhT CHRT

Placing asinge point on this chart is an assertion that fortcants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at tn(l frequerlcy nameu Slong the right or eft cdampe the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

26

l 1I I - -~

I I iI I

I

[bIs] [bIn]

lt-- -_- -1I

lt i

1 ~ i1_ -shy Ir ~ tmiddotmiddot lt

-- - - ---~--- - - - ----- --

-i -_~ ~ shyI 1

i I I

I I bullbullq_-

I ~~~-~--shyr ~~~~~ -~- I------------------------shy

-----I

[dIm] [sIh]

27

I -[blr]

i1 1 I I

i Ii I

I i I I

ii ___ -J

rmiddot I i

I 1 j

-~ ~~~ ~-~IIlIr~~~

I

1 ____~~l_~~--=~ _ ~--~~~~~~~~~- -

51 hI$ PiiB PD~ii~i

-~ - -- -- ----- ~------- - --- _-- - _ - shy [rIll) [klr]

28

1 I I I

---~S~ -~~~fi~ ~~~~~-~

~l_ middot~ ___

[klk]

I I I

r [dlk]

29

-------- --

-~- shy~--I~~

[tIll]

30

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lEI ranged on the

vowel chart in a thin oval shaped distribution from 400-625

hz for formant 1 and from 1400-2000 hz for formant 2

CHART III

lEI

i

I

1 I

1

1middot

II~~ 5 I~ I lOa I ~--~~~I-+--+-4-+--+---+--++-+-+-+-+--r--t-t--r--t--r--1

I

I I I I

t I

4

I I 1 I ~ I I I I

I t I ~

I I ~

-r--- r--- I V~~~-r~+-+-~~~+-+-~~~~~~~--T-~-r~-r~-r~-T---T--r~

V~~~++4-~~~-4-+-+~~~~~+-~-T-rV~7

~iA~~~~~I+-~~~~~I--~~~-r~~~~~8 FORMANT HHHH~~r+~~-r~+-~+-~I~-I~~rl7V CHART

I II 11I I V9 CaZiLrww 1ft huncirccLJ

-+-f-+-II-f-+-+-+-+--+-+--+--+----+-+--+-1--t-+-1---t---t--7 rtf eye 04 ~ I 11 V pq-+-+-I~-+--i--+I-t-t--+~i-I---t--+--tr -t--t-Tj-ri~middotltJ ecentimeters 1octGy

I V 5miU~ - aemiton ~~~~I~~+-~~l~-~-T~I~~~r~

t i lt~ I I IS I I liV

FolUlAn C1LBT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion T hat rormants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency namfu along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

2

tic spectrograph was utilized This instrument analyzes

a complex human speech wave and produces a visual image

of the frequencies in the wave which are not filtered out

by the articulators The data consisted of recordings of

eighty-eight words as produced by a native speaker Every

phoneme was contrasted with every other middotvowel phoneme in

identical environments Spectrograms were then made of

every phoneme in every environment that it occurred The

information derived from these spectrograms was then charted

These charts show the approximate range of sound quality

which native speakers recognize as a particular phoneme in

the specified environment

The results of the study show that Bahasa Indonesia

has three front vowels contrasting high mid and low tongue

positions and two back vowels contrasting high and mid

tongue positions The three front vowels have slightly overshy

lapping distributions this may partially be due to the fact

that the words in which the phonemes were found had no conshy

trasting word containing a neighboring phoneme This differs

markedly with the back vowels where the distributions are

sharply separated

The aforementioned charts of vowels have a distinct

resemblance to the traditional vowel charts Thus after

all the evidence was gathered and analyzed a traditional

vowel diagram was drawn for thes~ particular vowels of

Bahasa Indonesia

TO THE OFFICE OF GRADUATE STUDIES AND RESEARCH

The members of the Committee approve the thesis of

Ingrid T Hanna presented May 13 1974

e E Pierce Chairman

Studies

of Anthropology

May 13 1974

A SPECTROGRAPHIC ANALYSIS

OF

BAHASA INDONESIA VOWEL PHONEMES

UNDER PRIMARY STRESS IN eve WORDS

by

INGRID T HANNA

A thesis submitted in partialfulfillment of the requirements for th~ degree of

MASTER OF ARTS in

ANTHROPOLOGY

Portland State University 1974

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

I would like to thank the faculty members on my

thesis committee for their help and contributions

am especially grateful to Prof Joe E Pierce for his

continual advise and mor~l support

Mostly I would like to thank my husband withoutmiddot

whose understanding constant encouragement and proshy

fessional advise I could not have survived the entire

effort

I

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS iii

CHAPTERi r I INTRODUCTION 1

Language Justification for Study Statement of the Problem Delimitations of the Study

II THEORETICAL BACKGROUND 7

PhoneticsPhonemics Acoustic Theory FundamentalsHarmonics Acoustics vs Articulation Spectrograph

I I I METHODOLOGY bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull 1 5 I

Phoneme Identification Spectrograms

IV FINDINGS I 24

V SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 67

EIBLIOGRAPHY ~ bullbull _bullbull _ __ bull __ 690 __ bull _

Sources Sources

Cited Consulted

APPENDIX A 71

List of Words

APPENDIX B bull --- bull bull - bull bull bull bull bull bull I bull bull bull Linguistic Symbolization Used

73

CHAPTER I

INTRODUCTION

Language

Bahasa Indonesia the official name applied to the

Indonesian language is a member of the Malayo-Polyrresian

language family The term Bahasa Indonesia is often used

synonymously with modern Malay or Malay dialect (Uhlenbeck

1967) References to a similar form of this Malay based

language are found as early as the 16th cent~ry by traders

such as th~ Chinese the Hindu and the Arabs (Woodman 1955)

Words were added to the language known as Melaju Pasar or

Bazaar Malay as trade with foreigners increased (Woodman

1955) These foreign elements in Melaju Pasar formed the

essential differences between it and the Malay spoken on the

Ma~ay Peninsula (Woodman 1955) Bahasa Indonesia differs

little from the standard dialect of the Malay Peninsula and

daes so mainly in its relatively large and growing vocabulashy

ry borrowed from European and indigenous languages (Amerishy

can University 1970) Bahasa Indonesia is then an adaptashy

tion of Malay inasmuch as it has been changed by the origishy

nal regional languages and modern European languages (Alisshy

jahbana 1949)

2

Today Bahasa Indonesia is the official language of the

Republic of Indonesia It has been estimated that over 200I

region~l languages are spoken in this country of wide cul-

I tural diversity (Wo~dman 1955) When Indonesia beganto

I strive for independence from Dutch colonialists a common

language seemed eSsential in an effort to unify the nationI Indonesian political leaders desirous of revitalizing r th people br9ught (to bare) the most effective means of

organizing them in the greatest numbers (Alisjahbana 1949)

Attention was focused upon the Malay language which was the

lingua Franca for most of Southeast Asia Javanese was

rejected although it possessed a thousand-year-old literary

tradition and was the language of the largest ethnic group

in the islands (American University 1970) The Javanese

language has a fairly ~igid system of vo~abulary differshy

ences based on social class Thus Malay became the basis

of the national language At the 1928 conference of the

pertemuan Muda (Meeting of Youth) Malay was chosen to be

the basis of the national language (American University

1970) By 1930 then the term Malay Language was officshy

ially changed to the Indonesian language (Uhlenbeck 1967)

It became the language for scholarly endeavors and the langshy

uage of leaders and officials During the Japanese occupashy

tion in 1942 the language made further gains In an effort

to combat Dutch cultural influence it was made the compulshy

3

sory language uied in schools from elementary and up

Bahasa Indonesia became the official national language

when the Republic of Indonesia was farmed in 1945

Justification For Study

Phonemic descriptions of Bahasa Indonesia are almost

non-existent and very limited f from a linguistic point of

view Most descriptions of the sounds of Indonesian are

of a comparative nature i e Bahasa Indonesian sounds are

likened to sounds of modern Indo-European languages Echols

and Shadilys An Indonesian-English Dictionary describes

Indonesian sounds in relation to the similar sounds in

English For instance they argue that the e in the Indoshy

nesian word sen is like the e in the English word make n

only shorter Statements such as the aforementionedmay

be practical for most purposes but are not necessarily

linguistically sound and almost certainly inaccurate

Another deficiency which seems to be present in phonshy

emic analyses not only in Indonesian is the impressionistic

nature of these analyses When dealing with a lang~ag8

the linguist must attempt to remove all linguistic biases

and comparisons because phonetic details may escape the

ear of the analyst f especially in a foreign language upon

which he is likely to impose depending upon the degree of

his skill any of the few prejudices of his native phonemic

scale (Pulgram 1965) Even when the investigator does nat

4

I

rely on comparative methods of description he cannot compshy

letely remove all the sounds in his linguistic memory when

describing a new language He will invariably hear sounds

that are very similar to those he knows and may not be able

to discern certain minor although perhaps crucial differshy

ences Phonemic descriptions are most often of this impresshy

sionistic variety

Spectrographic analyses of the sounds of a language

provide an objective measure of the quality of the sounds

of a language Spectrographs record precise sound qualities

produced by a speaker particuiarly vowels This mode of

description will delete the impressions of the investigator

and will map precise quality for sounds in question what

shows on a spectrogram is an acous~ic reality whether the

analyst hears it or not (Pulgram 1965) It is these

precise sound qualities of Bahasa Iridonesian vowel phonemes

that this investigation will attempt to ascertain Instrushy

mentaltesting of hypotheses has been a part of scientific

study for many years but very little has been done to

date in linguistics (Pierce 1963) The acoustic specshy

trograph can provide definite answers as to the phonetic

quality of vowels

The science of phonemics developed out of the realizashy

tion that some phoneti6 features of a language differentiate

one word from another while others do not Edward Sapir

(1921) argues

5

Back of the purely objective system of sounds that is peculiar to a language and which can be arrived at only by a painstaking phonetic analysis there is -a more restricted inner or ideal system which perhaps equally unconscious as a system to the naive speaker can far more readily than the other be brought to his consciousness as a finished pattern a psychological mechanism The inner sound system overlaid though it may be by the mechanical or the irrelevant is a real important principle in the life of a language

Once it was accepted that language had a definite phonologshy

ical structure a method was devised to describe this undershy

lying system This method became the science of phonemics

The phonemic structure of a language represents the minimal

number of sound signals which make transmission of informashy

tion possible Spectrographic analyses of t~ese minimal

sound signals provide objective and empirical measurements

of the quality of these minimal sound features

Statement of the Problem

This investigation will determine the range of free

variation of Bahasa Indonesian vowel phonemes in a given

phonemic environment and types of conditioned variation

from one environment to another The nature and ra~ge of

the vowel quality for each phoneme will be determined by

spectrographic measurements

Delimitations of the Study

This study will only deal with Bahasa Indonesian

vowels sounds produced with vibration of the vocal cords

6

by unobstructed passage of air through the oral cavity

and not constricted enough to cause audible friction

Pei 1966) They will be the vowels found in monoshy

syllabic Indonesian wo~ds under primary stress and in a

consonant~vowel-cDnsonant pattern Each word will also

be part of a minimal pair ie every word must be conshy

trasted with another word in which only the medial vowel

is different andto which a different semantic meaning is

attached

CHAPTER II

THEORETICAL BACKGROUND

PhoneticsPhonemics

Phonetics is the branch of linguistics which deals

with the actual speech sounds of a language When dealing

with the phonetic level of linguistic analysis one describes

the sounds of a language in terms of articulation or acoustic

features In articulatory phonetics one describes sounds

in middotterms 9f manner of articulation ie whether it is a

stop fricat~ve etc point of articulation ie) bilabial

(be~ween the lips) dental etc or vowel quality ie

high-front-close (the highest part of the tongue-is very

high in the front of the mouth for producing this particular

sound) etc In acoustic phonetics sounds are described in

terms of the distributions of frequencies characteristic of

the sounds of a language The relationship generally acshy

cepted as existing between artic~latory and ~coustic phonetshy

ics is that certain articulations produce certain distinctive

patterns of frequency distributions It must be emphasized

at this point that both of the aforementioned types of deshy

scriptians deal with all human speech sounds not necessarily

those which perform a signalling function in a particular I

aspect of the language

I I

f

8

Distinctlve features are used to denote signalling

functions The label distinctive feature is used in the

literature to mean two quite different things Bloomfield

describes the categorization with examples which imply

that distinctive sound feature means any feature of the vocal

sound which when changed changes the meaning of a given

word eg pill and bill sin and sing etcri (Pierce 1965)

There Bloomfi~ld labels p as a distinctive sound feature

and b as a different sound feature Later Roman Jakobson

Gunnar M Fant and Morris Halle in their Preliminaries of

sectpeech Analysis take the phonemes of a language and break

them down into their component phonetic features some of

which are distinctive eg voicing in English b vs p

while others are not eg aspiration in English p~ in pin

as opposed to p in spin Anyone language code has a

finite set of distinctive features bullbullbull (Jakobson Fant and

Halle 1961) In English the feature of voicing in the b

of bill as opposed to the absence of voicing for the p

in pill is the phonetic feature which distinguishes these

two sounds A similar presence vs absence of aspiration

does not alter the meaning of any English utterance in fact

it is difficult to make English speakers aware of the fact

that aspiration is or is not present Implicit in this

theoretical approach is the concept that the variation in

human speech for the most part re~resents presence vs

9

1

absence of non-distinctive features of sound

One theoretical approach to linguistic structures

views the phoneme as concurrent bundles of distinctive

features (Jakobson Fant and Halle 1961) Each language

has a finite set of rules for grouping them (distinctive

features) into phQnemes (Jakobson Fant and Halle 1961)

Every phoneme in the language then is composed of a unique

set of distinctive features such that it is different from

any other phoneme by at least one of such distinctive feashy

tures This manner of linguistic signalling has important

implicat~ons toward phonemic analysis of sound systems As

previously mentioned a phoneme is a bundle of distinctive

features which when altered changes meaning In order

to verify whether a sound is a phoneme or not one must

show a word in which the replacement of at least one disti~c-

tive feature makes another word ie a minimal pair difshy

ferentiated by only a single distinctive feature and having

two distinct grammatical or semantical meanings

Phonemics the study of phonem~s is the level of lingushy

istic analysis which answers the question of how language

utilizes sound matter selecting certain of its elements and

adapting them for various ends The prima~y functions of

sound in a language is to distinguish one utterance from anshy

other in normal conversation Phonemic analysis as an opshy

eration examines a~ailable data in order to discover an unshy

derlying structure bullbullbull not an operation which forces a mass

1 0

of data into a structure (Pulgram 19~5) The nature of

each feature is of the essence Thus the composition of

each phoneme becomes of primary importance in a language

The phoneme can only be defined in reference to the larger

frame whi~h is the language of which it is a structured

feature (Pulgram 1965) It is the shortest stretch of

sound which serves a signalling function

Acoustic Theory

I Distinctive feature theory as previously describedI I seems to handle such phonemes s stops fricatives and

I nasals quite well eg the airflow out of the mouth is I

either stopped or it is allowed to escape On the other

1 hand vowels seem to be ranges of phonetic quality whichI

are extremely difficult if not impossible to distinguish

in terms of presence vs ab~~nce of distinctive features

Since this study will not be concerned with consonants but

only w~th vowels it is only necessary to discuss the acousshy

tic nature of vowel qualities from this point on

FundamentalsHarmonics

Vowel quality is determined by a combination of a fundashy

mental and its harmonics A vowel quality displayed on an

oscilloscope shows a very complex single wave form This

wave form is in reality the mathematical sum of a number

of simple wave forms or at least for theoretical purposes

1 1

can be treated as such These wave forms are generated

in the oral tract by the opening and closing of the glotshy

tis The fundamental wave is a sine wave with a frequency

equal to the number of times the glottis opens and closes

each second and an amplitude which is directly pro~ortion-

al to air pressure in the lungs Because of the nature

of sound waves a harmonic is generated at every multiple

of this fundamental eg if the fundamental is 100 cycles

per second then a harmonic is generated at 200 300

400 bullbullbull CO As soon as the complex wave leaves the vocal

chords harmoni6s are filtered out by the nature of the

tissue surrounding the oral tract as well as the cavities

in and adj o 1ning the oral tract The complex wave emerging

from the mouth is the mathematical sum of fundamental and

the harmonics which have not been filtered out by the oral

tract cf Martin Joos Acoustic Phonetics (1 948) chapshy

ters 1 and 2 for a fuller explanation of this process

Acoustics vs Articulation

In the last century far too much energy has b~en exshy

pended in attempts to relate acoustic features to specific

articulatory movements Bloch (1942) illustrates this by

stating qualities are identified by ear but in linguisshy

tic works they are traditionally defined in terms of their

assumed production by the vocal organs This type ofmiddotstudy

is misdirected because the only things that impinge on the

I I

- I

12

human ear are the harmonics which were not filtered out

The articulatory movements which cause the filtration ie

movement of the tongue from front to back creating a series

of filters each of which removes different harmonics

from the complex waves are irrelevant Pike (1943) argues

one should analyze and describe the sounds (or sound waves)

themselves rather than the movements ~roducing them

It has long been noted by acousticians that a variety

of articulatory movements remove the same harmonics and

r~sult in the production of very similar sounds Pierce

(1962) illustrates this by saying

As long as the formants are in their praper positions ie the proper frequencies are passed through the speech mechanism it does not matter whether the unwanted frequencies are filtered out by rounding the lips or moving the tongue to the back ThuQ when Holbrook and Carmody give one front-back position for the tongue for a given English vowel and IPA (International Pho~etic Alphabet) gives another it is quite probable that both are completely correct and that the formant shift is made by compensating for the lack of tongue movement in the speech of some speakers by additional lip rounding bullbullbullbull

Since the hearer of a stream of speech can hear 9nly those harmonics which emerge from the mouth as componshyents of the final complex wave the placement of the formant is of primary importance not the articulation which produced the sound

Therefore a study of the phonetic quality of vowels

demands an instrument which is capable of making an accurate

record of the presence or absence of all the harmonics

having sufficient amplitude to significantly alter the final

wave form The acoustic spectrograph is such an instrument

13

it was the first instrument to make large scale acoustic

a n a ly s e sapr act i c a I po s sibiIi t Y n ( Lad e fog ed 1 967 ) bull

Spectrograph

The acoustic spectrograph is a device ~hich records a

stream of speech 2~4 seconds or less in length This

recording is then fed into the analyzing part of the specshy

trograph where at each successive playing ne frequency

or rather one frequency band is lifted outof the total by

the variable filter (Pulgram 1965) A black ma~king is

made on a piece ofmiddot electro-sensitive paper each time there

is a harmonic present within the frequency band being anashy

lyzed Since the articulators are constantly moving and

changing the filtration characteristics of thevocal tract

the black markings ma~e by a stylus reflect the movements

of the articula~ors in a very broad sense More important

however it makes a precise record of the stimulus ie

the harmonics which reach the ear of the listener Dunn

(1950) says the vowels have asso~iated with them different

frequency regions in which the sound is more intense than

elsewhere in the spectrum The name formant has been apshy

plied to these regions

The next problem then is to relate the concentrations

of power mentioned above ie the formants to human pershy

ception of speech sounds The most widely utilized techshy

nique in this area is one devised by Martin Joos (1948)

~______________________________________~S___________________________________________________shy1

14

generally referred to as his 2 Formant Theory This techshy

nique represents the plotting of formant 1 and formant 2

in a specific wayan a particular chart cf Chart 1 on

p~ 23 This technique is clearly described by Ladefoged

(1967)

The relations between the formant structures of the vowels in a number of words can be conveniently represented by means of formant charts which show the frequency of the firs~ formant at a time in the word when the formant structure is changing at a minimum rate plotted against the frequency of the second formant at the same time

When making these kinds of plots a charting is derived of

vowels for any language which is remarkably like the tradishy

tional impressionistic vowel charts of the 19th century

Esner (1947) illustrated that if the frequency of the first

formant was plotted against the frequency of the second

formant it seemed to equal the relation between formant

frequency and the traditional vowel diagram

Basically this study will reproduce such vowel charts

for a number of examples of each sound in Bahasa Indonesia

Formant 1 will be platted against formant 2 for each vowel

phoneme in a variety of phonemic environments -The purpose

of this will be to determine the range of variation for

every vowel in each e~vironment as produced by a single native

speaker

CHAPTER III

METHODOLOGY

Phoneme Identification

In order to assess the phonetic quality of vowel phoshy

nemes one must first ascertain the number and relationshy

ship of sound contrasts in a language ie the phonemes

The visual representation of the actualization of the phoshy

neme ie the spectrogram can only be made on the basis

of a preceding decision of the linguist on the types and

number of phonemes in the l~nguage to be anaiyzed (Pulgram

1965)~ Phonemic analysis cannot be made with phonetic

data alone it must be made with phonetic data plus a sershy

ies of phonemic premises and procedures (Pike 1947) A

spectrogram conveys phonetic information which aids the

linguist in determining which phonetic features are consisshy

tently present in order to reach the most accurate phonetic

description

There are a variety of premises and procedures which

the investigator may utilize in order to discover the phoshy

nemic structure of a language Pike (1947) argues that the

investigator must have at hand observable native reaction

to native sounds andor know structural facts pertaining to

the phonetic nature of the sounds and their distribution

As stated before a phoneme is a bundle of sound f~atures

1

j

16

which when substituted for another bundle creates a difshy

ference in meaning Since the creation of a different morshy

pheme is the result of the substitution of a different sound

feature these sound features are said to be phonemes

A pair of words in which the first word is the same as the second except for the fact that one segment is replaced by a different but phonetic~lly similar segment in the second word constitutes proof that the two similar segments are phonemically distinct~ bullbullbull Word pairs of this type are said to be MINIMALshyLY DIFFERENJ because no smaller difference in the language can make a differ~nce in meahing in words (Pike 1947)

Hence minimal pairs of words were used to find phonemes

Minimal~y different word pairs prove to be the beginners

single most important tool for the analysis of phonemic difshy

ferences (Pike 1947)

Thus Echols and Shadilys An Indonesian-English Dicshy

tionarv (1968) was ut~lized to find three-phoneme words

containing two consonant sounds with a vowel in medial poshy

sition The process was simply to go through all the words

beginning with consonants and find minimally different t~ree

phoneme words This was done on a purely anthr~poscopic

basis on the part of the investigator If a different letshy

ter was employed to distinguish a different meaning it was

assumed to be a different phoneme The following ~ord pairs

and their meanings are examples of the words found in the

dictionary

ban--tire bin--son of

das-- a shot dos--small box carton

I

1 7

pal--pole pel--field

rang--rank position ring--ring

teh--tea toh--yet nevertheless

After having obtained the words from the dictionary

a native informant was called upon to verify ~he differshy

ance in meaning in the minimal pairs and to pronounce

them so that ~hey could be phonetically transcribed in

al1 impressionistic manner The informant employed was Kok

Djen Su a student at Portland State University from Yogshy

jakartai Indonesia He has been a student in the United

States for approximately two years and speaks broken al shy

though very understandable English Mr Su was horn to Mr

and Mrs Su Hendry Su who both speak Bahasa Indonesia Jashy

vanese and a small amount of Chinese Since his birth the

informant was exposed to a mixture of Javanese and Bahasa

Indonesia but has employed the national language of Indoshy

nesia since the age of three at school His bilingual upshy

bringing it seems to the author does not craate a subshy

stantial difference in the competence of Mr Su in Bahasa

Indonesia In fact he was able to distinguish the proshy

nunciation Qf words in both Javanese and in Bahasa Indoshy

nesia The utilization of one informant deletes any reshy

gional variation or individual variation between informshy

ants Since here we are attempting to ascertain the relashy

tive range of phonetic quality of vowel phonemes in Bahashy

sa Indonesia the informants bilingualism ahould cause

none or very few phonetic distortions

After-having verified the difference in meaning of

the word pairs Kok Djen ~u pronounced the word The

following impressionistic version of the Ihdonesian voshy

wel system was described

front central back

high

mid 1 I

I I low j

i I I

I

u-

E 0

A

1 Spectrograms

The phonemic entities symbolized in the preceding

section represent range-units of phonetic quality The

symbols and their position on the chart are based on the

aural perceptions of the investigator The purpose of the

spectrographic analysis of this data is to determine as

accurately as possible the actual phonetic range represenshy

ted by each of thephonemic symbols

I

i

1 9

In order to make spectrograms from which meani~gful

conclusions can be drawn one must have a native informant

of the language to be studied Spectrograms were made of

the speech of Mr Su the informant described earlier

In order to conserve the time of the informant a

sample of three-phoneme words were recorded The three-

phoneme words begin and end with consonants ahd contain a

vowel in medial position The list appears in Appendix A

The list of words was specifically selec~ed to eliminate

in so far as possible all variatiqn other than that which

is specifically caused by the preceding and following consoshy

nants This is true because by utilizing a single informant

the influence of dialects both regional and social are eshy

liminated and by utilizing one sy~lable words under primary

1stress sequential influences such as the Markov Process

are eliminated since there is no sequence beyond one phoshy

neme preceding and following the vowel This being the case

one should be able to derive from a series of spectrograms

of those vowels both the range of free variation and the

specific influence of each particular consonant on the voshy

weI quality of each medial phoneme

The n~xt st~p in the procedure was to play the tape-

recordings into the spectrograph two or three wo~ds at a

1The Markoy Process is a mechanical way of handling enshytropy in sequential operations IQ linguistics this is stashyted in terms ofthe probability of the occurrence of a parshyticular phoneme morpheme etc in a precise sequence

20

time The machine can handle 24 seconds of speech on one

spectrogram thus two or three words could be analyzed at

the same time as one with no loss in quality or precision

Unfortunately the recordings had to be played into a

microphone which picks up some background noise but by

placing the microp~one of the spectrograph very close to

the loudspeaker of the tape recorder and turning the volume

up slightly this background was eliminated for all pracshy

tical purposes middotIt would have been better to have had a

direct connection between the recordar and the spectrograph

but unfortunately no such devce was available Background

noise shows up as very small specks scattered more or less

at random and unless the volume of such noise is exceedshy

ingly strong does not interfere with the reading of the

spectrograms

Once the machine had completed the analys~s and produced

the graphic record of the list of words a frequency measur~

ing device was produced by the machine cf example below

1 11amp II~ill c=

- n- HE to

11r -shy

bull b mmiddot 1 bull bull L

-

gIl F Jamp u

n _ If

bull III

21

This measuring device is in reality a spectrogram with horishy

zontal markings The first line on the chart represents a

frequency of 0 hertz (hz) Each line above the first repshy

resents a multiple of 500 hz The device is used to locate

th~ center of formants 1 and 2 Since it is graduated in

500 hz it is necessary to interpolate when the center ofmiddot

power for a particular formant falls between two of these

lines This is done by dividing the area between the two

lines in half then dividing one of the halves in half which

gives a range of 125 hz within which the measurement falls

and an estimate is made of the precise measurement within

the 125 hz range This should give formant positions with

an accuraci of greater than plusmn25 hz

When visual location of the formant centers becprnes

difficult a section of the formant can be made cf exshy

ample below Such difficulties with visual location usually

arise when two weak formants overlap Such overlapping

produc~s what appears to the naked eye to be a band of modeshy

rately dark grey bands The sectioner is a built in mech-

IshyfL__---

tete we tt

~

I

1 I

22

anism capable of handling such problems In the preceding

I example the amplitude of each harmonic is proportional

to the length of the line representing that harmonic I

This makes it possible to locate formant centers when vi-

I sual location is difficult

The measurements were then transferred to formant

charts cf Chart 1 on the following page

6

23

CHART I

~

t

1+

t5

1amp

Ie

z~ 2t 2p 16 12 la 8 Iii

I ~

~

I S

l I

I I

~

V V

V T

l( FORMANT V CHART

Vi ~ CcdiOrate4 ift luutdnM I V ~ cycle ~ concf

V 10 eeentl~rsI~ V

V U 5millimctcrs - I $milton

2 zk2 lis ty

I

FOlWAlfT CHART

Placing a single point on this cha-t is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one fOrrUlt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant atmiddotthe frequency named along the top or bottom edge

ex Martin Joos~ Acoustic Phonetics (1948)

CHAPTER IV

FINDINGS

The data provided by the preceding methodology conshy

sisted of a series of scatter patterns on the vowel charts

Each of the dots within the pattern represented one occurshy

rence of a particular vowel To determine the range ofmiddot each

phoneme f the most divergent points in each pattern were con-

nected by a line These lines then circumscribe an area

which included the range of all the vowels in the sample

recognized ~y the informantmiddotas a particular phoneme

Verbal descriptions the actual charts of the phonemes

and the spectrograms utilized willbe found on the followshy

ing pages

25

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 1 range~ on the

vowel chart in a broad scattering from 300-500 hz for forshy

mant 1 and 1500-2100 hz for formant 2

CHART II

1

lid

13

bull

~

It

iA

Ml

ztr Zit zp 1 S lIZ middot1 I a r 8 6

I

f

I I

Ii 3

[7l I I V 1 I

) ~I I i I bull

V I I i bull r J

I V t I I I I I

i tt I

Kl7 I I I iI ~

I I I I I I I I I i I

I I I i I f I ltII

I I l7 I VI

I [7 1

1 I I I Va FORMANTc7 CHART

I

I I I I 173 CaEiIw-atd icw~[7 rf ltfer C0ItdI I I

j I I I i 7 10 e centlCMta1 oct4v

I V 5miU~ bull itonI

r I f 711 t14 j I I I Ik IV

FoiUlAhT CHRT

Placing asinge point on this chart is an assertion that fortcants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at tn(l frequerlcy nameu Slong the right or eft cdampe the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

26

l 1I I - -~

I I iI I

I

[bIs] [bIn]

lt-- -_- -1I

lt i

1 ~ i1_ -shy Ir ~ tmiddotmiddot lt

-- - - ---~--- - - - ----- --

-i -_~ ~ shyI 1

i I I

I I bullbullq_-

I ~~~-~--shyr ~~~~~ -~- I------------------------shy

-----I

[dIm] [sIh]

27

I -[blr]

i1 1 I I

i Ii I

I i I I

ii ___ -J

rmiddot I i

I 1 j

-~ ~~~ ~-~IIlIr~~~

I

1 ____~~l_~~--=~ _ ~--~~~~~~~~~- -

51 hI$ PiiB PD~ii~i

-~ - -- -- ----- ~------- - --- _-- - _ - shy [rIll) [klr]

28

1 I I I

---~S~ -~~~fi~ ~~~~~-~

~l_ middot~ ___

[klk]

I I I

r [dlk]

29

-------- --

-~- shy~--I~~

[tIll]

30

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lEI ranged on the

vowel chart in a thin oval shaped distribution from 400-625

hz for formant 1 and from 1400-2000 hz for formant 2

CHART III

lEI

i

I

1 I

1

1middot

II~~ 5 I~ I lOa I ~--~~~I-+--+-4-+--+---+--++-+-+-+-+--r--t-t--r--t--r--1

I

I I I I

t I

4

I I 1 I ~ I I I I

I t I ~

I I ~

-r--- r--- I V~~~-r~+-+-~~~+-+-~~~~~~~--T-~-r~-r~-r~-T---T--r~

V~~~++4-~~~-4-+-+~~~~~+-~-T-rV~7

~iA~~~~~I+-~~~~~I--~~~-r~~~~~8 FORMANT HHHH~~r+~~-r~+-~+-~I~-I~~rl7V CHART

I II 11I I V9 CaZiLrww 1ft huncirccLJ

-+-f-+-II-f-+-+-+-+--+-+--+--+----+-+--+-1--t-+-1---t---t--7 rtf eye 04 ~ I 11 V pq-+-+-I~-+--i--+I-t-t--+~i-I---t--+--tr -t--t-Tj-ri~middotltJ ecentimeters 1octGy

I V 5miU~ - aemiton ~~~~I~~+-~~l~-~-T~I~~~r~

t i lt~ I I IS I I liV

FolUlAn C1LBT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion T hat rormants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency namfu along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

TO THE OFFICE OF GRADUATE STUDIES AND RESEARCH

The members of the Committee approve the thesis of

Ingrid T Hanna presented May 13 1974

e E Pierce Chairman

Studies

of Anthropology

May 13 1974

A SPECTROGRAPHIC ANALYSIS

OF

BAHASA INDONESIA VOWEL PHONEMES

UNDER PRIMARY STRESS IN eve WORDS

by

INGRID T HANNA

A thesis submitted in partialfulfillment of the requirements for th~ degree of

MASTER OF ARTS in

ANTHROPOLOGY

Portland State University 1974

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

I would like to thank the faculty members on my

thesis committee for their help and contributions

am especially grateful to Prof Joe E Pierce for his

continual advise and mor~l support

Mostly I would like to thank my husband withoutmiddot

whose understanding constant encouragement and proshy

fessional advise I could not have survived the entire

effort

I

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS iii

CHAPTERi r I INTRODUCTION 1

Language Justification for Study Statement of the Problem Delimitations of the Study

II THEORETICAL BACKGROUND 7

PhoneticsPhonemics Acoustic Theory FundamentalsHarmonics Acoustics vs Articulation Spectrograph

I I I METHODOLOGY bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull 1 5 I

Phoneme Identification Spectrograms

IV FINDINGS I 24

V SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 67

EIBLIOGRAPHY ~ bullbull _bullbull _ __ bull __ 690 __ bull _

Sources Sources

Cited Consulted

APPENDIX A 71

List of Words

APPENDIX B bull --- bull bull - bull bull bull bull bull bull I bull bull bull Linguistic Symbolization Used

73

CHAPTER I

INTRODUCTION

Language

Bahasa Indonesia the official name applied to the

Indonesian language is a member of the Malayo-Polyrresian

language family The term Bahasa Indonesia is often used

synonymously with modern Malay or Malay dialect (Uhlenbeck

1967) References to a similar form of this Malay based

language are found as early as the 16th cent~ry by traders

such as th~ Chinese the Hindu and the Arabs (Woodman 1955)

Words were added to the language known as Melaju Pasar or

Bazaar Malay as trade with foreigners increased (Woodman

1955) These foreign elements in Melaju Pasar formed the

essential differences between it and the Malay spoken on the

Ma~ay Peninsula (Woodman 1955) Bahasa Indonesia differs

little from the standard dialect of the Malay Peninsula and

daes so mainly in its relatively large and growing vocabulashy

ry borrowed from European and indigenous languages (Amerishy

can University 1970) Bahasa Indonesia is then an adaptashy

tion of Malay inasmuch as it has been changed by the origishy

nal regional languages and modern European languages (Alisshy

jahbana 1949)

2

Today Bahasa Indonesia is the official language of the

Republic of Indonesia It has been estimated that over 200I

region~l languages are spoken in this country of wide cul-

I tural diversity (Wo~dman 1955) When Indonesia beganto

I strive for independence from Dutch colonialists a common

language seemed eSsential in an effort to unify the nationI Indonesian political leaders desirous of revitalizing r th people br9ught (to bare) the most effective means of

organizing them in the greatest numbers (Alisjahbana 1949)

Attention was focused upon the Malay language which was the

lingua Franca for most of Southeast Asia Javanese was

rejected although it possessed a thousand-year-old literary

tradition and was the language of the largest ethnic group

in the islands (American University 1970) The Javanese

language has a fairly ~igid system of vo~abulary differshy

ences based on social class Thus Malay became the basis

of the national language At the 1928 conference of the

pertemuan Muda (Meeting of Youth) Malay was chosen to be

the basis of the national language (American University

1970) By 1930 then the term Malay Language was officshy

ially changed to the Indonesian language (Uhlenbeck 1967)

It became the language for scholarly endeavors and the langshy

uage of leaders and officials During the Japanese occupashy

tion in 1942 the language made further gains In an effort

to combat Dutch cultural influence it was made the compulshy

3

sory language uied in schools from elementary and up

Bahasa Indonesia became the official national language

when the Republic of Indonesia was farmed in 1945

Justification For Study

Phonemic descriptions of Bahasa Indonesia are almost

non-existent and very limited f from a linguistic point of

view Most descriptions of the sounds of Indonesian are

of a comparative nature i e Bahasa Indonesian sounds are

likened to sounds of modern Indo-European languages Echols

and Shadilys An Indonesian-English Dictionary describes

Indonesian sounds in relation to the similar sounds in

English For instance they argue that the e in the Indoshy

nesian word sen is like the e in the English word make n

only shorter Statements such as the aforementionedmay

be practical for most purposes but are not necessarily

linguistically sound and almost certainly inaccurate

Another deficiency which seems to be present in phonshy

emic analyses not only in Indonesian is the impressionistic

nature of these analyses When dealing with a lang~ag8

the linguist must attempt to remove all linguistic biases

and comparisons because phonetic details may escape the

ear of the analyst f especially in a foreign language upon

which he is likely to impose depending upon the degree of

his skill any of the few prejudices of his native phonemic

scale (Pulgram 1965) Even when the investigator does nat

4

I

rely on comparative methods of description he cannot compshy

letely remove all the sounds in his linguistic memory when

describing a new language He will invariably hear sounds

that are very similar to those he knows and may not be able

to discern certain minor although perhaps crucial differshy

ences Phonemic descriptions are most often of this impresshy

sionistic variety

Spectrographic analyses of the sounds of a language

provide an objective measure of the quality of the sounds

of a language Spectrographs record precise sound qualities

produced by a speaker particuiarly vowels This mode of

description will delete the impressions of the investigator

and will map precise quality for sounds in question what

shows on a spectrogram is an acous~ic reality whether the

analyst hears it or not (Pulgram 1965) It is these

precise sound qualities of Bahasa Iridonesian vowel phonemes

that this investigation will attempt to ascertain Instrushy

mentaltesting of hypotheses has been a part of scientific

study for many years but very little has been done to

date in linguistics (Pierce 1963) The acoustic specshy

trograph can provide definite answers as to the phonetic

quality of vowels

The science of phonemics developed out of the realizashy

tion that some phoneti6 features of a language differentiate

one word from another while others do not Edward Sapir

(1921) argues

5

Back of the purely objective system of sounds that is peculiar to a language and which can be arrived at only by a painstaking phonetic analysis there is -a more restricted inner or ideal system which perhaps equally unconscious as a system to the naive speaker can far more readily than the other be brought to his consciousness as a finished pattern a psychological mechanism The inner sound system overlaid though it may be by the mechanical or the irrelevant is a real important principle in the life of a language

Once it was accepted that language had a definite phonologshy

ical structure a method was devised to describe this undershy

lying system This method became the science of phonemics

The phonemic structure of a language represents the minimal

number of sound signals which make transmission of informashy

tion possible Spectrographic analyses of t~ese minimal

sound signals provide objective and empirical measurements

of the quality of these minimal sound features

Statement of the Problem

This investigation will determine the range of free

variation of Bahasa Indonesian vowel phonemes in a given

phonemic environment and types of conditioned variation

from one environment to another The nature and ra~ge of

the vowel quality for each phoneme will be determined by

spectrographic measurements

Delimitations of the Study

This study will only deal with Bahasa Indonesian

vowels sounds produced with vibration of the vocal cords

6

by unobstructed passage of air through the oral cavity

and not constricted enough to cause audible friction

Pei 1966) They will be the vowels found in monoshy

syllabic Indonesian wo~ds under primary stress and in a

consonant~vowel-cDnsonant pattern Each word will also

be part of a minimal pair ie every word must be conshy

trasted with another word in which only the medial vowel

is different andto which a different semantic meaning is

attached

CHAPTER II

THEORETICAL BACKGROUND

PhoneticsPhonemics

Phonetics is the branch of linguistics which deals

with the actual speech sounds of a language When dealing

with the phonetic level of linguistic analysis one describes

the sounds of a language in terms of articulation or acoustic

features In articulatory phonetics one describes sounds

in middotterms 9f manner of articulation ie whether it is a

stop fricat~ve etc point of articulation ie) bilabial

(be~ween the lips) dental etc or vowel quality ie

high-front-close (the highest part of the tongue-is very

high in the front of the mouth for producing this particular

sound) etc In acoustic phonetics sounds are described in

terms of the distributions of frequencies characteristic of

the sounds of a language The relationship generally acshy

cepted as existing between artic~latory and ~coustic phonetshy

ics is that certain articulations produce certain distinctive

patterns of frequency distributions It must be emphasized

at this point that both of the aforementioned types of deshy

scriptians deal with all human speech sounds not necessarily

those which perform a signalling function in a particular I

aspect of the language

I I

f

8

Distinctlve features are used to denote signalling

functions The label distinctive feature is used in the

literature to mean two quite different things Bloomfield

describes the categorization with examples which imply

that distinctive sound feature means any feature of the vocal

sound which when changed changes the meaning of a given

word eg pill and bill sin and sing etcri (Pierce 1965)

There Bloomfi~ld labels p as a distinctive sound feature

and b as a different sound feature Later Roman Jakobson

Gunnar M Fant and Morris Halle in their Preliminaries of

sectpeech Analysis take the phonemes of a language and break

them down into their component phonetic features some of

which are distinctive eg voicing in English b vs p

while others are not eg aspiration in English p~ in pin

as opposed to p in spin Anyone language code has a

finite set of distinctive features bullbullbull (Jakobson Fant and

Halle 1961) In English the feature of voicing in the b

of bill as opposed to the absence of voicing for the p

in pill is the phonetic feature which distinguishes these

two sounds A similar presence vs absence of aspiration

does not alter the meaning of any English utterance in fact

it is difficult to make English speakers aware of the fact

that aspiration is or is not present Implicit in this

theoretical approach is the concept that the variation in

human speech for the most part re~resents presence vs

9

1

absence of non-distinctive features of sound

One theoretical approach to linguistic structures

views the phoneme as concurrent bundles of distinctive

features (Jakobson Fant and Halle 1961) Each language

has a finite set of rules for grouping them (distinctive

features) into phQnemes (Jakobson Fant and Halle 1961)

Every phoneme in the language then is composed of a unique

set of distinctive features such that it is different from

any other phoneme by at least one of such distinctive feashy

tures This manner of linguistic signalling has important

implicat~ons toward phonemic analysis of sound systems As

previously mentioned a phoneme is a bundle of distinctive

features which when altered changes meaning In order

to verify whether a sound is a phoneme or not one must

show a word in which the replacement of at least one disti~c-

tive feature makes another word ie a minimal pair difshy

ferentiated by only a single distinctive feature and having

two distinct grammatical or semantical meanings

Phonemics the study of phonem~s is the level of lingushy

istic analysis which answers the question of how language

utilizes sound matter selecting certain of its elements and

adapting them for various ends The prima~y functions of

sound in a language is to distinguish one utterance from anshy

other in normal conversation Phonemic analysis as an opshy

eration examines a~ailable data in order to discover an unshy

derlying structure bullbullbull not an operation which forces a mass

1 0

of data into a structure (Pulgram 19~5) The nature of

each feature is of the essence Thus the composition of

each phoneme becomes of primary importance in a language

The phoneme can only be defined in reference to the larger

frame whi~h is the language of which it is a structured

feature (Pulgram 1965) It is the shortest stretch of

sound which serves a signalling function

Acoustic Theory

I Distinctive feature theory as previously describedI I seems to handle such phonemes s stops fricatives and

I nasals quite well eg the airflow out of the mouth is I

either stopped or it is allowed to escape On the other

1 hand vowels seem to be ranges of phonetic quality whichI

are extremely difficult if not impossible to distinguish

in terms of presence vs ab~~nce of distinctive features

Since this study will not be concerned with consonants but

only w~th vowels it is only necessary to discuss the acousshy

tic nature of vowel qualities from this point on

FundamentalsHarmonics

Vowel quality is determined by a combination of a fundashy

mental and its harmonics A vowel quality displayed on an

oscilloscope shows a very complex single wave form This

wave form is in reality the mathematical sum of a number

of simple wave forms or at least for theoretical purposes

1 1

can be treated as such These wave forms are generated

in the oral tract by the opening and closing of the glotshy

tis The fundamental wave is a sine wave with a frequency

equal to the number of times the glottis opens and closes

each second and an amplitude which is directly pro~ortion-

al to air pressure in the lungs Because of the nature

of sound waves a harmonic is generated at every multiple

of this fundamental eg if the fundamental is 100 cycles

per second then a harmonic is generated at 200 300

400 bullbullbull CO As soon as the complex wave leaves the vocal

chords harmoni6s are filtered out by the nature of the

tissue surrounding the oral tract as well as the cavities

in and adj o 1ning the oral tract The complex wave emerging

from the mouth is the mathematical sum of fundamental and

the harmonics which have not been filtered out by the oral

tract cf Martin Joos Acoustic Phonetics (1 948) chapshy

ters 1 and 2 for a fuller explanation of this process

Acoustics vs Articulation

In the last century far too much energy has b~en exshy

pended in attempts to relate acoustic features to specific

articulatory movements Bloch (1942) illustrates this by

stating qualities are identified by ear but in linguisshy

tic works they are traditionally defined in terms of their

assumed production by the vocal organs This type ofmiddotstudy

is misdirected because the only things that impinge on the

I I

- I

12

human ear are the harmonics which were not filtered out

The articulatory movements which cause the filtration ie

movement of the tongue from front to back creating a series

of filters each of which removes different harmonics

from the complex waves are irrelevant Pike (1943) argues

one should analyze and describe the sounds (or sound waves)

themselves rather than the movements ~roducing them

It has long been noted by acousticians that a variety

of articulatory movements remove the same harmonics and

r~sult in the production of very similar sounds Pierce

(1962) illustrates this by saying

As long as the formants are in their praper positions ie the proper frequencies are passed through the speech mechanism it does not matter whether the unwanted frequencies are filtered out by rounding the lips or moving the tongue to the back ThuQ when Holbrook and Carmody give one front-back position for the tongue for a given English vowel and IPA (International Pho~etic Alphabet) gives another it is quite probable that both are completely correct and that the formant shift is made by compensating for the lack of tongue movement in the speech of some speakers by additional lip rounding bullbullbullbull

Since the hearer of a stream of speech can hear 9nly those harmonics which emerge from the mouth as componshyents of the final complex wave the placement of the formant is of primary importance not the articulation which produced the sound

Therefore a study of the phonetic quality of vowels

demands an instrument which is capable of making an accurate

record of the presence or absence of all the harmonics

having sufficient amplitude to significantly alter the final

wave form The acoustic spectrograph is such an instrument

13

it was the first instrument to make large scale acoustic

a n a ly s e sapr act i c a I po s sibiIi t Y n ( Lad e fog ed 1 967 ) bull

Spectrograph

The acoustic spectrograph is a device ~hich records a

stream of speech 2~4 seconds or less in length This

recording is then fed into the analyzing part of the specshy

trograph where at each successive playing ne frequency

or rather one frequency band is lifted outof the total by

the variable filter (Pulgram 1965) A black ma~king is

made on a piece ofmiddot electro-sensitive paper each time there

is a harmonic present within the frequency band being anashy

lyzed Since the articulators are constantly moving and

changing the filtration characteristics of thevocal tract

the black markings ma~e by a stylus reflect the movements

of the articula~ors in a very broad sense More important

however it makes a precise record of the stimulus ie

the harmonics which reach the ear of the listener Dunn

(1950) says the vowels have asso~iated with them different

frequency regions in which the sound is more intense than

elsewhere in the spectrum The name formant has been apshy

plied to these regions

The next problem then is to relate the concentrations

of power mentioned above ie the formants to human pershy

ception of speech sounds The most widely utilized techshy

nique in this area is one devised by Martin Joos (1948)

~______________________________________~S___________________________________________________shy1

14

generally referred to as his 2 Formant Theory This techshy

nique represents the plotting of formant 1 and formant 2

in a specific wayan a particular chart cf Chart 1 on

p~ 23 This technique is clearly described by Ladefoged

(1967)

The relations between the formant structures of the vowels in a number of words can be conveniently represented by means of formant charts which show the frequency of the firs~ formant at a time in the word when the formant structure is changing at a minimum rate plotted against the frequency of the second formant at the same time

When making these kinds of plots a charting is derived of

vowels for any language which is remarkably like the tradishy

tional impressionistic vowel charts of the 19th century

Esner (1947) illustrated that if the frequency of the first

formant was plotted against the frequency of the second

formant it seemed to equal the relation between formant

frequency and the traditional vowel diagram

Basically this study will reproduce such vowel charts

for a number of examples of each sound in Bahasa Indonesia

Formant 1 will be platted against formant 2 for each vowel

phoneme in a variety of phonemic environments -The purpose

of this will be to determine the range of variation for

every vowel in each e~vironment as produced by a single native

speaker

CHAPTER III

METHODOLOGY

Phoneme Identification

In order to assess the phonetic quality of vowel phoshy

nemes one must first ascertain the number and relationshy

ship of sound contrasts in a language ie the phonemes

The visual representation of the actualization of the phoshy

neme ie the spectrogram can only be made on the basis

of a preceding decision of the linguist on the types and

number of phonemes in the l~nguage to be anaiyzed (Pulgram

1965)~ Phonemic analysis cannot be made with phonetic

data alone it must be made with phonetic data plus a sershy

ies of phonemic premises and procedures (Pike 1947) A

spectrogram conveys phonetic information which aids the

linguist in determining which phonetic features are consisshy

tently present in order to reach the most accurate phonetic

description

There are a variety of premises and procedures which

the investigator may utilize in order to discover the phoshy

nemic structure of a language Pike (1947) argues that the

investigator must have at hand observable native reaction

to native sounds andor know structural facts pertaining to

the phonetic nature of the sounds and their distribution

As stated before a phoneme is a bundle of sound f~atures

1

j

16

which when substituted for another bundle creates a difshy

ference in meaning Since the creation of a different morshy

pheme is the result of the substitution of a different sound

feature these sound features are said to be phonemes

A pair of words in which the first word is the same as the second except for the fact that one segment is replaced by a different but phonetic~lly similar segment in the second word constitutes proof that the two similar segments are phonemically distinct~ bullbullbull Word pairs of this type are said to be MINIMALshyLY DIFFERENJ because no smaller difference in the language can make a differ~nce in meahing in words (Pike 1947)

Hence minimal pairs of words were used to find phonemes

Minimal~y different word pairs prove to be the beginners

single most important tool for the analysis of phonemic difshy

ferences (Pike 1947)

Thus Echols and Shadilys An Indonesian-English Dicshy

tionarv (1968) was ut~lized to find three-phoneme words

containing two consonant sounds with a vowel in medial poshy

sition The process was simply to go through all the words

beginning with consonants and find minimally different t~ree

phoneme words This was done on a purely anthr~poscopic

basis on the part of the investigator If a different letshy

ter was employed to distinguish a different meaning it was

assumed to be a different phoneme The following ~ord pairs

and their meanings are examples of the words found in the

dictionary

ban--tire bin--son of

das-- a shot dos--small box carton

I

1 7

pal--pole pel--field

rang--rank position ring--ring

teh--tea toh--yet nevertheless

After having obtained the words from the dictionary

a native informant was called upon to verify ~he differshy

ance in meaning in the minimal pairs and to pronounce

them so that ~hey could be phonetically transcribed in

al1 impressionistic manner The informant employed was Kok

Djen Su a student at Portland State University from Yogshy

jakartai Indonesia He has been a student in the United

States for approximately two years and speaks broken al shy

though very understandable English Mr Su was horn to Mr

and Mrs Su Hendry Su who both speak Bahasa Indonesia Jashy

vanese and a small amount of Chinese Since his birth the

informant was exposed to a mixture of Javanese and Bahasa

Indonesia but has employed the national language of Indoshy

nesia since the age of three at school His bilingual upshy

bringing it seems to the author does not craate a subshy

stantial difference in the competence of Mr Su in Bahasa

Indonesia In fact he was able to distinguish the proshy

nunciation Qf words in both Javanese and in Bahasa Indoshy

nesia The utilization of one informant deletes any reshy

gional variation or individual variation between informshy

ants Since here we are attempting to ascertain the relashy

tive range of phonetic quality of vowel phonemes in Bahashy

sa Indonesia the informants bilingualism ahould cause

none or very few phonetic distortions

After-having verified the difference in meaning of

the word pairs Kok Djen ~u pronounced the word The

following impressionistic version of the Ihdonesian voshy

wel system was described

front central back

high

mid 1 I

I I low j

i I I

I

u-

E 0

A

1 Spectrograms

The phonemic entities symbolized in the preceding

section represent range-units of phonetic quality The

symbols and their position on the chart are based on the

aural perceptions of the investigator The purpose of the

spectrographic analysis of this data is to determine as

accurately as possible the actual phonetic range represenshy

ted by each of thephonemic symbols

I

i

1 9

In order to make spectrograms from which meani~gful

conclusions can be drawn one must have a native informant

of the language to be studied Spectrograms were made of

the speech of Mr Su the informant described earlier

In order to conserve the time of the informant a

sample of three-phoneme words were recorded The three-

phoneme words begin and end with consonants ahd contain a

vowel in medial position The list appears in Appendix A

The list of words was specifically selec~ed to eliminate

in so far as possible all variatiqn other than that which

is specifically caused by the preceding and following consoshy

nants This is true because by utilizing a single informant

the influence of dialects both regional and social are eshy

liminated and by utilizing one sy~lable words under primary

1stress sequential influences such as the Markov Process

are eliminated since there is no sequence beyond one phoshy

neme preceding and following the vowel This being the case

one should be able to derive from a series of spectrograms

of those vowels both the range of free variation and the

specific influence of each particular consonant on the voshy

weI quality of each medial phoneme

The n~xt st~p in the procedure was to play the tape-

recordings into the spectrograph two or three wo~ds at a

1The Markoy Process is a mechanical way of handling enshytropy in sequential operations IQ linguistics this is stashyted in terms ofthe probability of the occurrence of a parshyticular phoneme morpheme etc in a precise sequence

20

time The machine can handle 24 seconds of speech on one

spectrogram thus two or three words could be analyzed at

the same time as one with no loss in quality or precision

Unfortunately the recordings had to be played into a

microphone which picks up some background noise but by

placing the microp~one of the spectrograph very close to

the loudspeaker of the tape recorder and turning the volume

up slightly this background was eliminated for all pracshy

tical purposes middotIt would have been better to have had a

direct connection between the recordar and the spectrograph

but unfortunately no such devce was available Background

noise shows up as very small specks scattered more or less

at random and unless the volume of such noise is exceedshy

ingly strong does not interfere with the reading of the

spectrograms

Once the machine had completed the analys~s and produced

the graphic record of the list of words a frequency measur~

ing device was produced by the machine cf example below

1 11amp II~ill c=

- n- HE to

11r -shy

bull b mmiddot 1 bull bull L

-

gIl F Jamp u

n _ If

bull III

21

This measuring device is in reality a spectrogram with horishy

zontal markings The first line on the chart represents a

frequency of 0 hertz (hz) Each line above the first repshy

resents a multiple of 500 hz The device is used to locate

th~ center of formants 1 and 2 Since it is graduated in

500 hz it is necessary to interpolate when the center ofmiddot

power for a particular formant falls between two of these

lines This is done by dividing the area between the two

lines in half then dividing one of the halves in half which

gives a range of 125 hz within which the measurement falls

and an estimate is made of the precise measurement within

the 125 hz range This should give formant positions with

an accuraci of greater than plusmn25 hz

When visual location of the formant centers becprnes

difficult a section of the formant can be made cf exshy

ample below Such difficulties with visual location usually

arise when two weak formants overlap Such overlapping

produc~s what appears to the naked eye to be a band of modeshy

rately dark grey bands The sectioner is a built in mech-

IshyfL__---

tete we tt

~

I

1 I

22

anism capable of handling such problems In the preceding

I example the amplitude of each harmonic is proportional

to the length of the line representing that harmonic I

This makes it possible to locate formant centers when vi-

I sual location is difficult

The measurements were then transferred to formant

charts cf Chart 1 on the following page

6

23

CHART I

~

t

1+

t5

1amp

Ie

z~ 2t 2p 16 12 la 8 Iii

I ~

~

I S

l I

I I

~

V V

V T

l( FORMANT V CHART

Vi ~ CcdiOrate4 ift luutdnM I V ~ cycle ~ concf

V 10 eeentl~rsI~ V

V U 5millimctcrs - I $milton

2 zk2 lis ty

I

FOlWAlfT CHART

Placing a single point on this cha-t is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one fOrrUlt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant atmiddotthe frequency named along the top or bottom edge

ex Martin Joos~ Acoustic Phonetics (1948)

CHAPTER IV

FINDINGS

The data provided by the preceding methodology conshy

sisted of a series of scatter patterns on the vowel charts

Each of the dots within the pattern represented one occurshy

rence of a particular vowel To determine the range ofmiddot each

phoneme f the most divergent points in each pattern were con-

nected by a line These lines then circumscribe an area

which included the range of all the vowels in the sample

recognized ~y the informantmiddotas a particular phoneme

Verbal descriptions the actual charts of the phonemes

and the spectrograms utilized willbe found on the followshy

ing pages

25

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 1 range~ on the

vowel chart in a broad scattering from 300-500 hz for forshy

mant 1 and 1500-2100 hz for formant 2

CHART II

1

lid

13

bull

~

It

iA

Ml

ztr Zit zp 1 S lIZ middot1 I a r 8 6

I

f

I I

Ii 3

[7l I I V 1 I

) ~I I i I bull

V I I i bull r J

I V t I I I I I

i tt I

Kl7 I I I iI ~

I I I I I I I I I i I

I I I i I f I ltII

I I l7 I VI

I [7 1

1 I I I Va FORMANTc7 CHART

I

I I I I 173 CaEiIw-atd icw~[7 rf ltfer C0ItdI I I

j I I I i 7 10 e centlCMta1 oct4v

I V 5miU~ bull itonI

r I f 711 t14 j I I I Ik IV

FoiUlAhT CHRT

Placing asinge point on this chart is an assertion that fortcants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at tn(l frequerlcy nameu Slong the right or eft cdampe the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

26

l 1I I - -~

I I iI I

I

[bIs] [bIn]

lt-- -_- -1I

lt i

1 ~ i1_ -shy Ir ~ tmiddotmiddot lt

-- - - ---~--- - - - ----- --

-i -_~ ~ shyI 1

i I I

I I bullbullq_-

I ~~~-~--shyr ~~~~~ -~- I------------------------shy

-----I

[dIm] [sIh]

27

I -[blr]

i1 1 I I

i Ii I

I i I I

ii ___ -J

rmiddot I i

I 1 j

-~ ~~~ ~-~IIlIr~~~

I

1 ____~~l_~~--=~ _ ~--~~~~~~~~~- -

51 hI$ PiiB PD~ii~i

-~ - -- -- ----- ~------- - --- _-- - _ - shy [rIll) [klr]

28

1 I I I

---~S~ -~~~fi~ ~~~~~-~

~l_ middot~ ___

[klk]

I I I

r [dlk]

29

-------- --

-~- shy~--I~~

[tIll]

30

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lEI ranged on the

vowel chart in a thin oval shaped distribution from 400-625

hz for formant 1 and from 1400-2000 hz for formant 2

CHART III

lEI

i

I

1 I

1

1middot

II~~ 5 I~ I lOa I ~--~~~I-+--+-4-+--+---+--++-+-+-+-+--r--t-t--r--t--r--1

I

I I I I

t I

4

I I 1 I ~ I I I I

I t I ~

I I ~

-r--- r--- I V~~~-r~+-+-~~~+-+-~~~~~~~--T-~-r~-r~-r~-T---T--r~

V~~~++4-~~~-4-+-+~~~~~+-~-T-rV~7

~iA~~~~~I+-~~~~~I--~~~-r~~~~~8 FORMANT HHHH~~r+~~-r~+-~+-~I~-I~~rl7V CHART

I II 11I I V9 CaZiLrww 1ft huncirccLJ

-+-f-+-II-f-+-+-+-+--+-+--+--+----+-+--+-1--t-+-1---t---t--7 rtf eye 04 ~ I 11 V pq-+-+-I~-+--i--+I-t-t--+~i-I---t--+--tr -t--t-Tj-ri~middotltJ ecentimeters 1octGy

I V 5miU~ - aemiton ~~~~I~~+-~~l~-~-T~I~~~r~

t i lt~ I I IS I I liV

FolUlAn C1LBT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion T hat rormants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency namfu along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

A SPECTROGRAPHIC ANALYSIS

OF

BAHASA INDONESIA VOWEL PHONEMES

UNDER PRIMARY STRESS IN eve WORDS

by

INGRID T HANNA

A thesis submitted in partialfulfillment of the requirements for th~ degree of

MASTER OF ARTS in

ANTHROPOLOGY

Portland State University 1974

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

I would like to thank the faculty members on my

thesis committee for their help and contributions

am especially grateful to Prof Joe E Pierce for his

continual advise and mor~l support

Mostly I would like to thank my husband withoutmiddot

whose understanding constant encouragement and proshy

fessional advise I could not have survived the entire

effort

I

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS iii

CHAPTERi r I INTRODUCTION 1

Language Justification for Study Statement of the Problem Delimitations of the Study

II THEORETICAL BACKGROUND 7

PhoneticsPhonemics Acoustic Theory FundamentalsHarmonics Acoustics vs Articulation Spectrograph

I I I METHODOLOGY bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull 1 5 I

Phoneme Identification Spectrograms

IV FINDINGS I 24

V SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 67

EIBLIOGRAPHY ~ bullbull _bullbull _ __ bull __ 690 __ bull _

Sources Sources

Cited Consulted

APPENDIX A 71

List of Words

APPENDIX B bull --- bull bull - bull bull bull bull bull bull I bull bull bull Linguistic Symbolization Used

73

CHAPTER I

INTRODUCTION

Language

Bahasa Indonesia the official name applied to the

Indonesian language is a member of the Malayo-Polyrresian

language family The term Bahasa Indonesia is often used

synonymously with modern Malay or Malay dialect (Uhlenbeck

1967) References to a similar form of this Malay based

language are found as early as the 16th cent~ry by traders

such as th~ Chinese the Hindu and the Arabs (Woodman 1955)

Words were added to the language known as Melaju Pasar or

Bazaar Malay as trade with foreigners increased (Woodman

1955) These foreign elements in Melaju Pasar formed the

essential differences between it and the Malay spoken on the

Ma~ay Peninsula (Woodman 1955) Bahasa Indonesia differs

little from the standard dialect of the Malay Peninsula and

daes so mainly in its relatively large and growing vocabulashy

ry borrowed from European and indigenous languages (Amerishy

can University 1970) Bahasa Indonesia is then an adaptashy

tion of Malay inasmuch as it has been changed by the origishy

nal regional languages and modern European languages (Alisshy

jahbana 1949)

2

Today Bahasa Indonesia is the official language of the

Republic of Indonesia It has been estimated that over 200I

region~l languages are spoken in this country of wide cul-

I tural diversity (Wo~dman 1955) When Indonesia beganto

I strive for independence from Dutch colonialists a common

language seemed eSsential in an effort to unify the nationI Indonesian political leaders desirous of revitalizing r th people br9ught (to bare) the most effective means of

organizing them in the greatest numbers (Alisjahbana 1949)

Attention was focused upon the Malay language which was the

lingua Franca for most of Southeast Asia Javanese was

rejected although it possessed a thousand-year-old literary

tradition and was the language of the largest ethnic group

in the islands (American University 1970) The Javanese

language has a fairly ~igid system of vo~abulary differshy

ences based on social class Thus Malay became the basis

of the national language At the 1928 conference of the

pertemuan Muda (Meeting of Youth) Malay was chosen to be

the basis of the national language (American University

1970) By 1930 then the term Malay Language was officshy

ially changed to the Indonesian language (Uhlenbeck 1967)

It became the language for scholarly endeavors and the langshy

uage of leaders and officials During the Japanese occupashy

tion in 1942 the language made further gains In an effort

to combat Dutch cultural influence it was made the compulshy

3

sory language uied in schools from elementary and up

Bahasa Indonesia became the official national language

when the Republic of Indonesia was farmed in 1945

Justification For Study

Phonemic descriptions of Bahasa Indonesia are almost

non-existent and very limited f from a linguistic point of

view Most descriptions of the sounds of Indonesian are

of a comparative nature i e Bahasa Indonesian sounds are

likened to sounds of modern Indo-European languages Echols

and Shadilys An Indonesian-English Dictionary describes

Indonesian sounds in relation to the similar sounds in

English For instance they argue that the e in the Indoshy

nesian word sen is like the e in the English word make n

only shorter Statements such as the aforementionedmay

be practical for most purposes but are not necessarily

linguistically sound and almost certainly inaccurate

Another deficiency which seems to be present in phonshy

emic analyses not only in Indonesian is the impressionistic

nature of these analyses When dealing with a lang~ag8

the linguist must attempt to remove all linguistic biases

and comparisons because phonetic details may escape the

ear of the analyst f especially in a foreign language upon

which he is likely to impose depending upon the degree of

his skill any of the few prejudices of his native phonemic

scale (Pulgram 1965) Even when the investigator does nat

4

I

rely on comparative methods of description he cannot compshy

letely remove all the sounds in his linguistic memory when

describing a new language He will invariably hear sounds

that are very similar to those he knows and may not be able

to discern certain minor although perhaps crucial differshy

ences Phonemic descriptions are most often of this impresshy

sionistic variety

Spectrographic analyses of the sounds of a language

provide an objective measure of the quality of the sounds

of a language Spectrographs record precise sound qualities

produced by a speaker particuiarly vowels This mode of

description will delete the impressions of the investigator

and will map precise quality for sounds in question what

shows on a spectrogram is an acous~ic reality whether the

analyst hears it or not (Pulgram 1965) It is these

precise sound qualities of Bahasa Iridonesian vowel phonemes

that this investigation will attempt to ascertain Instrushy

mentaltesting of hypotheses has been a part of scientific

study for many years but very little has been done to

date in linguistics (Pierce 1963) The acoustic specshy

trograph can provide definite answers as to the phonetic

quality of vowels

The science of phonemics developed out of the realizashy

tion that some phoneti6 features of a language differentiate

one word from another while others do not Edward Sapir

(1921) argues

5

Back of the purely objective system of sounds that is peculiar to a language and which can be arrived at only by a painstaking phonetic analysis there is -a more restricted inner or ideal system which perhaps equally unconscious as a system to the naive speaker can far more readily than the other be brought to his consciousness as a finished pattern a psychological mechanism The inner sound system overlaid though it may be by the mechanical or the irrelevant is a real important principle in the life of a language

Once it was accepted that language had a definite phonologshy

ical structure a method was devised to describe this undershy

lying system This method became the science of phonemics

The phonemic structure of a language represents the minimal

number of sound signals which make transmission of informashy

tion possible Spectrographic analyses of t~ese minimal

sound signals provide objective and empirical measurements

of the quality of these minimal sound features

Statement of the Problem

This investigation will determine the range of free

variation of Bahasa Indonesian vowel phonemes in a given

phonemic environment and types of conditioned variation

from one environment to another The nature and ra~ge of

the vowel quality for each phoneme will be determined by

spectrographic measurements

Delimitations of the Study

This study will only deal with Bahasa Indonesian

vowels sounds produced with vibration of the vocal cords

6

by unobstructed passage of air through the oral cavity

and not constricted enough to cause audible friction

Pei 1966) They will be the vowels found in monoshy

syllabic Indonesian wo~ds under primary stress and in a

consonant~vowel-cDnsonant pattern Each word will also

be part of a minimal pair ie every word must be conshy

trasted with another word in which only the medial vowel

is different andto which a different semantic meaning is

attached

CHAPTER II

THEORETICAL BACKGROUND

PhoneticsPhonemics

Phonetics is the branch of linguistics which deals

with the actual speech sounds of a language When dealing

with the phonetic level of linguistic analysis one describes

the sounds of a language in terms of articulation or acoustic

features In articulatory phonetics one describes sounds

in middotterms 9f manner of articulation ie whether it is a

stop fricat~ve etc point of articulation ie) bilabial

(be~ween the lips) dental etc or vowel quality ie

high-front-close (the highest part of the tongue-is very

high in the front of the mouth for producing this particular

sound) etc In acoustic phonetics sounds are described in

terms of the distributions of frequencies characteristic of

the sounds of a language The relationship generally acshy

cepted as existing between artic~latory and ~coustic phonetshy

ics is that certain articulations produce certain distinctive

patterns of frequency distributions It must be emphasized

at this point that both of the aforementioned types of deshy

scriptians deal with all human speech sounds not necessarily

those which perform a signalling function in a particular I

aspect of the language

I I

f

8

Distinctlve features are used to denote signalling

functions The label distinctive feature is used in the

literature to mean two quite different things Bloomfield

describes the categorization with examples which imply

that distinctive sound feature means any feature of the vocal

sound which when changed changes the meaning of a given

word eg pill and bill sin and sing etcri (Pierce 1965)

There Bloomfi~ld labels p as a distinctive sound feature

and b as a different sound feature Later Roman Jakobson

Gunnar M Fant and Morris Halle in their Preliminaries of

sectpeech Analysis take the phonemes of a language and break

them down into their component phonetic features some of

which are distinctive eg voicing in English b vs p

while others are not eg aspiration in English p~ in pin

as opposed to p in spin Anyone language code has a

finite set of distinctive features bullbullbull (Jakobson Fant and

Halle 1961) In English the feature of voicing in the b

of bill as opposed to the absence of voicing for the p

in pill is the phonetic feature which distinguishes these

two sounds A similar presence vs absence of aspiration

does not alter the meaning of any English utterance in fact

it is difficult to make English speakers aware of the fact

that aspiration is or is not present Implicit in this

theoretical approach is the concept that the variation in

human speech for the most part re~resents presence vs

9

1

absence of non-distinctive features of sound

One theoretical approach to linguistic structures

views the phoneme as concurrent bundles of distinctive

features (Jakobson Fant and Halle 1961) Each language

has a finite set of rules for grouping them (distinctive

features) into phQnemes (Jakobson Fant and Halle 1961)

Every phoneme in the language then is composed of a unique

set of distinctive features such that it is different from

any other phoneme by at least one of such distinctive feashy

tures This manner of linguistic signalling has important

implicat~ons toward phonemic analysis of sound systems As

previously mentioned a phoneme is a bundle of distinctive

features which when altered changes meaning In order

to verify whether a sound is a phoneme or not one must

show a word in which the replacement of at least one disti~c-

tive feature makes another word ie a minimal pair difshy

ferentiated by only a single distinctive feature and having

two distinct grammatical or semantical meanings

Phonemics the study of phonem~s is the level of lingushy

istic analysis which answers the question of how language

utilizes sound matter selecting certain of its elements and

adapting them for various ends The prima~y functions of

sound in a language is to distinguish one utterance from anshy

other in normal conversation Phonemic analysis as an opshy

eration examines a~ailable data in order to discover an unshy

derlying structure bullbullbull not an operation which forces a mass

1 0

of data into a structure (Pulgram 19~5) The nature of

each feature is of the essence Thus the composition of

each phoneme becomes of primary importance in a language

The phoneme can only be defined in reference to the larger

frame whi~h is the language of which it is a structured

feature (Pulgram 1965) It is the shortest stretch of

sound which serves a signalling function

Acoustic Theory

I Distinctive feature theory as previously describedI I seems to handle such phonemes s stops fricatives and

I nasals quite well eg the airflow out of the mouth is I

either stopped or it is allowed to escape On the other

1 hand vowels seem to be ranges of phonetic quality whichI

are extremely difficult if not impossible to distinguish

in terms of presence vs ab~~nce of distinctive features

Since this study will not be concerned with consonants but

only w~th vowels it is only necessary to discuss the acousshy

tic nature of vowel qualities from this point on

FundamentalsHarmonics

Vowel quality is determined by a combination of a fundashy

mental and its harmonics A vowel quality displayed on an

oscilloscope shows a very complex single wave form This

wave form is in reality the mathematical sum of a number

of simple wave forms or at least for theoretical purposes

1 1

can be treated as such These wave forms are generated

in the oral tract by the opening and closing of the glotshy

tis The fundamental wave is a sine wave with a frequency

equal to the number of times the glottis opens and closes

each second and an amplitude which is directly pro~ortion-

al to air pressure in the lungs Because of the nature

of sound waves a harmonic is generated at every multiple

of this fundamental eg if the fundamental is 100 cycles

per second then a harmonic is generated at 200 300

400 bullbullbull CO As soon as the complex wave leaves the vocal

chords harmoni6s are filtered out by the nature of the

tissue surrounding the oral tract as well as the cavities

in and adj o 1ning the oral tract The complex wave emerging

from the mouth is the mathematical sum of fundamental and

the harmonics which have not been filtered out by the oral

tract cf Martin Joos Acoustic Phonetics (1 948) chapshy

ters 1 and 2 for a fuller explanation of this process

Acoustics vs Articulation

In the last century far too much energy has b~en exshy

pended in attempts to relate acoustic features to specific

articulatory movements Bloch (1942) illustrates this by

stating qualities are identified by ear but in linguisshy

tic works they are traditionally defined in terms of their

assumed production by the vocal organs This type ofmiddotstudy

is misdirected because the only things that impinge on the

I I

- I

12

human ear are the harmonics which were not filtered out

The articulatory movements which cause the filtration ie

movement of the tongue from front to back creating a series

of filters each of which removes different harmonics

from the complex waves are irrelevant Pike (1943) argues

one should analyze and describe the sounds (or sound waves)

themselves rather than the movements ~roducing them

It has long been noted by acousticians that a variety

of articulatory movements remove the same harmonics and

r~sult in the production of very similar sounds Pierce

(1962) illustrates this by saying

As long as the formants are in their praper positions ie the proper frequencies are passed through the speech mechanism it does not matter whether the unwanted frequencies are filtered out by rounding the lips or moving the tongue to the back ThuQ when Holbrook and Carmody give one front-back position for the tongue for a given English vowel and IPA (International Pho~etic Alphabet) gives another it is quite probable that both are completely correct and that the formant shift is made by compensating for the lack of tongue movement in the speech of some speakers by additional lip rounding bullbullbullbull

Since the hearer of a stream of speech can hear 9nly those harmonics which emerge from the mouth as componshyents of the final complex wave the placement of the formant is of primary importance not the articulation which produced the sound

Therefore a study of the phonetic quality of vowels

demands an instrument which is capable of making an accurate

record of the presence or absence of all the harmonics

having sufficient amplitude to significantly alter the final

wave form The acoustic spectrograph is such an instrument

13

it was the first instrument to make large scale acoustic

a n a ly s e sapr act i c a I po s sibiIi t Y n ( Lad e fog ed 1 967 ) bull

Spectrograph

The acoustic spectrograph is a device ~hich records a

stream of speech 2~4 seconds or less in length This

recording is then fed into the analyzing part of the specshy

trograph where at each successive playing ne frequency

or rather one frequency band is lifted outof the total by

the variable filter (Pulgram 1965) A black ma~king is

made on a piece ofmiddot electro-sensitive paper each time there

is a harmonic present within the frequency band being anashy

lyzed Since the articulators are constantly moving and

changing the filtration characteristics of thevocal tract

the black markings ma~e by a stylus reflect the movements

of the articula~ors in a very broad sense More important

however it makes a precise record of the stimulus ie

the harmonics which reach the ear of the listener Dunn

(1950) says the vowels have asso~iated with them different

frequency regions in which the sound is more intense than

elsewhere in the spectrum The name formant has been apshy

plied to these regions

The next problem then is to relate the concentrations

of power mentioned above ie the formants to human pershy

ception of speech sounds The most widely utilized techshy

nique in this area is one devised by Martin Joos (1948)

~______________________________________~S___________________________________________________shy1

14

generally referred to as his 2 Formant Theory This techshy

nique represents the plotting of formant 1 and formant 2

in a specific wayan a particular chart cf Chart 1 on

p~ 23 This technique is clearly described by Ladefoged

(1967)

The relations between the formant structures of the vowels in a number of words can be conveniently represented by means of formant charts which show the frequency of the firs~ formant at a time in the word when the formant structure is changing at a minimum rate plotted against the frequency of the second formant at the same time

When making these kinds of plots a charting is derived of

vowels for any language which is remarkably like the tradishy

tional impressionistic vowel charts of the 19th century

Esner (1947) illustrated that if the frequency of the first

formant was plotted against the frequency of the second

formant it seemed to equal the relation between formant

frequency and the traditional vowel diagram

Basically this study will reproduce such vowel charts

for a number of examples of each sound in Bahasa Indonesia

Formant 1 will be platted against formant 2 for each vowel

phoneme in a variety of phonemic environments -The purpose

of this will be to determine the range of variation for

every vowel in each e~vironment as produced by a single native

speaker

CHAPTER III

METHODOLOGY

Phoneme Identification

In order to assess the phonetic quality of vowel phoshy

nemes one must first ascertain the number and relationshy

ship of sound contrasts in a language ie the phonemes

The visual representation of the actualization of the phoshy

neme ie the spectrogram can only be made on the basis

of a preceding decision of the linguist on the types and

number of phonemes in the l~nguage to be anaiyzed (Pulgram

1965)~ Phonemic analysis cannot be made with phonetic

data alone it must be made with phonetic data plus a sershy

ies of phonemic premises and procedures (Pike 1947) A

spectrogram conveys phonetic information which aids the

linguist in determining which phonetic features are consisshy

tently present in order to reach the most accurate phonetic

description

There are a variety of premises and procedures which

the investigator may utilize in order to discover the phoshy

nemic structure of a language Pike (1947) argues that the

investigator must have at hand observable native reaction

to native sounds andor know structural facts pertaining to

the phonetic nature of the sounds and their distribution

As stated before a phoneme is a bundle of sound f~atures

1

j

16

which when substituted for another bundle creates a difshy

ference in meaning Since the creation of a different morshy

pheme is the result of the substitution of a different sound

feature these sound features are said to be phonemes

A pair of words in which the first word is the same as the second except for the fact that one segment is replaced by a different but phonetic~lly similar segment in the second word constitutes proof that the two similar segments are phonemically distinct~ bullbullbull Word pairs of this type are said to be MINIMALshyLY DIFFERENJ because no smaller difference in the language can make a differ~nce in meahing in words (Pike 1947)

Hence minimal pairs of words were used to find phonemes

Minimal~y different word pairs prove to be the beginners

single most important tool for the analysis of phonemic difshy

ferences (Pike 1947)

Thus Echols and Shadilys An Indonesian-English Dicshy

tionarv (1968) was ut~lized to find three-phoneme words

containing two consonant sounds with a vowel in medial poshy

sition The process was simply to go through all the words

beginning with consonants and find minimally different t~ree

phoneme words This was done on a purely anthr~poscopic

basis on the part of the investigator If a different letshy

ter was employed to distinguish a different meaning it was

assumed to be a different phoneme The following ~ord pairs

and their meanings are examples of the words found in the

dictionary

ban--tire bin--son of

das-- a shot dos--small box carton

I

1 7

pal--pole pel--field

rang--rank position ring--ring

teh--tea toh--yet nevertheless

After having obtained the words from the dictionary

a native informant was called upon to verify ~he differshy

ance in meaning in the minimal pairs and to pronounce

them so that ~hey could be phonetically transcribed in

al1 impressionistic manner The informant employed was Kok

Djen Su a student at Portland State University from Yogshy

jakartai Indonesia He has been a student in the United

States for approximately two years and speaks broken al shy

though very understandable English Mr Su was horn to Mr

and Mrs Su Hendry Su who both speak Bahasa Indonesia Jashy

vanese and a small amount of Chinese Since his birth the

informant was exposed to a mixture of Javanese and Bahasa

Indonesia but has employed the national language of Indoshy

nesia since the age of three at school His bilingual upshy

bringing it seems to the author does not craate a subshy

stantial difference in the competence of Mr Su in Bahasa

Indonesia In fact he was able to distinguish the proshy

nunciation Qf words in both Javanese and in Bahasa Indoshy

nesia The utilization of one informant deletes any reshy

gional variation or individual variation between informshy

ants Since here we are attempting to ascertain the relashy

tive range of phonetic quality of vowel phonemes in Bahashy

sa Indonesia the informants bilingualism ahould cause

none or very few phonetic distortions

After-having verified the difference in meaning of

the word pairs Kok Djen ~u pronounced the word The

following impressionistic version of the Ihdonesian voshy

wel system was described

front central back

high

mid 1 I

I I low j

i I I

I

u-

E 0

A

1 Spectrograms

The phonemic entities symbolized in the preceding

section represent range-units of phonetic quality The

symbols and their position on the chart are based on the

aural perceptions of the investigator The purpose of the

spectrographic analysis of this data is to determine as

accurately as possible the actual phonetic range represenshy

ted by each of thephonemic symbols

I

i

1 9

In order to make spectrograms from which meani~gful

conclusions can be drawn one must have a native informant

of the language to be studied Spectrograms were made of

the speech of Mr Su the informant described earlier

In order to conserve the time of the informant a

sample of three-phoneme words were recorded The three-

phoneme words begin and end with consonants ahd contain a

vowel in medial position The list appears in Appendix A

The list of words was specifically selec~ed to eliminate

in so far as possible all variatiqn other than that which

is specifically caused by the preceding and following consoshy

nants This is true because by utilizing a single informant

the influence of dialects both regional and social are eshy

liminated and by utilizing one sy~lable words under primary

1stress sequential influences such as the Markov Process

are eliminated since there is no sequence beyond one phoshy

neme preceding and following the vowel This being the case

one should be able to derive from a series of spectrograms

of those vowels both the range of free variation and the

specific influence of each particular consonant on the voshy

weI quality of each medial phoneme

The n~xt st~p in the procedure was to play the tape-

recordings into the spectrograph two or three wo~ds at a

1The Markoy Process is a mechanical way of handling enshytropy in sequential operations IQ linguistics this is stashyted in terms ofthe probability of the occurrence of a parshyticular phoneme morpheme etc in a precise sequence

20

time The machine can handle 24 seconds of speech on one

spectrogram thus two or three words could be analyzed at

the same time as one with no loss in quality or precision

Unfortunately the recordings had to be played into a

microphone which picks up some background noise but by

placing the microp~one of the spectrograph very close to

the loudspeaker of the tape recorder and turning the volume

up slightly this background was eliminated for all pracshy

tical purposes middotIt would have been better to have had a

direct connection between the recordar and the spectrograph

but unfortunately no such devce was available Background

noise shows up as very small specks scattered more or less

at random and unless the volume of such noise is exceedshy

ingly strong does not interfere with the reading of the

spectrograms

Once the machine had completed the analys~s and produced

the graphic record of the list of words a frequency measur~

ing device was produced by the machine cf example below

1 11amp II~ill c=

- n- HE to

11r -shy

bull b mmiddot 1 bull bull L

-

gIl F Jamp u

n _ If

bull III

21

This measuring device is in reality a spectrogram with horishy

zontal markings The first line on the chart represents a

frequency of 0 hertz (hz) Each line above the first repshy

resents a multiple of 500 hz The device is used to locate

th~ center of formants 1 and 2 Since it is graduated in

500 hz it is necessary to interpolate when the center ofmiddot

power for a particular formant falls between two of these

lines This is done by dividing the area between the two

lines in half then dividing one of the halves in half which

gives a range of 125 hz within which the measurement falls

and an estimate is made of the precise measurement within

the 125 hz range This should give formant positions with

an accuraci of greater than plusmn25 hz

When visual location of the formant centers becprnes

difficult a section of the formant can be made cf exshy

ample below Such difficulties with visual location usually

arise when two weak formants overlap Such overlapping

produc~s what appears to the naked eye to be a band of modeshy

rately dark grey bands The sectioner is a built in mech-

IshyfL__---

tete we tt

~

I

1 I

22

anism capable of handling such problems In the preceding

I example the amplitude of each harmonic is proportional

to the length of the line representing that harmonic I

This makes it possible to locate formant centers when vi-

I sual location is difficult

The measurements were then transferred to formant

charts cf Chart 1 on the following page

6

23

CHART I

~

t

1+

t5

1amp

Ie

z~ 2t 2p 16 12 la 8 Iii

I ~

~

I S

l I

I I

~

V V

V T

l( FORMANT V CHART

Vi ~ CcdiOrate4 ift luutdnM I V ~ cycle ~ concf

V 10 eeentl~rsI~ V

V U 5millimctcrs - I $milton

2 zk2 lis ty

I

FOlWAlfT CHART

Placing a single point on this cha-t is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one fOrrUlt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant atmiddotthe frequency named along the top or bottom edge

ex Martin Joos~ Acoustic Phonetics (1948)

CHAPTER IV

FINDINGS

The data provided by the preceding methodology conshy

sisted of a series of scatter patterns on the vowel charts

Each of the dots within the pattern represented one occurshy

rence of a particular vowel To determine the range ofmiddot each

phoneme f the most divergent points in each pattern were con-

nected by a line These lines then circumscribe an area

which included the range of all the vowels in the sample

recognized ~y the informantmiddotas a particular phoneme

Verbal descriptions the actual charts of the phonemes

and the spectrograms utilized willbe found on the followshy

ing pages

25

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 1 range~ on the

vowel chart in a broad scattering from 300-500 hz for forshy

mant 1 and 1500-2100 hz for formant 2

CHART II

1

lid

13

bull

~

It

iA

Ml

ztr Zit zp 1 S lIZ middot1 I a r 8 6

I

f

I I

Ii 3

[7l I I V 1 I

) ~I I i I bull

V I I i bull r J

I V t I I I I I

i tt I

Kl7 I I I iI ~

I I I I I I I I I i I

I I I i I f I ltII

I I l7 I VI

I [7 1

1 I I I Va FORMANTc7 CHART

I

I I I I 173 CaEiIw-atd icw~[7 rf ltfer C0ItdI I I

j I I I i 7 10 e centlCMta1 oct4v

I V 5miU~ bull itonI

r I f 711 t14 j I I I Ik IV

FoiUlAhT CHRT

Placing asinge point on this chart is an assertion that fortcants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at tn(l frequerlcy nameu Slong the right or eft cdampe the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

26

l 1I I - -~

I I iI I

I

[bIs] [bIn]

lt-- -_- -1I

lt i

1 ~ i1_ -shy Ir ~ tmiddotmiddot lt

-- - - ---~--- - - - ----- --

-i -_~ ~ shyI 1

i I I

I I bullbullq_-

I ~~~-~--shyr ~~~~~ -~- I------------------------shy

-----I

[dIm] [sIh]

27

I -[blr]

i1 1 I I

i Ii I

I i I I

ii ___ -J

rmiddot I i

I 1 j

-~ ~~~ ~-~IIlIr~~~

I

1 ____~~l_~~--=~ _ ~--~~~~~~~~~- -

51 hI$ PiiB PD~ii~i

-~ - -- -- ----- ~------- - --- _-- - _ - shy [rIll) [klr]

28

1 I I I

---~S~ -~~~fi~ ~~~~~-~

~l_ middot~ ___

[klk]

I I I

r [dlk]

29

-------- --

-~- shy~--I~~

[tIll]

30

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lEI ranged on the

vowel chart in a thin oval shaped distribution from 400-625

hz for formant 1 and from 1400-2000 hz for formant 2

CHART III

lEI

i

I

1 I

1

1middot

II~~ 5 I~ I lOa I ~--~~~I-+--+-4-+--+---+--++-+-+-+-+--r--t-t--r--t--r--1

I

I I I I

t I

4

I I 1 I ~ I I I I

I t I ~

I I ~

-r--- r--- I V~~~-r~+-+-~~~+-+-~~~~~~~--T-~-r~-r~-r~-T---T--r~

V~~~++4-~~~-4-+-+~~~~~+-~-T-rV~7

~iA~~~~~I+-~~~~~I--~~~-r~~~~~8 FORMANT HHHH~~r+~~-r~+-~+-~I~-I~~rl7V CHART

I II 11I I V9 CaZiLrww 1ft huncirccLJ

-+-f-+-II-f-+-+-+-+--+-+--+--+----+-+--+-1--t-+-1---t---t--7 rtf eye 04 ~ I 11 V pq-+-+-I~-+--i--+I-t-t--+~i-I---t--+--tr -t--t-Tj-ri~middotltJ ecentimeters 1octGy

I V 5miU~ - aemiton ~~~~I~~+-~~l~-~-T~I~~~r~

t i lt~ I I IS I I liV

FolUlAn C1LBT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion T hat rormants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency namfu along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

I would like to thank the faculty members on my

thesis committee for their help and contributions

am especially grateful to Prof Joe E Pierce for his

continual advise and mor~l support

Mostly I would like to thank my husband withoutmiddot

whose understanding constant encouragement and proshy

fessional advise I could not have survived the entire

effort

I

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS iii

CHAPTERi r I INTRODUCTION 1

Language Justification for Study Statement of the Problem Delimitations of the Study

II THEORETICAL BACKGROUND 7

PhoneticsPhonemics Acoustic Theory FundamentalsHarmonics Acoustics vs Articulation Spectrograph

I I I METHODOLOGY bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull 1 5 I

Phoneme Identification Spectrograms

IV FINDINGS I 24

V SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 67

EIBLIOGRAPHY ~ bullbull _bullbull _ __ bull __ 690 __ bull _

Sources Sources

Cited Consulted

APPENDIX A 71

List of Words

APPENDIX B bull --- bull bull - bull bull bull bull bull bull I bull bull bull Linguistic Symbolization Used

73

CHAPTER I

INTRODUCTION

Language

Bahasa Indonesia the official name applied to the

Indonesian language is a member of the Malayo-Polyrresian

language family The term Bahasa Indonesia is often used

synonymously with modern Malay or Malay dialect (Uhlenbeck

1967) References to a similar form of this Malay based

language are found as early as the 16th cent~ry by traders

such as th~ Chinese the Hindu and the Arabs (Woodman 1955)

Words were added to the language known as Melaju Pasar or

Bazaar Malay as trade with foreigners increased (Woodman

1955) These foreign elements in Melaju Pasar formed the

essential differences between it and the Malay spoken on the

Ma~ay Peninsula (Woodman 1955) Bahasa Indonesia differs

little from the standard dialect of the Malay Peninsula and

daes so mainly in its relatively large and growing vocabulashy

ry borrowed from European and indigenous languages (Amerishy

can University 1970) Bahasa Indonesia is then an adaptashy

tion of Malay inasmuch as it has been changed by the origishy

nal regional languages and modern European languages (Alisshy

jahbana 1949)

2

Today Bahasa Indonesia is the official language of the

Republic of Indonesia It has been estimated that over 200I

region~l languages are spoken in this country of wide cul-

I tural diversity (Wo~dman 1955) When Indonesia beganto

I strive for independence from Dutch colonialists a common

language seemed eSsential in an effort to unify the nationI Indonesian political leaders desirous of revitalizing r th people br9ught (to bare) the most effective means of

organizing them in the greatest numbers (Alisjahbana 1949)

Attention was focused upon the Malay language which was the

lingua Franca for most of Southeast Asia Javanese was

rejected although it possessed a thousand-year-old literary

tradition and was the language of the largest ethnic group

in the islands (American University 1970) The Javanese

language has a fairly ~igid system of vo~abulary differshy

ences based on social class Thus Malay became the basis

of the national language At the 1928 conference of the

pertemuan Muda (Meeting of Youth) Malay was chosen to be

the basis of the national language (American University

1970) By 1930 then the term Malay Language was officshy

ially changed to the Indonesian language (Uhlenbeck 1967)

It became the language for scholarly endeavors and the langshy

uage of leaders and officials During the Japanese occupashy

tion in 1942 the language made further gains In an effort

to combat Dutch cultural influence it was made the compulshy

3

sory language uied in schools from elementary and up

Bahasa Indonesia became the official national language

when the Republic of Indonesia was farmed in 1945

Justification For Study

Phonemic descriptions of Bahasa Indonesia are almost

non-existent and very limited f from a linguistic point of

view Most descriptions of the sounds of Indonesian are

of a comparative nature i e Bahasa Indonesian sounds are

likened to sounds of modern Indo-European languages Echols

and Shadilys An Indonesian-English Dictionary describes

Indonesian sounds in relation to the similar sounds in

English For instance they argue that the e in the Indoshy

nesian word sen is like the e in the English word make n

only shorter Statements such as the aforementionedmay

be practical for most purposes but are not necessarily

linguistically sound and almost certainly inaccurate

Another deficiency which seems to be present in phonshy

emic analyses not only in Indonesian is the impressionistic

nature of these analyses When dealing with a lang~ag8

the linguist must attempt to remove all linguistic biases

and comparisons because phonetic details may escape the

ear of the analyst f especially in a foreign language upon

which he is likely to impose depending upon the degree of

his skill any of the few prejudices of his native phonemic

scale (Pulgram 1965) Even when the investigator does nat

4

I

rely on comparative methods of description he cannot compshy

letely remove all the sounds in his linguistic memory when

describing a new language He will invariably hear sounds

that are very similar to those he knows and may not be able

to discern certain minor although perhaps crucial differshy

ences Phonemic descriptions are most often of this impresshy

sionistic variety

Spectrographic analyses of the sounds of a language

provide an objective measure of the quality of the sounds

of a language Spectrographs record precise sound qualities

produced by a speaker particuiarly vowels This mode of

description will delete the impressions of the investigator

and will map precise quality for sounds in question what

shows on a spectrogram is an acous~ic reality whether the

analyst hears it or not (Pulgram 1965) It is these

precise sound qualities of Bahasa Iridonesian vowel phonemes

that this investigation will attempt to ascertain Instrushy

mentaltesting of hypotheses has been a part of scientific

study for many years but very little has been done to

date in linguistics (Pierce 1963) The acoustic specshy

trograph can provide definite answers as to the phonetic

quality of vowels

The science of phonemics developed out of the realizashy

tion that some phoneti6 features of a language differentiate

one word from another while others do not Edward Sapir

(1921) argues

5

Back of the purely objective system of sounds that is peculiar to a language and which can be arrived at only by a painstaking phonetic analysis there is -a more restricted inner or ideal system which perhaps equally unconscious as a system to the naive speaker can far more readily than the other be brought to his consciousness as a finished pattern a psychological mechanism The inner sound system overlaid though it may be by the mechanical or the irrelevant is a real important principle in the life of a language

Once it was accepted that language had a definite phonologshy

ical structure a method was devised to describe this undershy

lying system This method became the science of phonemics

The phonemic structure of a language represents the minimal

number of sound signals which make transmission of informashy

tion possible Spectrographic analyses of t~ese minimal

sound signals provide objective and empirical measurements

of the quality of these minimal sound features

Statement of the Problem

This investigation will determine the range of free

variation of Bahasa Indonesian vowel phonemes in a given

phonemic environment and types of conditioned variation

from one environment to another The nature and ra~ge of

the vowel quality for each phoneme will be determined by

spectrographic measurements

Delimitations of the Study

This study will only deal with Bahasa Indonesian

vowels sounds produced with vibration of the vocal cords

6

by unobstructed passage of air through the oral cavity

and not constricted enough to cause audible friction

Pei 1966) They will be the vowels found in monoshy

syllabic Indonesian wo~ds under primary stress and in a

consonant~vowel-cDnsonant pattern Each word will also

be part of a minimal pair ie every word must be conshy

trasted with another word in which only the medial vowel

is different andto which a different semantic meaning is

attached

CHAPTER II

THEORETICAL BACKGROUND

PhoneticsPhonemics

Phonetics is the branch of linguistics which deals

with the actual speech sounds of a language When dealing

with the phonetic level of linguistic analysis one describes

the sounds of a language in terms of articulation or acoustic

features In articulatory phonetics one describes sounds

in middotterms 9f manner of articulation ie whether it is a

stop fricat~ve etc point of articulation ie) bilabial

(be~ween the lips) dental etc or vowel quality ie

high-front-close (the highest part of the tongue-is very

high in the front of the mouth for producing this particular

sound) etc In acoustic phonetics sounds are described in

terms of the distributions of frequencies characteristic of

the sounds of a language The relationship generally acshy

cepted as existing between artic~latory and ~coustic phonetshy

ics is that certain articulations produce certain distinctive

patterns of frequency distributions It must be emphasized

at this point that both of the aforementioned types of deshy

scriptians deal with all human speech sounds not necessarily

those which perform a signalling function in a particular I

aspect of the language

I I

f

8

Distinctlve features are used to denote signalling

functions The label distinctive feature is used in the

literature to mean two quite different things Bloomfield

describes the categorization with examples which imply

that distinctive sound feature means any feature of the vocal

sound which when changed changes the meaning of a given

word eg pill and bill sin and sing etcri (Pierce 1965)

There Bloomfi~ld labels p as a distinctive sound feature

and b as a different sound feature Later Roman Jakobson

Gunnar M Fant and Morris Halle in their Preliminaries of

sectpeech Analysis take the phonemes of a language and break

them down into their component phonetic features some of

which are distinctive eg voicing in English b vs p

while others are not eg aspiration in English p~ in pin

as opposed to p in spin Anyone language code has a

finite set of distinctive features bullbullbull (Jakobson Fant and

Halle 1961) In English the feature of voicing in the b

of bill as opposed to the absence of voicing for the p

in pill is the phonetic feature which distinguishes these

two sounds A similar presence vs absence of aspiration

does not alter the meaning of any English utterance in fact

it is difficult to make English speakers aware of the fact

that aspiration is or is not present Implicit in this

theoretical approach is the concept that the variation in

human speech for the most part re~resents presence vs

9

1

absence of non-distinctive features of sound

One theoretical approach to linguistic structures

views the phoneme as concurrent bundles of distinctive

features (Jakobson Fant and Halle 1961) Each language

has a finite set of rules for grouping them (distinctive

features) into phQnemes (Jakobson Fant and Halle 1961)

Every phoneme in the language then is composed of a unique

set of distinctive features such that it is different from

any other phoneme by at least one of such distinctive feashy

tures This manner of linguistic signalling has important

implicat~ons toward phonemic analysis of sound systems As

previously mentioned a phoneme is a bundle of distinctive

features which when altered changes meaning In order

to verify whether a sound is a phoneme or not one must

show a word in which the replacement of at least one disti~c-

tive feature makes another word ie a minimal pair difshy

ferentiated by only a single distinctive feature and having

two distinct grammatical or semantical meanings

Phonemics the study of phonem~s is the level of lingushy

istic analysis which answers the question of how language

utilizes sound matter selecting certain of its elements and

adapting them for various ends The prima~y functions of

sound in a language is to distinguish one utterance from anshy

other in normal conversation Phonemic analysis as an opshy

eration examines a~ailable data in order to discover an unshy

derlying structure bullbullbull not an operation which forces a mass

1 0

of data into a structure (Pulgram 19~5) The nature of

each feature is of the essence Thus the composition of

each phoneme becomes of primary importance in a language

The phoneme can only be defined in reference to the larger

frame whi~h is the language of which it is a structured

feature (Pulgram 1965) It is the shortest stretch of

sound which serves a signalling function

Acoustic Theory

I Distinctive feature theory as previously describedI I seems to handle such phonemes s stops fricatives and

I nasals quite well eg the airflow out of the mouth is I

either stopped or it is allowed to escape On the other

1 hand vowels seem to be ranges of phonetic quality whichI

are extremely difficult if not impossible to distinguish

in terms of presence vs ab~~nce of distinctive features

Since this study will not be concerned with consonants but

only w~th vowels it is only necessary to discuss the acousshy

tic nature of vowel qualities from this point on

FundamentalsHarmonics

Vowel quality is determined by a combination of a fundashy

mental and its harmonics A vowel quality displayed on an

oscilloscope shows a very complex single wave form This

wave form is in reality the mathematical sum of a number

of simple wave forms or at least for theoretical purposes

1 1

can be treated as such These wave forms are generated

in the oral tract by the opening and closing of the glotshy

tis The fundamental wave is a sine wave with a frequency

equal to the number of times the glottis opens and closes

each second and an amplitude which is directly pro~ortion-

al to air pressure in the lungs Because of the nature

of sound waves a harmonic is generated at every multiple

of this fundamental eg if the fundamental is 100 cycles

per second then a harmonic is generated at 200 300

400 bullbullbull CO As soon as the complex wave leaves the vocal

chords harmoni6s are filtered out by the nature of the

tissue surrounding the oral tract as well as the cavities

in and adj o 1ning the oral tract The complex wave emerging

from the mouth is the mathematical sum of fundamental and

the harmonics which have not been filtered out by the oral

tract cf Martin Joos Acoustic Phonetics (1 948) chapshy

ters 1 and 2 for a fuller explanation of this process

Acoustics vs Articulation

In the last century far too much energy has b~en exshy

pended in attempts to relate acoustic features to specific

articulatory movements Bloch (1942) illustrates this by

stating qualities are identified by ear but in linguisshy

tic works they are traditionally defined in terms of their

assumed production by the vocal organs This type ofmiddotstudy

is misdirected because the only things that impinge on the

I I

- I

12

human ear are the harmonics which were not filtered out

The articulatory movements which cause the filtration ie

movement of the tongue from front to back creating a series

of filters each of which removes different harmonics

from the complex waves are irrelevant Pike (1943) argues

one should analyze and describe the sounds (or sound waves)

themselves rather than the movements ~roducing them

It has long been noted by acousticians that a variety

of articulatory movements remove the same harmonics and

r~sult in the production of very similar sounds Pierce

(1962) illustrates this by saying

As long as the formants are in their praper positions ie the proper frequencies are passed through the speech mechanism it does not matter whether the unwanted frequencies are filtered out by rounding the lips or moving the tongue to the back ThuQ when Holbrook and Carmody give one front-back position for the tongue for a given English vowel and IPA (International Pho~etic Alphabet) gives another it is quite probable that both are completely correct and that the formant shift is made by compensating for the lack of tongue movement in the speech of some speakers by additional lip rounding bullbullbullbull

Since the hearer of a stream of speech can hear 9nly those harmonics which emerge from the mouth as componshyents of the final complex wave the placement of the formant is of primary importance not the articulation which produced the sound

Therefore a study of the phonetic quality of vowels

demands an instrument which is capable of making an accurate

record of the presence or absence of all the harmonics

having sufficient amplitude to significantly alter the final

wave form The acoustic spectrograph is such an instrument

13

it was the first instrument to make large scale acoustic

a n a ly s e sapr act i c a I po s sibiIi t Y n ( Lad e fog ed 1 967 ) bull

Spectrograph

The acoustic spectrograph is a device ~hich records a

stream of speech 2~4 seconds or less in length This

recording is then fed into the analyzing part of the specshy

trograph where at each successive playing ne frequency

or rather one frequency band is lifted outof the total by

the variable filter (Pulgram 1965) A black ma~king is

made on a piece ofmiddot electro-sensitive paper each time there

is a harmonic present within the frequency band being anashy

lyzed Since the articulators are constantly moving and

changing the filtration characteristics of thevocal tract

the black markings ma~e by a stylus reflect the movements

of the articula~ors in a very broad sense More important

however it makes a precise record of the stimulus ie

the harmonics which reach the ear of the listener Dunn

(1950) says the vowels have asso~iated with them different

frequency regions in which the sound is more intense than

elsewhere in the spectrum The name formant has been apshy

plied to these regions

The next problem then is to relate the concentrations

of power mentioned above ie the formants to human pershy

ception of speech sounds The most widely utilized techshy

nique in this area is one devised by Martin Joos (1948)

~______________________________________~S___________________________________________________shy1

14

generally referred to as his 2 Formant Theory This techshy

nique represents the plotting of formant 1 and formant 2

in a specific wayan a particular chart cf Chart 1 on

p~ 23 This technique is clearly described by Ladefoged

(1967)

The relations between the formant structures of the vowels in a number of words can be conveniently represented by means of formant charts which show the frequency of the firs~ formant at a time in the word when the formant structure is changing at a minimum rate plotted against the frequency of the second formant at the same time

When making these kinds of plots a charting is derived of

vowels for any language which is remarkably like the tradishy

tional impressionistic vowel charts of the 19th century

Esner (1947) illustrated that if the frequency of the first

formant was plotted against the frequency of the second

formant it seemed to equal the relation between formant

frequency and the traditional vowel diagram

Basically this study will reproduce such vowel charts

for a number of examples of each sound in Bahasa Indonesia

Formant 1 will be platted against formant 2 for each vowel

phoneme in a variety of phonemic environments -The purpose

of this will be to determine the range of variation for

every vowel in each e~vironment as produced by a single native

speaker

CHAPTER III

METHODOLOGY

Phoneme Identification

In order to assess the phonetic quality of vowel phoshy

nemes one must first ascertain the number and relationshy

ship of sound contrasts in a language ie the phonemes

The visual representation of the actualization of the phoshy

neme ie the spectrogram can only be made on the basis

of a preceding decision of the linguist on the types and

number of phonemes in the l~nguage to be anaiyzed (Pulgram

1965)~ Phonemic analysis cannot be made with phonetic

data alone it must be made with phonetic data plus a sershy

ies of phonemic premises and procedures (Pike 1947) A

spectrogram conveys phonetic information which aids the

linguist in determining which phonetic features are consisshy

tently present in order to reach the most accurate phonetic

description

There are a variety of premises and procedures which

the investigator may utilize in order to discover the phoshy

nemic structure of a language Pike (1947) argues that the

investigator must have at hand observable native reaction

to native sounds andor know structural facts pertaining to

the phonetic nature of the sounds and their distribution

As stated before a phoneme is a bundle of sound f~atures

1

j

16

which when substituted for another bundle creates a difshy

ference in meaning Since the creation of a different morshy

pheme is the result of the substitution of a different sound

feature these sound features are said to be phonemes

A pair of words in which the first word is the same as the second except for the fact that one segment is replaced by a different but phonetic~lly similar segment in the second word constitutes proof that the two similar segments are phonemically distinct~ bullbullbull Word pairs of this type are said to be MINIMALshyLY DIFFERENJ because no smaller difference in the language can make a differ~nce in meahing in words (Pike 1947)

Hence minimal pairs of words were used to find phonemes

Minimal~y different word pairs prove to be the beginners

single most important tool for the analysis of phonemic difshy

ferences (Pike 1947)

Thus Echols and Shadilys An Indonesian-English Dicshy

tionarv (1968) was ut~lized to find three-phoneme words

containing two consonant sounds with a vowel in medial poshy

sition The process was simply to go through all the words

beginning with consonants and find minimally different t~ree

phoneme words This was done on a purely anthr~poscopic

basis on the part of the investigator If a different letshy

ter was employed to distinguish a different meaning it was

assumed to be a different phoneme The following ~ord pairs

and their meanings are examples of the words found in the

dictionary

ban--tire bin--son of

das-- a shot dos--small box carton

I

1 7

pal--pole pel--field

rang--rank position ring--ring

teh--tea toh--yet nevertheless

After having obtained the words from the dictionary

a native informant was called upon to verify ~he differshy

ance in meaning in the minimal pairs and to pronounce

them so that ~hey could be phonetically transcribed in

al1 impressionistic manner The informant employed was Kok

Djen Su a student at Portland State University from Yogshy

jakartai Indonesia He has been a student in the United

States for approximately two years and speaks broken al shy

though very understandable English Mr Su was horn to Mr

and Mrs Su Hendry Su who both speak Bahasa Indonesia Jashy

vanese and a small amount of Chinese Since his birth the

informant was exposed to a mixture of Javanese and Bahasa

Indonesia but has employed the national language of Indoshy

nesia since the age of three at school His bilingual upshy

bringing it seems to the author does not craate a subshy

stantial difference in the competence of Mr Su in Bahasa

Indonesia In fact he was able to distinguish the proshy

nunciation Qf words in both Javanese and in Bahasa Indoshy

nesia The utilization of one informant deletes any reshy

gional variation or individual variation between informshy

ants Since here we are attempting to ascertain the relashy

tive range of phonetic quality of vowel phonemes in Bahashy

sa Indonesia the informants bilingualism ahould cause

none or very few phonetic distortions

After-having verified the difference in meaning of

the word pairs Kok Djen ~u pronounced the word The

following impressionistic version of the Ihdonesian voshy

wel system was described

front central back

high

mid 1 I

I I low j

i I I

I

u-

E 0

A

1 Spectrograms

The phonemic entities symbolized in the preceding

section represent range-units of phonetic quality The

symbols and their position on the chart are based on the

aural perceptions of the investigator The purpose of the

spectrographic analysis of this data is to determine as

accurately as possible the actual phonetic range represenshy

ted by each of thephonemic symbols

I

i

1 9

In order to make spectrograms from which meani~gful

conclusions can be drawn one must have a native informant

of the language to be studied Spectrograms were made of

the speech of Mr Su the informant described earlier

In order to conserve the time of the informant a

sample of three-phoneme words were recorded The three-

phoneme words begin and end with consonants ahd contain a

vowel in medial position The list appears in Appendix A

The list of words was specifically selec~ed to eliminate

in so far as possible all variatiqn other than that which

is specifically caused by the preceding and following consoshy

nants This is true because by utilizing a single informant

the influence of dialects both regional and social are eshy

liminated and by utilizing one sy~lable words under primary

1stress sequential influences such as the Markov Process

are eliminated since there is no sequence beyond one phoshy

neme preceding and following the vowel This being the case

one should be able to derive from a series of spectrograms

of those vowels both the range of free variation and the

specific influence of each particular consonant on the voshy

weI quality of each medial phoneme

The n~xt st~p in the procedure was to play the tape-

recordings into the spectrograph two or three wo~ds at a

1The Markoy Process is a mechanical way of handling enshytropy in sequential operations IQ linguistics this is stashyted in terms ofthe probability of the occurrence of a parshyticular phoneme morpheme etc in a precise sequence

20

time The machine can handle 24 seconds of speech on one

spectrogram thus two or three words could be analyzed at

the same time as one with no loss in quality or precision

Unfortunately the recordings had to be played into a

microphone which picks up some background noise but by

placing the microp~one of the spectrograph very close to

the loudspeaker of the tape recorder and turning the volume

up slightly this background was eliminated for all pracshy

tical purposes middotIt would have been better to have had a

direct connection between the recordar and the spectrograph

but unfortunately no such devce was available Background

noise shows up as very small specks scattered more or less

at random and unless the volume of such noise is exceedshy

ingly strong does not interfere with the reading of the

spectrograms

Once the machine had completed the analys~s and produced

the graphic record of the list of words a frequency measur~

ing device was produced by the machine cf example below

1 11amp II~ill c=

- n- HE to

11r -shy

bull b mmiddot 1 bull bull L

-

gIl F Jamp u

n _ If

bull III

21

This measuring device is in reality a spectrogram with horishy

zontal markings The first line on the chart represents a

frequency of 0 hertz (hz) Each line above the first repshy

resents a multiple of 500 hz The device is used to locate

th~ center of formants 1 and 2 Since it is graduated in

500 hz it is necessary to interpolate when the center ofmiddot

power for a particular formant falls between two of these

lines This is done by dividing the area between the two

lines in half then dividing one of the halves in half which

gives a range of 125 hz within which the measurement falls

and an estimate is made of the precise measurement within

the 125 hz range This should give formant positions with

an accuraci of greater than plusmn25 hz

When visual location of the formant centers becprnes

difficult a section of the formant can be made cf exshy

ample below Such difficulties with visual location usually

arise when two weak formants overlap Such overlapping

produc~s what appears to the naked eye to be a band of modeshy

rately dark grey bands The sectioner is a built in mech-

IshyfL__---

tete we tt

~

I

1 I

22

anism capable of handling such problems In the preceding

I example the amplitude of each harmonic is proportional

to the length of the line representing that harmonic I

This makes it possible to locate formant centers when vi-

I sual location is difficult

The measurements were then transferred to formant

charts cf Chart 1 on the following page

6

23

CHART I

~

t

1+

t5

1amp

Ie

z~ 2t 2p 16 12 la 8 Iii

I ~

~

I S

l I

I I

~

V V

V T

l( FORMANT V CHART

Vi ~ CcdiOrate4 ift luutdnM I V ~ cycle ~ concf

V 10 eeentl~rsI~ V

V U 5millimctcrs - I $milton

2 zk2 lis ty

I

FOlWAlfT CHART

Placing a single point on this cha-t is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one fOrrUlt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant atmiddotthe frequency named along the top or bottom edge

ex Martin Joos~ Acoustic Phonetics (1948)

CHAPTER IV

FINDINGS

The data provided by the preceding methodology conshy

sisted of a series of scatter patterns on the vowel charts

Each of the dots within the pattern represented one occurshy

rence of a particular vowel To determine the range ofmiddot each

phoneme f the most divergent points in each pattern were con-

nected by a line These lines then circumscribe an area

which included the range of all the vowels in the sample

recognized ~y the informantmiddotas a particular phoneme

Verbal descriptions the actual charts of the phonemes

and the spectrograms utilized willbe found on the followshy

ing pages

25

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 1 range~ on the

vowel chart in a broad scattering from 300-500 hz for forshy

mant 1 and 1500-2100 hz for formant 2

CHART II

1

lid

13

bull

~

It

iA

Ml

ztr Zit zp 1 S lIZ middot1 I a r 8 6

I

f

I I

Ii 3

[7l I I V 1 I

) ~I I i I bull

V I I i bull r J

I V t I I I I I

i tt I

Kl7 I I I iI ~

I I I I I I I I I i I

I I I i I f I ltII

I I l7 I VI

I [7 1

1 I I I Va FORMANTc7 CHART

I

I I I I 173 CaEiIw-atd icw~[7 rf ltfer C0ItdI I I

j I I I i 7 10 e centlCMta1 oct4v

I V 5miU~ bull itonI

r I f 711 t14 j I I I Ik IV

FoiUlAhT CHRT

Placing asinge point on this chart is an assertion that fortcants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at tn(l frequerlcy nameu Slong the right or eft cdampe the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

26

l 1I I - -~

I I iI I

I

[bIs] [bIn]

lt-- -_- -1I

lt i

1 ~ i1_ -shy Ir ~ tmiddotmiddot lt

-- - - ---~--- - - - ----- --

-i -_~ ~ shyI 1

i I I

I I bullbullq_-

I ~~~-~--shyr ~~~~~ -~- I------------------------shy

-----I

[dIm] [sIh]

27

I -[blr]

i1 1 I I

i Ii I

I i I I

ii ___ -J

rmiddot I i

I 1 j

-~ ~~~ ~-~IIlIr~~~

I

1 ____~~l_~~--=~ _ ~--~~~~~~~~~- -

51 hI$ PiiB PD~ii~i

-~ - -- -- ----- ~------- - --- _-- - _ - shy [rIll) [klr]

28

1 I I I

---~S~ -~~~fi~ ~~~~~-~

~l_ middot~ ___

[klk]

I I I

r [dlk]

29

-------- --

-~- shy~--I~~

[tIll]

30

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lEI ranged on the

vowel chart in a thin oval shaped distribution from 400-625

hz for formant 1 and from 1400-2000 hz for formant 2

CHART III

lEI

i

I

1 I

1

1middot

II~~ 5 I~ I lOa I ~--~~~I-+--+-4-+--+---+--++-+-+-+-+--r--t-t--r--t--r--1

I

I I I I

t I

4

I I 1 I ~ I I I I

I t I ~

I I ~

-r--- r--- I V~~~-r~+-+-~~~+-+-~~~~~~~--T-~-r~-r~-r~-T---T--r~

V~~~++4-~~~-4-+-+~~~~~+-~-T-rV~7

~iA~~~~~I+-~~~~~I--~~~-r~~~~~8 FORMANT HHHH~~r+~~-r~+-~+-~I~-I~~rl7V CHART

I II 11I I V9 CaZiLrww 1ft huncirccLJ

-+-f-+-II-f-+-+-+-+--+-+--+--+----+-+--+-1--t-+-1---t---t--7 rtf eye 04 ~ I 11 V pq-+-+-I~-+--i--+I-t-t--+~i-I---t--+--tr -t--t-Tj-ri~middotltJ ecentimeters 1octGy

I V 5miU~ - aemiton ~~~~I~~+-~~l~-~-T~I~~~r~

t i lt~ I I IS I I liV

FolUlAn C1LBT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion T hat rormants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency namfu along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS iii

CHAPTERi r I INTRODUCTION 1

Language Justification for Study Statement of the Problem Delimitations of the Study

II THEORETICAL BACKGROUND 7

PhoneticsPhonemics Acoustic Theory FundamentalsHarmonics Acoustics vs Articulation Spectrograph

I I I METHODOLOGY bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull bull 1 5 I

Phoneme Identification Spectrograms

IV FINDINGS I 24

V SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 67

EIBLIOGRAPHY ~ bullbull _bullbull _ __ bull __ 690 __ bull _

Sources Sources

Cited Consulted

APPENDIX A 71

List of Words

APPENDIX B bull --- bull bull - bull bull bull bull bull bull I bull bull bull Linguistic Symbolization Used

73

CHAPTER I

INTRODUCTION

Language

Bahasa Indonesia the official name applied to the

Indonesian language is a member of the Malayo-Polyrresian

language family The term Bahasa Indonesia is often used

synonymously with modern Malay or Malay dialect (Uhlenbeck

1967) References to a similar form of this Malay based

language are found as early as the 16th cent~ry by traders

such as th~ Chinese the Hindu and the Arabs (Woodman 1955)

Words were added to the language known as Melaju Pasar or

Bazaar Malay as trade with foreigners increased (Woodman

1955) These foreign elements in Melaju Pasar formed the

essential differences between it and the Malay spoken on the

Ma~ay Peninsula (Woodman 1955) Bahasa Indonesia differs

little from the standard dialect of the Malay Peninsula and

daes so mainly in its relatively large and growing vocabulashy

ry borrowed from European and indigenous languages (Amerishy

can University 1970) Bahasa Indonesia is then an adaptashy

tion of Malay inasmuch as it has been changed by the origishy

nal regional languages and modern European languages (Alisshy

jahbana 1949)

2

Today Bahasa Indonesia is the official language of the

Republic of Indonesia It has been estimated that over 200I

region~l languages are spoken in this country of wide cul-

I tural diversity (Wo~dman 1955) When Indonesia beganto

I strive for independence from Dutch colonialists a common

language seemed eSsential in an effort to unify the nationI Indonesian political leaders desirous of revitalizing r th people br9ught (to bare) the most effective means of

organizing them in the greatest numbers (Alisjahbana 1949)

Attention was focused upon the Malay language which was the

lingua Franca for most of Southeast Asia Javanese was

rejected although it possessed a thousand-year-old literary

tradition and was the language of the largest ethnic group

in the islands (American University 1970) The Javanese

language has a fairly ~igid system of vo~abulary differshy

ences based on social class Thus Malay became the basis

of the national language At the 1928 conference of the

pertemuan Muda (Meeting of Youth) Malay was chosen to be

the basis of the national language (American University

1970) By 1930 then the term Malay Language was officshy

ially changed to the Indonesian language (Uhlenbeck 1967)

It became the language for scholarly endeavors and the langshy

uage of leaders and officials During the Japanese occupashy

tion in 1942 the language made further gains In an effort

to combat Dutch cultural influence it was made the compulshy

3

sory language uied in schools from elementary and up

Bahasa Indonesia became the official national language

when the Republic of Indonesia was farmed in 1945

Justification For Study

Phonemic descriptions of Bahasa Indonesia are almost

non-existent and very limited f from a linguistic point of

view Most descriptions of the sounds of Indonesian are

of a comparative nature i e Bahasa Indonesian sounds are

likened to sounds of modern Indo-European languages Echols

and Shadilys An Indonesian-English Dictionary describes

Indonesian sounds in relation to the similar sounds in

English For instance they argue that the e in the Indoshy

nesian word sen is like the e in the English word make n

only shorter Statements such as the aforementionedmay

be practical for most purposes but are not necessarily

linguistically sound and almost certainly inaccurate

Another deficiency which seems to be present in phonshy

emic analyses not only in Indonesian is the impressionistic

nature of these analyses When dealing with a lang~ag8

the linguist must attempt to remove all linguistic biases

and comparisons because phonetic details may escape the

ear of the analyst f especially in a foreign language upon

which he is likely to impose depending upon the degree of

his skill any of the few prejudices of his native phonemic

scale (Pulgram 1965) Even when the investigator does nat

4

I

rely on comparative methods of description he cannot compshy

letely remove all the sounds in his linguistic memory when

describing a new language He will invariably hear sounds

that are very similar to those he knows and may not be able

to discern certain minor although perhaps crucial differshy

ences Phonemic descriptions are most often of this impresshy

sionistic variety

Spectrographic analyses of the sounds of a language

provide an objective measure of the quality of the sounds

of a language Spectrographs record precise sound qualities

produced by a speaker particuiarly vowels This mode of

description will delete the impressions of the investigator

and will map precise quality for sounds in question what

shows on a spectrogram is an acous~ic reality whether the

analyst hears it or not (Pulgram 1965) It is these

precise sound qualities of Bahasa Iridonesian vowel phonemes

that this investigation will attempt to ascertain Instrushy

mentaltesting of hypotheses has been a part of scientific

study for many years but very little has been done to

date in linguistics (Pierce 1963) The acoustic specshy

trograph can provide definite answers as to the phonetic

quality of vowels

The science of phonemics developed out of the realizashy

tion that some phoneti6 features of a language differentiate

one word from another while others do not Edward Sapir

(1921) argues

5

Back of the purely objective system of sounds that is peculiar to a language and which can be arrived at only by a painstaking phonetic analysis there is -a more restricted inner or ideal system which perhaps equally unconscious as a system to the naive speaker can far more readily than the other be brought to his consciousness as a finished pattern a psychological mechanism The inner sound system overlaid though it may be by the mechanical or the irrelevant is a real important principle in the life of a language

Once it was accepted that language had a definite phonologshy

ical structure a method was devised to describe this undershy

lying system This method became the science of phonemics

The phonemic structure of a language represents the minimal

number of sound signals which make transmission of informashy

tion possible Spectrographic analyses of t~ese minimal

sound signals provide objective and empirical measurements

of the quality of these minimal sound features

Statement of the Problem

This investigation will determine the range of free

variation of Bahasa Indonesian vowel phonemes in a given

phonemic environment and types of conditioned variation

from one environment to another The nature and ra~ge of

the vowel quality for each phoneme will be determined by

spectrographic measurements

Delimitations of the Study

This study will only deal with Bahasa Indonesian

vowels sounds produced with vibration of the vocal cords

6

by unobstructed passage of air through the oral cavity

and not constricted enough to cause audible friction

Pei 1966) They will be the vowels found in monoshy

syllabic Indonesian wo~ds under primary stress and in a

consonant~vowel-cDnsonant pattern Each word will also

be part of a minimal pair ie every word must be conshy

trasted with another word in which only the medial vowel

is different andto which a different semantic meaning is

attached

CHAPTER II

THEORETICAL BACKGROUND

PhoneticsPhonemics

Phonetics is the branch of linguistics which deals

with the actual speech sounds of a language When dealing

with the phonetic level of linguistic analysis one describes

the sounds of a language in terms of articulation or acoustic

features In articulatory phonetics one describes sounds

in middotterms 9f manner of articulation ie whether it is a

stop fricat~ve etc point of articulation ie) bilabial

(be~ween the lips) dental etc or vowel quality ie

high-front-close (the highest part of the tongue-is very

high in the front of the mouth for producing this particular

sound) etc In acoustic phonetics sounds are described in

terms of the distributions of frequencies characteristic of

the sounds of a language The relationship generally acshy

cepted as existing between artic~latory and ~coustic phonetshy

ics is that certain articulations produce certain distinctive

patterns of frequency distributions It must be emphasized

at this point that both of the aforementioned types of deshy

scriptians deal with all human speech sounds not necessarily

those which perform a signalling function in a particular I

aspect of the language

I I

f

8

Distinctlve features are used to denote signalling

functions The label distinctive feature is used in the

literature to mean two quite different things Bloomfield

describes the categorization with examples which imply

that distinctive sound feature means any feature of the vocal

sound which when changed changes the meaning of a given

word eg pill and bill sin and sing etcri (Pierce 1965)

There Bloomfi~ld labels p as a distinctive sound feature

and b as a different sound feature Later Roman Jakobson

Gunnar M Fant and Morris Halle in their Preliminaries of

sectpeech Analysis take the phonemes of a language and break

them down into their component phonetic features some of

which are distinctive eg voicing in English b vs p

while others are not eg aspiration in English p~ in pin

as opposed to p in spin Anyone language code has a

finite set of distinctive features bullbullbull (Jakobson Fant and

Halle 1961) In English the feature of voicing in the b

of bill as opposed to the absence of voicing for the p

in pill is the phonetic feature which distinguishes these

two sounds A similar presence vs absence of aspiration

does not alter the meaning of any English utterance in fact

it is difficult to make English speakers aware of the fact

that aspiration is or is not present Implicit in this

theoretical approach is the concept that the variation in

human speech for the most part re~resents presence vs

9

1

absence of non-distinctive features of sound

One theoretical approach to linguistic structures

views the phoneme as concurrent bundles of distinctive

features (Jakobson Fant and Halle 1961) Each language

has a finite set of rules for grouping them (distinctive

features) into phQnemes (Jakobson Fant and Halle 1961)

Every phoneme in the language then is composed of a unique

set of distinctive features such that it is different from

any other phoneme by at least one of such distinctive feashy

tures This manner of linguistic signalling has important

implicat~ons toward phonemic analysis of sound systems As

previously mentioned a phoneme is a bundle of distinctive

features which when altered changes meaning In order

to verify whether a sound is a phoneme or not one must

show a word in which the replacement of at least one disti~c-

tive feature makes another word ie a minimal pair difshy

ferentiated by only a single distinctive feature and having

two distinct grammatical or semantical meanings

Phonemics the study of phonem~s is the level of lingushy

istic analysis which answers the question of how language

utilizes sound matter selecting certain of its elements and

adapting them for various ends The prima~y functions of

sound in a language is to distinguish one utterance from anshy

other in normal conversation Phonemic analysis as an opshy

eration examines a~ailable data in order to discover an unshy

derlying structure bullbullbull not an operation which forces a mass

1 0

of data into a structure (Pulgram 19~5) The nature of

each feature is of the essence Thus the composition of

each phoneme becomes of primary importance in a language

The phoneme can only be defined in reference to the larger

frame whi~h is the language of which it is a structured

feature (Pulgram 1965) It is the shortest stretch of

sound which serves a signalling function

Acoustic Theory

I Distinctive feature theory as previously describedI I seems to handle such phonemes s stops fricatives and

I nasals quite well eg the airflow out of the mouth is I

either stopped or it is allowed to escape On the other

1 hand vowels seem to be ranges of phonetic quality whichI

are extremely difficult if not impossible to distinguish

in terms of presence vs ab~~nce of distinctive features

Since this study will not be concerned with consonants but

only w~th vowels it is only necessary to discuss the acousshy

tic nature of vowel qualities from this point on

FundamentalsHarmonics

Vowel quality is determined by a combination of a fundashy

mental and its harmonics A vowel quality displayed on an

oscilloscope shows a very complex single wave form This

wave form is in reality the mathematical sum of a number

of simple wave forms or at least for theoretical purposes

1 1

can be treated as such These wave forms are generated

in the oral tract by the opening and closing of the glotshy

tis The fundamental wave is a sine wave with a frequency

equal to the number of times the glottis opens and closes

each second and an amplitude which is directly pro~ortion-

al to air pressure in the lungs Because of the nature

of sound waves a harmonic is generated at every multiple

of this fundamental eg if the fundamental is 100 cycles

per second then a harmonic is generated at 200 300

400 bullbullbull CO As soon as the complex wave leaves the vocal

chords harmoni6s are filtered out by the nature of the

tissue surrounding the oral tract as well as the cavities

in and adj o 1ning the oral tract The complex wave emerging

from the mouth is the mathematical sum of fundamental and

the harmonics which have not been filtered out by the oral

tract cf Martin Joos Acoustic Phonetics (1 948) chapshy

ters 1 and 2 for a fuller explanation of this process

Acoustics vs Articulation

In the last century far too much energy has b~en exshy

pended in attempts to relate acoustic features to specific

articulatory movements Bloch (1942) illustrates this by

stating qualities are identified by ear but in linguisshy

tic works they are traditionally defined in terms of their

assumed production by the vocal organs This type ofmiddotstudy

is misdirected because the only things that impinge on the

I I

- I

12

human ear are the harmonics which were not filtered out

The articulatory movements which cause the filtration ie

movement of the tongue from front to back creating a series

of filters each of which removes different harmonics

from the complex waves are irrelevant Pike (1943) argues

one should analyze and describe the sounds (or sound waves)

themselves rather than the movements ~roducing them

It has long been noted by acousticians that a variety

of articulatory movements remove the same harmonics and

r~sult in the production of very similar sounds Pierce

(1962) illustrates this by saying

As long as the formants are in their praper positions ie the proper frequencies are passed through the speech mechanism it does not matter whether the unwanted frequencies are filtered out by rounding the lips or moving the tongue to the back ThuQ when Holbrook and Carmody give one front-back position for the tongue for a given English vowel and IPA (International Pho~etic Alphabet) gives another it is quite probable that both are completely correct and that the formant shift is made by compensating for the lack of tongue movement in the speech of some speakers by additional lip rounding bullbullbullbull

Since the hearer of a stream of speech can hear 9nly those harmonics which emerge from the mouth as componshyents of the final complex wave the placement of the formant is of primary importance not the articulation which produced the sound

Therefore a study of the phonetic quality of vowels

demands an instrument which is capable of making an accurate

record of the presence or absence of all the harmonics

having sufficient amplitude to significantly alter the final

wave form The acoustic spectrograph is such an instrument

13

it was the first instrument to make large scale acoustic

a n a ly s e sapr act i c a I po s sibiIi t Y n ( Lad e fog ed 1 967 ) bull

Spectrograph

The acoustic spectrograph is a device ~hich records a

stream of speech 2~4 seconds or less in length This

recording is then fed into the analyzing part of the specshy

trograph where at each successive playing ne frequency

or rather one frequency band is lifted outof the total by

the variable filter (Pulgram 1965) A black ma~king is

made on a piece ofmiddot electro-sensitive paper each time there

is a harmonic present within the frequency band being anashy

lyzed Since the articulators are constantly moving and

changing the filtration characteristics of thevocal tract

the black markings ma~e by a stylus reflect the movements

of the articula~ors in a very broad sense More important

however it makes a precise record of the stimulus ie

the harmonics which reach the ear of the listener Dunn

(1950) says the vowels have asso~iated with them different

frequency regions in which the sound is more intense than

elsewhere in the spectrum The name formant has been apshy

plied to these regions

The next problem then is to relate the concentrations

of power mentioned above ie the formants to human pershy

ception of speech sounds The most widely utilized techshy

nique in this area is one devised by Martin Joos (1948)

~______________________________________~S___________________________________________________shy1

14

generally referred to as his 2 Formant Theory This techshy

nique represents the plotting of formant 1 and formant 2

in a specific wayan a particular chart cf Chart 1 on

p~ 23 This technique is clearly described by Ladefoged

(1967)

The relations between the formant structures of the vowels in a number of words can be conveniently represented by means of formant charts which show the frequency of the firs~ formant at a time in the word when the formant structure is changing at a minimum rate plotted against the frequency of the second formant at the same time

When making these kinds of plots a charting is derived of

vowels for any language which is remarkably like the tradishy

tional impressionistic vowel charts of the 19th century

Esner (1947) illustrated that if the frequency of the first

formant was plotted against the frequency of the second

formant it seemed to equal the relation between formant

frequency and the traditional vowel diagram

Basically this study will reproduce such vowel charts

for a number of examples of each sound in Bahasa Indonesia

Formant 1 will be platted against formant 2 for each vowel

phoneme in a variety of phonemic environments -The purpose

of this will be to determine the range of variation for

every vowel in each e~vironment as produced by a single native

speaker

CHAPTER III

METHODOLOGY

Phoneme Identification

In order to assess the phonetic quality of vowel phoshy

nemes one must first ascertain the number and relationshy

ship of sound contrasts in a language ie the phonemes

The visual representation of the actualization of the phoshy

neme ie the spectrogram can only be made on the basis

of a preceding decision of the linguist on the types and

number of phonemes in the l~nguage to be anaiyzed (Pulgram

1965)~ Phonemic analysis cannot be made with phonetic

data alone it must be made with phonetic data plus a sershy

ies of phonemic premises and procedures (Pike 1947) A

spectrogram conveys phonetic information which aids the

linguist in determining which phonetic features are consisshy

tently present in order to reach the most accurate phonetic

description

There are a variety of premises and procedures which

the investigator may utilize in order to discover the phoshy

nemic structure of a language Pike (1947) argues that the

investigator must have at hand observable native reaction

to native sounds andor know structural facts pertaining to

the phonetic nature of the sounds and their distribution

As stated before a phoneme is a bundle of sound f~atures

1

j

16

which when substituted for another bundle creates a difshy

ference in meaning Since the creation of a different morshy

pheme is the result of the substitution of a different sound

feature these sound features are said to be phonemes

A pair of words in which the first word is the same as the second except for the fact that one segment is replaced by a different but phonetic~lly similar segment in the second word constitutes proof that the two similar segments are phonemically distinct~ bullbullbull Word pairs of this type are said to be MINIMALshyLY DIFFERENJ because no smaller difference in the language can make a differ~nce in meahing in words (Pike 1947)

Hence minimal pairs of words were used to find phonemes

Minimal~y different word pairs prove to be the beginners

single most important tool for the analysis of phonemic difshy

ferences (Pike 1947)

Thus Echols and Shadilys An Indonesian-English Dicshy

tionarv (1968) was ut~lized to find three-phoneme words

containing two consonant sounds with a vowel in medial poshy

sition The process was simply to go through all the words

beginning with consonants and find minimally different t~ree

phoneme words This was done on a purely anthr~poscopic

basis on the part of the investigator If a different letshy

ter was employed to distinguish a different meaning it was

assumed to be a different phoneme The following ~ord pairs

and their meanings are examples of the words found in the

dictionary

ban--tire bin--son of

das-- a shot dos--small box carton

I

1 7

pal--pole pel--field

rang--rank position ring--ring

teh--tea toh--yet nevertheless

After having obtained the words from the dictionary

a native informant was called upon to verify ~he differshy

ance in meaning in the minimal pairs and to pronounce

them so that ~hey could be phonetically transcribed in

al1 impressionistic manner The informant employed was Kok

Djen Su a student at Portland State University from Yogshy

jakartai Indonesia He has been a student in the United

States for approximately two years and speaks broken al shy

though very understandable English Mr Su was horn to Mr

and Mrs Su Hendry Su who both speak Bahasa Indonesia Jashy

vanese and a small amount of Chinese Since his birth the

informant was exposed to a mixture of Javanese and Bahasa

Indonesia but has employed the national language of Indoshy

nesia since the age of three at school His bilingual upshy

bringing it seems to the author does not craate a subshy

stantial difference in the competence of Mr Su in Bahasa

Indonesia In fact he was able to distinguish the proshy

nunciation Qf words in both Javanese and in Bahasa Indoshy

nesia The utilization of one informant deletes any reshy

gional variation or individual variation between informshy

ants Since here we are attempting to ascertain the relashy

tive range of phonetic quality of vowel phonemes in Bahashy

sa Indonesia the informants bilingualism ahould cause

none or very few phonetic distortions

After-having verified the difference in meaning of

the word pairs Kok Djen ~u pronounced the word The

following impressionistic version of the Ihdonesian voshy

wel system was described

front central back

high

mid 1 I

I I low j

i I I

I

u-

E 0

A

1 Spectrograms

The phonemic entities symbolized in the preceding

section represent range-units of phonetic quality The

symbols and their position on the chart are based on the

aural perceptions of the investigator The purpose of the

spectrographic analysis of this data is to determine as

accurately as possible the actual phonetic range represenshy

ted by each of thephonemic symbols

I

i

1 9

In order to make spectrograms from which meani~gful

conclusions can be drawn one must have a native informant

of the language to be studied Spectrograms were made of

the speech of Mr Su the informant described earlier

In order to conserve the time of the informant a

sample of three-phoneme words were recorded The three-

phoneme words begin and end with consonants ahd contain a

vowel in medial position The list appears in Appendix A

The list of words was specifically selec~ed to eliminate

in so far as possible all variatiqn other than that which

is specifically caused by the preceding and following consoshy

nants This is true because by utilizing a single informant

the influence of dialects both regional and social are eshy

liminated and by utilizing one sy~lable words under primary

1stress sequential influences such as the Markov Process

are eliminated since there is no sequence beyond one phoshy

neme preceding and following the vowel This being the case

one should be able to derive from a series of spectrograms

of those vowels both the range of free variation and the

specific influence of each particular consonant on the voshy

weI quality of each medial phoneme

The n~xt st~p in the procedure was to play the tape-

recordings into the spectrograph two or three wo~ds at a

1The Markoy Process is a mechanical way of handling enshytropy in sequential operations IQ linguistics this is stashyted in terms ofthe probability of the occurrence of a parshyticular phoneme morpheme etc in a precise sequence

20

time The machine can handle 24 seconds of speech on one

spectrogram thus two or three words could be analyzed at

the same time as one with no loss in quality or precision

Unfortunately the recordings had to be played into a

microphone which picks up some background noise but by

placing the microp~one of the spectrograph very close to

the loudspeaker of the tape recorder and turning the volume

up slightly this background was eliminated for all pracshy

tical purposes middotIt would have been better to have had a

direct connection between the recordar and the spectrograph

but unfortunately no such devce was available Background

noise shows up as very small specks scattered more or less

at random and unless the volume of such noise is exceedshy

ingly strong does not interfere with the reading of the

spectrograms

Once the machine had completed the analys~s and produced

the graphic record of the list of words a frequency measur~

ing device was produced by the machine cf example below

1 11amp II~ill c=

- n- HE to

11r -shy

bull b mmiddot 1 bull bull L

-

gIl F Jamp u

n _ If

bull III

21

This measuring device is in reality a spectrogram with horishy

zontal markings The first line on the chart represents a

frequency of 0 hertz (hz) Each line above the first repshy

resents a multiple of 500 hz The device is used to locate

th~ center of formants 1 and 2 Since it is graduated in

500 hz it is necessary to interpolate when the center ofmiddot

power for a particular formant falls between two of these

lines This is done by dividing the area between the two

lines in half then dividing one of the halves in half which

gives a range of 125 hz within which the measurement falls

and an estimate is made of the precise measurement within

the 125 hz range This should give formant positions with

an accuraci of greater than plusmn25 hz

When visual location of the formant centers becprnes

difficult a section of the formant can be made cf exshy

ample below Such difficulties with visual location usually

arise when two weak formants overlap Such overlapping

produc~s what appears to the naked eye to be a band of modeshy

rately dark grey bands The sectioner is a built in mech-

IshyfL__---

tete we tt

~

I

1 I

22

anism capable of handling such problems In the preceding

I example the amplitude of each harmonic is proportional

to the length of the line representing that harmonic I

This makes it possible to locate formant centers when vi-

I sual location is difficult

The measurements were then transferred to formant

charts cf Chart 1 on the following page

6

23

CHART I

~

t

1+

t5

1amp

Ie

z~ 2t 2p 16 12 la 8 Iii

I ~

~

I S

l I

I I

~

V V

V T

l( FORMANT V CHART

Vi ~ CcdiOrate4 ift luutdnM I V ~ cycle ~ concf

V 10 eeentl~rsI~ V

V U 5millimctcrs - I $milton

2 zk2 lis ty

I

FOlWAlfT CHART

Placing a single point on this cha-t is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one fOrrUlt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant atmiddotthe frequency named along the top or bottom edge

ex Martin Joos~ Acoustic Phonetics (1948)

CHAPTER IV

FINDINGS

The data provided by the preceding methodology conshy

sisted of a series of scatter patterns on the vowel charts

Each of the dots within the pattern represented one occurshy

rence of a particular vowel To determine the range ofmiddot each

phoneme f the most divergent points in each pattern were con-

nected by a line These lines then circumscribe an area

which included the range of all the vowels in the sample

recognized ~y the informantmiddotas a particular phoneme

Verbal descriptions the actual charts of the phonemes

and the spectrograms utilized willbe found on the followshy

ing pages

25

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 1 range~ on the

vowel chart in a broad scattering from 300-500 hz for forshy

mant 1 and 1500-2100 hz for formant 2

CHART II

1

lid

13

bull

~

It

iA

Ml

ztr Zit zp 1 S lIZ middot1 I a r 8 6

I

f

I I

Ii 3

[7l I I V 1 I

) ~I I i I bull

V I I i bull r J

I V t I I I I I

i tt I

Kl7 I I I iI ~

I I I I I I I I I i I

I I I i I f I ltII

I I l7 I VI

I [7 1

1 I I I Va FORMANTc7 CHART

I

I I I I 173 CaEiIw-atd icw~[7 rf ltfer C0ItdI I I

j I I I i 7 10 e centlCMta1 oct4v

I V 5miU~ bull itonI

r I f 711 t14 j I I I Ik IV

FoiUlAhT CHRT

Placing asinge point on this chart is an assertion that fortcants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at tn(l frequerlcy nameu Slong the right or eft cdampe the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

26

l 1I I - -~

I I iI I

I

[bIs] [bIn]

lt-- -_- -1I

lt i

1 ~ i1_ -shy Ir ~ tmiddotmiddot lt

-- - - ---~--- - - - ----- --

-i -_~ ~ shyI 1

i I I

I I bullbullq_-

I ~~~-~--shyr ~~~~~ -~- I------------------------shy

-----I

[dIm] [sIh]

27

I -[blr]

i1 1 I I

i Ii I

I i I I

ii ___ -J

rmiddot I i

I 1 j

-~ ~~~ ~-~IIlIr~~~

I

1 ____~~l_~~--=~ _ ~--~~~~~~~~~- -

51 hI$ PiiB PD~ii~i

-~ - -- -- ----- ~------- - --- _-- - _ - shy [rIll) [klr]

28

1 I I I

---~S~ -~~~fi~ ~~~~~-~

~l_ middot~ ___

[klk]

I I I

r [dlk]

29

-------- --

-~- shy~--I~~

[tIll]

30

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lEI ranged on the

vowel chart in a thin oval shaped distribution from 400-625

hz for formant 1 and from 1400-2000 hz for formant 2

CHART III

lEI

i

I

1 I

1

1middot

II~~ 5 I~ I lOa I ~--~~~I-+--+-4-+--+---+--++-+-+-+-+--r--t-t--r--t--r--1

I

I I I I

t I

4

I I 1 I ~ I I I I

I t I ~

I I ~

-r--- r--- I V~~~-r~+-+-~~~+-+-~~~~~~~--T-~-r~-r~-r~-T---T--r~

V~~~++4-~~~-4-+-+~~~~~+-~-T-rV~7

~iA~~~~~I+-~~~~~I--~~~-r~~~~~8 FORMANT HHHH~~r+~~-r~+-~+-~I~-I~~rl7V CHART

I II 11I I V9 CaZiLrww 1ft huncirccLJ

-+-f-+-II-f-+-+-+-+--+-+--+--+----+-+--+-1--t-+-1---t---t--7 rtf eye 04 ~ I 11 V pq-+-+-I~-+--i--+I-t-t--+~i-I---t--+--tr -t--t-Tj-ri~middotltJ ecentimeters 1octGy

I V 5miU~ - aemiton ~~~~I~~+-~~l~-~-T~I~~~r~

t i lt~ I I IS I I liV

FolUlAn C1LBT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion T hat rormants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency namfu along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

CHAPTER I

INTRODUCTION

Language

Bahasa Indonesia the official name applied to the

Indonesian language is a member of the Malayo-Polyrresian

language family The term Bahasa Indonesia is often used

synonymously with modern Malay or Malay dialect (Uhlenbeck

1967) References to a similar form of this Malay based

language are found as early as the 16th cent~ry by traders

such as th~ Chinese the Hindu and the Arabs (Woodman 1955)

Words were added to the language known as Melaju Pasar or

Bazaar Malay as trade with foreigners increased (Woodman

1955) These foreign elements in Melaju Pasar formed the

essential differences between it and the Malay spoken on the

Ma~ay Peninsula (Woodman 1955) Bahasa Indonesia differs

little from the standard dialect of the Malay Peninsula and

daes so mainly in its relatively large and growing vocabulashy

ry borrowed from European and indigenous languages (Amerishy

can University 1970) Bahasa Indonesia is then an adaptashy

tion of Malay inasmuch as it has been changed by the origishy

nal regional languages and modern European languages (Alisshy

jahbana 1949)

2

Today Bahasa Indonesia is the official language of the

Republic of Indonesia It has been estimated that over 200I

region~l languages are spoken in this country of wide cul-

I tural diversity (Wo~dman 1955) When Indonesia beganto

I strive for independence from Dutch colonialists a common

language seemed eSsential in an effort to unify the nationI Indonesian political leaders desirous of revitalizing r th people br9ught (to bare) the most effective means of

organizing them in the greatest numbers (Alisjahbana 1949)

Attention was focused upon the Malay language which was the

lingua Franca for most of Southeast Asia Javanese was

rejected although it possessed a thousand-year-old literary

tradition and was the language of the largest ethnic group

in the islands (American University 1970) The Javanese

language has a fairly ~igid system of vo~abulary differshy

ences based on social class Thus Malay became the basis

of the national language At the 1928 conference of the

pertemuan Muda (Meeting of Youth) Malay was chosen to be

the basis of the national language (American University

1970) By 1930 then the term Malay Language was officshy

ially changed to the Indonesian language (Uhlenbeck 1967)

It became the language for scholarly endeavors and the langshy

uage of leaders and officials During the Japanese occupashy

tion in 1942 the language made further gains In an effort

to combat Dutch cultural influence it was made the compulshy

3

sory language uied in schools from elementary and up

Bahasa Indonesia became the official national language

when the Republic of Indonesia was farmed in 1945

Justification For Study

Phonemic descriptions of Bahasa Indonesia are almost

non-existent and very limited f from a linguistic point of

view Most descriptions of the sounds of Indonesian are

of a comparative nature i e Bahasa Indonesian sounds are

likened to sounds of modern Indo-European languages Echols

and Shadilys An Indonesian-English Dictionary describes

Indonesian sounds in relation to the similar sounds in

English For instance they argue that the e in the Indoshy

nesian word sen is like the e in the English word make n

only shorter Statements such as the aforementionedmay

be practical for most purposes but are not necessarily

linguistically sound and almost certainly inaccurate

Another deficiency which seems to be present in phonshy

emic analyses not only in Indonesian is the impressionistic

nature of these analyses When dealing with a lang~ag8

the linguist must attempt to remove all linguistic biases

and comparisons because phonetic details may escape the

ear of the analyst f especially in a foreign language upon

which he is likely to impose depending upon the degree of

his skill any of the few prejudices of his native phonemic

scale (Pulgram 1965) Even when the investigator does nat

4

I

rely on comparative methods of description he cannot compshy

letely remove all the sounds in his linguistic memory when

describing a new language He will invariably hear sounds

that are very similar to those he knows and may not be able

to discern certain minor although perhaps crucial differshy

ences Phonemic descriptions are most often of this impresshy

sionistic variety

Spectrographic analyses of the sounds of a language

provide an objective measure of the quality of the sounds

of a language Spectrographs record precise sound qualities

produced by a speaker particuiarly vowels This mode of

description will delete the impressions of the investigator

and will map precise quality for sounds in question what

shows on a spectrogram is an acous~ic reality whether the

analyst hears it or not (Pulgram 1965) It is these

precise sound qualities of Bahasa Iridonesian vowel phonemes

that this investigation will attempt to ascertain Instrushy

mentaltesting of hypotheses has been a part of scientific

study for many years but very little has been done to

date in linguistics (Pierce 1963) The acoustic specshy

trograph can provide definite answers as to the phonetic

quality of vowels

The science of phonemics developed out of the realizashy

tion that some phoneti6 features of a language differentiate

one word from another while others do not Edward Sapir

(1921) argues

5

Back of the purely objective system of sounds that is peculiar to a language and which can be arrived at only by a painstaking phonetic analysis there is -a more restricted inner or ideal system which perhaps equally unconscious as a system to the naive speaker can far more readily than the other be brought to his consciousness as a finished pattern a psychological mechanism The inner sound system overlaid though it may be by the mechanical or the irrelevant is a real important principle in the life of a language

Once it was accepted that language had a definite phonologshy

ical structure a method was devised to describe this undershy

lying system This method became the science of phonemics

The phonemic structure of a language represents the minimal

number of sound signals which make transmission of informashy

tion possible Spectrographic analyses of t~ese minimal

sound signals provide objective and empirical measurements

of the quality of these minimal sound features

Statement of the Problem

This investigation will determine the range of free

variation of Bahasa Indonesian vowel phonemes in a given

phonemic environment and types of conditioned variation

from one environment to another The nature and ra~ge of

the vowel quality for each phoneme will be determined by

spectrographic measurements

Delimitations of the Study

This study will only deal with Bahasa Indonesian

vowels sounds produced with vibration of the vocal cords

6

by unobstructed passage of air through the oral cavity

and not constricted enough to cause audible friction

Pei 1966) They will be the vowels found in monoshy

syllabic Indonesian wo~ds under primary stress and in a

consonant~vowel-cDnsonant pattern Each word will also

be part of a minimal pair ie every word must be conshy

trasted with another word in which only the medial vowel

is different andto which a different semantic meaning is

attached

CHAPTER II

THEORETICAL BACKGROUND

PhoneticsPhonemics

Phonetics is the branch of linguistics which deals

with the actual speech sounds of a language When dealing

with the phonetic level of linguistic analysis one describes

the sounds of a language in terms of articulation or acoustic

features In articulatory phonetics one describes sounds

in middotterms 9f manner of articulation ie whether it is a

stop fricat~ve etc point of articulation ie) bilabial

(be~ween the lips) dental etc or vowel quality ie

high-front-close (the highest part of the tongue-is very

high in the front of the mouth for producing this particular

sound) etc In acoustic phonetics sounds are described in

terms of the distributions of frequencies characteristic of

the sounds of a language The relationship generally acshy

cepted as existing between artic~latory and ~coustic phonetshy

ics is that certain articulations produce certain distinctive

patterns of frequency distributions It must be emphasized

at this point that both of the aforementioned types of deshy

scriptians deal with all human speech sounds not necessarily

those which perform a signalling function in a particular I

aspect of the language

I I

f

8

Distinctlve features are used to denote signalling

functions The label distinctive feature is used in the

literature to mean two quite different things Bloomfield

describes the categorization with examples which imply

that distinctive sound feature means any feature of the vocal

sound which when changed changes the meaning of a given

word eg pill and bill sin and sing etcri (Pierce 1965)

There Bloomfi~ld labels p as a distinctive sound feature

and b as a different sound feature Later Roman Jakobson

Gunnar M Fant and Morris Halle in their Preliminaries of

sectpeech Analysis take the phonemes of a language and break

them down into their component phonetic features some of

which are distinctive eg voicing in English b vs p

while others are not eg aspiration in English p~ in pin

as opposed to p in spin Anyone language code has a

finite set of distinctive features bullbullbull (Jakobson Fant and

Halle 1961) In English the feature of voicing in the b

of bill as opposed to the absence of voicing for the p

in pill is the phonetic feature which distinguishes these

two sounds A similar presence vs absence of aspiration

does not alter the meaning of any English utterance in fact

it is difficult to make English speakers aware of the fact

that aspiration is or is not present Implicit in this

theoretical approach is the concept that the variation in

human speech for the most part re~resents presence vs

9

1

absence of non-distinctive features of sound

One theoretical approach to linguistic structures

views the phoneme as concurrent bundles of distinctive

features (Jakobson Fant and Halle 1961) Each language

has a finite set of rules for grouping them (distinctive

features) into phQnemes (Jakobson Fant and Halle 1961)

Every phoneme in the language then is composed of a unique

set of distinctive features such that it is different from

any other phoneme by at least one of such distinctive feashy

tures This manner of linguistic signalling has important

implicat~ons toward phonemic analysis of sound systems As

previously mentioned a phoneme is a bundle of distinctive

features which when altered changes meaning In order

to verify whether a sound is a phoneme or not one must

show a word in which the replacement of at least one disti~c-

tive feature makes another word ie a minimal pair difshy

ferentiated by only a single distinctive feature and having

two distinct grammatical or semantical meanings

Phonemics the study of phonem~s is the level of lingushy

istic analysis which answers the question of how language

utilizes sound matter selecting certain of its elements and

adapting them for various ends The prima~y functions of

sound in a language is to distinguish one utterance from anshy

other in normal conversation Phonemic analysis as an opshy

eration examines a~ailable data in order to discover an unshy

derlying structure bullbullbull not an operation which forces a mass

1 0

of data into a structure (Pulgram 19~5) The nature of

each feature is of the essence Thus the composition of

each phoneme becomes of primary importance in a language

The phoneme can only be defined in reference to the larger

frame whi~h is the language of which it is a structured

feature (Pulgram 1965) It is the shortest stretch of

sound which serves a signalling function

Acoustic Theory

I Distinctive feature theory as previously describedI I seems to handle such phonemes s stops fricatives and

I nasals quite well eg the airflow out of the mouth is I

either stopped or it is allowed to escape On the other

1 hand vowels seem to be ranges of phonetic quality whichI

are extremely difficult if not impossible to distinguish

in terms of presence vs ab~~nce of distinctive features

Since this study will not be concerned with consonants but

only w~th vowels it is only necessary to discuss the acousshy

tic nature of vowel qualities from this point on

FundamentalsHarmonics

Vowel quality is determined by a combination of a fundashy

mental and its harmonics A vowel quality displayed on an

oscilloscope shows a very complex single wave form This

wave form is in reality the mathematical sum of a number

of simple wave forms or at least for theoretical purposes

1 1

can be treated as such These wave forms are generated

in the oral tract by the opening and closing of the glotshy

tis The fundamental wave is a sine wave with a frequency

equal to the number of times the glottis opens and closes

each second and an amplitude which is directly pro~ortion-

al to air pressure in the lungs Because of the nature

of sound waves a harmonic is generated at every multiple

of this fundamental eg if the fundamental is 100 cycles

per second then a harmonic is generated at 200 300

400 bullbullbull CO As soon as the complex wave leaves the vocal

chords harmoni6s are filtered out by the nature of the

tissue surrounding the oral tract as well as the cavities

in and adj o 1ning the oral tract The complex wave emerging

from the mouth is the mathematical sum of fundamental and

the harmonics which have not been filtered out by the oral

tract cf Martin Joos Acoustic Phonetics (1 948) chapshy

ters 1 and 2 for a fuller explanation of this process

Acoustics vs Articulation

In the last century far too much energy has b~en exshy

pended in attempts to relate acoustic features to specific

articulatory movements Bloch (1942) illustrates this by

stating qualities are identified by ear but in linguisshy

tic works they are traditionally defined in terms of their

assumed production by the vocal organs This type ofmiddotstudy

is misdirected because the only things that impinge on the

I I

- I

12

human ear are the harmonics which were not filtered out

The articulatory movements which cause the filtration ie

movement of the tongue from front to back creating a series

of filters each of which removes different harmonics

from the complex waves are irrelevant Pike (1943) argues

one should analyze and describe the sounds (or sound waves)

themselves rather than the movements ~roducing them

It has long been noted by acousticians that a variety

of articulatory movements remove the same harmonics and

r~sult in the production of very similar sounds Pierce

(1962) illustrates this by saying

As long as the formants are in their praper positions ie the proper frequencies are passed through the speech mechanism it does not matter whether the unwanted frequencies are filtered out by rounding the lips or moving the tongue to the back ThuQ when Holbrook and Carmody give one front-back position for the tongue for a given English vowel and IPA (International Pho~etic Alphabet) gives another it is quite probable that both are completely correct and that the formant shift is made by compensating for the lack of tongue movement in the speech of some speakers by additional lip rounding bullbullbullbull

Since the hearer of a stream of speech can hear 9nly those harmonics which emerge from the mouth as componshyents of the final complex wave the placement of the formant is of primary importance not the articulation which produced the sound

Therefore a study of the phonetic quality of vowels

demands an instrument which is capable of making an accurate

record of the presence or absence of all the harmonics

having sufficient amplitude to significantly alter the final

wave form The acoustic spectrograph is such an instrument

13

it was the first instrument to make large scale acoustic

a n a ly s e sapr act i c a I po s sibiIi t Y n ( Lad e fog ed 1 967 ) bull

Spectrograph

The acoustic spectrograph is a device ~hich records a

stream of speech 2~4 seconds or less in length This

recording is then fed into the analyzing part of the specshy

trograph where at each successive playing ne frequency

or rather one frequency band is lifted outof the total by

the variable filter (Pulgram 1965) A black ma~king is

made on a piece ofmiddot electro-sensitive paper each time there

is a harmonic present within the frequency band being anashy

lyzed Since the articulators are constantly moving and

changing the filtration characteristics of thevocal tract

the black markings ma~e by a stylus reflect the movements

of the articula~ors in a very broad sense More important

however it makes a precise record of the stimulus ie

the harmonics which reach the ear of the listener Dunn

(1950) says the vowels have asso~iated with them different

frequency regions in which the sound is more intense than

elsewhere in the spectrum The name formant has been apshy

plied to these regions

The next problem then is to relate the concentrations

of power mentioned above ie the formants to human pershy

ception of speech sounds The most widely utilized techshy

nique in this area is one devised by Martin Joos (1948)

~______________________________________~S___________________________________________________shy1

14

generally referred to as his 2 Formant Theory This techshy

nique represents the plotting of formant 1 and formant 2

in a specific wayan a particular chart cf Chart 1 on

p~ 23 This technique is clearly described by Ladefoged

(1967)

The relations between the formant structures of the vowels in a number of words can be conveniently represented by means of formant charts which show the frequency of the firs~ formant at a time in the word when the formant structure is changing at a minimum rate plotted against the frequency of the second formant at the same time

When making these kinds of plots a charting is derived of

vowels for any language which is remarkably like the tradishy

tional impressionistic vowel charts of the 19th century

Esner (1947) illustrated that if the frequency of the first

formant was plotted against the frequency of the second

formant it seemed to equal the relation between formant

frequency and the traditional vowel diagram

Basically this study will reproduce such vowel charts

for a number of examples of each sound in Bahasa Indonesia

Formant 1 will be platted against formant 2 for each vowel

phoneme in a variety of phonemic environments -The purpose

of this will be to determine the range of variation for

every vowel in each e~vironment as produced by a single native

speaker

CHAPTER III

METHODOLOGY

Phoneme Identification

In order to assess the phonetic quality of vowel phoshy

nemes one must first ascertain the number and relationshy

ship of sound contrasts in a language ie the phonemes

The visual representation of the actualization of the phoshy

neme ie the spectrogram can only be made on the basis

of a preceding decision of the linguist on the types and

number of phonemes in the l~nguage to be anaiyzed (Pulgram

1965)~ Phonemic analysis cannot be made with phonetic

data alone it must be made with phonetic data plus a sershy

ies of phonemic premises and procedures (Pike 1947) A

spectrogram conveys phonetic information which aids the

linguist in determining which phonetic features are consisshy

tently present in order to reach the most accurate phonetic

description

There are a variety of premises and procedures which

the investigator may utilize in order to discover the phoshy

nemic structure of a language Pike (1947) argues that the

investigator must have at hand observable native reaction

to native sounds andor know structural facts pertaining to

the phonetic nature of the sounds and their distribution

As stated before a phoneme is a bundle of sound f~atures

1

j

16

which when substituted for another bundle creates a difshy

ference in meaning Since the creation of a different morshy

pheme is the result of the substitution of a different sound

feature these sound features are said to be phonemes

A pair of words in which the first word is the same as the second except for the fact that one segment is replaced by a different but phonetic~lly similar segment in the second word constitutes proof that the two similar segments are phonemically distinct~ bullbullbull Word pairs of this type are said to be MINIMALshyLY DIFFERENJ because no smaller difference in the language can make a differ~nce in meahing in words (Pike 1947)

Hence minimal pairs of words were used to find phonemes

Minimal~y different word pairs prove to be the beginners

single most important tool for the analysis of phonemic difshy

ferences (Pike 1947)

Thus Echols and Shadilys An Indonesian-English Dicshy

tionarv (1968) was ut~lized to find three-phoneme words

containing two consonant sounds with a vowel in medial poshy

sition The process was simply to go through all the words

beginning with consonants and find minimally different t~ree

phoneme words This was done on a purely anthr~poscopic

basis on the part of the investigator If a different letshy

ter was employed to distinguish a different meaning it was

assumed to be a different phoneme The following ~ord pairs

and their meanings are examples of the words found in the

dictionary

ban--tire bin--son of

das-- a shot dos--small box carton

I

1 7

pal--pole pel--field

rang--rank position ring--ring

teh--tea toh--yet nevertheless

After having obtained the words from the dictionary

a native informant was called upon to verify ~he differshy

ance in meaning in the minimal pairs and to pronounce

them so that ~hey could be phonetically transcribed in

al1 impressionistic manner The informant employed was Kok

Djen Su a student at Portland State University from Yogshy

jakartai Indonesia He has been a student in the United

States for approximately two years and speaks broken al shy

though very understandable English Mr Su was horn to Mr

and Mrs Su Hendry Su who both speak Bahasa Indonesia Jashy

vanese and a small amount of Chinese Since his birth the

informant was exposed to a mixture of Javanese and Bahasa

Indonesia but has employed the national language of Indoshy

nesia since the age of three at school His bilingual upshy

bringing it seems to the author does not craate a subshy

stantial difference in the competence of Mr Su in Bahasa

Indonesia In fact he was able to distinguish the proshy

nunciation Qf words in both Javanese and in Bahasa Indoshy

nesia The utilization of one informant deletes any reshy

gional variation or individual variation between informshy

ants Since here we are attempting to ascertain the relashy

tive range of phonetic quality of vowel phonemes in Bahashy

sa Indonesia the informants bilingualism ahould cause

none or very few phonetic distortions

After-having verified the difference in meaning of

the word pairs Kok Djen ~u pronounced the word The

following impressionistic version of the Ihdonesian voshy

wel system was described

front central back

high

mid 1 I

I I low j

i I I

I

u-

E 0

A

1 Spectrograms

The phonemic entities symbolized in the preceding

section represent range-units of phonetic quality The

symbols and their position on the chart are based on the

aural perceptions of the investigator The purpose of the

spectrographic analysis of this data is to determine as

accurately as possible the actual phonetic range represenshy

ted by each of thephonemic symbols

I

i

1 9

In order to make spectrograms from which meani~gful

conclusions can be drawn one must have a native informant

of the language to be studied Spectrograms were made of

the speech of Mr Su the informant described earlier

In order to conserve the time of the informant a

sample of three-phoneme words were recorded The three-

phoneme words begin and end with consonants ahd contain a

vowel in medial position The list appears in Appendix A

The list of words was specifically selec~ed to eliminate

in so far as possible all variatiqn other than that which

is specifically caused by the preceding and following consoshy

nants This is true because by utilizing a single informant

the influence of dialects both regional and social are eshy

liminated and by utilizing one sy~lable words under primary

1stress sequential influences such as the Markov Process

are eliminated since there is no sequence beyond one phoshy

neme preceding and following the vowel This being the case

one should be able to derive from a series of spectrograms

of those vowels both the range of free variation and the

specific influence of each particular consonant on the voshy

weI quality of each medial phoneme

The n~xt st~p in the procedure was to play the tape-

recordings into the spectrograph two or three wo~ds at a

1The Markoy Process is a mechanical way of handling enshytropy in sequential operations IQ linguistics this is stashyted in terms ofthe probability of the occurrence of a parshyticular phoneme morpheme etc in a precise sequence

20

time The machine can handle 24 seconds of speech on one

spectrogram thus two or three words could be analyzed at

the same time as one with no loss in quality or precision

Unfortunately the recordings had to be played into a

microphone which picks up some background noise but by

placing the microp~one of the spectrograph very close to

the loudspeaker of the tape recorder and turning the volume

up slightly this background was eliminated for all pracshy

tical purposes middotIt would have been better to have had a

direct connection between the recordar and the spectrograph

but unfortunately no such devce was available Background

noise shows up as very small specks scattered more or less

at random and unless the volume of such noise is exceedshy

ingly strong does not interfere with the reading of the

spectrograms

Once the machine had completed the analys~s and produced

the graphic record of the list of words a frequency measur~

ing device was produced by the machine cf example below

1 11amp II~ill c=

- n- HE to

11r -shy

bull b mmiddot 1 bull bull L

-

gIl F Jamp u

n _ If

bull III

21

This measuring device is in reality a spectrogram with horishy

zontal markings The first line on the chart represents a

frequency of 0 hertz (hz) Each line above the first repshy

resents a multiple of 500 hz The device is used to locate

th~ center of formants 1 and 2 Since it is graduated in

500 hz it is necessary to interpolate when the center ofmiddot

power for a particular formant falls between two of these

lines This is done by dividing the area between the two

lines in half then dividing one of the halves in half which

gives a range of 125 hz within which the measurement falls

and an estimate is made of the precise measurement within

the 125 hz range This should give formant positions with

an accuraci of greater than plusmn25 hz

When visual location of the formant centers becprnes

difficult a section of the formant can be made cf exshy

ample below Such difficulties with visual location usually

arise when two weak formants overlap Such overlapping

produc~s what appears to the naked eye to be a band of modeshy

rately dark grey bands The sectioner is a built in mech-

IshyfL__---

tete we tt

~

I

1 I

22

anism capable of handling such problems In the preceding

I example the amplitude of each harmonic is proportional

to the length of the line representing that harmonic I

This makes it possible to locate formant centers when vi-

I sual location is difficult

The measurements were then transferred to formant

charts cf Chart 1 on the following page

6

23

CHART I

~

t

1+

t5

1amp

Ie

z~ 2t 2p 16 12 la 8 Iii

I ~

~

I S

l I

I I

~

V V

V T

l( FORMANT V CHART

Vi ~ CcdiOrate4 ift luutdnM I V ~ cycle ~ concf

V 10 eeentl~rsI~ V

V U 5millimctcrs - I $milton

2 zk2 lis ty

I

FOlWAlfT CHART

Placing a single point on this cha-t is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one fOrrUlt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant atmiddotthe frequency named along the top or bottom edge

ex Martin Joos~ Acoustic Phonetics (1948)

CHAPTER IV

FINDINGS

The data provided by the preceding methodology conshy

sisted of a series of scatter patterns on the vowel charts

Each of the dots within the pattern represented one occurshy

rence of a particular vowel To determine the range ofmiddot each

phoneme f the most divergent points in each pattern were con-

nected by a line These lines then circumscribe an area

which included the range of all the vowels in the sample

recognized ~y the informantmiddotas a particular phoneme

Verbal descriptions the actual charts of the phonemes

and the spectrograms utilized willbe found on the followshy

ing pages

25

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 1 range~ on the

vowel chart in a broad scattering from 300-500 hz for forshy

mant 1 and 1500-2100 hz for formant 2

CHART II

1

lid

13

bull

~

It

iA

Ml

ztr Zit zp 1 S lIZ middot1 I a r 8 6

I

f

I I

Ii 3

[7l I I V 1 I

) ~I I i I bull

V I I i bull r J

I V t I I I I I

i tt I

Kl7 I I I iI ~

I I I I I I I I I i I

I I I i I f I ltII

I I l7 I VI

I [7 1

1 I I I Va FORMANTc7 CHART

I

I I I I 173 CaEiIw-atd icw~[7 rf ltfer C0ItdI I I

j I I I i 7 10 e centlCMta1 oct4v

I V 5miU~ bull itonI

r I f 711 t14 j I I I Ik IV

FoiUlAhT CHRT

Placing asinge point on this chart is an assertion that fortcants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at tn(l frequerlcy nameu Slong the right or eft cdampe the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

26

l 1I I - -~

I I iI I

I

[bIs] [bIn]

lt-- -_- -1I

lt i

1 ~ i1_ -shy Ir ~ tmiddotmiddot lt

-- - - ---~--- - - - ----- --

-i -_~ ~ shyI 1

i I I

I I bullbullq_-

I ~~~-~--shyr ~~~~~ -~- I------------------------shy

-----I

[dIm] [sIh]

27

I -[blr]

i1 1 I I

i Ii I

I i I I

ii ___ -J

rmiddot I i

I 1 j

-~ ~~~ ~-~IIlIr~~~

I

1 ____~~l_~~--=~ _ ~--~~~~~~~~~- -

51 hI$ PiiB PD~ii~i

-~ - -- -- ----- ~------- - --- _-- - _ - shy [rIll) [klr]

28

1 I I I

---~S~ -~~~fi~ ~~~~~-~

~l_ middot~ ___

[klk]

I I I

r [dlk]

29

-------- --

-~- shy~--I~~

[tIll]

30

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lEI ranged on the

vowel chart in a thin oval shaped distribution from 400-625

hz for formant 1 and from 1400-2000 hz for formant 2

CHART III

lEI

i

I

1 I

1

1middot

II~~ 5 I~ I lOa I ~--~~~I-+--+-4-+--+---+--++-+-+-+-+--r--t-t--r--t--r--1

I

I I I I

t I

4

I I 1 I ~ I I I I

I t I ~

I I ~

-r--- r--- I V~~~-r~+-+-~~~+-+-~~~~~~~--T-~-r~-r~-r~-T---T--r~

V~~~++4-~~~-4-+-+~~~~~+-~-T-rV~7

~iA~~~~~I+-~~~~~I--~~~-r~~~~~8 FORMANT HHHH~~r+~~-r~+-~+-~I~-I~~rl7V CHART

I II 11I I V9 CaZiLrww 1ft huncirccLJ

-+-f-+-II-f-+-+-+-+--+-+--+--+----+-+--+-1--t-+-1---t---t--7 rtf eye 04 ~ I 11 V pq-+-+-I~-+--i--+I-t-t--+~i-I---t--+--tr -t--t-Tj-ri~middotltJ ecentimeters 1octGy

I V 5miU~ - aemiton ~~~~I~~+-~~l~-~-T~I~~~r~

t i lt~ I I IS I I liV

FolUlAn C1LBT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion T hat rormants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency namfu along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

2

Today Bahasa Indonesia is the official language of the

Republic of Indonesia It has been estimated that over 200I

region~l languages are spoken in this country of wide cul-

I tural diversity (Wo~dman 1955) When Indonesia beganto

I strive for independence from Dutch colonialists a common

language seemed eSsential in an effort to unify the nationI Indonesian political leaders desirous of revitalizing r th people br9ught (to bare) the most effective means of

organizing them in the greatest numbers (Alisjahbana 1949)

Attention was focused upon the Malay language which was the

lingua Franca for most of Southeast Asia Javanese was

rejected although it possessed a thousand-year-old literary

tradition and was the language of the largest ethnic group

in the islands (American University 1970) The Javanese

language has a fairly ~igid system of vo~abulary differshy

ences based on social class Thus Malay became the basis

of the national language At the 1928 conference of the

pertemuan Muda (Meeting of Youth) Malay was chosen to be

the basis of the national language (American University

1970) By 1930 then the term Malay Language was officshy

ially changed to the Indonesian language (Uhlenbeck 1967)

It became the language for scholarly endeavors and the langshy

uage of leaders and officials During the Japanese occupashy

tion in 1942 the language made further gains In an effort

to combat Dutch cultural influence it was made the compulshy

3

sory language uied in schools from elementary and up

Bahasa Indonesia became the official national language

when the Republic of Indonesia was farmed in 1945

Justification For Study

Phonemic descriptions of Bahasa Indonesia are almost

non-existent and very limited f from a linguistic point of

view Most descriptions of the sounds of Indonesian are

of a comparative nature i e Bahasa Indonesian sounds are

likened to sounds of modern Indo-European languages Echols

and Shadilys An Indonesian-English Dictionary describes

Indonesian sounds in relation to the similar sounds in

English For instance they argue that the e in the Indoshy

nesian word sen is like the e in the English word make n

only shorter Statements such as the aforementionedmay

be practical for most purposes but are not necessarily

linguistically sound and almost certainly inaccurate

Another deficiency which seems to be present in phonshy

emic analyses not only in Indonesian is the impressionistic

nature of these analyses When dealing with a lang~ag8

the linguist must attempt to remove all linguistic biases

and comparisons because phonetic details may escape the

ear of the analyst f especially in a foreign language upon

which he is likely to impose depending upon the degree of

his skill any of the few prejudices of his native phonemic

scale (Pulgram 1965) Even when the investigator does nat

4

I

rely on comparative methods of description he cannot compshy

letely remove all the sounds in his linguistic memory when

describing a new language He will invariably hear sounds

that are very similar to those he knows and may not be able

to discern certain minor although perhaps crucial differshy

ences Phonemic descriptions are most often of this impresshy

sionistic variety

Spectrographic analyses of the sounds of a language

provide an objective measure of the quality of the sounds

of a language Spectrographs record precise sound qualities

produced by a speaker particuiarly vowels This mode of

description will delete the impressions of the investigator

and will map precise quality for sounds in question what

shows on a spectrogram is an acous~ic reality whether the

analyst hears it or not (Pulgram 1965) It is these

precise sound qualities of Bahasa Iridonesian vowel phonemes

that this investigation will attempt to ascertain Instrushy

mentaltesting of hypotheses has been a part of scientific

study for many years but very little has been done to

date in linguistics (Pierce 1963) The acoustic specshy

trograph can provide definite answers as to the phonetic

quality of vowels

The science of phonemics developed out of the realizashy

tion that some phoneti6 features of a language differentiate

one word from another while others do not Edward Sapir

(1921) argues

5

Back of the purely objective system of sounds that is peculiar to a language and which can be arrived at only by a painstaking phonetic analysis there is -a more restricted inner or ideal system which perhaps equally unconscious as a system to the naive speaker can far more readily than the other be brought to his consciousness as a finished pattern a psychological mechanism The inner sound system overlaid though it may be by the mechanical or the irrelevant is a real important principle in the life of a language

Once it was accepted that language had a definite phonologshy

ical structure a method was devised to describe this undershy

lying system This method became the science of phonemics

The phonemic structure of a language represents the minimal

number of sound signals which make transmission of informashy

tion possible Spectrographic analyses of t~ese minimal

sound signals provide objective and empirical measurements

of the quality of these minimal sound features

Statement of the Problem

This investigation will determine the range of free

variation of Bahasa Indonesian vowel phonemes in a given

phonemic environment and types of conditioned variation

from one environment to another The nature and ra~ge of

the vowel quality for each phoneme will be determined by

spectrographic measurements

Delimitations of the Study

This study will only deal with Bahasa Indonesian

vowels sounds produced with vibration of the vocal cords

6

by unobstructed passage of air through the oral cavity

and not constricted enough to cause audible friction

Pei 1966) They will be the vowels found in monoshy

syllabic Indonesian wo~ds under primary stress and in a

consonant~vowel-cDnsonant pattern Each word will also

be part of a minimal pair ie every word must be conshy

trasted with another word in which only the medial vowel

is different andto which a different semantic meaning is

attached

CHAPTER II

THEORETICAL BACKGROUND

PhoneticsPhonemics

Phonetics is the branch of linguistics which deals

with the actual speech sounds of a language When dealing

with the phonetic level of linguistic analysis one describes

the sounds of a language in terms of articulation or acoustic

features In articulatory phonetics one describes sounds

in middotterms 9f manner of articulation ie whether it is a

stop fricat~ve etc point of articulation ie) bilabial

(be~ween the lips) dental etc or vowel quality ie

high-front-close (the highest part of the tongue-is very

high in the front of the mouth for producing this particular

sound) etc In acoustic phonetics sounds are described in

terms of the distributions of frequencies characteristic of

the sounds of a language The relationship generally acshy

cepted as existing between artic~latory and ~coustic phonetshy

ics is that certain articulations produce certain distinctive

patterns of frequency distributions It must be emphasized

at this point that both of the aforementioned types of deshy

scriptians deal with all human speech sounds not necessarily

those which perform a signalling function in a particular I

aspect of the language

I I

f

8

Distinctlve features are used to denote signalling

functions The label distinctive feature is used in the

literature to mean two quite different things Bloomfield

describes the categorization with examples which imply

that distinctive sound feature means any feature of the vocal

sound which when changed changes the meaning of a given

word eg pill and bill sin and sing etcri (Pierce 1965)

There Bloomfi~ld labels p as a distinctive sound feature

and b as a different sound feature Later Roman Jakobson

Gunnar M Fant and Morris Halle in their Preliminaries of

sectpeech Analysis take the phonemes of a language and break

them down into their component phonetic features some of

which are distinctive eg voicing in English b vs p

while others are not eg aspiration in English p~ in pin

as opposed to p in spin Anyone language code has a

finite set of distinctive features bullbullbull (Jakobson Fant and

Halle 1961) In English the feature of voicing in the b

of bill as opposed to the absence of voicing for the p

in pill is the phonetic feature which distinguishes these

two sounds A similar presence vs absence of aspiration

does not alter the meaning of any English utterance in fact

it is difficult to make English speakers aware of the fact

that aspiration is or is not present Implicit in this

theoretical approach is the concept that the variation in

human speech for the most part re~resents presence vs

9

1

absence of non-distinctive features of sound

One theoretical approach to linguistic structures

views the phoneme as concurrent bundles of distinctive

features (Jakobson Fant and Halle 1961) Each language

has a finite set of rules for grouping them (distinctive

features) into phQnemes (Jakobson Fant and Halle 1961)

Every phoneme in the language then is composed of a unique

set of distinctive features such that it is different from

any other phoneme by at least one of such distinctive feashy

tures This manner of linguistic signalling has important

implicat~ons toward phonemic analysis of sound systems As

previously mentioned a phoneme is a bundle of distinctive

features which when altered changes meaning In order

to verify whether a sound is a phoneme or not one must

show a word in which the replacement of at least one disti~c-

tive feature makes another word ie a minimal pair difshy

ferentiated by only a single distinctive feature and having

two distinct grammatical or semantical meanings

Phonemics the study of phonem~s is the level of lingushy

istic analysis which answers the question of how language

utilizes sound matter selecting certain of its elements and

adapting them for various ends The prima~y functions of

sound in a language is to distinguish one utterance from anshy

other in normal conversation Phonemic analysis as an opshy

eration examines a~ailable data in order to discover an unshy

derlying structure bullbullbull not an operation which forces a mass

1 0

of data into a structure (Pulgram 19~5) The nature of

each feature is of the essence Thus the composition of

each phoneme becomes of primary importance in a language

The phoneme can only be defined in reference to the larger

frame whi~h is the language of which it is a structured

feature (Pulgram 1965) It is the shortest stretch of

sound which serves a signalling function

Acoustic Theory

I Distinctive feature theory as previously describedI I seems to handle such phonemes s stops fricatives and

I nasals quite well eg the airflow out of the mouth is I

either stopped or it is allowed to escape On the other

1 hand vowels seem to be ranges of phonetic quality whichI

are extremely difficult if not impossible to distinguish

in terms of presence vs ab~~nce of distinctive features

Since this study will not be concerned with consonants but

only w~th vowels it is only necessary to discuss the acousshy

tic nature of vowel qualities from this point on

FundamentalsHarmonics

Vowel quality is determined by a combination of a fundashy

mental and its harmonics A vowel quality displayed on an

oscilloscope shows a very complex single wave form This

wave form is in reality the mathematical sum of a number

of simple wave forms or at least for theoretical purposes

1 1

can be treated as such These wave forms are generated

in the oral tract by the opening and closing of the glotshy

tis The fundamental wave is a sine wave with a frequency

equal to the number of times the glottis opens and closes

each second and an amplitude which is directly pro~ortion-

al to air pressure in the lungs Because of the nature

of sound waves a harmonic is generated at every multiple

of this fundamental eg if the fundamental is 100 cycles

per second then a harmonic is generated at 200 300

400 bullbullbull CO As soon as the complex wave leaves the vocal

chords harmoni6s are filtered out by the nature of the

tissue surrounding the oral tract as well as the cavities

in and adj o 1ning the oral tract The complex wave emerging

from the mouth is the mathematical sum of fundamental and

the harmonics which have not been filtered out by the oral

tract cf Martin Joos Acoustic Phonetics (1 948) chapshy

ters 1 and 2 for a fuller explanation of this process

Acoustics vs Articulation

In the last century far too much energy has b~en exshy

pended in attempts to relate acoustic features to specific

articulatory movements Bloch (1942) illustrates this by

stating qualities are identified by ear but in linguisshy

tic works they are traditionally defined in terms of their

assumed production by the vocal organs This type ofmiddotstudy

is misdirected because the only things that impinge on the

I I

- I

12

human ear are the harmonics which were not filtered out

The articulatory movements which cause the filtration ie

movement of the tongue from front to back creating a series

of filters each of which removes different harmonics

from the complex waves are irrelevant Pike (1943) argues

one should analyze and describe the sounds (or sound waves)

themselves rather than the movements ~roducing them

It has long been noted by acousticians that a variety

of articulatory movements remove the same harmonics and

r~sult in the production of very similar sounds Pierce

(1962) illustrates this by saying

As long as the formants are in their praper positions ie the proper frequencies are passed through the speech mechanism it does not matter whether the unwanted frequencies are filtered out by rounding the lips or moving the tongue to the back ThuQ when Holbrook and Carmody give one front-back position for the tongue for a given English vowel and IPA (International Pho~etic Alphabet) gives another it is quite probable that both are completely correct and that the formant shift is made by compensating for the lack of tongue movement in the speech of some speakers by additional lip rounding bullbullbullbull

Since the hearer of a stream of speech can hear 9nly those harmonics which emerge from the mouth as componshyents of the final complex wave the placement of the formant is of primary importance not the articulation which produced the sound

Therefore a study of the phonetic quality of vowels

demands an instrument which is capable of making an accurate

record of the presence or absence of all the harmonics

having sufficient amplitude to significantly alter the final

wave form The acoustic spectrograph is such an instrument

13

it was the first instrument to make large scale acoustic

a n a ly s e sapr act i c a I po s sibiIi t Y n ( Lad e fog ed 1 967 ) bull

Spectrograph

The acoustic spectrograph is a device ~hich records a

stream of speech 2~4 seconds or less in length This

recording is then fed into the analyzing part of the specshy

trograph where at each successive playing ne frequency

or rather one frequency band is lifted outof the total by

the variable filter (Pulgram 1965) A black ma~king is

made on a piece ofmiddot electro-sensitive paper each time there

is a harmonic present within the frequency band being anashy

lyzed Since the articulators are constantly moving and

changing the filtration characteristics of thevocal tract

the black markings ma~e by a stylus reflect the movements

of the articula~ors in a very broad sense More important

however it makes a precise record of the stimulus ie

the harmonics which reach the ear of the listener Dunn

(1950) says the vowels have asso~iated with them different

frequency regions in which the sound is more intense than

elsewhere in the spectrum The name formant has been apshy

plied to these regions

The next problem then is to relate the concentrations

of power mentioned above ie the formants to human pershy

ception of speech sounds The most widely utilized techshy

nique in this area is one devised by Martin Joos (1948)

~______________________________________~S___________________________________________________shy1

14

generally referred to as his 2 Formant Theory This techshy

nique represents the plotting of formant 1 and formant 2

in a specific wayan a particular chart cf Chart 1 on

p~ 23 This technique is clearly described by Ladefoged

(1967)

The relations between the formant structures of the vowels in a number of words can be conveniently represented by means of formant charts which show the frequency of the firs~ formant at a time in the word when the formant structure is changing at a minimum rate plotted against the frequency of the second formant at the same time

When making these kinds of plots a charting is derived of

vowels for any language which is remarkably like the tradishy

tional impressionistic vowel charts of the 19th century

Esner (1947) illustrated that if the frequency of the first

formant was plotted against the frequency of the second

formant it seemed to equal the relation between formant

frequency and the traditional vowel diagram

Basically this study will reproduce such vowel charts

for a number of examples of each sound in Bahasa Indonesia

Formant 1 will be platted against formant 2 for each vowel

phoneme in a variety of phonemic environments -The purpose

of this will be to determine the range of variation for

every vowel in each e~vironment as produced by a single native

speaker

CHAPTER III

METHODOLOGY

Phoneme Identification

In order to assess the phonetic quality of vowel phoshy

nemes one must first ascertain the number and relationshy

ship of sound contrasts in a language ie the phonemes

The visual representation of the actualization of the phoshy

neme ie the spectrogram can only be made on the basis

of a preceding decision of the linguist on the types and

number of phonemes in the l~nguage to be anaiyzed (Pulgram

1965)~ Phonemic analysis cannot be made with phonetic

data alone it must be made with phonetic data plus a sershy

ies of phonemic premises and procedures (Pike 1947) A

spectrogram conveys phonetic information which aids the

linguist in determining which phonetic features are consisshy

tently present in order to reach the most accurate phonetic

description

There are a variety of premises and procedures which

the investigator may utilize in order to discover the phoshy

nemic structure of a language Pike (1947) argues that the

investigator must have at hand observable native reaction

to native sounds andor know structural facts pertaining to

the phonetic nature of the sounds and their distribution

As stated before a phoneme is a bundle of sound f~atures

1

j

16

which when substituted for another bundle creates a difshy

ference in meaning Since the creation of a different morshy

pheme is the result of the substitution of a different sound

feature these sound features are said to be phonemes

A pair of words in which the first word is the same as the second except for the fact that one segment is replaced by a different but phonetic~lly similar segment in the second word constitutes proof that the two similar segments are phonemically distinct~ bullbullbull Word pairs of this type are said to be MINIMALshyLY DIFFERENJ because no smaller difference in the language can make a differ~nce in meahing in words (Pike 1947)

Hence minimal pairs of words were used to find phonemes

Minimal~y different word pairs prove to be the beginners

single most important tool for the analysis of phonemic difshy

ferences (Pike 1947)

Thus Echols and Shadilys An Indonesian-English Dicshy

tionarv (1968) was ut~lized to find three-phoneme words

containing two consonant sounds with a vowel in medial poshy

sition The process was simply to go through all the words

beginning with consonants and find minimally different t~ree

phoneme words This was done on a purely anthr~poscopic

basis on the part of the investigator If a different letshy

ter was employed to distinguish a different meaning it was

assumed to be a different phoneme The following ~ord pairs

and their meanings are examples of the words found in the

dictionary

ban--tire bin--son of

das-- a shot dos--small box carton

I

1 7

pal--pole pel--field

rang--rank position ring--ring

teh--tea toh--yet nevertheless

After having obtained the words from the dictionary

a native informant was called upon to verify ~he differshy

ance in meaning in the minimal pairs and to pronounce

them so that ~hey could be phonetically transcribed in

al1 impressionistic manner The informant employed was Kok

Djen Su a student at Portland State University from Yogshy

jakartai Indonesia He has been a student in the United

States for approximately two years and speaks broken al shy

though very understandable English Mr Su was horn to Mr

and Mrs Su Hendry Su who both speak Bahasa Indonesia Jashy

vanese and a small amount of Chinese Since his birth the

informant was exposed to a mixture of Javanese and Bahasa

Indonesia but has employed the national language of Indoshy

nesia since the age of three at school His bilingual upshy

bringing it seems to the author does not craate a subshy

stantial difference in the competence of Mr Su in Bahasa

Indonesia In fact he was able to distinguish the proshy

nunciation Qf words in both Javanese and in Bahasa Indoshy

nesia The utilization of one informant deletes any reshy

gional variation or individual variation between informshy

ants Since here we are attempting to ascertain the relashy

tive range of phonetic quality of vowel phonemes in Bahashy

sa Indonesia the informants bilingualism ahould cause

none or very few phonetic distortions

After-having verified the difference in meaning of

the word pairs Kok Djen ~u pronounced the word The

following impressionistic version of the Ihdonesian voshy

wel system was described

front central back

high

mid 1 I

I I low j

i I I

I

u-

E 0

A

1 Spectrograms

The phonemic entities symbolized in the preceding

section represent range-units of phonetic quality The

symbols and their position on the chart are based on the

aural perceptions of the investigator The purpose of the

spectrographic analysis of this data is to determine as

accurately as possible the actual phonetic range represenshy

ted by each of thephonemic symbols

I

i

1 9

In order to make spectrograms from which meani~gful

conclusions can be drawn one must have a native informant

of the language to be studied Spectrograms were made of

the speech of Mr Su the informant described earlier

In order to conserve the time of the informant a

sample of three-phoneme words were recorded The three-

phoneme words begin and end with consonants ahd contain a

vowel in medial position The list appears in Appendix A

The list of words was specifically selec~ed to eliminate

in so far as possible all variatiqn other than that which

is specifically caused by the preceding and following consoshy

nants This is true because by utilizing a single informant

the influence of dialects both regional and social are eshy

liminated and by utilizing one sy~lable words under primary

1stress sequential influences such as the Markov Process

are eliminated since there is no sequence beyond one phoshy

neme preceding and following the vowel This being the case

one should be able to derive from a series of spectrograms

of those vowels both the range of free variation and the

specific influence of each particular consonant on the voshy

weI quality of each medial phoneme

The n~xt st~p in the procedure was to play the tape-

recordings into the spectrograph two or three wo~ds at a

1The Markoy Process is a mechanical way of handling enshytropy in sequential operations IQ linguistics this is stashyted in terms ofthe probability of the occurrence of a parshyticular phoneme morpheme etc in a precise sequence

20

time The machine can handle 24 seconds of speech on one

spectrogram thus two or three words could be analyzed at

the same time as one with no loss in quality or precision

Unfortunately the recordings had to be played into a

microphone which picks up some background noise but by

placing the microp~one of the spectrograph very close to

the loudspeaker of the tape recorder and turning the volume

up slightly this background was eliminated for all pracshy

tical purposes middotIt would have been better to have had a

direct connection between the recordar and the spectrograph

but unfortunately no such devce was available Background

noise shows up as very small specks scattered more or less

at random and unless the volume of such noise is exceedshy

ingly strong does not interfere with the reading of the

spectrograms

Once the machine had completed the analys~s and produced

the graphic record of the list of words a frequency measur~

ing device was produced by the machine cf example below

1 11amp II~ill c=

- n- HE to

11r -shy

bull b mmiddot 1 bull bull L

-

gIl F Jamp u

n _ If

bull III

21

This measuring device is in reality a spectrogram with horishy

zontal markings The first line on the chart represents a

frequency of 0 hertz (hz) Each line above the first repshy

resents a multiple of 500 hz The device is used to locate

th~ center of formants 1 and 2 Since it is graduated in

500 hz it is necessary to interpolate when the center ofmiddot

power for a particular formant falls between two of these

lines This is done by dividing the area between the two

lines in half then dividing one of the halves in half which

gives a range of 125 hz within which the measurement falls

and an estimate is made of the precise measurement within

the 125 hz range This should give formant positions with

an accuraci of greater than plusmn25 hz

When visual location of the formant centers becprnes

difficult a section of the formant can be made cf exshy

ample below Such difficulties with visual location usually

arise when two weak formants overlap Such overlapping

produc~s what appears to the naked eye to be a band of modeshy

rately dark grey bands The sectioner is a built in mech-

IshyfL__---

tete we tt

~

I

1 I

22

anism capable of handling such problems In the preceding

I example the amplitude of each harmonic is proportional

to the length of the line representing that harmonic I

This makes it possible to locate formant centers when vi-

I sual location is difficult

The measurements were then transferred to formant

charts cf Chart 1 on the following page

6

23

CHART I

~

t

1+

t5

1amp

Ie

z~ 2t 2p 16 12 la 8 Iii

I ~

~

I S

l I

I I

~

V V

V T

l( FORMANT V CHART

Vi ~ CcdiOrate4 ift luutdnM I V ~ cycle ~ concf

V 10 eeentl~rsI~ V

V U 5millimctcrs - I $milton

2 zk2 lis ty

I

FOlWAlfT CHART

Placing a single point on this cha-t is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one fOrrUlt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant atmiddotthe frequency named along the top or bottom edge

ex Martin Joos~ Acoustic Phonetics (1948)

CHAPTER IV

FINDINGS

The data provided by the preceding methodology conshy

sisted of a series of scatter patterns on the vowel charts

Each of the dots within the pattern represented one occurshy

rence of a particular vowel To determine the range ofmiddot each

phoneme f the most divergent points in each pattern were con-

nected by a line These lines then circumscribe an area

which included the range of all the vowels in the sample

recognized ~y the informantmiddotas a particular phoneme

Verbal descriptions the actual charts of the phonemes

and the spectrograms utilized willbe found on the followshy

ing pages

25

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 1 range~ on the

vowel chart in a broad scattering from 300-500 hz for forshy

mant 1 and 1500-2100 hz for formant 2

CHART II

1

lid

13

bull

~

It

iA

Ml

ztr Zit zp 1 S lIZ middot1 I a r 8 6

I

f

I I

Ii 3

[7l I I V 1 I

) ~I I i I bull

V I I i bull r J

I V t I I I I I

i tt I

Kl7 I I I iI ~

I I I I I I I I I i I

I I I i I f I ltII

I I l7 I VI

I [7 1

1 I I I Va FORMANTc7 CHART

I

I I I I 173 CaEiIw-atd icw~[7 rf ltfer C0ItdI I I

j I I I i 7 10 e centlCMta1 oct4v

I V 5miU~ bull itonI

r I f 711 t14 j I I I Ik IV

FoiUlAhT CHRT

Placing asinge point on this chart is an assertion that fortcants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at tn(l frequerlcy nameu Slong the right or eft cdampe the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

26

l 1I I - -~

I I iI I

I

[bIs] [bIn]

lt-- -_- -1I

lt i

1 ~ i1_ -shy Ir ~ tmiddotmiddot lt

-- - - ---~--- - - - ----- --

-i -_~ ~ shyI 1

i I I

I I bullbullq_-

I ~~~-~--shyr ~~~~~ -~- I------------------------shy

-----I

[dIm] [sIh]

27

I -[blr]

i1 1 I I

i Ii I

I i I I

ii ___ -J

rmiddot I i

I 1 j

-~ ~~~ ~-~IIlIr~~~

I

1 ____~~l_~~--=~ _ ~--~~~~~~~~~- -

51 hI$ PiiB PD~ii~i

-~ - -- -- ----- ~------- - --- _-- - _ - shy [rIll) [klr]

28

1 I I I

---~S~ -~~~fi~ ~~~~~-~

~l_ middot~ ___

[klk]

I I I

r [dlk]

29

-------- --

-~- shy~--I~~

[tIll]

30

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lEI ranged on the

vowel chart in a thin oval shaped distribution from 400-625

hz for formant 1 and from 1400-2000 hz for formant 2

CHART III

lEI

i

I

1 I

1

1middot

II~~ 5 I~ I lOa I ~--~~~I-+--+-4-+--+---+--++-+-+-+-+--r--t-t--r--t--r--1

I

I I I I

t I

4

I I 1 I ~ I I I I

I t I ~

I I ~

-r--- r--- I V~~~-r~+-+-~~~+-+-~~~~~~~--T-~-r~-r~-r~-T---T--r~

V~~~++4-~~~-4-+-+~~~~~+-~-T-rV~7

~iA~~~~~I+-~~~~~I--~~~-r~~~~~8 FORMANT HHHH~~r+~~-r~+-~+-~I~-I~~rl7V CHART

I II 11I I V9 CaZiLrww 1ft huncirccLJ

-+-f-+-II-f-+-+-+-+--+-+--+--+----+-+--+-1--t-+-1---t---t--7 rtf eye 04 ~ I 11 V pq-+-+-I~-+--i--+I-t-t--+~i-I---t--+--tr -t--t-Tj-ri~middotltJ ecentimeters 1octGy

I V 5miU~ - aemiton ~~~~I~~+-~~l~-~-T~I~~~r~

t i lt~ I I IS I I liV

FolUlAn C1LBT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion T hat rormants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency namfu along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

3

sory language uied in schools from elementary and up

Bahasa Indonesia became the official national language

when the Republic of Indonesia was farmed in 1945

Justification For Study

Phonemic descriptions of Bahasa Indonesia are almost

non-existent and very limited f from a linguistic point of

view Most descriptions of the sounds of Indonesian are

of a comparative nature i e Bahasa Indonesian sounds are

likened to sounds of modern Indo-European languages Echols

and Shadilys An Indonesian-English Dictionary describes

Indonesian sounds in relation to the similar sounds in

English For instance they argue that the e in the Indoshy

nesian word sen is like the e in the English word make n

only shorter Statements such as the aforementionedmay

be practical for most purposes but are not necessarily

linguistically sound and almost certainly inaccurate

Another deficiency which seems to be present in phonshy

emic analyses not only in Indonesian is the impressionistic

nature of these analyses When dealing with a lang~ag8

the linguist must attempt to remove all linguistic biases

and comparisons because phonetic details may escape the

ear of the analyst f especially in a foreign language upon

which he is likely to impose depending upon the degree of

his skill any of the few prejudices of his native phonemic

scale (Pulgram 1965) Even when the investigator does nat

4

I

rely on comparative methods of description he cannot compshy

letely remove all the sounds in his linguistic memory when

describing a new language He will invariably hear sounds

that are very similar to those he knows and may not be able

to discern certain minor although perhaps crucial differshy

ences Phonemic descriptions are most often of this impresshy

sionistic variety

Spectrographic analyses of the sounds of a language

provide an objective measure of the quality of the sounds

of a language Spectrographs record precise sound qualities

produced by a speaker particuiarly vowels This mode of

description will delete the impressions of the investigator

and will map precise quality for sounds in question what

shows on a spectrogram is an acous~ic reality whether the

analyst hears it or not (Pulgram 1965) It is these

precise sound qualities of Bahasa Iridonesian vowel phonemes

that this investigation will attempt to ascertain Instrushy

mentaltesting of hypotheses has been a part of scientific

study for many years but very little has been done to

date in linguistics (Pierce 1963) The acoustic specshy

trograph can provide definite answers as to the phonetic

quality of vowels

The science of phonemics developed out of the realizashy

tion that some phoneti6 features of a language differentiate

one word from another while others do not Edward Sapir

(1921) argues

5

Back of the purely objective system of sounds that is peculiar to a language and which can be arrived at only by a painstaking phonetic analysis there is -a more restricted inner or ideal system which perhaps equally unconscious as a system to the naive speaker can far more readily than the other be brought to his consciousness as a finished pattern a psychological mechanism The inner sound system overlaid though it may be by the mechanical or the irrelevant is a real important principle in the life of a language

Once it was accepted that language had a definite phonologshy

ical structure a method was devised to describe this undershy

lying system This method became the science of phonemics

The phonemic structure of a language represents the minimal

number of sound signals which make transmission of informashy

tion possible Spectrographic analyses of t~ese minimal

sound signals provide objective and empirical measurements

of the quality of these minimal sound features

Statement of the Problem

This investigation will determine the range of free

variation of Bahasa Indonesian vowel phonemes in a given

phonemic environment and types of conditioned variation

from one environment to another The nature and ra~ge of

the vowel quality for each phoneme will be determined by

spectrographic measurements

Delimitations of the Study

This study will only deal with Bahasa Indonesian

vowels sounds produced with vibration of the vocal cords

6

by unobstructed passage of air through the oral cavity

and not constricted enough to cause audible friction

Pei 1966) They will be the vowels found in monoshy

syllabic Indonesian wo~ds under primary stress and in a

consonant~vowel-cDnsonant pattern Each word will also

be part of a minimal pair ie every word must be conshy

trasted with another word in which only the medial vowel

is different andto which a different semantic meaning is

attached

CHAPTER II

THEORETICAL BACKGROUND

PhoneticsPhonemics

Phonetics is the branch of linguistics which deals

with the actual speech sounds of a language When dealing

with the phonetic level of linguistic analysis one describes

the sounds of a language in terms of articulation or acoustic

features In articulatory phonetics one describes sounds

in middotterms 9f manner of articulation ie whether it is a

stop fricat~ve etc point of articulation ie) bilabial

(be~ween the lips) dental etc or vowel quality ie

high-front-close (the highest part of the tongue-is very

high in the front of the mouth for producing this particular

sound) etc In acoustic phonetics sounds are described in

terms of the distributions of frequencies characteristic of

the sounds of a language The relationship generally acshy

cepted as existing between artic~latory and ~coustic phonetshy

ics is that certain articulations produce certain distinctive

patterns of frequency distributions It must be emphasized

at this point that both of the aforementioned types of deshy

scriptians deal with all human speech sounds not necessarily

those which perform a signalling function in a particular I

aspect of the language

I I

f

8

Distinctlve features are used to denote signalling

functions The label distinctive feature is used in the

literature to mean two quite different things Bloomfield

describes the categorization with examples which imply

that distinctive sound feature means any feature of the vocal

sound which when changed changes the meaning of a given

word eg pill and bill sin and sing etcri (Pierce 1965)

There Bloomfi~ld labels p as a distinctive sound feature

and b as a different sound feature Later Roman Jakobson

Gunnar M Fant and Morris Halle in their Preliminaries of

sectpeech Analysis take the phonemes of a language and break

them down into their component phonetic features some of

which are distinctive eg voicing in English b vs p

while others are not eg aspiration in English p~ in pin

as opposed to p in spin Anyone language code has a

finite set of distinctive features bullbullbull (Jakobson Fant and

Halle 1961) In English the feature of voicing in the b

of bill as opposed to the absence of voicing for the p

in pill is the phonetic feature which distinguishes these

two sounds A similar presence vs absence of aspiration

does not alter the meaning of any English utterance in fact

it is difficult to make English speakers aware of the fact

that aspiration is or is not present Implicit in this

theoretical approach is the concept that the variation in

human speech for the most part re~resents presence vs

9

1

absence of non-distinctive features of sound

One theoretical approach to linguistic structures

views the phoneme as concurrent bundles of distinctive

features (Jakobson Fant and Halle 1961) Each language

has a finite set of rules for grouping them (distinctive

features) into phQnemes (Jakobson Fant and Halle 1961)

Every phoneme in the language then is composed of a unique

set of distinctive features such that it is different from

any other phoneme by at least one of such distinctive feashy

tures This manner of linguistic signalling has important

implicat~ons toward phonemic analysis of sound systems As

previously mentioned a phoneme is a bundle of distinctive

features which when altered changes meaning In order

to verify whether a sound is a phoneme or not one must

show a word in which the replacement of at least one disti~c-

tive feature makes another word ie a minimal pair difshy

ferentiated by only a single distinctive feature and having

two distinct grammatical or semantical meanings

Phonemics the study of phonem~s is the level of lingushy

istic analysis which answers the question of how language

utilizes sound matter selecting certain of its elements and

adapting them for various ends The prima~y functions of

sound in a language is to distinguish one utterance from anshy

other in normal conversation Phonemic analysis as an opshy

eration examines a~ailable data in order to discover an unshy

derlying structure bullbullbull not an operation which forces a mass

1 0

of data into a structure (Pulgram 19~5) The nature of

each feature is of the essence Thus the composition of

each phoneme becomes of primary importance in a language

The phoneme can only be defined in reference to the larger

frame whi~h is the language of which it is a structured

feature (Pulgram 1965) It is the shortest stretch of

sound which serves a signalling function

Acoustic Theory

I Distinctive feature theory as previously describedI I seems to handle such phonemes s stops fricatives and

I nasals quite well eg the airflow out of the mouth is I

either stopped or it is allowed to escape On the other

1 hand vowels seem to be ranges of phonetic quality whichI

are extremely difficult if not impossible to distinguish

in terms of presence vs ab~~nce of distinctive features

Since this study will not be concerned with consonants but

only w~th vowels it is only necessary to discuss the acousshy

tic nature of vowel qualities from this point on

FundamentalsHarmonics

Vowel quality is determined by a combination of a fundashy

mental and its harmonics A vowel quality displayed on an

oscilloscope shows a very complex single wave form This

wave form is in reality the mathematical sum of a number

of simple wave forms or at least for theoretical purposes

1 1

can be treated as such These wave forms are generated

in the oral tract by the opening and closing of the glotshy

tis The fundamental wave is a sine wave with a frequency

equal to the number of times the glottis opens and closes

each second and an amplitude which is directly pro~ortion-

al to air pressure in the lungs Because of the nature

of sound waves a harmonic is generated at every multiple

of this fundamental eg if the fundamental is 100 cycles

per second then a harmonic is generated at 200 300

400 bullbullbull CO As soon as the complex wave leaves the vocal

chords harmoni6s are filtered out by the nature of the

tissue surrounding the oral tract as well as the cavities

in and adj o 1ning the oral tract The complex wave emerging

from the mouth is the mathematical sum of fundamental and

the harmonics which have not been filtered out by the oral

tract cf Martin Joos Acoustic Phonetics (1 948) chapshy

ters 1 and 2 for a fuller explanation of this process

Acoustics vs Articulation

In the last century far too much energy has b~en exshy

pended in attempts to relate acoustic features to specific

articulatory movements Bloch (1942) illustrates this by

stating qualities are identified by ear but in linguisshy

tic works they are traditionally defined in terms of their

assumed production by the vocal organs This type ofmiddotstudy

is misdirected because the only things that impinge on the

I I

- I

12

human ear are the harmonics which were not filtered out

The articulatory movements which cause the filtration ie

movement of the tongue from front to back creating a series

of filters each of which removes different harmonics

from the complex waves are irrelevant Pike (1943) argues

one should analyze and describe the sounds (or sound waves)

themselves rather than the movements ~roducing them

It has long been noted by acousticians that a variety

of articulatory movements remove the same harmonics and

r~sult in the production of very similar sounds Pierce

(1962) illustrates this by saying

As long as the formants are in their praper positions ie the proper frequencies are passed through the speech mechanism it does not matter whether the unwanted frequencies are filtered out by rounding the lips or moving the tongue to the back ThuQ when Holbrook and Carmody give one front-back position for the tongue for a given English vowel and IPA (International Pho~etic Alphabet) gives another it is quite probable that both are completely correct and that the formant shift is made by compensating for the lack of tongue movement in the speech of some speakers by additional lip rounding bullbullbullbull

Since the hearer of a stream of speech can hear 9nly those harmonics which emerge from the mouth as componshyents of the final complex wave the placement of the formant is of primary importance not the articulation which produced the sound

Therefore a study of the phonetic quality of vowels

demands an instrument which is capable of making an accurate

record of the presence or absence of all the harmonics

having sufficient amplitude to significantly alter the final

wave form The acoustic spectrograph is such an instrument

13

it was the first instrument to make large scale acoustic

a n a ly s e sapr act i c a I po s sibiIi t Y n ( Lad e fog ed 1 967 ) bull

Spectrograph

The acoustic spectrograph is a device ~hich records a

stream of speech 2~4 seconds or less in length This

recording is then fed into the analyzing part of the specshy

trograph where at each successive playing ne frequency

or rather one frequency band is lifted outof the total by

the variable filter (Pulgram 1965) A black ma~king is

made on a piece ofmiddot electro-sensitive paper each time there

is a harmonic present within the frequency band being anashy

lyzed Since the articulators are constantly moving and

changing the filtration characteristics of thevocal tract

the black markings ma~e by a stylus reflect the movements

of the articula~ors in a very broad sense More important

however it makes a precise record of the stimulus ie

the harmonics which reach the ear of the listener Dunn

(1950) says the vowels have asso~iated with them different

frequency regions in which the sound is more intense than

elsewhere in the spectrum The name formant has been apshy

plied to these regions

The next problem then is to relate the concentrations

of power mentioned above ie the formants to human pershy

ception of speech sounds The most widely utilized techshy

nique in this area is one devised by Martin Joos (1948)

~______________________________________~S___________________________________________________shy1

14

generally referred to as his 2 Formant Theory This techshy

nique represents the plotting of formant 1 and formant 2

in a specific wayan a particular chart cf Chart 1 on

p~ 23 This technique is clearly described by Ladefoged

(1967)

The relations between the formant structures of the vowels in a number of words can be conveniently represented by means of formant charts which show the frequency of the firs~ formant at a time in the word when the formant structure is changing at a minimum rate plotted against the frequency of the second formant at the same time

When making these kinds of plots a charting is derived of

vowels for any language which is remarkably like the tradishy

tional impressionistic vowel charts of the 19th century

Esner (1947) illustrated that if the frequency of the first

formant was plotted against the frequency of the second

formant it seemed to equal the relation between formant

frequency and the traditional vowel diagram

Basically this study will reproduce such vowel charts

for a number of examples of each sound in Bahasa Indonesia

Formant 1 will be platted against formant 2 for each vowel

phoneme in a variety of phonemic environments -The purpose

of this will be to determine the range of variation for

every vowel in each e~vironment as produced by a single native

speaker

CHAPTER III

METHODOLOGY

Phoneme Identification

In order to assess the phonetic quality of vowel phoshy

nemes one must first ascertain the number and relationshy

ship of sound contrasts in a language ie the phonemes

The visual representation of the actualization of the phoshy

neme ie the spectrogram can only be made on the basis

of a preceding decision of the linguist on the types and

number of phonemes in the l~nguage to be anaiyzed (Pulgram

1965)~ Phonemic analysis cannot be made with phonetic

data alone it must be made with phonetic data plus a sershy

ies of phonemic premises and procedures (Pike 1947) A

spectrogram conveys phonetic information which aids the

linguist in determining which phonetic features are consisshy

tently present in order to reach the most accurate phonetic

description

There are a variety of premises and procedures which

the investigator may utilize in order to discover the phoshy

nemic structure of a language Pike (1947) argues that the

investigator must have at hand observable native reaction

to native sounds andor know structural facts pertaining to

the phonetic nature of the sounds and their distribution

As stated before a phoneme is a bundle of sound f~atures

1

j

16

which when substituted for another bundle creates a difshy

ference in meaning Since the creation of a different morshy

pheme is the result of the substitution of a different sound

feature these sound features are said to be phonemes

A pair of words in which the first word is the same as the second except for the fact that one segment is replaced by a different but phonetic~lly similar segment in the second word constitutes proof that the two similar segments are phonemically distinct~ bullbullbull Word pairs of this type are said to be MINIMALshyLY DIFFERENJ because no smaller difference in the language can make a differ~nce in meahing in words (Pike 1947)

Hence minimal pairs of words were used to find phonemes

Minimal~y different word pairs prove to be the beginners

single most important tool for the analysis of phonemic difshy

ferences (Pike 1947)

Thus Echols and Shadilys An Indonesian-English Dicshy

tionarv (1968) was ut~lized to find three-phoneme words

containing two consonant sounds with a vowel in medial poshy

sition The process was simply to go through all the words

beginning with consonants and find minimally different t~ree

phoneme words This was done on a purely anthr~poscopic

basis on the part of the investigator If a different letshy

ter was employed to distinguish a different meaning it was

assumed to be a different phoneme The following ~ord pairs

and their meanings are examples of the words found in the

dictionary

ban--tire bin--son of

das-- a shot dos--small box carton

I

1 7

pal--pole pel--field

rang--rank position ring--ring

teh--tea toh--yet nevertheless

After having obtained the words from the dictionary

a native informant was called upon to verify ~he differshy

ance in meaning in the minimal pairs and to pronounce

them so that ~hey could be phonetically transcribed in

al1 impressionistic manner The informant employed was Kok

Djen Su a student at Portland State University from Yogshy

jakartai Indonesia He has been a student in the United

States for approximately two years and speaks broken al shy

though very understandable English Mr Su was horn to Mr

and Mrs Su Hendry Su who both speak Bahasa Indonesia Jashy

vanese and a small amount of Chinese Since his birth the

informant was exposed to a mixture of Javanese and Bahasa

Indonesia but has employed the national language of Indoshy

nesia since the age of three at school His bilingual upshy

bringing it seems to the author does not craate a subshy

stantial difference in the competence of Mr Su in Bahasa

Indonesia In fact he was able to distinguish the proshy

nunciation Qf words in both Javanese and in Bahasa Indoshy

nesia The utilization of one informant deletes any reshy

gional variation or individual variation between informshy

ants Since here we are attempting to ascertain the relashy

tive range of phonetic quality of vowel phonemes in Bahashy

sa Indonesia the informants bilingualism ahould cause

none or very few phonetic distortions

After-having verified the difference in meaning of

the word pairs Kok Djen ~u pronounced the word The

following impressionistic version of the Ihdonesian voshy

wel system was described

front central back

high

mid 1 I

I I low j

i I I

I

u-

E 0

A

1 Spectrograms

The phonemic entities symbolized in the preceding

section represent range-units of phonetic quality The

symbols and their position on the chart are based on the

aural perceptions of the investigator The purpose of the

spectrographic analysis of this data is to determine as

accurately as possible the actual phonetic range represenshy

ted by each of thephonemic symbols

I

i

1 9

In order to make spectrograms from which meani~gful

conclusions can be drawn one must have a native informant

of the language to be studied Spectrograms were made of

the speech of Mr Su the informant described earlier

In order to conserve the time of the informant a

sample of three-phoneme words were recorded The three-

phoneme words begin and end with consonants ahd contain a

vowel in medial position The list appears in Appendix A

The list of words was specifically selec~ed to eliminate

in so far as possible all variatiqn other than that which

is specifically caused by the preceding and following consoshy

nants This is true because by utilizing a single informant

the influence of dialects both regional and social are eshy

liminated and by utilizing one sy~lable words under primary

1stress sequential influences such as the Markov Process

are eliminated since there is no sequence beyond one phoshy

neme preceding and following the vowel This being the case

one should be able to derive from a series of spectrograms

of those vowels both the range of free variation and the

specific influence of each particular consonant on the voshy

weI quality of each medial phoneme

The n~xt st~p in the procedure was to play the tape-

recordings into the spectrograph two or three wo~ds at a

1The Markoy Process is a mechanical way of handling enshytropy in sequential operations IQ linguistics this is stashyted in terms ofthe probability of the occurrence of a parshyticular phoneme morpheme etc in a precise sequence

20

time The machine can handle 24 seconds of speech on one

spectrogram thus two or three words could be analyzed at

the same time as one with no loss in quality or precision

Unfortunately the recordings had to be played into a

microphone which picks up some background noise but by

placing the microp~one of the spectrograph very close to

the loudspeaker of the tape recorder and turning the volume

up slightly this background was eliminated for all pracshy

tical purposes middotIt would have been better to have had a

direct connection between the recordar and the spectrograph

but unfortunately no such devce was available Background

noise shows up as very small specks scattered more or less

at random and unless the volume of such noise is exceedshy

ingly strong does not interfere with the reading of the

spectrograms

Once the machine had completed the analys~s and produced

the graphic record of the list of words a frequency measur~

ing device was produced by the machine cf example below

1 11amp II~ill c=

- n- HE to

11r -shy

bull b mmiddot 1 bull bull L

-

gIl F Jamp u

n _ If

bull III

21

This measuring device is in reality a spectrogram with horishy

zontal markings The first line on the chart represents a

frequency of 0 hertz (hz) Each line above the first repshy

resents a multiple of 500 hz The device is used to locate

th~ center of formants 1 and 2 Since it is graduated in

500 hz it is necessary to interpolate when the center ofmiddot

power for a particular formant falls between two of these

lines This is done by dividing the area between the two

lines in half then dividing one of the halves in half which

gives a range of 125 hz within which the measurement falls

and an estimate is made of the precise measurement within

the 125 hz range This should give formant positions with

an accuraci of greater than plusmn25 hz

When visual location of the formant centers becprnes

difficult a section of the formant can be made cf exshy

ample below Such difficulties with visual location usually

arise when two weak formants overlap Such overlapping

produc~s what appears to the naked eye to be a band of modeshy

rately dark grey bands The sectioner is a built in mech-

IshyfL__---

tete we tt

~

I

1 I

22

anism capable of handling such problems In the preceding

I example the amplitude of each harmonic is proportional

to the length of the line representing that harmonic I

This makes it possible to locate formant centers when vi-

I sual location is difficult

The measurements were then transferred to formant

charts cf Chart 1 on the following page

6

23

CHART I

~

t

1+

t5

1amp

Ie

z~ 2t 2p 16 12 la 8 Iii

I ~

~

I S

l I

I I

~

V V

V T

l( FORMANT V CHART

Vi ~ CcdiOrate4 ift luutdnM I V ~ cycle ~ concf

V 10 eeentl~rsI~ V

V U 5millimctcrs - I $milton

2 zk2 lis ty

I

FOlWAlfT CHART

Placing a single point on this cha-t is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one fOrrUlt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant atmiddotthe frequency named along the top or bottom edge

ex Martin Joos~ Acoustic Phonetics (1948)

CHAPTER IV

FINDINGS

The data provided by the preceding methodology conshy

sisted of a series of scatter patterns on the vowel charts

Each of the dots within the pattern represented one occurshy

rence of a particular vowel To determine the range ofmiddot each

phoneme f the most divergent points in each pattern were con-

nected by a line These lines then circumscribe an area

which included the range of all the vowels in the sample

recognized ~y the informantmiddotas a particular phoneme

Verbal descriptions the actual charts of the phonemes

and the spectrograms utilized willbe found on the followshy

ing pages

25

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 1 range~ on the

vowel chart in a broad scattering from 300-500 hz for forshy

mant 1 and 1500-2100 hz for formant 2

CHART II

1

lid

13

bull

~

It

iA

Ml

ztr Zit zp 1 S lIZ middot1 I a r 8 6

I

f

I I

Ii 3

[7l I I V 1 I

) ~I I i I bull

V I I i bull r J

I V t I I I I I

i tt I

Kl7 I I I iI ~

I I I I I I I I I i I

I I I i I f I ltII

I I l7 I VI

I [7 1

1 I I I Va FORMANTc7 CHART

I

I I I I 173 CaEiIw-atd icw~[7 rf ltfer C0ItdI I I

j I I I i 7 10 e centlCMta1 oct4v

I V 5miU~ bull itonI

r I f 711 t14 j I I I Ik IV

FoiUlAhT CHRT

Placing asinge point on this chart is an assertion that fortcants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at tn(l frequerlcy nameu Slong the right or eft cdampe the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

26

l 1I I - -~

I I iI I

I

[bIs] [bIn]

lt-- -_- -1I

lt i

1 ~ i1_ -shy Ir ~ tmiddotmiddot lt

-- - - ---~--- - - - ----- --

-i -_~ ~ shyI 1

i I I

I I bullbullq_-

I ~~~-~--shyr ~~~~~ -~- I------------------------shy

-----I

[dIm] [sIh]

27

I -[blr]

i1 1 I I

i Ii I

I i I I

ii ___ -J

rmiddot I i

I 1 j

-~ ~~~ ~-~IIlIr~~~

I

1 ____~~l_~~--=~ _ ~--~~~~~~~~~- -

51 hI$ PiiB PD~ii~i

-~ - -- -- ----- ~------- - --- _-- - _ - shy [rIll) [klr]

28

1 I I I

---~S~ -~~~fi~ ~~~~~-~

~l_ middot~ ___

[klk]

I I I

r [dlk]

29

-------- --

-~- shy~--I~~

[tIll]

30

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lEI ranged on the

vowel chart in a thin oval shaped distribution from 400-625

hz for formant 1 and from 1400-2000 hz for formant 2

CHART III

lEI

i

I

1 I

1

1middot

II~~ 5 I~ I lOa I ~--~~~I-+--+-4-+--+---+--++-+-+-+-+--r--t-t--r--t--r--1

I

I I I I

t I

4

I I 1 I ~ I I I I

I t I ~

I I ~

-r--- r--- I V~~~-r~+-+-~~~+-+-~~~~~~~--T-~-r~-r~-r~-T---T--r~

V~~~++4-~~~-4-+-+~~~~~+-~-T-rV~7

~iA~~~~~I+-~~~~~I--~~~-r~~~~~8 FORMANT HHHH~~r+~~-r~+-~+-~I~-I~~rl7V CHART

I II 11I I V9 CaZiLrww 1ft huncirccLJ

-+-f-+-II-f-+-+-+-+--+-+--+--+----+-+--+-1--t-+-1---t---t--7 rtf eye 04 ~ I 11 V pq-+-+-I~-+--i--+I-t-t--+~i-I---t--+--tr -t--t-Tj-ri~middotltJ ecentimeters 1octGy

I V 5miU~ - aemiton ~~~~I~~+-~~l~-~-T~I~~~r~

t i lt~ I I IS I I liV

FolUlAn C1LBT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion T hat rormants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency namfu along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

4

I

rely on comparative methods of description he cannot compshy

letely remove all the sounds in his linguistic memory when

describing a new language He will invariably hear sounds

that are very similar to those he knows and may not be able

to discern certain minor although perhaps crucial differshy

ences Phonemic descriptions are most often of this impresshy

sionistic variety

Spectrographic analyses of the sounds of a language

provide an objective measure of the quality of the sounds

of a language Spectrographs record precise sound qualities

produced by a speaker particuiarly vowels This mode of

description will delete the impressions of the investigator

and will map precise quality for sounds in question what

shows on a spectrogram is an acous~ic reality whether the

analyst hears it or not (Pulgram 1965) It is these

precise sound qualities of Bahasa Iridonesian vowel phonemes

that this investigation will attempt to ascertain Instrushy

mentaltesting of hypotheses has been a part of scientific

study for many years but very little has been done to

date in linguistics (Pierce 1963) The acoustic specshy

trograph can provide definite answers as to the phonetic

quality of vowels

The science of phonemics developed out of the realizashy

tion that some phoneti6 features of a language differentiate

one word from another while others do not Edward Sapir

(1921) argues

5

Back of the purely objective system of sounds that is peculiar to a language and which can be arrived at only by a painstaking phonetic analysis there is -a more restricted inner or ideal system which perhaps equally unconscious as a system to the naive speaker can far more readily than the other be brought to his consciousness as a finished pattern a psychological mechanism The inner sound system overlaid though it may be by the mechanical or the irrelevant is a real important principle in the life of a language

Once it was accepted that language had a definite phonologshy

ical structure a method was devised to describe this undershy

lying system This method became the science of phonemics

The phonemic structure of a language represents the minimal

number of sound signals which make transmission of informashy

tion possible Spectrographic analyses of t~ese minimal

sound signals provide objective and empirical measurements

of the quality of these minimal sound features

Statement of the Problem

This investigation will determine the range of free

variation of Bahasa Indonesian vowel phonemes in a given

phonemic environment and types of conditioned variation

from one environment to another The nature and ra~ge of

the vowel quality for each phoneme will be determined by

spectrographic measurements

Delimitations of the Study

This study will only deal with Bahasa Indonesian

vowels sounds produced with vibration of the vocal cords

6

by unobstructed passage of air through the oral cavity

and not constricted enough to cause audible friction

Pei 1966) They will be the vowels found in monoshy

syllabic Indonesian wo~ds under primary stress and in a

consonant~vowel-cDnsonant pattern Each word will also

be part of a minimal pair ie every word must be conshy

trasted with another word in which only the medial vowel

is different andto which a different semantic meaning is

attached

CHAPTER II

THEORETICAL BACKGROUND

PhoneticsPhonemics

Phonetics is the branch of linguistics which deals

with the actual speech sounds of a language When dealing

with the phonetic level of linguistic analysis one describes

the sounds of a language in terms of articulation or acoustic

features In articulatory phonetics one describes sounds

in middotterms 9f manner of articulation ie whether it is a

stop fricat~ve etc point of articulation ie) bilabial

(be~ween the lips) dental etc or vowel quality ie

high-front-close (the highest part of the tongue-is very

high in the front of the mouth for producing this particular

sound) etc In acoustic phonetics sounds are described in

terms of the distributions of frequencies characteristic of

the sounds of a language The relationship generally acshy

cepted as existing between artic~latory and ~coustic phonetshy

ics is that certain articulations produce certain distinctive

patterns of frequency distributions It must be emphasized

at this point that both of the aforementioned types of deshy

scriptians deal with all human speech sounds not necessarily

those which perform a signalling function in a particular I

aspect of the language

I I

f

8

Distinctlve features are used to denote signalling

functions The label distinctive feature is used in the

literature to mean two quite different things Bloomfield

describes the categorization with examples which imply

that distinctive sound feature means any feature of the vocal

sound which when changed changes the meaning of a given

word eg pill and bill sin and sing etcri (Pierce 1965)

There Bloomfi~ld labels p as a distinctive sound feature

and b as a different sound feature Later Roman Jakobson

Gunnar M Fant and Morris Halle in their Preliminaries of

sectpeech Analysis take the phonemes of a language and break

them down into their component phonetic features some of

which are distinctive eg voicing in English b vs p

while others are not eg aspiration in English p~ in pin

as opposed to p in spin Anyone language code has a

finite set of distinctive features bullbullbull (Jakobson Fant and

Halle 1961) In English the feature of voicing in the b

of bill as opposed to the absence of voicing for the p

in pill is the phonetic feature which distinguishes these

two sounds A similar presence vs absence of aspiration

does not alter the meaning of any English utterance in fact

it is difficult to make English speakers aware of the fact

that aspiration is or is not present Implicit in this

theoretical approach is the concept that the variation in

human speech for the most part re~resents presence vs

9

1

absence of non-distinctive features of sound

One theoretical approach to linguistic structures

views the phoneme as concurrent bundles of distinctive

features (Jakobson Fant and Halle 1961) Each language

has a finite set of rules for grouping them (distinctive

features) into phQnemes (Jakobson Fant and Halle 1961)

Every phoneme in the language then is composed of a unique

set of distinctive features such that it is different from

any other phoneme by at least one of such distinctive feashy

tures This manner of linguistic signalling has important

implicat~ons toward phonemic analysis of sound systems As

previously mentioned a phoneme is a bundle of distinctive

features which when altered changes meaning In order

to verify whether a sound is a phoneme or not one must

show a word in which the replacement of at least one disti~c-

tive feature makes another word ie a minimal pair difshy

ferentiated by only a single distinctive feature and having

two distinct grammatical or semantical meanings

Phonemics the study of phonem~s is the level of lingushy

istic analysis which answers the question of how language

utilizes sound matter selecting certain of its elements and

adapting them for various ends The prima~y functions of

sound in a language is to distinguish one utterance from anshy

other in normal conversation Phonemic analysis as an opshy

eration examines a~ailable data in order to discover an unshy

derlying structure bullbullbull not an operation which forces a mass

1 0

of data into a structure (Pulgram 19~5) The nature of

each feature is of the essence Thus the composition of

each phoneme becomes of primary importance in a language

The phoneme can only be defined in reference to the larger

frame whi~h is the language of which it is a structured

feature (Pulgram 1965) It is the shortest stretch of

sound which serves a signalling function

Acoustic Theory

I Distinctive feature theory as previously describedI I seems to handle such phonemes s stops fricatives and

I nasals quite well eg the airflow out of the mouth is I

either stopped or it is allowed to escape On the other

1 hand vowels seem to be ranges of phonetic quality whichI

are extremely difficult if not impossible to distinguish

in terms of presence vs ab~~nce of distinctive features

Since this study will not be concerned with consonants but

only w~th vowels it is only necessary to discuss the acousshy

tic nature of vowel qualities from this point on

FundamentalsHarmonics

Vowel quality is determined by a combination of a fundashy

mental and its harmonics A vowel quality displayed on an

oscilloscope shows a very complex single wave form This

wave form is in reality the mathematical sum of a number

of simple wave forms or at least for theoretical purposes

1 1

can be treated as such These wave forms are generated

in the oral tract by the opening and closing of the glotshy

tis The fundamental wave is a sine wave with a frequency

equal to the number of times the glottis opens and closes

each second and an amplitude which is directly pro~ortion-

al to air pressure in the lungs Because of the nature

of sound waves a harmonic is generated at every multiple

of this fundamental eg if the fundamental is 100 cycles

per second then a harmonic is generated at 200 300

400 bullbullbull CO As soon as the complex wave leaves the vocal

chords harmoni6s are filtered out by the nature of the

tissue surrounding the oral tract as well as the cavities

in and adj o 1ning the oral tract The complex wave emerging

from the mouth is the mathematical sum of fundamental and

the harmonics which have not been filtered out by the oral

tract cf Martin Joos Acoustic Phonetics (1 948) chapshy

ters 1 and 2 for a fuller explanation of this process

Acoustics vs Articulation

In the last century far too much energy has b~en exshy

pended in attempts to relate acoustic features to specific

articulatory movements Bloch (1942) illustrates this by

stating qualities are identified by ear but in linguisshy

tic works they are traditionally defined in terms of their

assumed production by the vocal organs This type ofmiddotstudy

is misdirected because the only things that impinge on the

I I

- I

12

human ear are the harmonics which were not filtered out

The articulatory movements which cause the filtration ie

movement of the tongue from front to back creating a series

of filters each of which removes different harmonics

from the complex waves are irrelevant Pike (1943) argues

one should analyze and describe the sounds (or sound waves)

themselves rather than the movements ~roducing them

It has long been noted by acousticians that a variety

of articulatory movements remove the same harmonics and

r~sult in the production of very similar sounds Pierce

(1962) illustrates this by saying

As long as the formants are in their praper positions ie the proper frequencies are passed through the speech mechanism it does not matter whether the unwanted frequencies are filtered out by rounding the lips or moving the tongue to the back ThuQ when Holbrook and Carmody give one front-back position for the tongue for a given English vowel and IPA (International Pho~etic Alphabet) gives another it is quite probable that both are completely correct and that the formant shift is made by compensating for the lack of tongue movement in the speech of some speakers by additional lip rounding bullbullbullbull

Since the hearer of a stream of speech can hear 9nly those harmonics which emerge from the mouth as componshyents of the final complex wave the placement of the formant is of primary importance not the articulation which produced the sound

Therefore a study of the phonetic quality of vowels

demands an instrument which is capable of making an accurate

record of the presence or absence of all the harmonics

having sufficient amplitude to significantly alter the final

wave form The acoustic spectrograph is such an instrument

13

it was the first instrument to make large scale acoustic

a n a ly s e sapr act i c a I po s sibiIi t Y n ( Lad e fog ed 1 967 ) bull

Spectrograph

The acoustic spectrograph is a device ~hich records a

stream of speech 2~4 seconds or less in length This

recording is then fed into the analyzing part of the specshy

trograph where at each successive playing ne frequency

or rather one frequency band is lifted outof the total by

the variable filter (Pulgram 1965) A black ma~king is

made on a piece ofmiddot electro-sensitive paper each time there

is a harmonic present within the frequency band being anashy

lyzed Since the articulators are constantly moving and

changing the filtration characteristics of thevocal tract

the black markings ma~e by a stylus reflect the movements

of the articula~ors in a very broad sense More important

however it makes a precise record of the stimulus ie

the harmonics which reach the ear of the listener Dunn

(1950) says the vowels have asso~iated with them different

frequency regions in which the sound is more intense than

elsewhere in the spectrum The name formant has been apshy

plied to these regions

The next problem then is to relate the concentrations

of power mentioned above ie the formants to human pershy

ception of speech sounds The most widely utilized techshy

nique in this area is one devised by Martin Joos (1948)

~______________________________________~S___________________________________________________shy1

14

generally referred to as his 2 Formant Theory This techshy

nique represents the plotting of formant 1 and formant 2

in a specific wayan a particular chart cf Chart 1 on

p~ 23 This technique is clearly described by Ladefoged

(1967)

The relations between the formant structures of the vowels in a number of words can be conveniently represented by means of formant charts which show the frequency of the firs~ formant at a time in the word when the formant structure is changing at a minimum rate plotted against the frequency of the second formant at the same time

When making these kinds of plots a charting is derived of

vowels for any language which is remarkably like the tradishy

tional impressionistic vowel charts of the 19th century

Esner (1947) illustrated that if the frequency of the first

formant was plotted against the frequency of the second

formant it seemed to equal the relation between formant

frequency and the traditional vowel diagram

Basically this study will reproduce such vowel charts

for a number of examples of each sound in Bahasa Indonesia

Formant 1 will be platted against formant 2 for each vowel

phoneme in a variety of phonemic environments -The purpose

of this will be to determine the range of variation for

every vowel in each e~vironment as produced by a single native

speaker

CHAPTER III

METHODOLOGY

Phoneme Identification

In order to assess the phonetic quality of vowel phoshy

nemes one must first ascertain the number and relationshy

ship of sound contrasts in a language ie the phonemes

The visual representation of the actualization of the phoshy

neme ie the spectrogram can only be made on the basis

of a preceding decision of the linguist on the types and

number of phonemes in the l~nguage to be anaiyzed (Pulgram

1965)~ Phonemic analysis cannot be made with phonetic

data alone it must be made with phonetic data plus a sershy

ies of phonemic premises and procedures (Pike 1947) A

spectrogram conveys phonetic information which aids the

linguist in determining which phonetic features are consisshy

tently present in order to reach the most accurate phonetic

description

There are a variety of premises and procedures which

the investigator may utilize in order to discover the phoshy

nemic structure of a language Pike (1947) argues that the

investigator must have at hand observable native reaction

to native sounds andor know structural facts pertaining to

the phonetic nature of the sounds and their distribution

As stated before a phoneme is a bundle of sound f~atures

1

j

16

which when substituted for another bundle creates a difshy

ference in meaning Since the creation of a different morshy

pheme is the result of the substitution of a different sound

feature these sound features are said to be phonemes

A pair of words in which the first word is the same as the second except for the fact that one segment is replaced by a different but phonetic~lly similar segment in the second word constitutes proof that the two similar segments are phonemically distinct~ bullbullbull Word pairs of this type are said to be MINIMALshyLY DIFFERENJ because no smaller difference in the language can make a differ~nce in meahing in words (Pike 1947)

Hence minimal pairs of words were used to find phonemes

Minimal~y different word pairs prove to be the beginners

single most important tool for the analysis of phonemic difshy

ferences (Pike 1947)

Thus Echols and Shadilys An Indonesian-English Dicshy

tionarv (1968) was ut~lized to find three-phoneme words

containing two consonant sounds with a vowel in medial poshy

sition The process was simply to go through all the words

beginning with consonants and find minimally different t~ree

phoneme words This was done on a purely anthr~poscopic

basis on the part of the investigator If a different letshy

ter was employed to distinguish a different meaning it was

assumed to be a different phoneme The following ~ord pairs

and their meanings are examples of the words found in the

dictionary

ban--tire bin--son of

das-- a shot dos--small box carton

I

1 7

pal--pole pel--field

rang--rank position ring--ring

teh--tea toh--yet nevertheless

After having obtained the words from the dictionary

a native informant was called upon to verify ~he differshy

ance in meaning in the minimal pairs and to pronounce

them so that ~hey could be phonetically transcribed in

al1 impressionistic manner The informant employed was Kok

Djen Su a student at Portland State University from Yogshy

jakartai Indonesia He has been a student in the United

States for approximately two years and speaks broken al shy

though very understandable English Mr Su was horn to Mr

and Mrs Su Hendry Su who both speak Bahasa Indonesia Jashy

vanese and a small amount of Chinese Since his birth the

informant was exposed to a mixture of Javanese and Bahasa

Indonesia but has employed the national language of Indoshy

nesia since the age of three at school His bilingual upshy

bringing it seems to the author does not craate a subshy

stantial difference in the competence of Mr Su in Bahasa

Indonesia In fact he was able to distinguish the proshy

nunciation Qf words in both Javanese and in Bahasa Indoshy

nesia The utilization of one informant deletes any reshy

gional variation or individual variation between informshy

ants Since here we are attempting to ascertain the relashy

tive range of phonetic quality of vowel phonemes in Bahashy

sa Indonesia the informants bilingualism ahould cause

none or very few phonetic distortions

After-having verified the difference in meaning of

the word pairs Kok Djen ~u pronounced the word The

following impressionistic version of the Ihdonesian voshy

wel system was described

front central back

high

mid 1 I

I I low j

i I I

I

u-

E 0

A

1 Spectrograms

The phonemic entities symbolized in the preceding

section represent range-units of phonetic quality The

symbols and their position on the chart are based on the

aural perceptions of the investigator The purpose of the

spectrographic analysis of this data is to determine as

accurately as possible the actual phonetic range represenshy

ted by each of thephonemic symbols

I

i

1 9

In order to make spectrograms from which meani~gful

conclusions can be drawn one must have a native informant

of the language to be studied Spectrograms were made of

the speech of Mr Su the informant described earlier

In order to conserve the time of the informant a

sample of three-phoneme words were recorded The three-

phoneme words begin and end with consonants ahd contain a

vowel in medial position The list appears in Appendix A

The list of words was specifically selec~ed to eliminate

in so far as possible all variatiqn other than that which

is specifically caused by the preceding and following consoshy

nants This is true because by utilizing a single informant

the influence of dialects both regional and social are eshy

liminated and by utilizing one sy~lable words under primary

1stress sequential influences such as the Markov Process

are eliminated since there is no sequence beyond one phoshy

neme preceding and following the vowel This being the case

one should be able to derive from a series of spectrograms

of those vowels both the range of free variation and the

specific influence of each particular consonant on the voshy

weI quality of each medial phoneme

The n~xt st~p in the procedure was to play the tape-

recordings into the spectrograph two or three wo~ds at a

1The Markoy Process is a mechanical way of handling enshytropy in sequential operations IQ linguistics this is stashyted in terms ofthe probability of the occurrence of a parshyticular phoneme morpheme etc in a precise sequence

20

time The machine can handle 24 seconds of speech on one

spectrogram thus two or three words could be analyzed at

the same time as one with no loss in quality or precision

Unfortunately the recordings had to be played into a

microphone which picks up some background noise but by

placing the microp~one of the spectrograph very close to

the loudspeaker of the tape recorder and turning the volume

up slightly this background was eliminated for all pracshy

tical purposes middotIt would have been better to have had a

direct connection between the recordar and the spectrograph

but unfortunately no such devce was available Background

noise shows up as very small specks scattered more or less

at random and unless the volume of such noise is exceedshy

ingly strong does not interfere with the reading of the

spectrograms

Once the machine had completed the analys~s and produced

the graphic record of the list of words a frequency measur~

ing device was produced by the machine cf example below

1 11amp II~ill c=

- n- HE to

11r -shy

bull b mmiddot 1 bull bull L

-

gIl F Jamp u

n _ If

bull III

21

This measuring device is in reality a spectrogram with horishy

zontal markings The first line on the chart represents a

frequency of 0 hertz (hz) Each line above the first repshy

resents a multiple of 500 hz The device is used to locate

th~ center of formants 1 and 2 Since it is graduated in

500 hz it is necessary to interpolate when the center ofmiddot

power for a particular formant falls between two of these

lines This is done by dividing the area between the two

lines in half then dividing one of the halves in half which

gives a range of 125 hz within which the measurement falls

and an estimate is made of the precise measurement within

the 125 hz range This should give formant positions with

an accuraci of greater than plusmn25 hz

When visual location of the formant centers becprnes

difficult a section of the formant can be made cf exshy

ample below Such difficulties with visual location usually

arise when two weak formants overlap Such overlapping

produc~s what appears to the naked eye to be a band of modeshy

rately dark grey bands The sectioner is a built in mech-

IshyfL__---

tete we tt

~

I

1 I

22

anism capable of handling such problems In the preceding

I example the amplitude of each harmonic is proportional

to the length of the line representing that harmonic I

This makes it possible to locate formant centers when vi-

I sual location is difficult

The measurements were then transferred to formant

charts cf Chart 1 on the following page

6

23

CHART I

~

t

1+

t5

1amp

Ie

z~ 2t 2p 16 12 la 8 Iii

I ~

~

I S

l I

I I

~

V V

V T

l( FORMANT V CHART

Vi ~ CcdiOrate4 ift luutdnM I V ~ cycle ~ concf

V 10 eeentl~rsI~ V

V U 5millimctcrs - I $milton

2 zk2 lis ty

I

FOlWAlfT CHART

Placing a single point on this cha-t is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one fOrrUlt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant atmiddotthe frequency named along the top or bottom edge

ex Martin Joos~ Acoustic Phonetics (1948)

CHAPTER IV

FINDINGS

The data provided by the preceding methodology conshy

sisted of a series of scatter patterns on the vowel charts

Each of the dots within the pattern represented one occurshy

rence of a particular vowel To determine the range ofmiddot each

phoneme f the most divergent points in each pattern were con-

nected by a line These lines then circumscribe an area

which included the range of all the vowels in the sample

recognized ~y the informantmiddotas a particular phoneme

Verbal descriptions the actual charts of the phonemes

and the spectrograms utilized willbe found on the followshy

ing pages

25

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 1 range~ on the

vowel chart in a broad scattering from 300-500 hz for forshy

mant 1 and 1500-2100 hz for formant 2

CHART II

1

lid

13

bull

~

It

iA

Ml

ztr Zit zp 1 S lIZ middot1 I a r 8 6

I

f

I I

Ii 3

[7l I I V 1 I

) ~I I i I bull

V I I i bull r J

I V t I I I I I

i tt I

Kl7 I I I iI ~

I I I I I I I I I i I

I I I i I f I ltII

I I l7 I VI

I [7 1

1 I I I Va FORMANTc7 CHART

I

I I I I 173 CaEiIw-atd icw~[7 rf ltfer C0ItdI I I

j I I I i 7 10 e centlCMta1 oct4v

I V 5miU~ bull itonI

r I f 711 t14 j I I I Ik IV

FoiUlAhT CHRT

Placing asinge point on this chart is an assertion that fortcants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at tn(l frequerlcy nameu Slong the right or eft cdampe the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

26

l 1I I - -~

I I iI I

I

[bIs] [bIn]

lt-- -_- -1I

lt i

1 ~ i1_ -shy Ir ~ tmiddotmiddot lt

-- - - ---~--- - - - ----- --

-i -_~ ~ shyI 1

i I I

I I bullbullq_-

I ~~~-~--shyr ~~~~~ -~- I------------------------shy

-----I

[dIm] [sIh]

27

I -[blr]

i1 1 I I

i Ii I

I i I I

ii ___ -J

rmiddot I i

I 1 j

-~ ~~~ ~-~IIlIr~~~

I

1 ____~~l_~~--=~ _ ~--~~~~~~~~~- -

51 hI$ PiiB PD~ii~i

-~ - -- -- ----- ~------- - --- _-- - _ - shy [rIll) [klr]

28

1 I I I

---~S~ -~~~fi~ ~~~~~-~

~l_ middot~ ___

[klk]

I I I

r [dlk]

29

-------- --

-~- shy~--I~~

[tIll]

30

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lEI ranged on the

vowel chart in a thin oval shaped distribution from 400-625

hz for formant 1 and from 1400-2000 hz for formant 2

CHART III

lEI

i

I

1 I

1

1middot

II~~ 5 I~ I lOa I ~--~~~I-+--+-4-+--+---+--++-+-+-+-+--r--t-t--r--t--r--1

I

I I I I

t I

4

I I 1 I ~ I I I I

I t I ~

I I ~

-r--- r--- I V~~~-r~+-+-~~~+-+-~~~~~~~--T-~-r~-r~-r~-T---T--r~

V~~~++4-~~~-4-+-+~~~~~+-~-T-rV~7

~iA~~~~~I+-~~~~~I--~~~-r~~~~~8 FORMANT HHHH~~r+~~-r~+-~+-~I~-I~~rl7V CHART

I II 11I I V9 CaZiLrww 1ft huncirccLJ

-+-f-+-II-f-+-+-+-+--+-+--+--+----+-+--+-1--t-+-1---t---t--7 rtf eye 04 ~ I 11 V pq-+-+-I~-+--i--+I-t-t--+~i-I---t--+--tr -t--t-Tj-ri~middotltJ ecentimeters 1octGy

I V 5miU~ - aemiton ~~~~I~~+-~~l~-~-T~I~~~r~

t i lt~ I I IS I I liV

FolUlAn C1LBT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion T hat rormants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency namfu along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

5

Back of the purely objective system of sounds that is peculiar to a language and which can be arrived at only by a painstaking phonetic analysis there is -a more restricted inner or ideal system which perhaps equally unconscious as a system to the naive speaker can far more readily than the other be brought to his consciousness as a finished pattern a psychological mechanism The inner sound system overlaid though it may be by the mechanical or the irrelevant is a real important principle in the life of a language

Once it was accepted that language had a definite phonologshy

ical structure a method was devised to describe this undershy

lying system This method became the science of phonemics

The phonemic structure of a language represents the minimal

number of sound signals which make transmission of informashy

tion possible Spectrographic analyses of t~ese minimal

sound signals provide objective and empirical measurements

of the quality of these minimal sound features

Statement of the Problem

This investigation will determine the range of free

variation of Bahasa Indonesian vowel phonemes in a given

phonemic environment and types of conditioned variation

from one environment to another The nature and ra~ge of

the vowel quality for each phoneme will be determined by

spectrographic measurements

Delimitations of the Study

This study will only deal with Bahasa Indonesian

vowels sounds produced with vibration of the vocal cords

6

by unobstructed passage of air through the oral cavity

and not constricted enough to cause audible friction

Pei 1966) They will be the vowels found in monoshy

syllabic Indonesian wo~ds under primary stress and in a

consonant~vowel-cDnsonant pattern Each word will also

be part of a minimal pair ie every word must be conshy

trasted with another word in which only the medial vowel

is different andto which a different semantic meaning is

attached

CHAPTER II

THEORETICAL BACKGROUND

PhoneticsPhonemics

Phonetics is the branch of linguistics which deals

with the actual speech sounds of a language When dealing

with the phonetic level of linguistic analysis one describes

the sounds of a language in terms of articulation or acoustic

features In articulatory phonetics one describes sounds

in middotterms 9f manner of articulation ie whether it is a

stop fricat~ve etc point of articulation ie) bilabial

(be~ween the lips) dental etc or vowel quality ie

high-front-close (the highest part of the tongue-is very

high in the front of the mouth for producing this particular

sound) etc In acoustic phonetics sounds are described in

terms of the distributions of frequencies characteristic of

the sounds of a language The relationship generally acshy

cepted as existing between artic~latory and ~coustic phonetshy

ics is that certain articulations produce certain distinctive

patterns of frequency distributions It must be emphasized

at this point that both of the aforementioned types of deshy

scriptians deal with all human speech sounds not necessarily

those which perform a signalling function in a particular I

aspect of the language

I I

f

8

Distinctlve features are used to denote signalling

functions The label distinctive feature is used in the

literature to mean two quite different things Bloomfield

describes the categorization with examples which imply

that distinctive sound feature means any feature of the vocal

sound which when changed changes the meaning of a given

word eg pill and bill sin and sing etcri (Pierce 1965)

There Bloomfi~ld labels p as a distinctive sound feature

and b as a different sound feature Later Roman Jakobson

Gunnar M Fant and Morris Halle in their Preliminaries of

sectpeech Analysis take the phonemes of a language and break

them down into their component phonetic features some of

which are distinctive eg voicing in English b vs p

while others are not eg aspiration in English p~ in pin

as opposed to p in spin Anyone language code has a

finite set of distinctive features bullbullbull (Jakobson Fant and

Halle 1961) In English the feature of voicing in the b

of bill as opposed to the absence of voicing for the p

in pill is the phonetic feature which distinguishes these

two sounds A similar presence vs absence of aspiration

does not alter the meaning of any English utterance in fact

it is difficult to make English speakers aware of the fact

that aspiration is or is not present Implicit in this

theoretical approach is the concept that the variation in

human speech for the most part re~resents presence vs

9

1

absence of non-distinctive features of sound

One theoretical approach to linguistic structures

views the phoneme as concurrent bundles of distinctive

features (Jakobson Fant and Halle 1961) Each language

has a finite set of rules for grouping them (distinctive

features) into phQnemes (Jakobson Fant and Halle 1961)

Every phoneme in the language then is composed of a unique

set of distinctive features such that it is different from

any other phoneme by at least one of such distinctive feashy

tures This manner of linguistic signalling has important

implicat~ons toward phonemic analysis of sound systems As

previously mentioned a phoneme is a bundle of distinctive

features which when altered changes meaning In order

to verify whether a sound is a phoneme or not one must

show a word in which the replacement of at least one disti~c-

tive feature makes another word ie a minimal pair difshy

ferentiated by only a single distinctive feature and having

two distinct grammatical or semantical meanings

Phonemics the study of phonem~s is the level of lingushy

istic analysis which answers the question of how language

utilizes sound matter selecting certain of its elements and

adapting them for various ends The prima~y functions of

sound in a language is to distinguish one utterance from anshy

other in normal conversation Phonemic analysis as an opshy

eration examines a~ailable data in order to discover an unshy

derlying structure bullbullbull not an operation which forces a mass

1 0

of data into a structure (Pulgram 19~5) The nature of

each feature is of the essence Thus the composition of

each phoneme becomes of primary importance in a language

The phoneme can only be defined in reference to the larger

frame whi~h is the language of which it is a structured

feature (Pulgram 1965) It is the shortest stretch of

sound which serves a signalling function

Acoustic Theory

I Distinctive feature theory as previously describedI I seems to handle such phonemes s stops fricatives and

I nasals quite well eg the airflow out of the mouth is I

either stopped or it is allowed to escape On the other

1 hand vowels seem to be ranges of phonetic quality whichI

are extremely difficult if not impossible to distinguish

in terms of presence vs ab~~nce of distinctive features

Since this study will not be concerned with consonants but

only w~th vowels it is only necessary to discuss the acousshy

tic nature of vowel qualities from this point on

FundamentalsHarmonics

Vowel quality is determined by a combination of a fundashy

mental and its harmonics A vowel quality displayed on an

oscilloscope shows a very complex single wave form This

wave form is in reality the mathematical sum of a number

of simple wave forms or at least for theoretical purposes

1 1

can be treated as such These wave forms are generated

in the oral tract by the opening and closing of the glotshy

tis The fundamental wave is a sine wave with a frequency

equal to the number of times the glottis opens and closes

each second and an amplitude which is directly pro~ortion-

al to air pressure in the lungs Because of the nature

of sound waves a harmonic is generated at every multiple

of this fundamental eg if the fundamental is 100 cycles

per second then a harmonic is generated at 200 300

400 bullbullbull CO As soon as the complex wave leaves the vocal

chords harmoni6s are filtered out by the nature of the

tissue surrounding the oral tract as well as the cavities

in and adj o 1ning the oral tract The complex wave emerging

from the mouth is the mathematical sum of fundamental and

the harmonics which have not been filtered out by the oral

tract cf Martin Joos Acoustic Phonetics (1 948) chapshy

ters 1 and 2 for a fuller explanation of this process

Acoustics vs Articulation

In the last century far too much energy has b~en exshy

pended in attempts to relate acoustic features to specific

articulatory movements Bloch (1942) illustrates this by

stating qualities are identified by ear but in linguisshy

tic works they are traditionally defined in terms of their

assumed production by the vocal organs This type ofmiddotstudy

is misdirected because the only things that impinge on the

I I

- I

12

human ear are the harmonics which were not filtered out

The articulatory movements which cause the filtration ie

movement of the tongue from front to back creating a series

of filters each of which removes different harmonics

from the complex waves are irrelevant Pike (1943) argues

one should analyze and describe the sounds (or sound waves)

themselves rather than the movements ~roducing them

It has long been noted by acousticians that a variety

of articulatory movements remove the same harmonics and

r~sult in the production of very similar sounds Pierce

(1962) illustrates this by saying

As long as the formants are in their praper positions ie the proper frequencies are passed through the speech mechanism it does not matter whether the unwanted frequencies are filtered out by rounding the lips or moving the tongue to the back ThuQ when Holbrook and Carmody give one front-back position for the tongue for a given English vowel and IPA (International Pho~etic Alphabet) gives another it is quite probable that both are completely correct and that the formant shift is made by compensating for the lack of tongue movement in the speech of some speakers by additional lip rounding bullbullbullbull

Since the hearer of a stream of speech can hear 9nly those harmonics which emerge from the mouth as componshyents of the final complex wave the placement of the formant is of primary importance not the articulation which produced the sound

Therefore a study of the phonetic quality of vowels

demands an instrument which is capable of making an accurate

record of the presence or absence of all the harmonics

having sufficient amplitude to significantly alter the final

wave form The acoustic spectrograph is such an instrument

13

it was the first instrument to make large scale acoustic

a n a ly s e sapr act i c a I po s sibiIi t Y n ( Lad e fog ed 1 967 ) bull

Spectrograph

The acoustic spectrograph is a device ~hich records a

stream of speech 2~4 seconds or less in length This

recording is then fed into the analyzing part of the specshy

trograph where at each successive playing ne frequency

or rather one frequency band is lifted outof the total by

the variable filter (Pulgram 1965) A black ma~king is

made on a piece ofmiddot electro-sensitive paper each time there

is a harmonic present within the frequency band being anashy

lyzed Since the articulators are constantly moving and

changing the filtration characteristics of thevocal tract

the black markings ma~e by a stylus reflect the movements

of the articula~ors in a very broad sense More important

however it makes a precise record of the stimulus ie

the harmonics which reach the ear of the listener Dunn

(1950) says the vowels have asso~iated with them different

frequency regions in which the sound is more intense than

elsewhere in the spectrum The name formant has been apshy

plied to these regions

The next problem then is to relate the concentrations

of power mentioned above ie the formants to human pershy

ception of speech sounds The most widely utilized techshy

nique in this area is one devised by Martin Joos (1948)

~______________________________________~S___________________________________________________shy1

14

generally referred to as his 2 Formant Theory This techshy

nique represents the plotting of formant 1 and formant 2

in a specific wayan a particular chart cf Chart 1 on

p~ 23 This technique is clearly described by Ladefoged

(1967)

The relations between the formant structures of the vowels in a number of words can be conveniently represented by means of formant charts which show the frequency of the firs~ formant at a time in the word when the formant structure is changing at a minimum rate plotted against the frequency of the second formant at the same time

When making these kinds of plots a charting is derived of

vowels for any language which is remarkably like the tradishy

tional impressionistic vowel charts of the 19th century

Esner (1947) illustrated that if the frequency of the first

formant was plotted against the frequency of the second

formant it seemed to equal the relation between formant

frequency and the traditional vowel diagram

Basically this study will reproduce such vowel charts

for a number of examples of each sound in Bahasa Indonesia

Formant 1 will be platted against formant 2 for each vowel

phoneme in a variety of phonemic environments -The purpose

of this will be to determine the range of variation for

every vowel in each e~vironment as produced by a single native

speaker

CHAPTER III

METHODOLOGY

Phoneme Identification

In order to assess the phonetic quality of vowel phoshy

nemes one must first ascertain the number and relationshy

ship of sound contrasts in a language ie the phonemes

The visual representation of the actualization of the phoshy

neme ie the spectrogram can only be made on the basis

of a preceding decision of the linguist on the types and

number of phonemes in the l~nguage to be anaiyzed (Pulgram

1965)~ Phonemic analysis cannot be made with phonetic

data alone it must be made with phonetic data plus a sershy

ies of phonemic premises and procedures (Pike 1947) A

spectrogram conveys phonetic information which aids the

linguist in determining which phonetic features are consisshy

tently present in order to reach the most accurate phonetic

description

There are a variety of premises and procedures which

the investigator may utilize in order to discover the phoshy

nemic structure of a language Pike (1947) argues that the

investigator must have at hand observable native reaction

to native sounds andor know structural facts pertaining to

the phonetic nature of the sounds and their distribution

As stated before a phoneme is a bundle of sound f~atures

1

j

16

which when substituted for another bundle creates a difshy

ference in meaning Since the creation of a different morshy

pheme is the result of the substitution of a different sound

feature these sound features are said to be phonemes

A pair of words in which the first word is the same as the second except for the fact that one segment is replaced by a different but phonetic~lly similar segment in the second word constitutes proof that the two similar segments are phonemically distinct~ bullbullbull Word pairs of this type are said to be MINIMALshyLY DIFFERENJ because no smaller difference in the language can make a differ~nce in meahing in words (Pike 1947)

Hence minimal pairs of words were used to find phonemes

Minimal~y different word pairs prove to be the beginners

single most important tool for the analysis of phonemic difshy

ferences (Pike 1947)

Thus Echols and Shadilys An Indonesian-English Dicshy

tionarv (1968) was ut~lized to find three-phoneme words

containing two consonant sounds with a vowel in medial poshy

sition The process was simply to go through all the words

beginning with consonants and find minimally different t~ree

phoneme words This was done on a purely anthr~poscopic

basis on the part of the investigator If a different letshy

ter was employed to distinguish a different meaning it was

assumed to be a different phoneme The following ~ord pairs

and their meanings are examples of the words found in the

dictionary

ban--tire bin--son of

das-- a shot dos--small box carton

I

1 7

pal--pole pel--field

rang--rank position ring--ring

teh--tea toh--yet nevertheless

After having obtained the words from the dictionary

a native informant was called upon to verify ~he differshy

ance in meaning in the minimal pairs and to pronounce

them so that ~hey could be phonetically transcribed in

al1 impressionistic manner The informant employed was Kok

Djen Su a student at Portland State University from Yogshy

jakartai Indonesia He has been a student in the United

States for approximately two years and speaks broken al shy

though very understandable English Mr Su was horn to Mr

and Mrs Su Hendry Su who both speak Bahasa Indonesia Jashy

vanese and a small amount of Chinese Since his birth the

informant was exposed to a mixture of Javanese and Bahasa

Indonesia but has employed the national language of Indoshy

nesia since the age of three at school His bilingual upshy

bringing it seems to the author does not craate a subshy

stantial difference in the competence of Mr Su in Bahasa

Indonesia In fact he was able to distinguish the proshy

nunciation Qf words in both Javanese and in Bahasa Indoshy

nesia The utilization of one informant deletes any reshy

gional variation or individual variation between informshy

ants Since here we are attempting to ascertain the relashy

tive range of phonetic quality of vowel phonemes in Bahashy

sa Indonesia the informants bilingualism ahould cause

none or very few phonetic distortions

After-having verified the difference in meaning of

the word pairs Kok Djen ~u pronounced the word The

following impressionistic version of the Ihdonesian voshy

wel system was described

front central back

high

mid 1 I

I I low j

i I I

I

u-

E 0

A

1 Spectrograms

The phonemic entities symbolized in the preceding

section represent range-units of phonetic quality The

symbols and their position on the chart are based on the

aural perceptions of the investigator The purpose of the

spectrographic analysis of this data is to determine as

accurately as possible the actual phonetic range represenshy

ted by each of thephonemic symbols

I

i

1 9

In order to make spectrograms from which meani~gful

conclusions can be drawn one must have a native informant

of the language to be studied Spectrograms were made of

the speech of Mr Su the informant described earlier

In order to conserve the time of the informant a

sample of three-phoneme words were recorded The three-

phoneme words begin and end with consonants ahd contain a

vowel in medial position The list appears in Appendix A

The list of words was specifically selec~ed to eliminate

in so far as possible all variatiqn other than that which

is specifically caused by the preceding and following consoshy

nants This is true because by utilizing a single informant

the influence of dialects both regional and social are eshy

liminated and by utilizing one sy~lable words under primary

1stress sequential influences such as the Markov Process

are eliminated since there is no sequence beyond one phoshy

neme preceding and following the vowel This being the case

one should be able to derive from a series of spectrograms

of those vowels both the range of free variation and the

specific influence of each particular consonant on the voshy

weI quality of each medial phoneme

The n~xt st~p in the procedure was to play the tape-

recordings into the spectrograph two or three wo~ds at a

1The Markoy Process is a mechanical way of handling enshytropy in sequential operations IQ linguistics this is stashyted in terms ofthe probability of the occurrence of a parshyticular phoneme morpheme etc in a precise sequence

20

time The machine can handle 24 seconds of speech on one

spectrogram thus two or three words could be analyzed at

the same time as one with no loss in quality or precision

Unfortunately the recordings had to be played into a

microphone which picks up some background noise but by

placing the microp~one of the spectrograph very close to

the loudspeaker of the tape recorder and turning the volume

up slightly this background was eliminated for all pracshy

tical purposes middotIt would have been better to have had a

direct connection between the recordar and the spectrograph

but unfortunately no such devce was available Background

noise shows up as very small specks scattered more or less

at random and unless the volume of such noise is exceedshy

ingly strong does not interfere with the reading of the

spectrograms

Once the machine had completed the analys~s and produced

the graphic record of the list of words a frequency measur~

ing device was produced by the machine cf example below

1 11amp II~ill c=

- n- HE to

11r -shy

bull b mmiddot 1 bull bull L

-

gIl F Jamp u

n _ If

bull III

21

This measuring device is in reality a spectrogram with horishy

zontal markings The first line on the chart represents a

frequency of 0 hertz (hz) Each line above the first repshy

resents a multiple of 500 hz The device is used to locate

th~ center of formants 1 and 2 Since it is graduated in

500 hz it is necessary to interpolate when the center ofmiddot

power for a particular formant falls between two of these

lines This is done by dividing the area between the two

lines in half then dividing one of the halves in half which

gives a range of 125 hz within which the measurement falls

and an estimate is made of the precise measurement within

the 125 hz range This should give formant positions with

an accuraci of greater than plusmn25 hz

When visual location of the formant centers becprnes

difficult a section of the formant can be made cf exshy

ample below Such difficulties with visual location usually

arise when two weak formants overlap Such overlapping

produc~s what appears to the naked eye to be a band of modeshy

rately dark grey bands The sectioner is a built in mech-

IshyfL__---

tete we tt

~

I

1 I

22

anism capable of handling such problems In the preceding

I example the amplitude of each harmonic is proportional

to the length of the line representing that harmonic I

This makes it possible to locate formant centers when vi-

I sual location is difficult

The measurements were then transferred to formant

charts cf Chart 1 on the following page

6

23

CHART I

~

t

1+

t5

1amp

Ie

z~ 2t 2p 16 12 la 8 Iii

I ~

~

I S

l I

I I

~

V V

V T

l( FORMANT V CHART

Vi ~ CcdiOrate4 ift luutdnM I V ~ cycle ~ concf

V 10 eeentl~rsI~ V

V U 5millimctcrs - I $milton

2 zk2 lis ty

I

FOlWAlfT CHART

Placing a single point on this cha-t is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one fOrrUlt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant atmiddotthe frequency named along the top or bottom edge

ex Martin Joos~ Acoustic Phonetics (1948)

CHAPTER IV

FINDINGS

The data provided by the preceding methodology conshy

sisted of a series of scatter patterns on the vowel charts

Each of the dots within the pattern represented one occurshy

rence of a particular vowel To determine the range ofmiddot each

phoneme f the most divergent points in each pattern were con-

nected by a line These lines then circumscribe an area

which included the range of all the vowels in the sample

recognized ~y the informantmiddotas a particular phoneme

Verbal descriptions the actual charts of the phonemes

and the spectrograms utilized willbe found on the followshy

ing pages

25

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 1 range~ on the

vowel chart in a broad scattering from 300-500 hz for forshy

mant 1 and 1500-2100 hz for formant 2

CHART II

1

lid

13

bull

~

It

iA

Ml

ztr Zit zp 1 S lIZ middot1 I a r 8 6

I

f

I I

Ii 3

[7l I I V 1 I

) ~I I i I bull

V I I i bull r J

I V t I I I I I

i tt I

Kl7 I I I iI ~

I I I I I I I I I i I

I I I i I f I ltII

I I l7 I VI

I [7 1

1 I I I Va FORMANTc7 CHART

I

I I I I 173 CaEiIw-atd icw~[7 rf ltfer C0ItdI I I

j I I I i 7 10 e centlCMta1 oct4v

I V 5miU~ bull itonI

r I f 711 t14 j I I I Ik IV

FoiUlAhT CHRT

Placing asinge point on this chart is an assertion that fortcants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at tn(l frequerlcy nameu Slong the right or eft cdampe the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

26

l 1I I - -~

I I iI I

I

[bIs] [bIn]

lt-- -_- -1I

lt i

1 ~ i1_ -shy Ir ~ tmiddotmiddot lt

-- - - ---~--- - - - ----- --

-i -_~ ~ shyI 1

i I I

I I bullbullq_-

I ~~~-~--shyr ~~~~~ -~- I------------------------shy

-----I

[dIm] [sIh]

27

I -[blr]

i1 1 I I

i Ii I

I i I I

ii ___ -J

rmiddot I i

I 1 j

-~ ~~~ ~-~IIlIr~~~

I

1 ____~~l_~~--=~ _ ~--~~~~~~~~~- -

51 hI$ PiiB PD~ii~i

-~ - -- -- ----- ~------- - --- _-- - _ - shy [rIll) [klr]

28

1 I I I

---~S~ -~~~fi~ ~~~~~-~

~l_ middot~ ___

[klk]

I I I

r [dlk]

29

-------- --

-~- shy~--I~~

[tIll]

30

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lEI ranged on the

vowel chart in a thin oval shaped distribution from 400-625

hz for formant 1 and from 1400-2000 hz for formant 2

CHART III

lEI

i

I

1 I

1

1middot

II~~ 5 I~ I lOa I ~--~~~I-+--+-4-+--+---+--++-+-+-+-+--r--t-t--r--t--r--1

I

I I I I

t I

4

I I 1 I ~ I I I I

I t I ~

I I ~

-r--- r--- I V~~~-r~+-+-~~~+-+-~~~~~~~--T-~-r~-r~-r~-T---T--r~

V~~~++4-~~~-4-+-+~~~~~+-~-T-rV~7

~iA~~~~~I+-~~~~~I--~~~-r~~~~~8 FORMANT HHHH~~r+~~-r~+-~+-~I~-I~~rl7V CHART

I II 11I I V9 CaZiLrww 1ft huncirccLJ

-+-f-+-II-f-+-+-+-+--+-+--+--+----+-+--+-1--t-+-1---t---t--7 rtf eye 04 ~ I 11 V pq-+-+-I~-+--i--+I-t-t--+~i-I---t--+--tr -t--t-Tj-ri~middotltJ ecentimeters 1octGy

I V 5miU~ - aemiton ~~~~I~~+-~~l~-~-T~I~~~r~

t i lt~ I I IS I I liV

FolUlAn C1LBT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion T hat rormants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency namfu along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

6

by unobstructed passage of air through the oral cavity

and not constricted enough to cause audible friction

Pei 1966) They will be the vowels found in monoshy

syllabic Indonesian wo~ds under primary stress and in a

consonant~vowel-cDnsonant pattern Each word will also

be part of a minimal pair ie every word must be conshy

trasted with another word in which only the medial vowel

is different andto which a different semantic meaning is

attached

CHAPTER II

THEORETICAL BACKGROUND

PhoneticsPhonemics

Phonetics is the branch of linguistics which deals

with the actual speech sounds of a language When dealing

with the phonetic level of linguistic analysis one describes

the sounds of a language in terms of articulation or acoustic

features In articulatory phonetics one describes sounds

in middotterms 9f manner of articulation ie whether it is a

stop fricat~ve etc point of articulation ie) bilabial

(be~ween the lips) dental etc or vowel quality ie

high-front-close (the highest part of the tongue-is very

high in the front of the mouth for producing this particular

sound) etc In acoustic phonetics sounds are described in

terms of the distributions of frequencies characteristic of

the sounds of a language The relationship generally acshy

cepted as existing between artic~latory and ~coustic phonetshy

ics is that certain articulations produce certain distinctive

patterns of frequency distributions It must be emphasized

at this point that both of the aforementioned types of deshy

scriptians deal with all human speech sounds not necessarily

those which perform a signalling function in a particular I

aspect of the language

I I

f

8

Distinctlve features are used to denote signalling

functions The label distinctive feature is used in the

literature to mean two quite different things Bloomfield

describes the categorization with examples which imply

that distinctive sound feature means any feature of the vocal

sound which when changed changes the meaning of a given

word eg pill and bill sin and sing etcri (Pierce 1965)

There Bloomfi~ld labels p as a distinctive sound feature

and b as a different sound feature Later Roman Jakobson

Gunnar M Fant and Morris Halle in their Preliminaries of

sectpeech Analysis take the phonemes of a language and break

them down into their component phonetic features some of

which are distinctive eg voicing in English b vs p

while others are not eg aspiration in English p~ in pin

as opposed to p in spin Anyone language code has a

finite set of distinctive features bullbullbull (Jakobson Fant and

Halle 1961) In English the feature of voicing in the b

of bill as opposed to the absence of voicing for the p

in pill is the phonetic feature which distinguishes these

two sounds A similar presence vs absence of aspiration

does not alter the meaning of any English utterance in fact

it is difficult to make English speakers aware of the fact

that aspiration is or is not present Implicit in this

theoretical approach is the concept that the variation in

human speech for the most part re~resents presence vs

9

1

absence of non-distinctive features of sound

One theoretical approach to linguistic structures

views the phoneme as concurrent bundles of distinctive

features (Jakobson Fant and Halle 1961) Each language

has a finite set of rules for grouping them (distinctive

features) into phQnemes (Jakobson Fant and Halle 1961)

Every phoneme in the language then is composed of a unique

set of distinctive features such that it is different from

any other phoneme by at least one of such distinctive feashy

tures This manner of linguistic signalling has important

implicat~ons toward phonemic analysis of sound systems As

previously mentioned a phoneme is a bundle of distinctive

features which when altered changes meaning In order

to verify whether a sound is a phoneme or not one must

show a word in which the replacement of at least one disti~c-

tive feature makes another word ie a minimal pair difshy

ferentiated by only a single distinctive feature and having

two distinct grammatical or semantical meanings

Phonemics the study of phonem~s is the level of lingushy

istic analysis which answers the question of how language

utilizes sound matter selecting certain of its elements and

adapting them for various ends The prima~y functions of

sound in a language is to distinguish one utterance from anshy

other in normal conversation Phonemic analysis as an opshy

eration examines a~ailable data in order to discover an unshy

derlying structure bullbullbull not an operation which forces a mass

1 0

of data into a structure (Pulgram 19~5) The nature of

each feature is of the essence Thus the composition of

each phoneme becomes of primary importance in a language

The phoneme can only be defined in reference to the larger

frame whi~h is the language of which it is a structured

feature (Pulgram 1965) It is the shortest stretch of

sound which serves a signalling function

Acoustic Theory

I Distinctive feature theory as previously describedI I seems to handle such phonemes s stops fricatives and

I nasals quite well eg the airflow out of the mouth is I

either stopped or it is allowed to escape On the other

1 hand vowels seem to be ranges of phonetic quality whichI

are extremely difficult if not impossible to distinguish

in terms of presence vs ab~~nce of distinctive features

Since this study will not be concerned with consonants but

only w~th vowels it is only necessary to discuss the acousshy

tic nature of vowel qualities from this point on

FundamentalsHarmonics

Vowel quality is determined by a combination of a fundashy

mental and its harmonics A vowel quality displayed on an

oscilloscope shows a very complex single wave form This

wave form is in reality the mathematical sum of a number

of simple wave forms or at least for theoretical purposes

1 1

can be treated as such These wave forms are generated

in the oral tract by the opening and closing of the glotshy

tis The fundamental wave is a sine wave with a frequency

equal to the number of times the glottis opens and closes

each second and an amplitude which is directly pro~ortion-

al to air pressure in the lungs Because of the nature

of sound waves a harmonic is generated at every multiple

of this fundamental eg if the fundamental is 100 cycles

per second then a harmonic is generated at 200 300

400 bullbullbull CO As soon as the complex wave leaves the vocal

chords harmoni6s are filtered out by the nature of the

tissue surrounding the oral tract as well as the cavities

in and adj o 1ning the oral tract The complex wave emerging

from the mouth is the mathematical sum of fundamental and

the harmonics which have not been filtered out by the oral

tract cf Martin Joos Acoustic Phonetics (1 948) chapshy

ters 1 and 2 for a fuller explanation of this process

Acoustics vs Articulation

In the last century far too much energy has b~en exshy

pended in attempts to relate acoustic features to specific

articulatory movements Bloch (1942) illustrates this by

stating qualities are identified by ear but in linguisshy

tic works they are traditionally defined in terms of their

assumed production by the vocal organs This type ofmiddotstudy

is misdirected because the only things that impinge on the

I I

- I

12

human ear are the harmonics which were not filtered out

The articulatory movements which cause the filtration ie

movement of the tongue from front to back creating a series

of filters each of which removes different harmonics

from the complex waves are irrelevant Pike (1943) argues

one should analyze and describe the sounds (or sound waves)

themselves rather than the movements ~roducing them

It has long been noted by acousticians that a variety

of articulatory movements remove the same harmonics and

r~sult in the production of very similar sounds Pierce

(1962) illustrates this by saying

As long as the formants are in their praper positions ie the proper frequencies are passed through the speech mechanism it does not matter whether the unwanted frequencies are filtered out by rounding the lips or moving the tongue to the back ThuQ when Holbrook and Carmody give one front-back position for the tongue for a given English vowel and IPA (International Pho~etic Alphabet) gives another it is quite probable that both are completely correct and that the formant shift is made by compensating for the lack of tongue movement in the speech of some speakers by additional lip rounding bullbullbullbull

Since the hearer of a stream of speech can hear 9nly those harmonics which emerge from the mouth as componshyents of the final complex wave the placement of the formant is of primary importance not the articulation which produced the sound

Therefore a study of the phonetic quality of vowels

demands an instrument which is capable of making an accurate

record of the presence or absence of all the harmonics

having sufficient amplitude to significantly alter the final

wave form The acoustic spectrograph is such an instrument

13

it was the first instrument to make large scale acoustic

a n a ly s e sapr act i c a I po s sibiIi t Y n ( Lad e fog ed 1 967 ) bull

Spectrograph

The acoustic spectrograph is a device ~hich records a

stream of speech 2~4 seconds or less in length This

recording is then fed into the analyzing part of the specshy

trograph where at each successive playing ne frequency

or rather one frequency band is lifted outof the total by

the variable filter (Pulgram 1965) A black ma~king is

made on a piece ofmiddot electro-sensitive paper each time there

is a harmonic present within the frequency band being anashy

lyzed Since the articulators are constantly moving and

changing the filtration characteristics of thevocal tract

the black markings ma~e by a stylus reflect the movements

of the articula~ors in a very broad sense More important

however it makes a precise record of the stimulus ie

the harmonics which reach the ear of the listener Dunn

(1950) says the vowels have asso~iated with them different

frequency regions in which the sound is more intense than

elsewhere in the spectrum The name formant has been apshy

plied to these regions

The next problem then is to relate the concentrations

of power mentioned above ie the formants to human pershy

ception of speech sounds The most widely utilized techshy

nique in this area is one devised by Martin Joos (1948)

~______________________________________~S___________________________________________________shy1

14

generally referred to as his 2 Formant Theory This techshy

nique represents the plotting of formant 1 and formant 2

in a specific wayan a particular chart cf Chart 1 on

p~ 23 This technique is clearly described by Ladefoged

(1967)

The relations between the formant structures of the vowels in a number of words can be conveniently represented by means of formant charts which show the frequency of the firs~ formant at a time in the word when the formant structure is changing at a minimum rate plotted against the frequency of the second formant at the same time

When making these kinds of plots a charting is derived of

vowels for any language which is remarkably like the tradishy

tional impressionistic vowel charts of the 19th century

Esner (1947) illustrated that if the frequency of the first

formant was plotted against the frequency of the second

formant it seemed to equal the relation between formant

frequency and the traditional vowel diagram

Basically this study will reproduce such vowel charts

for a number of examples of each sound in Bahasa Indonesia

Formant 1 will be platted against formant 2 for each vowel

phoneme in a variety of phonemic environments -The purpose

of this will be to determine the range of variation for

every vowel in each e~vironment as produced by a single native

speaker

CHAPTER III

METHODOLOGY

Phoneme Identification

In order to assess the phonetic quality of vowel phoshy

nemes one must first ascertain the number and relationshy

ship of sound contrasts in a language ie the phonemes

The visual representation of the actualization of the phoshy

neme ie the spectrogram can only be made on the basis

of a preceding decision of the linguist on the types and

number of phonemes in the l~nguage to be anaiyzed (Pulgram

1965)~ Phonemic analysis cannot be made with phonetic

data alone it must be made with phonetic data plus a sershy

ies of phonemic premises and procedures (Pike 1947) A

spectrogram conveys phonetic information which aids the

linguist in determining which phonetic features are consisshy

tently present in order to reach the most accurate phonetic

description

There are a variety of premises and procedures which

the investigator may utilize in order to discover the phoshy

nemic structure of a language Pike (1947) argues that the

investigator must have at hand observable native reaction

to native sounds andor know structural facts pertaining to

the phonetic nature of the sounds and their distribution

As stated before a phoneme is a bundle of sound f~atures

1

j

16

which when substituted for another bundle creates a difshy

ference in meaning Since the creation of a different morshy

pheme is the result of the substitution of a different sound

feature these sound features are said to be phonemes

A pair of words in which the first word is the same as the second except for the fact that one segment is replaced by a different but phonetic~lly similar segment in the second word constitutes proof that the two similar segments are phonemically distinct~ bullbullbull Word pairs of this type are said to be MINIMALshyLY DIFFERENJ because no smaller difference in the language can make a differ~nce in meahing in words (Pike 1947)

Hence minimal pairs of words were used to find phonemes

Minimal~y different word pairs prove to be the beginners

single most important tool for the analysis of phonemic difshy

ferences (Pike 1947)

Thus Echols and Shadilys An Indonesian-English Dicshy

tionarv (1968) was ut~lized to find three-phoneme words

containing two consonant sounds with a vowel in medial poshy

sition The process was simply to go through all the words

beginning with consonants and find minimally different t~ree

phoneme words This was done on a purely anthr~poscopic

basis on the part of the investigator If a different letshy

ter was employed to distinguish a different meaning it was

assumed to be a different phoneme The following ~ord pairs

and their meanings are examples of the words found in the

dictionary

ban--tire bin--son of

das-- a shot dos--small box carton

I

1 7

pal--pole pel--field

rang--rank position ring--ring

teh--tea toh--yet nevertheless

After having obtained the words from the dictionary

a native informant was called upon to verify ~he differshy

ance in meaning in the minimal pairs and to pronounce

them so that ~hey could be phonetically transcribed in

al1 impressionistic manner The informant employed was Kok

Djen Su a student at Portland State University from Yogshy

jakartai Indonesia He has been a student in the United

States for approximately two years and speaks broken al shy

though very understandable English Mr Su was horn to Mr

and Mrs Su Hendry Su who both speak Bahasa Indonesia Jashy

vanese and a small amount of Chinese Since his birth the

informant was exposed to a mixture of Javanese and Bahasa

Indonesia but has employed the national language of Indoshy

nesia since the age of three at school His bilingual upshy

bringing it seems to the author does not craate a subshy

stantial difference in the competence of Mr Su in Bahasa

Indonesia In fact he was able to distinguish the proshy

nunciation Qf words in both Javanese and in Bahasa Indoshy

nesia The utilization of one informant deletes any reshy

gional variation or individual variation between informshy

ants Since here we are attempting to ascertain the relashy

tive range of phonetic quality of vowel phonemes in Bahashy

sa Indonesia the informants bilingualism ahould cause

none or very few phonetic distortions

After-having verified the difference in meaning of

the word pairs Kok Djen ~u pronounced the word The

following impressionistic version of the Ihdonesian voshy

wel system was described

front central back

high

mid 1 I

I I low j

i I I

I

u-

E 0

A

1 Spectrograms

The phonemic entities symbolized in the preceding

section represent range-units of phonetic quality The

symbols and their position on the chart are based on the

aural perceptions of the investigator The purpose of the

spectrographic analysis of this data is to determine as

accurately as possible the actual phonetic range represenshy

ted by each of thephonemic symbols

I

i

1 9

In order to make spectrograms from which meani~gful

conclusions can be drawn one must have a native informant

of the language to be studied Spectrograms were made of

the speech of Mr Su the informant described earlier

In order to conserve the time of the informant a

sample of three-phoneme words were recorded The three-

phoneme words begin and end with consonants ahd contain a

vowel in medial position The list appears in Appendix A

The list of words was specifically selec~ed to eliminate

in so far as possible all variatiqn other than that which

is specifically caused by the preceding and following consoshy

nants This is true because by utilizing a single informant

the influence of dialects both regional and social are eshy

liminated and by utilizing one sy~lable words under primary

1stress sequential influences such as the Markov Process

are eliminated since there is no sequence beyond one phoshy

neme preceding and following the vowel This being the case

one should be able to derive from a series of spectrograms

of those vowels both the range of free variation and the

specific influence of each particular consonant on the voshy

weI quality of each medial phoneme

The n~xt st~p in the procedure was to play the tape-

recordings into the spectrograph two or three wo~ds at a

1The Markoy Process is a mechanical way of handling enshytropy in sequential operations IQ linguistics this is stashyted in terms ofthe probability of the occurrence of a parshyticular phoneme morpheme etc in a precise sequence

20

time The machine can handle 24 seconds of speech on one

spectrogram thus two or three words could be analyzed at

the same time as one with no loss in quality or precision

Unfortunately the recordings had to be played into a

microphone which picks up some background noise but by

placing the microp~one of the spectrograph very close to

the loudspeaker of the tape recorder and turning the volume

up slightly this background was eliminated for all pracshy

tical purposes middotIt would have been better to have had a

direct connection between the recordar and the spectrograph

but unfortunately no such devce was available Background

noise shows up as very small specks scattered more or less

at random and unless the volume of such noise is exceedshy

ingly strong does not interfere with the reading of the

spectrograms

Once the machine had completed the analys~s and produced

the graphic record of the list of words a frequency measur~

ing device was produced by the machine cf example below

1 11amp II~ill c=

- n- HE to

11r -shy

bull b mmiddot 1 bull bull L

-

gIl F Jamp u

n _ If

bull III

21

This measuring device is in reality a spectrogram with horishy

zontal markings The first line on the chart represents a

frequency of 0 hertz (hz) Each line above the first repshy

resents a multiple of 500 hz The device is used to locate

th~ center of formants 1 and 2 Since it is graduated in

500 hz it is necessary to interpolate when the center ofmiddot

power for a particular formant falls between two of these

lines This is done by dividing the area between the two

lines in half then dividing one of the halves in half which

gives a range of 125 hz within which the measurement falls

and an estimate is made of the precise measurement within

the 125 hz range This should give formant positions with

an accuraci of greater than plusmn25 hz

When visual location of the formant centers becprnes

difficult a section of the formant can be made cf exshy

ample below Such difficulties with visual location usually

arise when two weak formants overlap Such overlapping

produc~s what appears to the naked eye to be a band of modeshy

rately dark grey bands The sectioner is a built in mech-

IshyfL__---

tete we tt

~

I

1 I

22

anism capable of handling such problems In the preceding

I example the amplitude of each harmonic is proportional

to the length of the line representing that harmonic I

This makes it possible to locate formant centers when vi-

I sual location is difficult

The measurements were then transferred to formant

charts cf Chart 1 on the following page

6

23

CHART I

~

t

1+

t5

1amp

Ie

z~ 2t 2p 16 12 la 8 Iii

I ~

~

I S

l I

I I

~

V V

V T

l( FORMANT V CHART

Vi ~ CcdiOrate4 ift luutdnM I V ~ cycle ~ concf

V 10 eeentl~rsI~ V

V U 5millimctcrs - I $milton

2 zk2 lis ty

I

FOlWAlfT CHART

Placing a single point on this cha-t is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one fOrrUlt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant atmiddotthe frequency named along the top or bottom edge

ex Martin Joos~ Acoustic Phonetics (1948)

CHAPTER IV

FINDINGS

The data provided by the preceding methodology conshy

sisted of a series of scatter patterns on the vowel charts

Each of the dots within the pattern represented one occurshy

rence of a particular vowel To determine the range ofmiddot each

phoneme f the most divergent points in each pattern were con-

nected by a line These lines then circumscribe an area

which included the range of all the vowels in the sample

recognized ~y the informantmiddotas a particular phoneme

Verbal descriptions the actual charts of the phonemes

and the spectrograms utilized willbe found on the followshy

ing pages

25

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 1 range~ on the

vowel chart in a broad scattering from 300-500 hz for forshy

mant 1 and 1500-2100 hz for formant 2

CHART II

1

lid

13

bull

~

It

iA

Ml

ztr Zit zp 1 S lIZ middot1 I a r 8 6

I

f

I I

Ii 3

[7l I I V 1 I

) ~I I i I bull

V I I i bull r J

I V t I I I I I

i tt I

Kl7 I I I iI ~

I I I I I I I I I i I

I I I i I f I ltII

I I l7 I VI

I [7 1

1 I I I Va FORMANTc7 CHART

I

I I I I 173 CaEiIw-atd icw~[7 rf ltfer C0ItdI I I

j I I I i 7 10 e centlCMta1 oct4v

I V 5miU~ bull itonI

r I f 711 t14 j I I I Ik IV

FoiUlAhT CHRT

Placing asinge point on this chart is an assertion that fortcants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at tn(l frequerlcy nameu Slong the right or eft cdampe the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

26

l 1I I - -~

I I iI I

I

[bIs] [bIn]

lt-- -_- -1I

lt i

1 ~ i1_ -shy Ir ~ tmiddotmiddot lt

-- - - ---~--- - - - ----- --

-i -_~ ~ shyI 1

i I I

I I bullbullq_-

I ~~~-~--shyr ~~~~~ -~- I------------------------shy

-----I

[dIm] [sIh]

27

I -[blr]

i1 1 I I

i Ii I

I i I I

ii ___ -J

rmiddot I i

I 1 j

-~ ~~~ ~-~IIlIr~~~

I

1 ____~~l_~~--=~ _ ~--~~~~~~~~~- -

51 hI$ PiiB PD~ii~i

-~ - -- -- ----- ~------- - --- _-- - _ - shy [rIll) [klr]

28

1 I I I

---~S~ -~~~fi~ ~~~~~-~

~l_ middot~ ___

[klk]

I I I

r [dlk]

29

-------- --

-~- shy~--I~~

[tIll]

30

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lEI ranged on the

vowel chart in a thin oval shaped distribution from 400-625

hz for formant 1 and from 1400-2000 hz for formant 2

CHART III

lEI

i

I

1 I

1

1middot

II~~ 5 I~ I lOa I ~--~~~I-+--+-4-+--+---+--++-+-+-+-+--r--t-t--r--t--r--1

I

I I I I

t I

4

I I 1 I ~ I I I I

I t I ~

I I ~

-r--- r--- I V~~~-r~+-+-~~~+-+-~~~~~~~--T-~-r~-r~-r~-T---T--r~

V~~~++4-~~~-4-+-+~~~~~+-~-T-rV~7

~iA~~~~~I+-~~~~~I--~~~-r~~~~~8 FORMANT HHHH~~r+~~-r~+-~+-~I~-I~~rl7V CHART

I II 11I I V9 CaZiLrww 1ft huncirccLJ

-+-f-+-II-f-+-+-+-+--+-+--+--+----+-+--+-1--t-+-1---t---t--7 rtf eye 04 ~ I 11 V pq-+-+-I~-+--i--+I-t-t--+~i-I---t--+--tr -t--t-Tj-ri~middotltJ ecentimeters 1octGy

I V 5miU~ - aemiton ~~~~I~~+-~~l~-~-T~I~~~r~

t i lt~ I I IS I I liV

FolUlAn C1LBT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion T hat rormants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency namfu along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

CHAPTER II

THEORETICAL BACKGROUND

PhoneticsPhonemics

Phonetics is the branch of linguistics which deals

with the actual speech sounds of a language When dealing

with the phonetic level of linguistic analysis one describes

the sounds of a language in terms of articulation or acoustic

features In articulatory phonetics one describes sounds

in middotterms 9f manner of articulation ie whether it is a

stop fricat~ve etc point of articulation ie) bilabial

(be~ween the lips) dental etc or vowel quality ie

high-front-close (the highest part of the tongue-is very

high in the front of the mouth for producing this particular

sound) etc In acoustic phonetics sounds are described in

terms of the distributions of frequencies characteristic of

the sounds of a language The relationship generally acshy

cepted as existing between artic~latory and ~coustic phonetshy

ics is that certain articulations produce certain distinctive

patterns of frequency distributions It must be emphasized

at this point that both of the aforementioned types of deshy

scriptians deal with all human speech sounds not necessarily

those which perform a signalling function in a particular I

aspect of the language

I I

f

8

Distinctlve features are used to denote signalling

functions The label distinctive feature is used in the

literature to mean two quite different things Bloomfield

describes the categorization with examples which imply

that distinctive sound feature means any feature of the vocal

sound which when changed changes the meaning of a given

word eg pill and bill sin and sing etcri (Pierce 1965)

There Bloomfi~ld labels p as a distinctive sound feature

and b as a different sound feature Later Roman Jakobson

Gunnar M Fant and Morris Halle in their Preliminaries of

sectpeech Analysis take the phonemes of a language and break

them down into their component phonetic features some of

which are distinctive eg voicing in English b vs p

while others are not eg aspiration in English p~ in pin

as opposed to p in spin Anyone language code has a

finite set of distinctive features bullbullbull (Jakobson Fant and

Halle 1961) In English the feature of voicing in the b

of bill as opposed to the absence of voicing for the p

in pill is the phonetic feature which distinguishes these

two sounds A similar presence vs absence of aspiration

does not alter the meaning of any English utterance in fact

it is difficult to make English speakers aware of the fact

that aspiration is or is not present Implicit in this

theoretical approach is the concept that the variation in

human speech for the most part re~resents presence vs

9

1

absence of non-distinctive features of sound

One theoretical approach to linguistic structures

views the phoneme as concurrent bundles of distinctive

features (Jakobson Fant and Halle 1961) Each language

has a finite set of rules for grouping them (distinctive

features) into phQnemes (Jakobson Fant and Halle 1961)

Every phoneme in the language then is composed of a unique

set of distinctive features such that it is different from

any other phoneme by at least one of such distinctive feashy

tures This manner of linguistic signalling has important

implicat~ons toward phonemic analysis of sound systems As

previously mentioned a phoneme is a bundle of distinctive

features which when altered changes meaning In order

to verify whether a sound is a phoneme or not one must

show a word in which the replacement of at least one disti~c-

tive feature makes another word ie a minimal pair difshy

ferentiated by only a single distinctive feature and having

two distinct grammatical or semantical meanings

Phonemics the study of phonem~s is the level of lingushy

istic analysis which answers the question of how language

utilizes sound matter selecting certain of its elements and

adapting them for various ends The prima~y functions of

sound in a language is to distinguish one utterance from anshy

other in normal conversation Phonemic analysis as an opshy

eration examines a~ailable data in order to discover an unshy

derlying structure bullbullbull not an operation which forces a mass

1 0

of data into a structure (Pulgram 19~5) The nature of

each feature is of the essence Thus the composition of

each phoneme becomes of primary importance in a language

The phoneme can only be defined in reference to the larger

frame whi~h is the language of which it is a structured

feature (Pulgram 1965) It is the shortest stretch of

sound which serves a signalling function

Acoustic Theory

I Distinctive feature theory as previously describedI I seems to handle such phonemes s stops fricatives and

I nasals quite well eg the airflow out of the mouth is I

either stopped or it is allowed to escape On the other

1 hand vowels seem to be ranges of phonetic quality whichI

are extremely difficult if not impossible to distinguish

in terms of presence vs ab~~nce of distinctive features

Since this study will not be concerned with consonants but

only w~th vowels it is only necessary to discuss the acousshy

tic nature of vowel qualities from this point on

FundamentalsHarmonics

Vowel quality is determined by a combination of a fundashy

mental and its harmonics A vowel quality displayed on an

oscilloscope shows a very complex single wave form This

wave form is in reality the mathematical sum of a number

of simple wave forms or at least for theoretical purposes

1 1

can be treated as such These wave forms are generated

in the oral tract by the opening and closing of the glotshy

tis The fundamental wave is a sine wave with a frequency

equal to the number of times the glottis opens and closes

each second and an amplitude which is directly pro~ortion-

al to air pressure in the lungs Because of the nature

of sound waves a harmonic is generated at every multiple

of this fundamental eg if the fundamental is 100 cycles

per second then a harmonic is generated at 200 300

400 bullbullbull CO As soon as the complex wave leaves the vocal

chords harmoni6s are filtered out by the nature of the

tissue surrounding the oral tract as well as the cavities

in and adj o 1ning the oral tract The complex wave emerging

from the mouth is the mathematical sum of fundamental and

the harmonics which have not been filtered out by the oral

tract cf Martin Joos Acoustic Phonetics (1 948) chapshy

ters 1 and 2 for a fuller explanation of this process

Acoustics vs Articulation

In the last century far too much energy has b~en exshy

pended in attempts to relate acoustic features to specific

articulatory movements Bloch (1942) illustrates this by

stating qualities are identified by ear but in linguisshy

tic works they are traditionally defined in terms of their

assumed production by the vocal organs This type ofmiddotstudy

is misdirected because the only things that impinge on the

I I

- I

12

human ear are the harmonics which were not filtered out

The articulatory movements which cause the filtration ie

movement of the tongue from front to back creating a series

of filters each of which removes different harmonics

from the complex waves are irrelevant Pike (1943) argues

one should analyze and describe the sounds (or sound waves)

themselves rather than the movements ~roducing them

It has long been noted by acousticians that a variety

of articulatory movements remove the same harmonics and

r~sult in the production of very similar sounds Pierce

(1962) illustrates this by saying

As long as the formants are in their praper positions ie the proper frequencies are passed through the speech mechanism it does not matter whether the unwanted frequencies are filtered out by rounding the lips or moving the tongue to the back ThuQ when Holbrook and Carmody give one front-back position for the tongue for a given English vowel and IPA (International Pho~etic Alphabet) gives another it is quite probable that both are completely correct and that the formant shift is made by compensating for the lack of tongue movement in the speech of some speakers by additional lip rounding bullbullbullbull

Since the hearer of a stream of speech can hear 9nly those harmonics which emerge from the mouth as componshyents of the final complex wave the placement of the formant is of primary importance not the articulation which produced the sound

Therefore a study of the phonetic quality of vowels

demands an instrument which is capable of making an accurate

record of the presence or absence of all the harmonics

having sufficient amplitude to significantly alter the final

wave form The acoustic spectrograph is such an instrument

13

it was the first instrument to make large scale acoustic

a n a ly s e sapr act i c a I po s sibiIi t Y n ( Lad e fog ed 1 967 ) bull

Spectrograph

The acoustic spectrograph is a device ~hich records a

stream of speech 2~4 seconds or less in length This

recording is then fed into the analyzing part of the specshy

trograph where at each successive playing ne frequency

or rather one frequency band is lifted outof the total by

the variable filter (Pulgram 1965) A black ma~king is

made on a piece ofmiddot electro-sensitive paper each time there

is a harmonic present within the frequency band being anashy

lyzed Since the articulators are constantly moving and

changing the filtration characteristics of thevocal tract

the black markings ma~e by a stylus reflect the movements

of the articula~ors in a very broad sense More important

however it makes a precise record of the stimulus ie

the harmonics which reach the ear of the listener Dunn

(1950) says the vowels have asso~iated with them different

frequency regions in which the sound is more intense than

elsewhere in the spectrum The name formant has been apshy

plied to these regions

The next problem then is to relate the concentrations

of power mentioned above ie the formants to human pershy

ception of speech sounds The most widely utilized techshy

nique in this area is one devised by Martin Joos (1948)

~______________________________________~S___________________________________________________shy1

14

generally referred to as his 2 Formant Theory This techshy

nique represents the plotting of formant 1 and formant 2

in a specific wayan a particular chart cf Chart 1 on

p~ 23 This technique is clearly described by Ladefoged

(1967)

The relations between the formant structures of the vowels in a number of words can be conveniently represented by means of formant charts which show the frequency of the firs~ formant at a time in the word when the formant structure is changing at a minimum rate plotted against the frequency of the second formant at the same time

When making these kinds of plots a charting is derived of

vowels for any language which is remarkably like the tradishy

tional impressionistic vowel charts of the 19th century

Esner (1947) illustrated that if the frequency of the first

formant was plotted against the frequency of the second

formant it seemed to equal the relation between formant

frequency and the traditional vowel diagram

Basically this study will reproduce such vowel charts

for a number of examples of each sound in Bahasa Indonesia

Formant 1 will be platted against formant 2 for each vowel

phoneme in a variety of phonemic environments -The purpose

of this will be to determine the range of variation for

every vowel in each e~vironment as produced by a single native

speaker

CHAPTER III

METHODOLOGY

Phoneme Identification

In order to assess the phonetic quality of vowel phoshy

nemes one must first ascertain the number and relationshy

ship of sound contrasts in a language ie the phonemes

The visual representation of the actualization of the phoshy

neme ie the spectrogram can only be made on the basis

of a preceding decision of the linguist on the types and

number of phonemes in the l~nguage to be anaiyzed (Pulgram

1965)~ Phonemic analysis cannot be made with phonetic

data alone it must be made with phonetic data plus a sershy

ies of phonemic premises and procedures (Pike 1947) A

spectrogram conveys phonetic information which aids the

linguist in determining which phonetic features are consisshy

tently present in order to reach the most accurate phonetic

description

There are a variety of premises and procedures which

the investigator may utilize in order to discover the phoshy

nemic structure of a language Pike (1947) argues that the

investigator must have at hand observable native reaction

to native sounds andor know structural facts pertaining to

the phonetic nature of the sounds and their distribution

As stated before a phoneme is a bundle of sound f~atures

1

j

16

which when substituted for another bundle creates a difshy

ference in meaning Since the creation of a different morshy

pheme is the result of the substitution of a different sound

feature these sound features are said to be phonemes

A pair of words in which the first word is the same as the second except for the fact that one segment is replaced by a different but phonetic~lly similar segment in the second word constitutes proof that the two similar segments are phonemically distinct~ bullbullbull Word pairs of this type are said to be MINIMALshyLY DIFFERENJ because no smaller difference in the language can make a differ~nce in meahing in words (Pike 1947)

Hence minimal pairs of words were used to find phonemes

Minimal~y different word pairs prove to be the beginners

single most important tool for the analysis of phonemic difshy

ferences (Pike 1947)

Thus Echols and Shadilys An Indonesian-English Dicshy

tionarv (1968) was ut~lized to find three-phoneme words

containing two consonant sounds with a vowel in medial poshy

sition The process was simply to go through all the words

beginning with consonants and find minimally different t~ree

phoneme words This was done on a purely anthr~poscopic

basis on the part of the investigator If a different letshy

ter was employed to distinguish a different meaning it was

assumed to be a different phoneme The following ~ord pairs

and their meanings are examples of the words found in the

dictionary

ban--tire bin--son of

das-- a shot dos--small box carton

I

1 7

pal--pole pel--field

rang--rank position ring--ring

teh--tea toh--yet nevertheless

After having obtained the words from the dictionary

a native informant was called upon to verify ~he differshy

ance in meaning in the minimal pairs and to pronounce

them so that ~hey could be phonetically transcribed in

al1 impressionistic manner The informant employed was Kok

Djen Su a student at Portland State University from Yogshy

jakartai Indonesia He has been a student in the United

States for approximately two years and speaks broken al shy

though very understandable English Mr Su was horn to Mr

and Mrs Su Hendry Su who both speak Bahasa Indonesia Jashy

vanese and a small amount of Chinese Since his birth the

informant was exposed to a mixture of Javanese and Bahasa

Indonesia but has employed the national language of Indoshy

nesia since the age of three at school His bilingual upshy

bringing it seems to the author does not craate a subshy

stantial difference in the competence of Mr Su in Bahasa

Indonesia In fact he was able to distinguish the proshy

nunciation Qf words in both Javanese and in Bahasa Indoshy

nesia The utilization of one informant deletes any reshy

gional variation or individual variation between informshy

ants Since here we are attempting to ascertain the relashy

tive range of phonetic quality of vowel phonemes in Bahashy

sa Indonesia the informants bilingualism ahould cause

none or very few phonetic distortions

After-having verified the difference in meaning of

the word pairs Kok Djen ~u pronounced the word The

following impressionistic version of the Ihdonesian voshy

wel system was described

front central back

high

mid 1 I

I I low j

i I I

I

u-

E 0

A

1 Spectrograms

The phonemic entities symbolized in the preceding

section represent range-units of phonetic quality The

symbols and their position on the chart are based on the

aural perceptions of the investigator The purpose of the

spectrographic analysis of this data is to determine as

accurately as possible the actual phonetic range represenshy

ted by each of thephonemic symbols

I

i

1 9

In order to make spectrograms from which meani~gful

conclusions can be drawn one must have a native informant

of the language to be studied Spectrograms were made of

the speech of Mr Su the informant described earlier

In order to conserve the time of the informant a

sample of three-phoneme words were recorded The three-

phoneme words begin and end with consonants ahd contain a

vowel in medial position The list appears in Appendix A

The list of words was specifically selec~ed to eliminate

in so far as possible all variatiqn other than that which

is specifically caused by the preceding and following consoshy

nants This is true because by utilizing a single informant

the influence of dialects both regional and social are eshy

liminated and by utilizing one sy~lable words under primary

1stress sequential influences such as the Markov Process

are eliminated since there is no sequence beyond one phoshy

neme preceding and following the vowel This being the case

one should be able to derive from a series of spectrograms

of those vowels both the range of free variation and the

specific influence of each particular consonant on the voshy

weI quality of each medial phoneme

The n~xt st~p in the procedure was to play the tape-

recordings into the spectrograph two or three wo~ds at a

1The Markoy Process is a mechanical way of handling enshytropy in sequential operations IQ linguistics this is stashyted in terms ofthe probability of the occurrence of a parshyticular phoneme morpheme etc in a precise sequence

20

time The machine can handle 24 seconds of speech on one

spectrogram thus two or three words could be analyzed at

the same time as one with no loss in quality or precision

Unfortunately the recordings had to be played into a

microphone which picks up some background noise but by

placing the microp~one of the spectrograph very close to

the loudspeaker of the tape recorder and turning the volume

up slightly this background was eliminated for all pracshy

tical purposes middotIt would have been better to have had a

direct connection between the recordar and the spectrograph

but unfortunately no such devce was available Background

noise shows up as very small specks scattered more or less

at random and unless the volume of such noise is exceedshy

ingly strong does not interfere with the reading of the

spectrograms

Once the machine had completed the analys~s and produced

the graphic record of the list of words a frequency measur~

ing device was produced by the machine cf example below

1 11amp II~ill c=

- n- HE to

11r -shy

bull b mmiddot 1 bull bull L

-

gIl F Jamp u

n _ If

bull III

21

This measuring device is in reality a spectrogram with horishy

zontal markings The first line on the chart represents a

frequency of 0 hertz (hz) Each line above the first repshy

resents a multiple of 500 hz The device is used to locate

th~ center of formants 1 and 2 Since it is graduated in

500 hz it is necessary to interpolate when the center ofmiddot

power for a particular formant falls between two of these

lines This is done by dividing the area between the two

lines in half then dividing one of the halves in half which

gives a range of 125 hz within which the measurement falls

and an estimate is made of the precise measurement within

the 125 hz range This should give formant positions with

an accuraci of greater than plusmn25 hz

When visual location of the formant centers becprnes

difficult a section of the formant can be made cf exshy

ample below Such difficulties with visual location usually

arise when two weak formants overlap Such overlapping

produc~s what appears to the naked eye to be a band of modeshy

rately dark grey bands The sectioner is a built in mech-

IshyfL__---

tete we tt

~

I

1 I

22

anism capable of handling such problems In the preceding

I example the amplitude of each harmonic is proportional

to the length of the line representing that harmonic I

This makes it possible to locate formant centers when vi-

I sual location is difficult

The measurements were then transferred to formant

charts cf Chart 1 on the following page

6

23

CHART I

~

t

1+

t5

1amp

Ie

z~ 2t 2p 16 12 la 8 Iii

I ~

~

I S

l I

I I

~

V V

V T

l( FORMANT V CHART

Vi ~ CcdiOrate4 ift luutdnM I V ~ cycle ~ concf

V 10 eeentl~rsI~ V

V U 5millimctcrs - I $milton

2 zk2 lis ty

I

FOlWAlfT CHART

Placing a single point on this cha-t is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one fOrrUlt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant atmiddotthe frequency named along the top or bottom edge

ex Martin Joos~ Acoustic Phonetics (1948)

CHAPTER IV

FINDINGS

The data provided by the preceding methodology conshy

sisted of a series of scatter patterns on the vowel charts

Each of the dots within the pattern represented one occurshy

rence of a particular vowel To determine the range ofmiddot each

phoneme f the most divergent points in each pattern were con-

nected by a line These lines then circumscribe an area

which included the range of all the vowels in the sample

recognized ~y the informantmiddotas a particular phoneme

Verbal descriptions the actual charts of the phonemes

and the spectrograms utilized willbe found on the followshy

ing pages

25

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 1 range~ on the

vowel chart in a broad scattering from 300-500 hz for forshy

mant 1 and 1500-2100 hz for formant 2

CHART II

1

lid

13

bull

~

It

iA

Ml

ztr Zit zp 1 S lIZ middot1 I a r 8 6

I

f

I I

Ii 3

[7l I I V 1 I

) ~I I i I bull

V I I i bull r J

I V t I I I I I

i tt I

Kl7 I I I iI ~

I I I I I I I I I i I

I I I i I f I ltII

I I l7 I VI

I [7 1

1 I I I Va FORMANTc7 CHART

I

I I I I 173 CaEiIw-atd icw~[7 rf ltfer C0ItdI I I

j I I I i 7 10 e centlCMta1 oct4v

I V 5miU~ bull itonI

r I f 711 t14 j I I I Ik IV

FoiUlAhT CHRT

Placing asinge point on this chart is an assertion that fortcants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at tn(l frequerlcy nameu Slong the right or eft cdampe the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

26

l 1I I - -~

I I iI I

I

[bIs] [bIn]

lt-- -_- -1I

lt i

1 ~ i1_ -shy Ir ~ tmiddotmiddot lt

-- - - ---~--- - - - ----- --

-i -_~ ~ shyI 1

i I I

I I bullbullq_-

I ~~~-~--shyr ~~~~~ -~- I------------------------shy

-----I

[dIm] [sIh]

27

I -[blr]

i1 1 I I

i Ii I

I i I I

ii ___ -J

rmiddot I i

I 1 j

-~ ~~~ ~-~IIlIr~~~

I

1 ____~~l_~~--=~ _ ~--~~~~~~~~~- -

51 hI$ PiiB PD~ii~i

-~ - -- -- ----- ~------- - --- _-- - _ - shy [rIll) [klr]

28

1 I I I

---~S~ -~~~fi~ ~~~~~-~

~l_ middot~ ___

[klk]

I I I

r [dlk]

29

-------- --

-~- shy~--I~~

[tIll]

30

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lEI ranged on the

vowel chart in a thin oval shaped distribution from 400-625

hz for formant 1 and from 1400-2000 hz for formant 2

CHART III

lEI

i

I

1 I

1

1middot

II~~ 5 I~ I lOa I ~--~~~I-+--+-4-+--+---+--++-+-+-+-+--r--t-t--r--t--r--1

I

I I I I

t I

4

I I 1 I ~ I I I I

I t I ~

I I ~

-r--- r--- I V~~~-r~+-+-~~~+-+-~~~~~~~--T-~-r~-r~-r~-T---T--r~

V~~~++4-~~~-4-+-+~~~~~+-~-T-rV~7

~iA~~~~~I+-~~~~~I--~~~-r~~~~~8 FORMANT HHHH~~r+~~-r~+-~+-~I~-I~~rl7V CHART

I II 11I I V9 CaZiLrww 1ft huncirccLJ

-+-f-+-II-f-+-+-+-+--+-+--+--+----+-+--+-1--t-+-1---t---t--7 rtf eye 04 ~ I 11 V pq-+-+-I~-+--i--+I-t-t--+~i-I---t--+--tr -t--t-Tj-ri~middotltJ ecentimeters 1octGy

I V 5miU~ - aemiton ~~~~I~~+-~~l~-~-T~I~~~r~

t i lt~ I I IS I I liV

FolUlAn C1LBT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion T hat rormants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency namfu along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

I I

f

8

Distinctlve features are used to denote signalling

functions The label distinctive feature is used in the

literature to mean two quite different things Bloomfield

describes the categorization with examples which imply

that distinctive sound feature means any feature of the vocal

sound which when changed changes the meaning of a given

word eg pill and bill sin and sing etcri (Pierce 1965)

There Bloomfi~ld labels p as a distinctive sound feature

and b as a different sound feature Later Roman Jakobson

Gunnar M Fant and Morris Halle in their Preliminaries of

sectpeech Analysis take the phonemes of a language and break

them down into their component phonetic features some of

which are distinctive eg voicing in English b vs p

while others are not eg aspiration in English p~ in pin

as opposed to p in spin Anyone language code has a

finite set of distinctive features bullbullbull (Jakobson Fant and

Halle 1961) In English the feature of voicing in the b

of bill as opposed to the absence of voicing for the p

in pill is the phonetic feature which distinguishes these

two sounds A similar presence vs absence of aspiration

does not alter the meaning of any English utterance in fact

it is difficult to make English speakers aware of the fact

that aspiration is or is not present Implicit in this

theoretical approach is the concept that the variation in

human speech for the most part re~resents presence vs

9

1

absence of non-distinctive features of sound

One theoretical approach to linguistic structures

views the phoneme as concurrent bundles of distinctive

features (Jakobson Fant and Halle 1961) Each language

has a finite set of rules for grouping them (distinctive

features) into phQnemes (Jakobson Fant and Halle 1961)

Every phoneme in the language then is composed of a unique

set of distinctive features such that it is different from

any other phoneme by at least one of such distinctive feashy

tures This manner of linguistic signalling has important

implicat~ons toward phonemic analysis of sound systems As

previously mentioned a phoneme is a bundle of distinctive

features which when altered changes meaning In order

to verify whether a sound is a phoneme or not one must

show a word in which the replacement of at least one disti~c-

tive feature makes another word ie a minimal pair difshy

ferentiated by only a single distinctive feature and having

two distinct grammatical or semantical meanings

Phonemics the study of phonem~s is the level of lingushy

istic analysis which answers the question of how language

utilizes sound matter selecting certain of its elements and

adapting them for various ends The prima~y functions of

sound in a language is to distinguish one utterance from anshy

other in normal conversation Phonemic analysis as an opshy

eration examines a~ailable data in order to discover an unshy

derlying structure bullbullbull not an operation which forces a mass

1 0

of data into a structure (Pulgram 19~5) The nature of

each feature is of the essence Thus the composition of

each phoneme becomes of primary importance in a language

The phoneme can only be defined in reference to the larger

frame whi~h is the language of which it is a structured

feature (Pulgram 1965) It is the shortest stretch of

sound which serves a signalling function

Acoustic Theory

I Distinctive feature theory as previously describedI I seems to handle such phonemes s stops fricatives and

I nasals quite well eg the airflow out of the mouth is I

either stopped or it is allowed to escape On the other

1 hand vowels seem to be ranges of phonetic quality whichI

are extremely difficult if not impossible to distinguish

in terms of presence vs ab~~nce of distinctive features

Since this study will not be concerned with consonants but

only w~th vowels it is only necessary to discuss the acousshy

tic nature of vowel qualities from this point on

FundamentalsHarmonics

Vowel quality is determined by a combination of a fundashy

mental and its harmonics A vowel quality displayed on an

oscilloscope shows a very complex single wave form This

wave form is in reality the mathematical sum of a number

of simple wave forms or at least for theoretical purposes

1 1

can be treated as such These wave forms are generated

in the oral tract by the opening and closing of the glotshy

tis The fundamental wave is a sine wave with a frequency

equal to the number of times the glottis opens and closes

each second and an amplitude which is directly pro~ortion-

al to air pressure in the lungs Because of the nature

of sound waves a harmonic is generated at every multiple

of this fundamental eg if the fundamental is 100 cycles

per second then a harmonic is generated at 200 300

400 bullbullbull CO As soon as the complex wave leaves the vocal

chords harmoni6s are filtered out by the nature of the

tissue surrounding the oral tract as well as the cavities

in and adj o 1ning the oral tract The complex wave emerging

from the mouth is the mathematical sum of fundamental and

the harmonics which have not been filtered out by the oral

tract cf Martin Joos Acoustic Phonetics (1 948) chapshy

ters 1 and 2 for a fuller explanation of this process

Acoustics vs Articulation

In the last century far too much energy has b~en exshy

pended in attempts to relate acoustic features to specific

articulatory movements Bloch (1942) illustrates this by

stating qualities are identified by ear but in linguisshy

tic works they are traditionally defined in terms of their

assumed production by the vocal organs This type ofmiddotstudy

is misdirected because the only things that impinge on the

I I

- I

12

human ear are the harmonics which were not filtered out

The articulatory movements which cause the filtration ie

movement of the tongue from front to back creating a series

of filters each of which removes different harmonics

from the complex waves are irrelevant Pike (1943) argues

one should analyze and describe the sounds (or sound waves)

themselves rather than the movements ~roducing them

It has long been noted by acousticians that a variety

of articulatory movements remove the same harmonics and

r~sult in the production of very similar sounds Pierce

(1962) illustrates this by saying

As long as the formants are in their praper positions ie the proper frequencies are passed through the speech mechanism it does not matter whether the unwanted frequencies are filtered out by rounding the lips or moving the tongue to the back ThuQ when Holbrook and Carmody give one front-back position for the tongue for a given English vowel and IPA (International Pho~etic Alphabet) gives another it is quite probable that both are completely correct and that the formant shift is made by compensating for the lack of tongue movement in the speech of some speakers by additional lip rounding bullbullbullbull

Since the hearer of a stream of speech can hear 9nly those harmonics which emerge from the mouth as componshyents of the final complex wave the placement of the formant is of primary importance not the articulation which produced the sound

Therefore a study of the phonetic quality of vowels

demands an instrument which is capable of making an accurate

record of the presence or absence of all the harmonics

having sufficient amplitude to significantly alter the final

wave form The acoustic spectrograph is such an instrument

13

it was the first instrument to make large scale acoustic

a n a ly s e sapr act i c a I po s sibiIi t Y n ( Lad e fog ed 1 967 ) bull

Spectrograph

The acoustic spectrograph is a device ~hich records a

stream of speech 2~4 seconds or less in length This

recording is then fed into the analyzing part of the specshy

trograph where at each successive playing ne frequency

or rather one frequency band is lifted outof the total by

the variable filter (Pulgram 1965) A black ma~king is

made on a piece ofmiddot electro-sensitive paper each time there

is a harmonic present within the frequency band being anashy

lyzed Since the articulators are constantly moving and

changing the filtration characteristics of thevocal tract

the black markings ma~e by a stylus reflect the movements

of the articula~ors in a very broad sense More important

however it makes a precise record of the stimulus ie

the harmonics which reach the ear of the listener Dunn

(1950) says the vowels have asso~iated with them different

frequency regions in which the sound is more intense than

elsewhere in the spectrum The name formant has been apshy

plied to these regions

The next problem then is to relate the concentrations

of power mentioned above ie the formants to human pershy

ception of speech sounds The most widely utilized techshy

nique in this area is one devised by Martin Joos (1948)

~______________________________________~S___________________________________________________shy1

14

generally referred to as his 2 Formant Theory This techshy

nique represents the plotting of formant 1 and formant 2

in a specific wayan a particular chart cf Chart 1 on

p~ 23 This technique is clearly described by Ladefoged

(1967)

The relations between the formant structures of the vowels in a number of words can be conveniently represented by means of formant charts which show the frequency of the firs~ formant at a time in the word when the formant structure is changing at a minimum rate plotted against the frequency of the second formant at the same time

When making these kinds of plots a charting is derived of

vowels for any language which is remarkably like the tradishy

tional impressionistic vowel charts of the 19th century

Esner (1947) illustrated that if the frequency of the first

formant was plotted against the frequency of the second

formant it seemed to equal the relation between formant

frequency and the traditional vowel diagram

Basically this study will reproduce such vowel charts

for a number of examples of each sound in Bahasa Indonesia

Formant 1 will be platted against formant 2 for each vowel

phoneme in a variety of phonemic environments -The purpose

of this will be to determine the range of variation for

every vowel in each e~vironment as produced by a single native

speaker

CHAPTER III

METHODOLOGY

Phoneme Identification

In order to assess the phonetic quality of vowel phoshy

nemes one must first ascertain the number and relationshy

ship of sound contrasts in a language ie the phonemes

The visual representation of the actualization of the phoshy

neme ie the spectrogram can only be made on the basis

of a preceding decision of the linguist on the types and

number of phonemes in the l~nguage to be anaiyzed (Pulgram

1965)~ Phonemic analysis cannot be made with phonetic

data alone it must be made with phonetic data plus a sershy

ies of phonemic premises and procedures (Pike 1947) A

spectrogram conveys phonetic information which aids the

linguist in determining which phonetic features are consisshy

tently present in order to reach the most accurate phonetic

description

There are a variety of premises and procedures which

the investigator may utilize in order to discover the phoshy

nemic structure of a language Pike (1947) argues that the

investigator must have at hand observable native reaction

to native sounds andor know structural facts pertaining to

the phonetic nature of the sounds and their distribution

As stated before a phoneme is a bundle of sound f~atures

1

j

16

which when substituted for another bundle creates a difshy

ference in meaning Since the creation of a different morshy

pheme is the result of the substitution of a different sound

feature these sound features are said to be phonemes

A pair of words in which the first word is the same as the second except for the fact that one segment is replaced by a different but phonetic~lly similar segment in the second word constitutes proof that the two similar segments are phonemically distinct~ bullbullbull Word pairs of this type are said to be MINIMALshyLY DIFFERENJ because no smaller difference in the language can make a differ~nce in meahing in words (Pike 1947)

Hence minimal pairs of words were used to find phonemes

Minimal~y different word pairs prove to be the beginners

single most important tool for the analysis of phonemic difshy

ferences (Pike 1947)

Thus Echols and Shadilys An Indonesian-English Dicshy

tionarv (1968) was ut~lized to find three-phoneme words

containing two consonant sounds with a vowel in medial poshy

sition The process was simply to go through all the words

beginning with consonants and find minimally different t~ree

phoneme words This was done on a purely anthr~poscopic

basis on the part of the investigator If a different letshy

ter was employed to distinguish a different meaning it was

assumed to be a different phoneme The following ~ord pairs

and their meanings are examples of the words found in the

dictionary

ban--tire bin--son of

das-- a shot dos--small box carton

I

1 7

pal--pole pel--field

rang--rank position ring--ring

teh--tea toh--yet nevertheless

After having obtained the words from the dictionary

a native informant was called upon to verify ~he differshy

ance in meaning in the minimal pairs and to pronounce

them so that ~hey could be phonetically transcribed in

al1 impressionistic manner The informant employed was Kok

Djen Su a student at Portland State University from Yogshy

jakartai Indonesia He has been a student in the United

States for approximately two years and speaks broken al shy

though very understandable English Mr Su was horn to Mr

and Mrs Su Hendry Su who both speak Bahasa Indonesia Jashy

vanese and a small amount of Chinese Since his birth the

informant was exposed to a mixture of Javanese and Bahasa

Indonesia but has employed the national language of Indoshy

nesia since the age of three at school His bilingual upshy

bringing it seems to the author does not craate a subshy

stantial difference in the competence of Mr Su in Bahasa

Indonesia In fact he was able to distinguish the proshy

nunciation Qf words in both Javanese and in Bahasa Indoshy

nesia The utilization of one informant deletes any reshy

gional variation or individual variation between informshy

ants Since here we are attempting to ascertain the relashy

tive range of phonetic quality of vowel phonemes in Bahashy

sa Indonesia the informants bilingualism ahould cause

none or very few phonetic distortions

After-having verified the difference in meaning of

the word pairs Kok Djen ~u pronounced the word The

following impressionistic version of the Ihdonesian voshy

wel system was described

front central back

high

mid 1 I

I I low j

i I I

I

u-

E 0

A

1 Spectrograms

The phonemic entities symbolized in the preceding

section represent range-units of phonetic quality The

symbols and their position on the chart are based on the

aural perceptions of the investigator The purpose of the

spectrographic analysis of this data is to determine as

accurately as possible the actual phonetic range represenshy

ted by each of thephonemic symbols

I

i

1 9

In order to make spectrograms from which meani~gful

conclusions can be drawn one must have a native informant

of the language to be studied Spectrograms were made of

the speech of Mr Su the informant described earlier

In order to conserve the time of the informant a

sample of three-phoneme words were recorded The three-

phoneme words begin and end with consonants ahd contain a

vowel in medial position The list appears in Appendix A

The list of words was specifically selec~ed to eliminate

in so far as possible all variatiqn other than that which

is specifically caused by the preceding and following consoshy

nants This is true because by utilizing a single informant

the influence of dialects both regional and social are eshy

liminated and by utilizing one sy~lable words under primary

1stress sequential influences such as the Markov Process

are eliminated since there is no sequence beyond one phoshy

neme preceding and following the vowel This being the case

one should be able to derive from a series of spectrograms

of those vowels both the range of free variation and the

specific influence of each particular consonant on the voshy

weI quality of each medial phoneme

The n~xt st~p in the procedure was to play the tape-

recordings into the spectrograph two or three wo~ds at a

1The Markoy Process is a mechanical way of handling enshytropy in sequential operations IQ linguistics this is stashyted in terms ofthe probability of the occurrence of a parshyticular phoneme morpheme etc in a precise sequence

20

time The machine can handle 24 seconds of speech on one

spectrogram thus two or three words could be analyzed at

the same time as one with no loss in quality or precision

Unfortunately the recordings had to be played into a

microphone which picks up some background noise but by

placing the microp~one of the spectrograph very close to

the loudspeaker of the tape recorder and turning the volume

up slightly this background was eliminated for all pracshy

tical purposes middotIt would have been better to have had a

direct connection between the recordar and the spectrograph

but unfortunately no such devce was available Background

noise shows up as very small specks scattered more or less

at random and unless the volume of such noise is exceedshy

ingly strong does not interfere with the reading of the

spectrograms

Once the machine had completed the analys~s and produced

the graphic record of the list of words a frequency measur~

ing device was produced by the machine cf example below

1 11amp II~ill c=

- n- HE to

11r -shy

bull b mmiddot 1 bull bull L

-

gIl F Jamp u

n _ If

bull III

21

This measuring device is in reality a spectrogram with horishy

zontal markings The first line on the chart represents a

frequency of 0 hertz (hz) Each line above the first repshy

resents a multiple of 500 hz The device is used to locate

th~ center of formants 1 and 2 Since it is graduated in

500 hz it is necessary to interpolate when the center ofmiddot

power for a particular formant falls between two of these

lines This is done by dividing the area between the two

lines in half then dividing one of the halves in half which

gives a range of 125 hz within which the measurement falls

and an estimate is made of the precise measurement within

the 125 hz range This should give formant positions with

an accuraci of greater than plusmn25 hz

When visual location of the formant centers becprnes

difficult a section of the formant can be made cf exshy

ample below Such difficulties with visual location usually

arise when two weak formants overlap Such overlapping

produc~s what appears to the naked eye to be a band of modeshy

rately dark grey bands The sectioner is a built in mech-

IshyfL__---

tete we tt

~

I

1 I

22

anism capable of handling such problems In the preceding

I example the amplitude of each harmonic is proportional

to the length of the line representing that harmonic I

This makes it possible to locate formant centers when vi-

I sual location is difficult

The measurements were then transferred to formant

charts cf Chart 1 on the following page

6

23

CHART I

~

t

1+

t5

1amp

Ie

z~ 2t 2p 16 12 la 8 Iii

I ~

~

I S

l I

I I

~

V V

V T

l( FORMANT V CHART

Vi ~ CcdiOrate4 ift luutdnM I V ~ cycle ~ concf

V 10 eeentl~rsI~ V

V U 5millimctcrs - I $milton

2 zk2 lis ty

I

FOlWAlfT CHART

Placing a single point on this cha-t is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one fOrrUlt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant atmiddotthe frequency named along the top or bottom edge

ex Martin Joos~ Acoustic Phonetics (1948)

CHAPTER IV

FINDINGS

The data provided by the preceding methodology conshy

sisted of a series of scatter patterns on the vowel charts

Each of the dots within the pattern represented one occurshy

rence of a particular vowel To determine the range ofmiddot each

phoneme f the most divergent points in each pattern were con-

nected by a line These lines then circumscribe an area

which included the range of all the vowels in the sample

recognized ~y the informantmiddotas a particular phoneme

Verbal descriptions the actual charts of the phonemes

and the spectrograms utilized willbe found on the followshy

ing pages

25

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 1 range~ on the

vowel chart in a broad scattering from 300-500 hz for forshy

mant 1 and 1500-2100 hz for formant 2

CHART II

1

lid

13

bull

~

It

iA

Ml

ztr Zit zp 1 S lIZ middot1 I a r 8 6

I

f

I I

Ii 3

[7l I I V 1 I

) ~I I i I bull

V I I i bull r J

I V t I I I I I

i tt I

Kl7 I I I iI ~

I I I I I I I I I i I

I I I i I f I ltII

I I l7 I VI

I [7 1

1 I I I Va FORMANTc7 CHART

I

I I I I 173 CaEiIw-atd icw~[7 rf ltfer C0ItdI I I

j I I I i 7 10 e centlCMta1 oct4v

I V 5miU~ bull itonI

r I f 711 t14 j I I I Ik IV

FoiUlAhT CHRT

Placing asinge point on this chart is an assertion that fortcants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at tn(l frequerlcy nameu Slong the right or eft cdampe the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

26

l 1I I - -~

I I iI I

I

[bIs] [bIn]

lt-- -_- -1I

lt i

1 ~ i1_ -shy Ir ~ tmiddotmiddot lt

-- - - ---~--- - - - ----- --

-i -_~ ~ shyI 1

i I I

I I bullbullq_-

I ~~~-~--shyr ~~~~~ -~- I------------------------shy

-----I

[dIm] [sIh]

27

I -[blr]

i1 1 I I

i Ii I

I i I I

ii ___ -J

rmiddot I i

I 1 j

-~ ~~~ ~-~IIlIr~~~

I

1 ____~~l_~~--=~ _ ~--~~~~~~~~~- -

51 hI$ PiiB PD~ii~i

-~ - -- -- ----- ~------- - --- _-- - _ - shy [rIll) [klr]

28

1 I I I

---~S~ -~~~fi~ ~~~~~-~

~l_ middot~ ___

[klk]

I I I

r [dlk]

29

-------- --

-~- shy~--I~~

[tIll]

30

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lEI ranged on the

vowel chart in a thin oval shaped distribution from 400-625

hz for formant 1 and from 1400-2000 hz for formant 2

CHART III

lEI

i

I

1 I

1

1middot

II~~ 5 I~ I lOa I ~--~~~I-+--+-4-+--+---+--++-+-+-+-+--r--t-t--r--t--r--1

I

I I I I

t I

4

I I 1 I ~ I I I I

I t I ~

I I ~

-r--- r--- I V~~~-r~+-+-~~~+-+-~~~~~~~--T-~-r~-r~-r~-T---T--r~

V~~~++4-~~~-4-+-+~~~~~+-~-T-rV~7

~iA~~~~~I+-~~~~~I--~~~-r~~~~~8 FORMANT HHHH~~r+~~-r~+-~+-~I~-I~~rl7V CHART

I II 11I I V9 CaZiLrww 1ft huncirccLJ

-+-f-+-II-f-+-+-+-+--+-+--+--+----+-+--+-1--t-+-1---t---t--7 rtf eye 04 ~ I 11 V pq-+-+-I~-+--i--+I-t-t--+~i-I---t--+--tr -t--t-Tj-ri~middotltJ ecentimeters 1octGy

I V 5miU~ - aemiton ~~~~I~~+-~~l~-~-T~I~~~r~

t i lt~ I I IS I I liV

FolUlAn C1LBT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion T hat rormants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency namfu along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

9

1

absence of non-distinctive features of sound

One theoretical approach to linguistic structures

views the phoneme as concurrent bundles of distinctive

features (Jakobson Fant and Halle 1961) Each language

has a finite set of rules for grouping them (distinctive

features) into phQnemes (Jakobson Fant and Halle 1961)

Every phoneme in the language then is composed of a unique

set of distinctive features such that it is different from

any other phoneme by at least one of such distinctive feashy

tures This manner of linguistic signalling has important

implicat~ons toward phonemic analysis of sound systems As

previously mentioned a phoneme is a bundle of distinctive

features which when altered changes meaning In order

to verify whether a sound is a phoneme or not one must

show a word in which the replacement of at least one disti~c-

tive feature makes another word ie a minimal pair difshy

ferentiated by only a single distinctive feature and having

two distinct grammatical or semantical meanings

Phonemics the study of phonem~s is the level of lingushy

istic analysis which answers the question of how language

utilizes sound matter selecting certain of its elements and

adapting them for various ends The prima~y functions of

sound in a language is to distinguish one utterance from anshy

other in normal conversation Phonemic analysis as an opshy

eration examines a~ailable data in order to discover an unshy

derlying structure bullbullbull not an operation which forces a mass

1 0

of data into a structure (Pulgram 19~5) The nature of

each feature is of the essence Thus the composition of

each phoneme becomes of primary importance in a language

The phoneme can only be defined in reference to the larger

frame whi~h is the language of which it is a structured

feature (Pulgram 1965) It is the shortest stretch of

sound which serves a signalling function

Acoustic Theory

I Distinctive feature theory as previously describedI I seems to handle such phonemes s stops fricatives and

I nasals quite well eg the airflow out of the mouth is I

either stopped or it is allowed to escape On the other

1 hand vowels seem to be ranges of phonetic quality whichI

are extremely difficult if not impossible to distinguish

in terms of presence vs ab~~nce of distinctive features

Since this study will not be concerned with consonants but

only w~th vowels it is only necessary to discuss the acousshy

tic nature of vowel qualities from this point on

FundamentalsHarmonics

Vowel quality is determined by a combination of a fundashy

mental and its harmonics A vowel quality displayed on an

oscilloscope shows a very complex single wave form This

wave form is in reality the mathematical sum of a number

of simple wave forms or at least for theoretical purposes

1 1

can be treated as such These wave forms are generated

in the oral tract by the opening and closing of the glotshy

tis The fundamental wave is a sine wave with a frequency

equal to the number of times the glottis opens and closes

each second and an amplitude which is directly pro~ortion-

al to air pressure in the lungs Because of the nature

of sound waves a harmonic is generated at every multiple

of this fundamental eg if the fundamental is 100 cycles

per second then a harmonic is generated at 200 300

400 bullbullbull CO As soon as the complex wave leaves the vocal

chords harmoni6s are filtered out by the nature of the

tissue surrounding the oral tract as well as the cavities

in and adj o 1ning the oral tract The complex wave emerging

from the mouth is the mathematical sum of fundamental and

the harmonics which have not been filtered out by the oral

tract cf Martin Joos Acoustic Phonetics (1 948) chapshy

ters 1 and 2 for a fuller explanation of this process

Acoustics vs Articulation

In the last century far too much energy has b~en exshy

pended in attempts to relate acoustic features to specific

articulatory movements Bloch (1942) illustrates this by

stating qualities are identified by ear but in linguisshy

tic works they are traditionally defined in terms of their

assumed production by the vocal organs This type ofmiddotstudy

is misdirected because the only things that impinge on the

I I

- I

12

human ear are the harmonics which were not filtered out

The articulatory movements which cause the filtration ie

movement of the tongue from front to back creating a series

of filters each of which removes different harmonics

from the complex waves are irrelevant Pike (1943) argues

one should analyze and describe the sounds (or sound waves)

themselves rather than the movements ~roducing them

It has long been noted by acousticians that a variety

of articulatory movements remove the same harmonics and

r~sult in the production of very similar sounds Pierce

(1962) illustrates this by saying

As long as the formants are in their praper positions ie the proper frequencies are passed through the speech mechanism it does not matter whether the unwanted frequencies are filtered out by rounding the lips or moving the tongue to the back ThuQ when Holbrook and Carmody give one front-back position for the tongue for a given English vowel and IPA (International Pho~etic Alphabet) gives another it is quite probable that both are completely correct and that the formant shift is made by compensating for the lack of tongue movement in the speech of some speakers by additional lip rounding bullbullbullbull

Since the hearer of a stream of speech can hear 9nly those harmonics which emerge from the mouth as componshyents of the final complex wave the placement of the formant is of primary importance not the articulation which produced the sound

Therefore a study of the phonetic quality of vowels

demands an instrument which is capable of making an accurate

record of the presence or absence of all the harmonics

having sufficient amplitude to significantly alter the final

wave form The acoustic spectrograph is such an instrument

13

it was the first instrument to make large scale acoustic

a n a ly s e sapr act i c a I po s sibiIi t Y n ( Lad e fog ed 1 967 ) bull

Spectrograph

The acoustic spectrograph is a device ~hich records a

stream of speech 2~4 seconds or less in length This

recording is then fed into the analyzing part of the specshy

trograph where at each successive playing ne frequency

or rather one frequency band is lifted outof the total by

the variable filter (Pulgram 1965) A black ma~king is

made on a piece ofmiddot electro-sensitive paper each time there

is a harmonic present within the frequency band being anashy

lyzed Since the articulators are constantly moving and

changing the filtration characteristics of thevocal tract

the black markings ma~e by a stylus reflect the movements

of the articula~ors in a very broad sense More important

however it makes a precise record of the stimulus ie

the harmonics which reach the ear of the listener Dunn

(1950) says the vowels have asso~iated with them different

frequency regions in which the sound is more intense than

elsewhere in the spectrum The name formant has been apshy

plied to these regions

The next problem then is to relate the concentrations

of power mentioned above ie the formants to human pershy

ception of speech sounds The most widely utilized techshy

nique in this area is one devised by Martin Joos (1948)

~______________________________________~S___________________________________________________shy1

14

generally referred to as his 2 Formant Theory This techshy

nique represents the plotting of formant 1 and formant 2

in a specific wayan a particular chart cf Chart 1 on

p~ 23 This technique is clearly described by Ladefoged

(1967)

The relations between the formant structures of the vowels in a number of words can be conveniently represented by means of formant charts which show the frequency of the firs~ formant at a time in the word when the formant structure is changing at a minimum rate plotted against the frequency of the second formant at the same time

When making these kinds of plots a charting is derived of

vowels for any language which is remarkably like the tradishy

tional impressionistic vowel charts of the 19th century

Esner (1947) illustrated that if the frequency of the first

formant was plotted against the frequency of the second

formant it seemed to equal the relation between formant

frequency and the traditional vowel diagram

Basically this study will reproduce such vowel charts

for a number of examples of each sound in Bahasa Indonesia

Formant 1 will be platted against formant 2 for each vowel

phoneme in a variety of phonemic environments -The purpose

of this will be to determine the range of variation for

every vowel in each e~vironment as produced by a single native

speaker

CHAPTER III

METHODOLOGY

Phoneme Identification

In order to assess the phonetic quality of vowel phoshy

nemes one must first ascertain the number and relationshy

ship of sound contrasts in a language ie the phonemes

The visual representation of the actualization of the phoshy

neme ie the spectrogram can only be made on the basis

of a preceding decision of the linguist on the types and

number of phonemes in the l~nguage to be anaiyzed (Pulgram

1965)~ Phonemic analysis cannot be made with phonetic

data alone it must be made with phonetic data plus a sershy

ies of phonemic premises and procedures (Pike 1947) A

spectrogram conveys phonetic information which aids the

linguist in determining which phonetic features are consisshy

tently present in order to reach the most accurate phonetic

description

There are a variety of premises and procedures which

the investigator may utilize in order to discover the phoshy

nemic structure of a language Pike (1947) argues that the

investigator must have at hand observable native reaction

to native sounds andor know structural facts pertaining to

the phonetic nature of the sounds and their distribution

As stated before a phoneme is a bundle of sound f~atures

1

j

16

which when substituted for another bundle creates a difshy

ference in meaning Since the creation of a different morshy

pheme is the result of the substitution of a different sound

feature these sound features are said to be phonemes

A pair of words in which the first word is the same as the second except for the fact that one segment is replaced by a different but phonetic~lly similar segment in the second word constitutes proof that the two similar segments are phonemically distinct~ bullbullbull Word pairs of this type are said to be MINIMALshyLY DIFFERENJ because no smaller difference in the language can make a differ~nce in meahing in words (Pike 1947)

Hence minimal pairs of words were used to find phonemes

Minimal~y different word pairs prove to be the beginners

single most important tool for the analysis of phonemic difshy

ferences (Pike 1947)

Thus Echols and Shadilys An Indonesian-English Dicshy

tionarv (1968) was ut~lized to find three-phoneme words

containing two consonant sounds with a vowel in medial poshy

sition The process was simply to go through all the words

beginning with consonants and find minimally different t~ree

phoneme words This was done on a purely anthr~poscopic

basis on the part of the investigator If a different letshy

ter was employed to distinguish a different meaning it was

assumed to be a different phoneme The following ~ord pairs

and their meanings are examples of the words found in the

dictionary

ban--tire bin--son of

das-- a shot dos--small box carton

I

1 7

pal--pole pel--field

rang--rank position ring--ring

teh--tea toh--yet nevertheless

After having obtained the words from the dictionary

a native informant was called upon to verify ~he differshy

ance in meaning in the minimal pairs and to pronounce

them so that ~hey could be phonetically transcribed in

al1 impressionistic manner The informant employed was Kok

Djen Su a student at Portland State University from Yogshy

jakartai Indonesia He has been a student in the United

States for approximately two years and speaks broken al shy

though very understandable English Mr Su was horn to Mr

and Mrs Su Hendry Su who both speak Bahasa Indonesia Jashy

vanese and a small amount of Chinese Since his birth the

informant was exposed to a mixture of Javanese and Bahasa

Indonesia but has employed the national language of Indoshy

nesia since the age of three at school His bilingual upshy

bringing it seems to the author does not craate a subshy

stantial difference in the competence of Mr Su in Bahasa

Indonesia In fact he was able to distinguish the proshy

nunciation Qf words in both Javanese and in Bahasa Indoshy

nesia The utilization of one informant deletes any reshy

gional variation or individual variation between informshy

ants Since here we are attempting to ascertain the relashy

tive range of phonetic quality of vowel phonemes in Bahashy

sa Indonesia the informants bilingualism ahould cause

none or very few phonetic distortions

After-having verified the difference in meaning of

the word pairs Kok Djen ~u pronounced the word The

following impressionistic version of the Ihdonesian voshy

wel system was described

front central back

high

mid 1 I

I I low j

i I I

I

u-

E 0

A

1 Spectrograms

The phonemic entities symbolized in the preceding

section represent range-units of phonetic quality The

symbols and their position on the chart are based on the

aural perceptions of the investigator The purpose of the

spectrographic analysis of this data is to determine as

accurately as possible the actual phonetic range represenshy

ted by each of thephonemic symbols

I

i

1 9

In order to make spectrograms from which meani~gful

conclusions can be drawn one must have a native informant

of the language to be studied Spectrograms were made of

the speech of Mr Su the informant described earlier

In order to conserve the time of the informant a

sample of three-phoneme words were recorded The three-

phoneme words begin and end with consonants ahd contain a

vowel in medial position The list appears in Appendix A

The list of words was specifically selec~ed to eliminate

in so far as possible all variatiqn other than that which

is specifically caused by the preceding and following consoshy

nants This is true because by utilizing a single informant

the influence of dialects both regional and social are eshy

liminated and by utilizing one sy~lable words under primary

1stress sequential influences such as the Markov Process

are eliminated since there is no sequence beyond one phoshy

neme preceding and following the vowel This being the case

one should be able to derive from a series of spectrograms

of those vowels both the range of free variation and the

specific influence of each particular consonant on the voshy

weI quality of each medial phoneme

The n~xt st~p in the procedure was to play the tape-

recordings into the spectrograph two or three wo~ds at a

1The Markoy Process is a mechanical way of handling enshytropy in sequential operations IQ linguistics this is stashyted in terms ofthe probability of the occurrence of a parshyticular phoneme morpheme etc in a precise sequence

20

time The machine can handle 24 seconds of speech on one

spectrogram thus two or three words could be analyzed at

the same time as one with no loss in quality or precision

Unfortunately the recordings had to be played into a

microphone which picks up some background noise but by

placing the microp~one of the spectrograph very close to

the loudspeaker of the tape recorder and turning the volume

up slightly this background was eliminated for all pracshy

tical purposes middotIt would have been better to have had a

direct connection between the recordar and the spectrograph

but unfortunately no such devce was available Background

noise shows up as very small specks scattered more or less

at random and unless the volume of such noise is exceedshy

ingly strong does not interfere with the reading of the

spectrograms

Once the machine had completed the analys~s and produced

the graphic record of the list of words a frequency measur~

ing device was produced by the machine cf example below

1 11amp II~ill c=

- n- HE to

11r -shy

bull b mmiddot 1 bull bull L

-

gIl F Jamp u

n _ If

bull III

21

This measuring device is in reality a spectrogram with horishy

zontal markings The first line on the chart represents a

frequency of 0 hertz (hz) Each line above the first repshy

resents a multiple of 500 hz The device is used to locate

th~ center of formants 1 and 2 Since it is graduated in

500 hz it is necessary to interpolate when the center ofmiddot

power for a particular formant falls between two of these

lines This is done by dividing the area between the two

lines in half then dividing one of the halves in half which

gives a range of 125 hz within which the measurement falls

and an estimate is made of the precise measurement within

the 125 hz range This should give formant positions with

an accuraci of greater than plusmn25 hz

When visual location of the formant centers becprnes

difficult a section of the formant can be made cf exshy

ample below Such difficulties with visual location usually

arise when two weak formants overlap Such overlapping

produc~s what appears to the naked eye to be a band of modeshy

rately dark grey bands The sectioner is a built in mech-

IshyfL__---

tete we tt

~

I

1 I

22

anism capable of handling such problems In the preceding

I example the amplitude of each harmonic is proportional

to the length of the line representing that harmonic I

This makes it possible to locate formant centers when vi-

I sual location is difficult

The measurements were then transferred to formant

charts cf Chart 1 on the following page

6

23

CHART I

~

t

1+

t5

1amp

Ie

z~ 2t 2p 16 12 la 8 Iii

I ~

~

I S

l I

I I

~

V V

V T

l( FORMANT V CHART

Vi ~ CcdiOrate4 ift luutdnM I V ~ cycle ~ concf

V 10 eeentl~rsI~ V

V U 5millimctcrs - I $milton

2 zk2 lis ty

I

FOlWAlfT CHART

Placing a single point on this cha-t is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one fOrrUlt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant atmiddotthe frequency named along the top or bottom edge

ex Martin Joos~ Acoustic Phonetics (1948)

CHAPTER IV

FINDINGS

The data provided by the preceding methodology conshy

sisted of a series of scatter patterns on the vowel charts

Each of the dots within the pattern represented one occurshy

rence of a particular vowel To determine the range ofmiddot each

phoneme f the most divergent points in each pattern were con-

nected by a line These lines then circumscribe an area

which included the range of all the vowels in the sample

recognized ~y the informantmiddotas a particular phoneme

Verbal descriptions the actual charts of the phonemes

and the spectrograms utilized willbe found on the followshy

ing pages

25

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 1 range~ on the

vowel chart in a broad scattering from 300-500 hz for forshy

mant 1 and 1500-2100 hz for formant 2

CHART II

1

lid

13

bull

~

It

iA

Ml

ztr Zit zp 1 S lIZ middot1 I a r 8 6

I

f

I I

Ii 3

[7l I I V 1 I

) ~I I i I bull

V I I i bull r J

I V t I I I I I

i tt I

Kl7 I I I iI ~

I I I I I I I I I i I

I I I i I f I ltII

I I l7 I VI

I [7 1

1 I I I Va FORMANTc7 CHART

I

I I I I 173 CaEiIw-atd icw~[7 rf ltfer C0ItdI I I

j I I I i 7 10 e centlCMta1 oct4v

I V 5miU~ bull itonI

r I f 711 t14 j I I I Ik IV

FoiUlAhT CHRT

Placing asinge point on this chart is an assertion that fortcants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at tn(l frequerlcy nameu Slong the right or eft cdampe the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

26

l 1I I - -~

I I iI I

I

[bIs] [bIn]

lt-- -_- -1I

lt i

1 ~ i1_ -shy Ir ~ tmiddotmiddot lt

-- - - ---~--- - - - ----- --

-i -_~ ~ shyI 1

i I I

I I bullbullq_-

I ~~~-~--shyr ~~~~~ -~- I------------------------shy

-----I

[dIm] [sIh]

27

I -[blr]

i1 1 I I

i Ii I

I i I I

ii ___ -J

rmiddot I i

I 1 j

-~ ~~~ ~-~IIlIr~~~

I

1 ____~~l_~~--=~ _ ~--~~~~~~~~~- -

51 hI$ PiiB PD~ii~i

-~ - -- -- ----- ~------- - --- _-- - _ - shy [rIll) [klr]

28

1 I I I

---~S~ -~~~fi~ ~~~~~-~

~l_ middot~ ___

[klk]

I I I

r [dlk]

29

-------- --

-~- shy~--I~~

[tIll]

30

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lEI ranged on the

vowel chart in a thin oval shaped distribution from 400-625

hz for formant 1 and from 1400-2000 hz for formant 2

CHART III

lEI

i

I

1 I

1

1middot

II~~ 5 I~ I lOa I ~--~~~I-+--+-4-+--+---+--++-+-+-+-+--r--t-t--r--t--r--1

I

I I I I

t I

4

I I 1 I ~ I I I I

I t I ~

I I ~

-r--- r--- I V~~~-r~+-+-~~~+-+-~~~~~~~--T-~-r~-r~-r~-T---T--r~

V~~~++4-~~~-4-+-+~~~~~+-~-T-rV~7

~iA~~~~~I+-~~~~~I--~~~-r~~~~~8 FORMANT HHHH~~r+~~-r~+-~+-~I~-I~~rl7V CHART

I II 11I I V9 CaZiLrww 1ft huncirccLJ

-+-f-+-II-f-+-+-+-+--+-+--+--+----+-+--+-1--t-+-1---t---t--7 rtf eye 04 ~ I 11 V pq-+-+-I~-+--i--+I-t-t--+~i-I---t--+--tr -t--t-Tj-ri~middotltJ ecentimeters 1octGy

I V 5miU~ - aemiton ~~~~I~~+-~~l~-~-T~I~~~r~

t i lt~ I I IS I I liV

FolUlAn C1LBT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion T hat rormants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency namfu along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

1 0

of data into a structure (Pulgram 19~5) The nature of

each feature is of the essence Thus the composition of

each phoneme becomes of primary importance in a language

The phoneme can only be defined in reference to the larger

frame whi~h is the language of which it is a structured

feature (Pulgram 1965) It is the shortest stretch of

sound which serves a signalling function

Acoustic Theory

I Distinctive feature theory as previously describedI I seems to handle such phonemes s stops fricatives and

I nasals quite well eg the airflow out of the mouth is I

either stopped or it is allowed to escape On the other

1 hand vowels seem to be ranges of phonetic quality whichI

are extremely difficult if not impossible to distinguish

in terms of presence vs ab~~nce of distinctive features

Since this study will not be concerned with consonants but

only w~th vowels it is only necessary to discuss the acousshy

tic nature of vowel qualities from this point on

FundamentalsHarmonics

Vowel quality is determined by a combination of a fundashy

mental and its harmonics A vowel quality displayed on an

oscilloscope shows a very complex single wave form This

wave form is in reality the mathematical sum of a number

of simple wave forms or at least for theoretical purposes

1 1

can be treated as such These wave forms are generated

in the oral tract by the opening and closing of the glotshy

tis The fundamental wave is a sine wave with a frequency

equal to the number of times the glottis opens and closes

each second and an amplitude which is directly pro~ortion-

al to air pressure in the lungs Because of the nature

of sound waves a harmonic is generated at every multiple

of this fundamental eg if the fundamental is 100 cycles

per second then a harmonic is generated at 200 300

400 bullbullbull CO As soon as the complex wave leaves the vocal

chords harmoni6s are filtered out by the nature of the

tissue surrounding the oral tract as well as the cavities

in and adj o 1ning the oral tract The complex wave emerging

from the mouth is the mathematical sum of fundamental and

the harmonics which have not been filtered out by the oral

tract cf Martin Joos Acoustic Phonetics (1 948) chapshy

ters 1 and 2 for a fuller explanation of this process

Acoustics vs Articulation

In the last century far too much energy has b~en exshy

pended in attempts to relate acoustic features to specific

articulatory movements Bloch (1942) illustrates this by

stating qualities are identified by ear but in linguisshy

tic works they are traditionally defined in terms of their

assumed production by the vocal organs This type ofmiddotstudy

is misdirected because the only things that impinge on the

I I

- I

12

human ear are the harmonics which were not filtered out

The articulatory movements which cause the filtration ie

movement of the tongue from front to back creating a series

of filters each of which removes different harmonics

from the complex waves are irrelevant Pike (1943) argues

one should analyze and describe the sounds (or sound waves)

themselves rather than the movements ~roducing them

It has long been noted by acousticians that a variety

of articulatory movements remove the same harmonics and

r~sult in the production of very similar sounds Pierce

(1962) illustrates this by saying

As long as the formants are in their praper positions ie the proper frequencies are passed through the speech mechanism it does not matter whether the unwanted frequencies are filtered out by rounding the lips or moving the tongue to the back ThuQ when Holbrook and Carmody give one front-back position for the tongue for a given English vowel and IPA (International Pho~etic Alphabet) gives another it is quite probable that both are completely correct and that the formant shift is made by compensating for the lack of tongue movement in the speech of some speakers by additional lip rounding bullbullbullbull

Since the hearer of a stream of speech can hear 9nly those harmonics which emerge from the mouth as componshyents of the final complex wave the placement of the formant is of primary importance not the articulation which produced the sound

Therefore a study of the phonetic quality of vowels

demands an instrument which is capable of making an accurate

record of the presence or absence of all the harmonics

having sufficient amplitude to significantly alter the final

wave form The acoustic spectrograph is such an instrument

13

it was the first instrument to make large scale acoustic

a n a ly s e sapr act i c a I po s sibiIi t Y n ( Lad e fog ed 1 967 ) bull

Spectrograph

The acoustic spectrograph is a device ~hich records a

stream of speech 2~4 seconds or less in length This

recording is then fed into the analyzing part of the specshy

trograph where at each successive playing ne frequency

or rather one frequency band is lifted outof the total by

the variable filter (Pulgram 1965) A black ma~king is

made on a piece ofmiddot electro-sensitive paper each time there

is a harmonic present within the frequency band being anashy

lyzed Since the articulators are constantly moving and

changing the filtration characteristics of thevocal tract

the black markings ma~e by a stylus reflect the movements

of the articula~ors in a very broad sense More important

however it makes a precise record of the stimulus ie

the harmonics which reach the ear of the listener Dunn

(1950) says the vowels have asso~iated with them different

frequency regions in which the sound is more intense than

elsewhere in the spectrum The name formant has been apshy

plied to these regions

The next problem then is to relate the concentrations

of power mentioned above ie the formants to human pershy

ception of speech sounds The most widely utilized techshy

nique in this area is one devised by Martin Joos (1948)

~______________________________________~S___________________________________________________shy1

14

generally referred to as his 2 Formant Theory This techshy

nique represents the plotting of formant 1 and formant 2

in a specific wayan a particular chart cf Chart 1 on

p~ 23 This technique is clearly described by Ladefoged

(1967)

The relations between the formant structures of the vowels in a number of words can be conveniently represented by means of formant charts which show the frequency of the firs~ formant at a time in the word when the formant structure is changing at a minimum rate plotted against the frequency of the second formant at the same time

When making these kinds of plots a charting is derived of

vowels for any language which is remarkably like the tradishy

tional impressionistic vowel charts of the 19th century

Esner (1947) illustrated that if the frequency of the first

formant was plotted against the frequency of the second

formant it seemed to equal the relation between formant

frequency and the traditional vowel diagram

Basically this study will reproduce such vowel charts

for a number of examples of each sound in Bahasa Indonesia

Formant 1 will be platted against formant 2 for each vowel

phoneme in a variety of phonemic environments -The purpose

of this will be to determine the range of variation for

every vowel in each e~vironment as produced by a single native

speaker

CHAPTER III

METHODOLOGY

Phoneme Identification

In order to assess the phonetic quality of vowel phoshy

nemes one must first ascertain the number and relationshy

ship of sound contrasts in a language ie the phonemes

The visual representation of the actualization of the phoshy

neme ie the spectrogram can only be made on the basis

of a preceding decision of the linguist on the types and

number of phonemes in the l~nguage to be anaiyzed (Pulgram

1965)~ Phonemic analysis cannot be made with phonetic

data alone it must be made with phonetic data plus a sershy

ies of phonemic premises and procedures (Pike 1947) A

spectrogram conveys phonetic information which aids the

linguist in determining which phonetic features are consisshy

tently present in order to reach the most accurate phonetic

description

There are a variety of premises and procedures which

the investigator may utilize in order to discover the phoshy

nemic structure of a language Pike (1947) argues that the

investigator must have at hand observable native reaction

to native sounds andor know structural facts pertaining to

the phonetic nature of the sounds and their distribution

As stated before a phoneme is a bundle of sound f~atures

1

j

16

which when substituted for another bundle creates a difshy

ference in meaning Since the creation of a different morshy

pheme is the result of the substitution of a different sound

feature these sound features are said to be phonemes

A pair of words in which the first word is the same as the second except for the fact that one segment is replaced by a different but phonetic~lly similar segment in the second word constitutes proof that the two similar segments are phonemically distinct~ bullbullbull Word pairs of this type are said to be MINIMALshyLY DIFFERENJ because no smaller difference in the language can make a differ~nce in meahing in words (Pike 1947)

Hence minimal pairs of words were used to find phonemes

Minimal~y different word pairs prove to be the beginners

single most important tool for the analysis of phonemic difshy

ferences (Pike 1947)

Thus Echols and Shadilys An Indonesian-English Dicshy

tionarv (1968) was ut~lized to find three-phoneme words

containing two consonant sounds with a vowel in medial poshy

sition The process was simply to go through all the words

beginning with consonants and find minimally different t~ree

phoneme words This was done on a purely anthr~poscopic

basis on the part of the investigator If a different letshy

ter was employed to distinguish a different meaning it was

assumed to be a different phoneme The following ~ord pairs

and their meanings are examples of the words found in the

dictionary

ban--tire bin--son of

das-- a shot dos--small box carton

I

1 7

pal--pole pel--field

rang--rank position ring--ring

teh--tea toh--yet nevertheless

After having obtained the words from the dictionary

a native informant was called upon to verify ~he differshy

ance in meaning in the minimal pairs and to pronounce

them so that ~hey could be phonetically transcribed in

al1 impressionistic manner The informant employed was Kok

Djen Su a student at Portland State University from Yogshy

jakartai Indonesia He has been a student in the United

States for approximately two years and speaks broken al shy

though very understandable English Mr Su was horn to Mr

and Mrs Su Hendry Su who both speak Bahasa Indonesia Jashy

vanese and a small amount of Chinese Since his birth the

informant was exposed to a mixture of Javanese and Bahasa

Indonesia but has employed the national language of Indoshy

nesia since the age of three at school His bilingual upshy

bringing it seems to the author does not craate a subshy

stantial difference in the competence of Mr Su in Bahasa

Indonesia In fact he was able to distinguish the proshy

nunciation Qf words in both Javanese and in Bahasa Indoshy

nesia The utilization of one informant deletes any reshy

gional variation or individual variation between informshy

ants Since here we are attempting to ascertain the relashy

tive range of phonetic quality of vowel phonemes in Bahashy

sa Indonesia the informants bilingualism ahould cause

none or very few phonetic distortions

After-having verified the difference in meaning of

the word pairs Kok Djen ~u pronounced the word The

following impressionistic version of the Ihdonesian voshy

wel system was described

front central back

high

mid 1 I

I I low j

i I I

I

u-

E 0

A

1 Spectrograms

The phonemic entities symbolized in the preceding

section represent range-units of phonetic quality The

symbols and their position on the chart are based on the

aural perceptions of the investigator The purpose of the

spectrographic analysis of this data is to determine as

accurately as possible the actual phonetic range represenshy

ted by each of thephonemic symbols

I

i

1 9

In order to make spectrograms from which meani~gful

conclusions can be drawn one must have a native informant

of the language to be studied Spectrograms were made of

the speech of Mr Su the informant described earlier

In order to conserve the time of the informant a

sample of three-phoneme words were recorded The three-

phoneme words begin and end with consonants ahd contain a

vowel in medial position The list appears in Appendix A

The list of words was specifically selec~ed to eliminate

in so far as possible all variatiqn other than that which

is specifically caused by the preceding and following consoshy

nants This is true because by utilizing a single informant

the influence of dialects both regional and social are eshy

liminated and by utilizing one sy~lable words under primary

1stress sequential influences such as the Markov Process

are eliminated since there is no sequence beyond one phoshy

neme preceding and following the vowel This being the case

one should be able to derive from a series of spectrograms

of those vowels both the range of free variation and the

specific influence of each particular consonant on the voshy

weI quality of each medial phoneme

The n~xt st~p in the procedure was to play the tape-

recordings into the spectrograph two or three wo~ds at a

1The Markoy Process is a mechanical way of handling enshytropy in sequential operations IQ linguistics this is stashyted in terms ofthe probability of the occurrence of a parshyticular phoneme morpheme etc in a precise sequence

20

time The machine can handle 24 seconds of speech on one

spectrogram thus two or three words could be analyzed at

the same time as one with no loss in quality or precision

Unfortunately the recordings had to be played into a

microphone which picks up some background noise but by

placing the microp~one of the spectrograph very close to

the loudspeaker of the tape recorder and turning the volume

up slightly this background was eliminated for all pracshy

tical purposes middotIt would have been better to have had a

direct connection between the recordar and the spectrograph

but unfortunately no such devce was available Background

noise shows up as very small specks scattered more or less

at random and unless the volume of such noise is exceedshy

ingly strong does not interfere with the reading of the

spectrograms

Once the machine had completed the analys~s and produced

the graphic record of the list of words a frequency measur~

ing device was produced by the machine cf example below

1 11amp II~ill c=

- n- HE to

11r -shy

bull b mmiddot 1 bull bull L

-

gIl F Jamp u

n _ If

bull III

21

This measuring device is in reality a spectrogram with horishy

zontal markings The first line on the chart represents a

frequency of 0 hertz (hz) Each line above the first repshy

resents a multiple of 500 hz The device is used to locate

th~ center of formants 1 and 2 Since it is graduated in

500 hz it is necessary to interpolate when the center ofmiddot

power for a particular formant falls between two of these

lines This is done by dividing the area between the two

lines in half then dividing one of the halves in half which

gives a range of 125 hz within which the measurement falls

and an estimate is made of the precise measurement within

the 125 hz range This should give formant positions with

an accuraci of greater than plusmn25 hz

When visual location of the formant centers becprnes

difficult a section of the formant can be made cf exshy

ample below Such difficulties with visual location usually

arise when two weak formants overlap Such overlapping

produc~s what appears to the naked eye to be a band of modeshy

rately dark grey bands The sectioner is a built in mech-

IshyfL__---

tete we tt

~

I

1 I

22

anism capable of handling such problems In the preceding

I example the amplitude of each harmonic is proportional

to the length of the line representing that harmonic I

This makes it possible to locate formant centers when vi-

I sual location is difficult

The measurements were then transferred to formant

charts cf Chart 1 on the following page

6

23

CHART I

~

t

1+

t5

1amp

Ie

z~ 2t 2p 16 12 la 8 Iii

I ~

~

I S

l I

I I

~

V V

V T

l( FORMANT V CHART

Vi ~ CcdiOrate4 ift luutdnM I V ~ cycle ~ concf

V 10 eeentl~rsI~ V

V U 5millimctcrs - I $milton

2 zk2 lis ty

I

FOlWAlfT CHART

Placing a single point on this cha-t is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one fOrrUlt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant atmiddotthe frequency named along the top or bottom edge

ex Martin Joos~ Acoustic Phonetics (1948)

CHAPTER IV

FINDINGS

The data provided by the preceding methodology conshy

sisted of a series of scatter patterns on the vowel charts

Each of the dots within the pattern represented one occurshy

rence of a particular vowel To determine the range ofmiddot each

phoneme f the most divergent points in each pattern were con-

nected by a line These lines then circumscribe an area

which included the range of all the vowels in the sample

recognized ~y the informantmiddotas a particular phoneme

Verbal descriptions the actual charts of the phonemes

and the spectrograms utilized willbe found on the followshy

ing pages

25

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 1 range~ on the

vowel chart in a broad scattering from 300-500 hz for forshy

mant 1 and 1500-2100 hz for formant 2

CHART II

1

lid

13

bull

~

It

iA

Ml

ztr Zit zp 1 S lIZ middot1 I a r 8 6

I

f

I I

Ii 3

[7l I I V 1 I

) ~I I i I bull

V I I i bull r J

I V t I I I I I

i tt I

Kl7 I I I iI ~

I I I I I I I I I i I

I I I i I f I ltII

I I l7 I VI

I [7 1

1 I I I Va FORMANTc7 CHART

I

I I I I 173 CaEiIw-atd icw~[7 rf ltfer C0ItdI I I

j I I I i 7 10 e centlCMta1 oct4v

I V 5miU~ bull itonI

r I f 711 t14 j I I I Ik IV

FoiUlAhT CHRT

Placing asinge point on this chart is an assertion that fortcants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at tn(l frequerlcy nameu Slong the right or eft cdampe the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

26

l 1I I - -~

I I iI I

I

[bIs] [bIn]

lt-- -_- -1I

lt i

1 ~ i1_ -shy Ir ~ tmiddotmiddot lt

-- - - ---~--- - - - ----- --

-i -_~ ~ shyI 1

i I I

I I bullbullq_-

I ~~~-~--shyr ~~~~~ -~- I------------------------shy

-----I

[dIm] [sIh]

27

I -[blr]

i1 1 I I

i Ii I

I i I I

ii ___ -J

rmiddot I i

I 1 j

-~ ~~~ ~-~IIlIr~~~

I

1 ____~~l_~~--=~ _ ~--~~~~~~~~~- -

51 hI$ PiiB PD~ii~i

-~ - -- -- ----- ~------- - --- _-- - _ - shy [rIll) [klr]

28

1 I I I

---~S~ -~~~fi~ ~~~~~-~

~l_ middot~ ___

[klk]

I I I

r [dlk]

29

-------- --

-~- shy~--I~~

[tIll]

30

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lEI ranged on the

vowel chart in a thin oval shaped distribution from 400-625

hz for formant 1 and from 1400-2000 hz for formant 2

CHART III

lEI

i

I

1 I

1

1middot

II~~ 5 I~ I lOa I ~--~~~I-+--+-4-+--+---+--++-+-+-+-+--r--t-t--r--t--r--1

I

I I I I

t I

4

I I 1 I ~ I I I I

I t I ~

I I ~

-r--- r--- I V~~~-r~+-+-~~~+-+-~~~~~~~--T-~-r~-r~-r~-T---T--r~

V~~~++4-~~~-4-+-+~~~~~+-~-T-rV~7

~iA~~~~~I+-~~~~~I--~~~-r~~~~~8 FORMANT HHHH~~r+~~-r~+-~+-~I~-I~~rl7V CHART

I II 11I I V9 CaZiLrww 1ft huncirccLJ

-+-f-+-II-f-+-+-+-+--+-+--+--+----+-+--+-1--t-+-1---t---t--7 rtf eye 04 ~ I 11 V pq-+-+-I~-+--i--+I-t-t--+~i-I---t--+--tr -t--t-Tj-ri~middotltJ ecentimeters 1octGy

I V 5miU~ - aemiton ~~~~I~~+-~~l~-~-T~I~~~r~

t i lt~ I I IS I I liV

FolUlAn C1LBT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion T hat rormants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency namfu along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

1 1

can be treated as such These wave forms are generated

in the oral tract by the opening and closing of the glotshy

tis The fundamental wave is a sine wave with a frequency

equal to the number of times the glottis opens and closes

each second and an amplitude which is directly pro~ortion-

al to air pressure in the lungs Because of the nature

of sound waves a harmonic is generated at every multiple

of this fundamental eg if the fundamental is 100 cycles

per second then a harmonic is generated at 200 300

400 bullbullbull CO As soon as the complex wave leaves the vocal

chords harmoni6s are filtered out by the nature of the

tissue surrounding the oral tract as well as the cavities

in and adj o 1ning the oral tract The complex wave emerging

from the mouth is the mathematical sum of fundamental and

the harmonics which have not been filtered out by the oral

tract cf Martin Joos Acoustic Phonetics (1 948) chapshy

ters 1 and 2 for a fuller explanation of this process

Acoustics vs Articulation

In the last century far too much energy has b~en exshy

pended in attempts to relate acoustic features to specific

articulatory movements Bloch (1942) illustrates this by

stating qualities are identified by ear but in linguisshy

tic works they are traditionally defined in terms of their

assumed production by the vocal organs This type ofmiddotstudy

is misdirected because the only things that impinge on the

I I

- I

12

human ear are the harmonics which were not filtered out

The articulatory movements which cause the filtration ie

movement of the tongue from front to back creating a series

of filters each of which removes different harmonics

from the complex waves are irrelevant Pike (1943) argues

one should analyze and describe the sounds (or sound waves)

themselves rather than the movements ~roducing them

It has long been noted by acousticians that a variety

of articulatory movements remove the same harmonics and

r~sult in the production of very similar sounds Pierce

(1962) illustrates this by saying

As long as the formants are in their praper positions ie the proper frequencies are passed through the speech mechanism it does not matter whether the unwanted frequencies are filtered out by rounding the lips or moving the tongue to the back ThuQ when Holbrook and Carmody give one front-back position for the tongue for a given English vowel and IPA (International Pho~etic Alphabet) gives another it is quite probable that both are completely correct and that the formant shift is made by compensating for the lack of tongue movement in the speech of some speakers by additional lip rounding bullbullbullbull

Since the hearer of a stream of speech can hear 9nly those harmonics which emerge from the mouth as componshyents of the final complex wave the placement of the formant is of primary importance not the articulation which produced the sound

Therefore a study of the phonetic quality of vowels

demands an instrument which is capable of making an accurate

record of the presence or absence of all the harmonics

having sufficient amplitude to significantly alter the final

wave form The acoustic spectrograph is such an instrument

13

it was the first instrument to make large scale acoustic

a n a ly s e sapr act i c a I po s sibiIi t Y n ( Lad e fog ed 1 967 ) bull

Spectrograph

The acoustic spectrograph is a device ~hich records a

stream of speech 2~4 seconds or less in length This

recording is then fed into the analyzing part of the specshy

trograph where at each successive playing ne frequency

or rather one frequency band is lifted outof the total by

the variable filter (Pulgram 1965) A black ma~king is

made on a piece ofmiddot electro-sensitive paper each time there

is a harmonic present within the frequency band being anashy

lyzed Since the articulators are constantly moving and

changing the filtration characteristics of thevocal tract

the black markings ma~e by a stylus reflect the movements

of the articula~ors in a very broad sense More important

however it makes a precise record of the stimulus ie

the harmonics which reach the ear of the listener Dunn

(1950) says the vowels have asso~iated with them different

frequency regions in which the sound is more intense than

elsewhere in the spectrum The name formant has been apshy

plied to these regions

The next problem then is to relate the concentrations

of power mentioned above ie the formants to human pershy

ception of speech sounds The most widely utilized techshy

nique in this area is one devised by Martin Joos (1948)

~______________________________________~S___________________________________________________shy1

14

generally referred to as his 2 Formant Theory This techshy

nique represents the plotting of formant 1 and formant 2

in a specific wayan a particular chart cf Chart 1 on

p~ 23 This technique is clearly described by Ladefoged

(1967)

The relations between the formant structures of the vowels in a number of words can be conveniently represented by means of formant charts which show the frequency of the firs~ formant at a time in the word when the formant structure is changing at a minimum rate plotted against the frequency of the second formant at the same time

When making these kinds of plots a charting is derived of

vowels for any language which is remarkably like the tradishy

tional impressionistic vowel charts of the 19th century

Esner (1947) illustrated that if the frequency of the first

formant was plotted against the frequency of the second

formant it seemed to equal the relation between formant

frequency and the traditional vowel diagram

Basically this study will reproduce such vowel charts

for a number of examples of each sound in Bahasa Indonesia

Formant 1 will be platted against formant 2 for each vowel

phoneme in a variety of phonemic environments -The purpose

of this will be to determine the range of variation for

every vowel in each e~vironment as produced by a single native

speaker

CHAPTER III

METHODOLOGY

Phoneme Identification

In order to assess the phonetic quality of vowel phoshy

nemes one must first ascertain the number and relationshy

ship of sound contrasts in a language ie the phonemes

The visual representation of the actualization of the phoshy

neme ie the spectrogram can only be made on the basis

of a preceding decision of the linguist on the types and

number of phonemes in the l~nguage to be anaiyzed (Pulgram

1965)~ Phonemic analysis cannot be made with phonetic

data alone it must be made with phonetic data plus a sershy

ies of phonemic premises and procedures (Pike 1947) A

spectrogram conveys phonetic information which aids the

linguist in determining which phonetic features are consisshy

tently present in order to reach the most accurate phonetic

description

There are a variety of premises and procedures which

the investigator may utilize in order to discover the phoshy

nemic structure of a language Pike (1947) argues that the

investigator must have at hand observable native reaction

to native sounds andor know structural facts pertaining to

the phonetic nature of the sounds and their distribution

As stated before a phoneme is a bundle of sound f~atures

1

j

16

which when substituted for another bundle creates a difshy

ference in meaning Since the creation of a different morshy

pheme is the result of the substitution of a different sound

feature these sound features are said to be phonemes

A pair of words in which the first word is the same as the second except for the fact that one segment is replaced by a different but phonetic~lly similar segment in the second word constitutes proof that the two similar segments are phonemically distinct~ bullbullbull Word pairs of this type are said to be MINIMALshyLY DIFFERENJ because no smaller difference in the language can make a differ~nce in meahing in words (Pike 1947)

Hence minimal pairs of words were used to find phonemes

Minimal~y different word pairs prove to be the beginners

single most important tool for the analysis of phonemic difshy

ferences (Pike 1947)

Thus Echols and Shadilys An Indonesian-English Dicshy

tionarv (1968) was ut~lized to find three-phoneme words

containing two consonant sounds with a vowel in medial poshy

sition The process was simply to go through all the words

beginning with consonants and find minimally different t~ree

phoneme words This was done on a purely anthr~poscopic

basis on the part of the investigator If a different letshy

ter was employed to distinguish a different meaning it was

assumed to be a different phoneme The following ~ord pairs

and their meanings are examples of the words found in the

dictionary

ban--tire bin--son of

das-- a shot dos--small box carton

I

1 7

pal--pole pel--field

rang--rank position ring--ring

teh--tea toh--yet nevertheless

After having obtained the words from the dictionary

a native informant was called upon to verify ~he differshy

ance in meaning in the minimal pairs and to pronounce

them so that ~hey could be phonetically transcribed in

al1 impressionistic manner The informant employed was Kok

Djen Su a student at Portland State University from Yogshy

jakartai Indonesia He has been a student in the United

States for approximately two years and speaks broken al shy

though very understandable English Mr Su was horn to Mr

and Mrs Su Hendry Su who both speak Bahasa Indonesia Jashy

vanese and a small amount of Chinese Since his birth the

informant was exposed to a mixture of Javanese and Bahasa

Indonesia but has employed the national language of Indoshy

nesia since the age of three at school His bilingual upshy

bringing it seems to the author does not craate a subshy

stantial difference in the competence of Mr Su in Bahasa

Indonesia In fact he was able to distinguish the proshy

nunciation Qf words in both Javanese and in Bahasa Indoshy

nesia The utilization of one informant deletes any reshy

gional variation or individual variation between informshy

ants Since here we are attempting to ascertain the relashy

tive range of phonetic quality of vowel phonemes in Bahashy

sa Indonesia the informants bilingualism ahould cause

none or very few phonetic distortions

After-having verified the difference in meaning of

the word pairs Kok Djen ~u pronounced the word The

following impressionistic version of the Ihdonesian voshy

wel system was described

front central back

high

mid 1 I

I I low j

i I I

I

u-

E 0

A

1 Spectrograms

The phonemic entities symbolized in the preceding

section represent range-units of phonetic quality The

symbols and their position on the chart are based on the

aural perceptions of the investigator The purpose of the

spectrographic analysis of this data is to determine as

accurately as possible the actual phonetic range represenshy

ted by each of thephonemic symbols

I

i

1 9

In order to make spectrograms from which meani~gful

conclusions can be drawn one must have a native informant

of the language to be studied Spectrograms were made of

the speech of Mr Su the informant described earlier

In order to conserve the time of the informant a

sample of three-phoneme words were recorded The three-

phoneme words begin and end with consonants ahd contain a

vowel in medial position The list appears in Appendix A

The list of words was specifically selec~ed to eliminate

in so far as possible all variatiqn other than that which

is specifically caused by the preceding and following consoshy

nants This is true because by utilizing a single informant

the influence of dialects both regional and social are eshy

liminated and by utilizing one sy~lable words under primary

1stress sequential influences such as the Markov Process

are eliminated since there is no sequence beyond one phoshy

neme preceding and following the vowel This being the case

one should be able to derive from a series of spectrograms

of those vowels both the range of free variation and the

specific influence of each particular consonant on the voshy

weI quality of each medial phoneme

The n~xt st~p in the procedure was to play the tape-

recordings into the spectrograph two or three wo~ds at a

1The Markoy Process is a mechanical way of handling enshytropy in sequential operations IQ linguistics this is stashyted in terms ofthe probability of the occurrence of a parshyticular phoneme morpheme etc in a precise sequence

20

time The machine can handle 24 seconds of speech on one

spectrogram thus two or three words could be analyzed at

the same time as one with no loss in quality or precision

Unfortunately the recordings had to be played into a

microphone which picks up some background noise but by

placing the microp~one of the spectrograph very close to

the loudspeaker of the tape recorder and turning the volume

up slightly this background was eliminated for all pracshy

tical purposes middotIt would have been better to have had a

direct connection between the recordar and the spectrograph

but unfortunately no such devce was available Background

noise shows up as very small specks scattered more or less

at random and unless the volume of such noise is exceedshy

ingly strong does not interfere with the reading of the

spectrograms

Once the machine had completed the analys~s and produced

the graphic record of the list of words a frequency measur~

ing device was produced by the machine cf example below

1 11amp II~ill c=

- n- HE to

11r -shy

bull b mmiddot 1 bull bull L

-

gIl F Jamp u

n _ If

bull III

21

This measuring device is in reality a spectrogram with horishy

zontal markings The first line on the chart represents a

frequency of 0 hertz (hz) Each line above the first repshy

resents a multiple of 500 hz The device is used to locate

th~ center of formants 1 and 2 Since it is graduated in

500 hz it is necessary to interpolate when the center ofmiddot

power for a particular formant falls between two of these

lines This is done by dividing the area between the two

lines in half then dividing one of the halves in half which

gives a range of 125 hz within which the measurement falls

and an estimate is made of the precise measurement within

the 125 hz range This should give formant positions with

an accuraci of greater than plusmn25 hz

When visual location of the formant centers becprnes

difficult a section of the formant can be made cf exshy

ample below Such difficulties with visual location usually

arise when two weak formants overlap Such overlapping

produc~s what appears to the naked eye to be a band of modeshy

rately dark grey bands The sectioner is a built in mech-

IshyfL__---

tete we tt

~

I

1 I

22

anism capable of handling such problems In the preceding

I example the amplitude of each harmonic is proportional

to the length of the line representing that harmonic I

This makes it possible to locate formant centers when vi-

I sual location is difficult

The measurements were then transferred to formant

charts cf Chart 1 on the following page

6

23

CHART I

~

t

1+

t5

1amp

Ie

z~ 2t 2p 16 12 la 8 Iii

I ~

~

I S

l I

I I

~

V V

V T

l( FORMANT V CHART

Vi ~ CcdiOrate4 ift luutdnM I V ~ cycle ~ concf

V 10 eeentl~rsI~ V

V U 5millimctcrs - I $milton

2 zk2 lis ty

I

FOlWAlfT CHART

Placing a single point on this cha-t is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one fOrrUlt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant atmiddotthe frequency named along the top or bottom edge

ex Martin Joos~ Acoustic Phonetics (1948)

CHAPTER IV

FINDINGS

The data provided by the preceding methodology conshy

sisted of a series of scatter patterns on the vowel charts

Each of the dots within the pattern represented one occurshy

rence of a particular vowel To determine the range ofmiddot each

phoneme f the most divergent points in each pattern were con-

nected by a line These lines then circumscribe an area

which included the range of all the vowels in the sample

recognized ~y the informantmiddotas a particular phoneme

Verbal descriptions the actual charts of the phonemes

and the spectrograms utilized willbe found on the followshy

ing pages

25

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 1 range~ on the

vowel chart in a broad scattering from 300-500 hz for forshy

mant 1 and 1500-2100 hz for formant 2

CHART II

1

lid

13

bull

~

It

iA

Ml

ztr Zit zp 1 S lIZ middot1 I a r 8 6

I

f

I I

Ii 3

[7l I I V 1 I

) ~I I i I bull

V I I i bull r J

I V t I I I I I

i tt I

Kl7 I I I iI ~

I I I I I I I I I i I

I I I i I f I ltII

I I l7 I VI

I [7 1

1 I I I Va FORMANTc7 CHART

I

I I I I 173 CaEiIw-atd icw~[7 rf ltfer C0ItdI I I

j I I I i 7 10 e centlCMta1 oct4v

I V 5miU~ bull itonI

r I f 711 t14 j I I I Ik IV

FoiUlAhT CHRT

Placing asinge point on this chart is an assertion that fortcants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at tn(l frequerlcy nameu Slong the right or eft cdampe the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

26

l 1I I - -~

I I iI I

I

[bIs] [bIn]

lt-- -_- -1I

lt i

1 ~ i1_ -shy Ir ~ tmiddotmiddot lt

-- - - ---~--- - - - ----- --

-i -_~ ~ shyI 1

i I I

I I bullbullq_-

I ~~~-~--shyr ~~~~~ -~- I------------------------shy

-----I

[dIm] [sIh]

27

I -[blr]

i1 1 I I

i Ii I

I i I I

ii ___ -J

rmiddot I i

I 1 j

-~ ~~~ ~-~IIlIr~~~

I

1 ____~~l_~~--=~ _ ~--~~~~~~~~~- -

51 hI$ PiiB PD~ii~i

-~ - -- -- ----- ~------- - --- _-- - _ - shy [rIll) [klr]

28

1 I I I

---~S~ -~~~fi~ ~~~~~-~

~l_ middot~ ___

[klk]

I I I

r [dlk]

29

-------- --

-~- shy~--I~~

[tIll]

30

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lEI ranged on the

vowel chart in a thin oval shaped distribution from 400-625

hz for formant 1 and from 1400-2000 hz for formant 2

CHART III

lEI

i

I

1 I

1

1middot

II~~ 5 I~ I lOa I ~--~~~I-+--+-4-+--+---+--++-+-+-+-+--r--t-t--r--t--r--1

I

I I I I

t I

4

I I 1 I ~ I I I I

I t I ~

I I ~

-r--- r--- I V~~~-r~+-+-~~~+-+-~~~~~~~--T-~-r~-r~-r~-T---T--r~

V~~~++4-~~~-4-+-+~~~~~+-~-T-rV~7

~iA~~~~~I+-~~~~~I--~~~-r~~~~~8 FORMANT HHHH~~r+~~-r~+-~+-~I~-I~~rl7V CHART

I II 11I I V9 CaZiLrww 1ft huncirccLJ

-+-f-+-II-f-+-+-+-+--+-+--+--+----+-+--+-1--t-+-1---t---t--7 rtf eye 04 ~ I 11 V pq-+-+-I~-+--i--+I-t-t--+~i-I---t--+--tr -t--t-Tj-ri~middotltJ ecentimeters 1octGy

I V 5miU~ - aemiton ~~~~I~~+-~~l~-~-T~I~~~r~

t i lt~ I I IS I I liV

FolUlAn C1LBT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion T hat rormants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency namfu along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

12

human ear are the harmonics which were not filtered out

The articulatory movements which cause the filtration ie

movement of the tongue from front to back creating a series

of filters each of which removes different harmonics

from the complex waves are irrelevant Pike (1943) argues

one should analyze and describe the sounds (or sound waves)

themselves rather than the movements ~roducing them

It has long been noted by acousticians that a variety

of articulatory movements remove the same harmonics and

r~sult in the production of very similar sounds Pierce

(1962) illustrates this by saying

As long as the formants are in their praper positions ie the proper frequencies are passed through the speech mechanism it does not matter whether the unwanted frequencies are filtered out by rounding the lips or moving the tongue to the back ThuQ when Holbrook and Carmody give one front-back position for the tongue for a given English vowel and IPA (International Pho~etic Alphabet) gives another it is quite probable that both are completely correct and that the formant shift is made by compensating for the lack of tongue movement in the speech of some speakers by additional lip rounding bullbullbullbull

Since the hearer of a stream of speech can hear 9nly those harmonics which emerge from the mouth as componshyents of the final complex wave the placement of the formant is of primary importance not the articulation which produced the sound

Therefore a study of the phonetic quality of vowels

demands an instrument which is capable of making an accurate

record of the presence or absence of all the harmonics

having sufficient amplitude to significantly alter the final

wave form The acoustic spectrograph is such an instrument

13

it was the first instrument to make large scale acoustic

a n a ly s e sapr act i c a I po s sibiIi t Y n ( Lad e fog ed 1 967 ) bull

Spectrograph

The acoustic spectrograph is a device ~hich records a

stream of speech 2~4 seconds or less in length This

recording is then fed into the analyzing part of the specshy

trograph where at each successive playing ne frequency

or rather one frequency band is lifted outof the total by

the variable filter (Pulgram 1965) A black ma~king is

made on a piece ofmiddot electro-sensitive paper each time there

is a harmonic present within the frequency band being anashy

lyzed Since the articulators are constantly moving and

changing the filtration characteristics of thevocal tract

the black markings ma~e by a stylus reflect the movements

of the articula~ors in a very broad sense More important

however it makes a precise record of the stimulus ie

the harmonics which reach the ear of the listener Dunn

(1950) says the vowels have asso~iated with them different

frequency regions in which the sound is more intense than

elsewhere in the spectrum The name formant has been apshy

plied to these regions

The next problem then is to relate the concentrations

of power mentioned above ie the formants to human pershy

ception of speech sounds The most widely utilized techshy

nique in this area is one devised by Martin Joos (1948)

~______________________________________~S___________________________________________________shy1

14

generally referred to as his 2 Formant Theory This techshy

nique represents the plotting of formant 1 and formant 2

in a specific wayan a particular chart cf Chart 1 on

p~ 23 This technique is clearly described by Ladefoged

(1967)

The relations between the formant structures of the vowels in a number of words can be conveniently represented by means of formant charts which show the frequency of the firs~ formant at a time in the word when the formant structure is changing at a minimum rate plotted against the frequency of the second formant at the same time

When making these kinds of plots a charting is derived of

vowels for any language which is remarkably like the tradishy

tional impressionistic vowel charts of the 19th century

Esner (1947) illustrated that if the frequency of the first

formant was plotted against the frequency of the second

formant it seemed to equal the relation between formant

frequency and the traditional vowel diagram

Basically this study will reproduce such vowel charts

for a number of examples of each sound in Bahasa Indonesia

Formant 1 will be platted against formant 2 for each vowel

phoneme in a variety of phonemic environments -The purpose

of this will be to determine the range of variation for

every vowel in each e~vironment as produced by a single native

speaker

CHAPTER III

METHODOLOGY

Phoneme Identification

In order to assess the phonetic quality of vowel phoshy

nemes one must first ascertain the number and relationshy

ship of sound contrasts in a language ie the phonemes

The visual representation of the actualization of the phoshy

neme ie the spectrogram can only be made on the basis

of a preceding decision of the linguist on the types and

number of phonemes in the l~nguage to be anaiyzed (Pulgram

1965)~ Phonemic analysis cannot be made with phonetic

data alone it must be made with phonetic data plus a sershy

ies of phonemic premises and procedures (Pike 1947) A

spectrogram conveys phonetic information which aids the

linguist in determining which phonetic features are consisshy

tently present in order to reach the most accurate phonetic

description

There are a variety of premises and procedures which

the investigator may utilize in order to discover the phoshy

nemic structure of a language Pike (1947) argues that the

investigator must have at hand observable native reaction

to native sounds andor know structural facts pertaining to

the phonetic nature of the sounds and their distribution

As stated before a phoneme is a bundle of sound f~atures

1

j

16

which when substituted for another bundle creates a difshy

ference in meaning Since the creation of a different morshy

pheme is the result of the substitution of a different sound

feature these sound features are said to be phonemes

A pair of words in which the first word is the same as the second except for the fact that one segment is replaced by a different but phonetic~lly similar segment in the second word constitutes proof that the two similar segments are phonemically distinct~ bullbullbull Word pairs of this type are said to be MINIMALshyLY DIFFERENJ because no smaller difference in the language can make a differ~nce in meahing in words (Pike 1947)

Hence minimal pairs of words were used to find phonemes

Minimal~y different word pairs prove to be the beginners

single most important tool for the analysis of phonemic difshy

ferences (Pike 1947)

Thus Echols and Shadilys An Indonesian-English Dicshy

tionarv (1968) was ut~lized to find three-phoneme words

containing two consonant sounds with a vowel in medial poshy

sition The process was simply to go through all the words

beginning with consonants and find minimally different t~ree

phoneme words This was done on a purely anthr~poscopic

basis on the part of the investigator If a different letshy

ter was employed to distinguish a different meaning it was

assumed to be a different phoneme The following ~ord pairs

and their meanings are examples of the words found in the

dictionary

ban--tire bin--son of

das-- a shot dos--small box carton

I

1 7

pal--pole pel--field

rang--rank position ring--ring

teh--tea toh--yet nevertheless

After having obtained the words from the dictionary

a native informant was called upon to verify ~he differshy

ance in meaning in the minimal pairs and to pronounce

them so that ~hey could be phonetically transcribed in

al1 impressionistic manner The informant employed was Kok

Djen Su a student at Portland State University from Yogshy

jakartai Indonesia He has been a student in the United

States for approximately two years and speaks broken al shy

though very understandable English Mr Su was horn to Mr

and Mrs Su Hendry Su who both speak Bahasa Indonesia Jashy

vanese and a small amount of Chinese Since his birth the

informant was exposed to a mixture of Javanese and Bahasa

Indonesia but has employed the national language of Indoshy

nesia since the age of three at school His bilingual upshy

bringing it seems to the author does not craate a subshy

stantial difference in the competence of Mr Su in Bahasa

Indonesia In fact he was able to distinguish the proshy

nunciation Qf words in both Javanese and in Bahasa Indoshy

nesia The utilization of one informant deletes any reshy

gional variation or individual variation between informshy

ants Since here we are attempting to ascertain the relashy

tive range of phonetic quality of vowel phonemes in Bahashy

sa Indonesia the informants bilingualism ahould cause

none or very few phonetic distortions

After-having verified the difference in meaning of

the word pairs Kok Djen ~u pronounced the word The

following impressionistic version of the Ihdonesian voshy

wel system was described

front central back

high

mid 1 I

I I low j

i I I

I

u-

E 0

A

1 Spectrograms

The phonemic entities symbolized in the preceding

section represent range-units of phonetic quality The

symbols and their position on the chart are based on the

aural perceptions of the investigator The purpose of the

spectrographic analysis of this data is to determine as

accurately as possible the actual phonetic range represenshy

ted by each of thephonemic symbols

I

i

1 9

In order to make spectrograms from which meani~gful

conclusions can be drawn one must have a native informant

of the language to be studied Spectrograms were made of

the speech of Mr Su the informant described earlier

In order to conserve the time of the informant a

sample of three-phoneme words were recorded The three-

phoneme words begin and end with consonants ahd contain a

vowel in medial position The list appears in Appendix A

The list of words was specifically selec~ed to eliminate

in so far as possible all variatiqn other than that which

is specifically caused by the preceding and following consoshy

nants This is true because by utilizing a single informant

the influence of dialects both regional and social are eshy

liminated and by utilizing one sy~lable words under primary

1stress sequential influences such as the Markov Process

are eliminated since there is no sequence beyond one phoshy

neme preceding and following the vowel This being the case

one should be able to derive from a series of spectrograms

of those vowels both the range of free variation and the

specific influence of each particular consonant on the voshy

weI quality of each medial phoneme

The n~xt st~p in the procedure was to play the tape-

recordings into the spectrograph two or three wo~ds at a

1The Markoy Process is a mechanical way of handling enshytropy in sequential operations IQ linguistics this is stashyted in terms ofthe probability of the occurrence of a parshyticular phoneme morpheme etc in a precise sequence

20

time The machine can handle 24 seconds of speech on one

spectrogram thus two or three words could be analyzed at

the same time as one with no loss in quality or precision

Unfortunately the recordings had to be played into a

microphone which picks up some background noise but by

placing the microp~one of the spectrograph very close to

the loudspeaker of the tape recorder and turning the volume

up slightly this background was eliminated for all pracshy

tical purposes middotIt would have been better to have had a

direct connection between the recordar and the spectrograph

but unfortunately no such devce was available Background

noise shows up as very small specks scattered more or less

at random and unless the volume of such noise is exceedshy

ingly strong does not interfere with the reading of the

spectrograms

Once the machine had completed the analys~s and produced

the graphic record of the list of words a frequency measur~

ing device was produced by the machine cf example below

1 11amp II~ill c=

- n- HE to

11r -shy

bull b mmiddot 1 bull bull L

-

gIl F Jamp u

n _ If

bull III

21

This measuring device is in reality a spectrogram with horishy

zontal markings The first line on the chart represents a

frequency of 0 hertz (hz) Each line above the first repshy

resents a multiple of 500 hz The device is used to locate

th~ center of formants 1 and 2 Since it is graduated in

500 hz it is necessary to interpolate when the center ofmiddot

power for a particular formant falls between two of these

lines This is done by dividing the area between the two

lines in half then dividing one of the halves in half which

gives a range of 125 hz within which the measurement falls

and an estimate is made of the precise measurement within

the 125 hz range This should give formant positions with

an accuraci of greater than plusmn25 hz

When visual location of the formant centers becprnes

difficult a section of the formant can be made cf exshy

ample below Such difficulties with visual location usually

arise when two weak formants overlap Such overlapping

produc~s what appears to the naked eye to be a band of modeshy

rately dark grey bands The sectioner is a built in mech-

IshyfL__---

tete we tt

~

I

1 I

22

anism capable of handling such problems In the preceding

I example the amplitude of each harmonic is proportional

to the length of the line representing that harmonic I

This makes it possible to locate formant centers when vi-

I sual location is difficult

The measurements were then transferred to formant

charts cf Chart 1 on the following page

6

23

CHART I

~

t

1+

t5

1amp

Ie

z~ 2t 2p 16 12 la 8 Iii

I ~

~

I S

l I

I I

~

V V

V T

l( FORMANT V CHART

Vi ~ CcdiOrate4 ift luutdnM I V ~ cycle ~ concf

V 10 eeentl~rsI~ V

V U 5millimctcrs - I $milton

2 zk2 lis ty

I

FOlWAlfT CHART

Placing a single point on this cha-t is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one fOrrUlt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant atmiddotthe frequency named along the top or bottom edge

ex Martin Joos~ Acoustic Phonetics (1948)

CHAPTER IV

FINDINGS

The data provided by the preceding methodology conshy

sisted of a series of scatter patterns on the vowel charts

Each of the dots within the pattern represented one occurshy

rence of a particular vowel To determine the range ofmiddot each

phoneme f the most divergent points in each pattern were con-

nected by a line These lines then circumscribe an area

which included the range of all the vowels in the sample

recognized ~y the informantmiddotas a particular phoneme

Verbal descriptions the actual charts of the phonemes

and the spectrograms utilized willbe found on the followshy

ing pages

25

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 1 range~ on the

vowel chart in a broad scattering from 300-500 hz for forshy

mant 1 and 1500-2100 hz for formant 2

CHART II

1

lid

13

bull

~

It

iA

Ml

ztr Zit zp 1 S lIZ middot1 I a r 8 6

I

f

I I

Ii 3

[7l I I V 1 I

) ~I I i I bull

V I I i bull r J

I V t I I I I I

i tt I

Kl7 I I I iI ~

I I I I I I I I I i I

I I I i I f I ltII

I I l7 I VI

I [7 1

1 I I I Va FORMANTc7 CHART

I

I I I I 173 CaEiIw-atd icw~[7 rf ltfer C0ItdI I I

j I I I i 7 10 e centlCMta1 oct4v

I V 5miU~ bull itonI

r I f 711 t14 j I I I Ik IV

FoiUlAhT CHRT

Placing asinge point on this chart is an assertion that fortcants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at tn(l frequerlcy nameu Slong the right or eft cdampe the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

26

l 1I I - -~

I I iI I

I

[bIs] [bIn]

lt-- -_- -1I

lt i

1 ~ i1_ -shy Ir ~ tmiddotmiddot lt

-- - - ---~--- - - - ----- --

-i -_~ ~ shyI 1

i I I

I I bullbullq_-

I ~~~-~--shyr ~~~~~ -~- I------------------------shy

-----I

[dIm] [sIh]

27

I -[blr]

i1 1 I I

i Ii I

I i I I

ii ___ -J

rmiddot I i

I 1 j

-~ ~~~ ~-~IIlIr~~~

I

1 ____~~l_~~--=~ _ ~--~~~~~~~~~- -

51 hI$ PiiB PD~ii~i

-~ - -- -- ----- ~------- - --- _-- - _ - shy [rIll) [klr]

28

1 I I I

---~S~ -~~~fi~ ~~~~~-~

~l_ middot~ ___

[klk]

I I I

r [dlk]

29

-------- --

-~- shy~--I~~

[tIll]

30

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lEI ranged on the

vowel chart in a thin oval shaped distribution from 400-625

hz for formant 1 and from 1400-2000 hz for formant 2

CHART III

lEI

i

I

1 I

1

1middot

II~~ 5 I~ I lOa I ~--~~~I-+--+-4-+--+---+--++-+-+-+-+--r--t-t--r--t--r--1

I

I I I I

t I

4

I I 1 I ~ I I I I

I t I ~

I I ~

-r--- r--- I V~~~-r~+-+-~~~+-+-~~~~~~~--T-~-r~-r~-r~-T---T--r~

V~~~++4-~~~-4-+-+~~~~~+-~-T-rV~7

~iA~~~~~I+-~~~~~I--~~~-r~~~~~8 FORMANT HHHH~~r+~~-r~+-~+-~I~-I~~rl7V CHART

I II 11I I V9 CaZiLrww 1ft huncirccLJ

-+-f-+-II-f-+-+-+-+--+-+--+--+----+-+--+-1--t-+-1---t---t--7 rtf eye 04 ~ I 11 V pq-+-+-I~-+--i--+I-t-t--+~i-I---t--+--tr -t--t-Tj-ri~middotltJ ecentimeters 1octGy

I V 5miU~ - aemiton ~~~~I~~+-~~l~-~-T~I~~~r~

t i lt~ I I IS I I liV

FolUlAn C1LBT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion T hat rormants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency namfu along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

13

it was the first instrument to make large scale acoustic

a n a ly s e sapr act i c a I po s sibiIi t Y n ( Lad e fog ed 1 967 ) bull

Spectrograph

The acoustic spectrograph is a device ~hich records a

stream of speech 2~4 seconds or less in length This

recording is then fed into the analyzing part of the specshy

trograph where at each successive playing ne frequency

or rather one frequency band is lifted outof the total by

the variable filter (Pulgram 1965) A black ma~king is

made on a piece ofmiddot electro-sensitive paper each time there

is a harmonic present within the frequency band being anashy

lyzed Since the articulators are constantly moving and

changing the filtration characteristics of thevocal tract

the black markings ma~e by a stylus reflect the movements

of the articula~ors in a very broad sense More important

however it makes a precise record of the stimulus ie

the harmonics which reach the ear of the listener Dunn

(1950) says the vowels have asso~iated with them different

frequency regions in which the sound is more intense than

elsewhere in the spectrum The name formant has been apshy

plied to these regions

The next problem then is to relate the concentrations

of power mentioned above ie the formants to human pershy

ception of speech sounds The most widely utilized techshy

nique in this area is one devised by Martin Joos (1948)

~______________________________________~S___________________________________________________shy1

14

generally referred to as his 2 Formant Theory This techshy

nique represents the plotting of formant 1 and formant 2

in a specific wayan a particular chart cf Chart 1 on

p~ 23 This technique is clearly described by Ladefoged

(1967)

The relations between the formant structures of the vowels in a number of words can be conveniently represented by means of formant charts which show the frequency of the firs~ formant at a time in the word when the formant structure is changing at a minimum rate plotted against the frequency of the second formant at the same time

When making these kinds of plots a charting is derived of

vowels for any language which is remarkably like the tradishy

tional impressionistic vowel charts of the 19th century

Esner (1947) illustrated that if the frequency of the first

formant was plotted against the frequency of the second

formant it seemed to equal the relation between formant

frequency and the traditional vowel diagram

Basically this study will reproduce such vowel charts

for a number of examples of each sound in Bahasa Indonesia

Formant 1 will be platted against formant 2 for each vowel

phoneme in a variety of phonemic environments -The purpose

of this will be to determine the range of variation for

every vowel in each e~vironment as produced by a single native

speaker

CHAPTER III

METHODOLOGY

Phoneme Identification

In order to assess the phonetic quality of vowel phoshy

nemes one must first ascertain the number and relationshy

ship of sound contrasts in a language ie the phonemes

The visual representation of the actualization of the phoshy

neme ie the spectrogram can only be made on the basis

of a preceding decision of the linguist on the types and

number of phonemes in the l~nguage to be anaiyzed (Pulgram

1965)~ Phonemic analysis cannot be made with phonetic

data alone it must be made with phonetic data plus a sershy

ies of phonemic premises and procedures (Pike 1947) A

spectrogram conveys phonetic information which aids the

linguist in determining which phonetic features are consisshy

tently present in order to reach the most accurate phonetic

description

There are a variety of premises and procedures which

the investigator may utilize in order to discover the phoshy

nemic structure of a language Pike (1947) argues that the

investigator must have at hand observable native reaction

to native sounds andor know structural facts pertaining to

the phonetic nature of the sounds and their distribution

As stated before a phoneme is a bundle of sound f~atures

1

j

16

which when substituted for another bundle creates a difshy

ference in meaning Since the creation of a different morshy

pheme is the result of the substitution of a different sound

feature these sound features are said to be phonemes

A pair of words in which the first word is the same as the second except for the fact that one segment is replaced by a different but phonetic~lly similar segment in the second word constitutes proof that the two similar segments are phonemically distinct~ bullbullbull Word pairs of this type are said to be MINIMALshyLY DIFFERENJ because no smaller difference in the language can make a differ~nce in meahing in words (Pike 1947)

Hence minimal pairs of words were used to find phonemes

Minimal~y different word pairs prove to be the beginners

single most important tool for the analysis of phonemic difshy

ferences (Pike 1947)

Thus Echols and Shadilys An Indonesian-English Dicshy

tionarv (1968) was ut~lized to find three-phoneme words

containing two consonant sounds with a vowel in medial poshy

sition The process was simply to go through all the words

beginning with consonants and find minimally different t~ree

phoneme words This was done on a purely anthr~poscopic

basis on the part of the investigator If a different letshy

ter was employed to distinguish a different meaning it was

assumed to be a different phoneme The following ~ord pairs

and their meanings are examples of the words found in the

dictionary

ban--tire bin--son of

das-- a shot dos--small box carton

I

1 7

pal--pole pel--field

rang--rank position ring--ring

teh--tea toh--yet nevertheless

After having obtained the words from the dictionary

a native informant was called upon to verify ~he differshy

ance in meaning in the minimal pairs and to pronounce

them so that ~hey could be phonetically transcribed in

al1 impressionistic manner The informant employed was Kok

Djen Su a student at Portland State University from Yogshy

jakartai Indonesia He has been a student in the United

States for approximately two years and speaks broken al shy

though very understandable English Mr Su was horn to Mr

and Mrs Su Hendry Su who both speak Bahasa Indonesia Jashy

vanese and a small amount of Chinese Since his birth the

informant was exposed to a mixture of Javanese and Bahasa

Indonesia but has employed the national language of Indoshy

nesia since the age of three at school His bilingual upshy

bringing it seems to the author does not craate a subshy

stantial difference in the competence of Mr Su in Bahasa

Indonesia In fact he was able to distinguish the proshy

nunciation Qf words in both Javanese and in Bahasa Indoshy

nesia The utilization of one informant deletes any reshy

gional variation or individual variation between informshy

ants Since here we are attempting to ascertain the relashy

tive range of phonetic quality of vowel phonemes in Bahashy

sa Indonesia the informants bilingualism ahould cause

none or very few phonetic distortions

After-having verified the difference in meaning of

the word pairs Kok Djen ~u pronounced the word The

following impressionistic version of the Ihdonesian voshy

wel system was described

front central back

high

mid 1 I

I I low j

i I I

I

u-

E 0

A

1 Spectrograms

The phonemic entities symbolized in the preceding

section represent range-units of phonetic quality The

symbols and their position on the chart are based on the

aural perceptions of the investigator The purpose of the

spectrographic analysis of this data is to determine as

accurately as possible the actual phonetic range represenshy

ted by each of thephonemic symbols

I

i

1 9

In order to make spectrograms from which meani~gful

conclusions can be drawn one must have a native informant

of the language to be studied Spectrograms were made of

the speech of Mr Su the informant described earlier

In order to conserve the time of the informant a

sample of three-phoneme words were recorded The three-

phoneme words begin and end with consonants ahd contain a

vowel in medial position The list appears in Appendix A

The list of words was specifically selec~ed to eliminate

in so far as possible all variatiqn other than that which

is specifically caused by the preceding and following consoshy

nants This is true because by utilizing a single informant

the influence of dialects both regional and social are eshy

liminated and by utilizing one sy~lable words under primary

1stress sequential influences such as the Markov Process

are eliminated since there is no sequence beyond one phoshy

neme preceding and following the vowel This being the case

one should be able to derive from a series of spectrograms

of those vowels both the range of free variation and the

specific influence of each particular consonant on the voshy

weI quality of each medial phoneme

The n~xt st~p in the procedure was to play the tape-

recordings into the spectrograph two or three wo~ds at a

1The Markoy Process is a mechanical way of handling enshytropy in sequential operations IQ linguistics this is stashyted in terms ofthe probability of the occurrence of a parshyticular phoneme morpheme etc in a precise sequence

20

time The machine can handle 24 seconds of speech on one

spectrogram thus two or three words could be analyzed at

the same time as one with no loss in quality or precision

Unfortunately the recordings had to be played into a

microphone which picks up some background noise but by

placing the microp~one of the spectrograph very close to

the loudspeaker of the tape recorder and turning the volume

up slightly this background was eliminated for all pracshy

tical purposes middotIt would have been better to have had a

direct connection between the recordar and the spectrograph

but unfortunately no such devce was available Background

noise shows up as very small specks scattered more or less

at random and unless the volume of such noise is exceedshy

ingly strong does not interfere with the reading of the

spectrograms

Once the machine had completed the analys~s and produced

the graphic record of the list of words a frequency measur~

ing device was produced by the machine cf example below

1 11amp II~ill c=

- n- HE to

11r -shy

bull b mmiddot 1 bull bull L

-

gIl F Jamp u

n _ If

bull III

21

This measuring device is in reality a spectrogram with horishy

zontal markings The first line on the chart represents a

frequency of 0 hertz (hz) Each line above the first repshy

resents a multiple of 500 hz The device is used to locate

th~ center of formants 1 and 2 Since it is graduated in

500 hz it is necessary to interpolate when the center ofmiddot

power for a particular formant falls between two of these

lines This is done by dividing the area between the two

lines in half then dividing one of the halves in half which

gives a range of 125 hz within which the measurement falls

and an estimate is made of the precise measurement within

the 125 hz range This should give formant positions with

an accuraci of greater than plusmn25 hz

When visual location of the formant centers becprnes

difficult a section of the formant can be made cf exshy

ample below Such difficulties with visual location usually

arise when two weak formants overlap Such overlapping

produc~s what appears to the naked eye to be a band of modeshy

rately dark grey bands The sectioner is a built in mech-

IshyfL__---

tete we tt

~

I

1 I

22

anism capable of handling such problems In the preceding

I example the amplitude of each harmonic is proportional

to the length of the line representing that harmonic I

This makes it possible to locate formant centers when vi-

I sual location is difficult

The measurements were then transferred to formant

charts cf Chart 1 on the following page

6

23

CHART I

~

t

1+

t5

1amp

Ie

z~ 2t 2p 16 12 la 8 Iii

I ~

~

I S

l I

I I

~

V V

V T

l( FORMANT V CHART

Vi ~ CcdiOrate4 ift luutdnM I V ~ cycle ~ concf

V 10 eeentl~rsI~ V

V U 5millimctcrs - I $milton

2 zk2 lis ty

I

FOlWAlfT CHART

Placing a single point on this cha-t is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one fOrrUlt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant atmiddotthe frequency named along the top or bottom edge

ex Martin Joos~ Acoustic Phonetics (1948)

CHAPTER IV

FINDINGS

The data provided by the preceding methodology conshy

sisted of a series of scatter patterns on the vowel charts

Each of the dots within the pattern represented one occurshy

rence of a particular vowel To determine the range ofmiddot each

phoneme f the most divergent points in each pattern were con-

nected by a line These lines then circumscribe an area

which included the range of all the vowels in the sample

recognized ~y the informantmiddotas a particular phoneme

Verbal descriptions the actual charts of the phonemes

and the spectrograms utilized willbe found on the followshy

ing pages

25

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 1 range~ on the

vowel chart in a broad scattering from 300-500 hz for forshy

mant 1 and 1500-2100 hz for formant 2

CHART II

1

lid

13

bull

~

It

iA

Ml

ztr Zit zp 1 S lIZ middot1 I a r 8 6

I

f

I I

Ii 3

[7l I I V 1 I

) ~I I i I bull

V I I i bull r J

I V t I I I I I

i tt I

Kl7 I I I iI ~

I I I I I I I I I i I

I I I i I f I ltII

I I l7 I VI

I [7 1

1 I I I Va FORMANTc7 CHART

I

I I I I 173 CaEiIw-atd icw~[7 rf ltfer C0ItdI I I

j I I I i 7 10 e centlCMta1 oct4v

I V 5miU~ bull itonI

r I f 711 t14 j I I I Ik IV

FoiUlAhT CHRT

Placing asinge point on this chart is an assertion that fortcants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at tn(l frequerlcy nameu Slong the right or eft cdampe the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

26

l 1I I - -~

I I iI I

I

[bIs] [bIn]

lt-- -_- -1I

lt i

1 ~ i1_ -shy Ir ~ tmiddotmiddot lt

-- - - ---~--- - - - ----- --

-i -_~ ~ shyI 1

i I I

I I bullbullq_-

I ~~~-~--shyr ~~~~~ -~- I------------------------shy

-----I

[dIm] [sIh]

27

I -[blr]

i1 1 I I

i Ii I

I i I I

ii ___ -J

rmiddot I i

I 1 j

-~ ~~~ ~-~IIlIr~~~

I

1 ____~~l_~~--=~ _ ~--~~~~~~~~~- -

51 hI$ PiiB PD~ii~i

-~ - -- -- ----- ~------- - --- _-- - _ - shy [rIll) [klr]

28

1 I I I

---~S~ -~~~fi~ ~~~~~-~

~l_ middot~ ___

[klk]

I I I

r [dlk]

29

-------- --

-~- shy~--I~~

[tIll]

30

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lEI ranged on the

vowel chart in a thin oval shaped distribution from 400-625

hz for formant 1 and from 1400-2000 hz for formant 2

CHART III

lEI

i

I

1 I

1

1middot

II~~ 5 I~ I lOa I ~--~~~I-+--+-4-+--+---+--++-+-+-+-+--r--t-t--r--t--r--1

I

I I I I

t I

4

I I 1 I ~ I I I I

I t I ~

I I ~

-r--- r--- I V~~~-r~+-+-~~~+-+-~~~~~~~--T-~-r~-r~-r~-T---T--r~

V~~~++4-~~~-4-+-+~~~~~+-~-T-rV~7

~iA~~~~~I+-~~~~~I--~~~-r~~~~~8 FORMANT HHHH~~r+~~-r~+-~+-~I~-I~~rl7V CHART

I II 11I I V9 CaZiLrww 1ft huncirccLJ

-+-f-+-II-f-+-+-+-+--+-+--+--+----+-+--+-1--t-+-1---t---t--7 rtf eye 04 ~ I 11 V pq-+-+-I~-+--i--+I-t-t--+~i-I---t--+--tr -t--t-Tj-ri~middotltJ ecentimeters 1octGy

I V 5miU~ - aemiton ~~~~I~~+-~~l~-~-T~I~~~r~

t i lt~ I I IS I I liV

FolUlAn C1LBT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion T hat rormants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency namfu along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

14

generally referred to as his 2 Formant Theory This techshy

nique represents the plotting of formant 1 and formant 2

in a specific wayan a particular chart cf Chart 1 on

p~ 23 This technique is clearly described by Ladefoged

(1967)

The relations between the formant structures of the vowels in a number of words can be conveniently represented by means of formant charts which show the frequency of the firs~ formant at a time in the word when the formant structure is changing at a minimum rate plotted against the frequency of the second formant at the same time

When making these kinds of plots a charting is derived of

vowels for any language which is remarkably like the tradishy

tional impressionistic vowel charts of the 19th century

Esner (1947) illustrated that if the frequency of the first

formant was plotted against the frequency of the second

formant it seemed to equal the relation between formant

frequency and the traditional vowel diagram

Basically this study will reproduce such vowel charts

for a number of examples of each sound in Bahasa Indonesia

Formant 1 will be platted against formant 2 for each vowel

phoneme in a variety of phonemic environments -The purpose

of this will be to determine the range of variation for

every vowel in each e~vironment as produced by a single native

speaker

CHAPTER III

METHODOLOGY

Phoneme Identification

In order to assess the phonetic quality of vowel phoshy

nemes one must first ascertain the number and relationshy

ship of sound contrasts in a language ie the phonemes

The visual representation of the actualization of the phoshy

neme ie the spectrogram can only be made on the basis

of a preceding decision of the linguist on the types and

number of phonemes in the l~nguage to be anaiyzed (Pulgram

1965)~ Phonemic analysis cannot be made with phonetic

data alone it must be made with phonetic data plus a sershy

ies of phonemic premises and procedures (Pike 1947) A

spectrogram conveys phonetic information which aids the

linguist in determining which phonetic features are consisshy

tently present in order to reach the most accurate phonetic

description

There are a variety of premises and procedures which

the investigator may utilize in order to discover the phoshy

nemic structure of a language Pike (1947) argues that the

investigator must have at hand observable native reaction

to native sounds andor know structural facts pertaining to

the phonetic nature of the sounds and their distribution

As stated before a phoneme is a bundle of sound f~atures

1

j

16

which when substituted for another bundle creates a difshy

ference in meaning Since the creation of a different morshy

pheme is the result of the substitution of a different sound

feature these sound features are said to be phonemes

A pair of words in which the first word is the same as the second except for the fact that one segment is replaced by a different but phonetic~lly similar segment in the second word constitutes proof that the two similar segments are phonemically distinct~ bullbullbull Word pairs of this type are said to be MINIMALshyLY DIFFERENJ because no smaller difference in the language can make a differ~nce in meahing in words (Pike 1947)

Hence minimal pairs of words were used to find phonemes

Minimal~y different word pairs prove to be the beginners

single most important tool for the analysis of phonemic difshy

ferences (Pike 1947)

Thus Echols and Shadilys An Indonesian-English Dicshy

tionarv (1968) was ut~lized to find three-phoneme words

containing two consonant sounds with a vowel in medial poshy

sition The process was simply to go through all the words

beginning with consonants and find minimally different t~ree

phoneme words This was done on a purely anthr~poscopic

basis on the part of the investigator If a different letshy

ter was employed to distinguish a different meaning it was

assumed to be a different phoneme The following ~ord pairs

and their meanings are examples of the words found in the

dictionary

ban--tire bin--son of

das-- a shot dos--small box carton

I

1 7

pal--pole pel--field

rang--rank position ring--ring

teh--tea toh--yet nevertheless

After having obtained the words from the dictionary

a native informant was called upon to verify ~he differshy

ance in meaning in the minimal pairs and to pronounce

them so that ~hey could be phonetically transcribed in

al1 impressionistic manner The informant employed was Kok

Djen Su a student at Portland State University from Yogshy

jakartai Indonesia He has been a student in the United

States for approximately two years and speaks broken al shy

though very understandable English Mr Su was horn to Mr

and Mrs Su Hendry Su who both speak Bahasa Indonesia Jashy

vanese and a small amount of Chinese Since his birth the

informant was exposed to a mixture of Javanese and Bahasa

Indonesia but has employed the national language of Indoshy

nesia since the age of three at school His bilingual upshy

bringing it seems to the author does not craate a subshy

stantial difference in the competence of Mr Su in Bahasa

Indonesia In fact he was able to distinguish the proshy

nunciation Qf words in both Javanese and in Bahasa Indoshy

nesia The utilization of one informant deletes any reshy

gional variation or individual variation between informshy

ants Since here we are attempting to ascertain the relashy

tive range of phonetic quality of vowel phonemes in Bahashy

sa Indonesia the informants bilingualism ahould cause

none or very few phonetic distortions

After-having verified the difference in meaning of

the word pairs Kok Djen ~u pronounced the word The

following impressionistic version of the Ihdonesian voshy

wel system was described

front central back

high

mid 1 I

I I low j

i I I

I

u-

E 0

A

1 Spectrograms

The phonemic entities symbolized in the preceding

section represent range-units of phonetic quality The

symbols and their position on the chart are based on the

aural perceptions of the investigator The purpose of the

spectrographic analysis of this data is to determine as

accurately as possible the actual phonetic range represenshy

ted by each of thephonemic symbols

I

i

1 9

In order to make spectrograms from which meani~gful

conclusions can be drawn one must have a native informant

of the language to be studied Spectrograms were made of

the speech of Mr Su the informant described earlier

In order to conserve the time of the informant a

sample of three-phoneme words were recorded The three-

phoneme words begin and end with consonants ahd contain a

vowel in medial position The list appears in Appendix A

The list of words was specifically selec~ed to eliminate

in so far as possible all variatiqn other than that which

is specifically caused by the preceding and following consoshy

nants This is true because by utilizing a single informant

the influence of dialects both regional and social are eshy

liminated and by utilizing one sy~lable words under primary

1stress sequential influences such as the Markov Process

are eliminated since there is no sequence beyond one phoshy

neme preceding and following the vowel This being the case

one should be able to derive from a series of spectrograms

of those vowels both the range of free variation and the

specific influence of each particular consonant on the voshy

weI quality of each medial phoneme

The n~xt st~p in the procedure was to play the tape-

recordings into the spectrograph two or three wo~ds at a

1The Markoy Process is a mechanical way of handling enshytropy in sequential operations IQ linguistics this is stashyted in terms ofthe probability of the occurrence of a parshyticular phoneme morpheme etc in a precise sequence

20

time The machine can handle 24 seconds of speech on one

spectrogram thus two or three words could be analyzed at

the same time as one with no loss in quality or precision

Unfortunately the recordings had to be played into a

microphone which picks up some background noise but by

placing the microp~one of the spectrograph very close to

the loudspeaker of the tape recorder and turning the volume

up slightly this background was eliminated for all pracshy

tical purposes middotIt would have been better to have had a

direct connection between the recordar and the spectrograph

but unfortunately no such devce was available Background

noise shows up as very small specks scattered more or less

at random and unless the volume of such noise is exceedshy

ingly strong does not interfere with the reading of the

spectrograms

Once the machine had completed the analys~s and produced

the graphic record of the list of words a frequency measur~

ing device was produced by the machine cf example below

1 11amp II~ill c=

- n- HE to

11r -shy

bull b mmiddot 1 bull bull L

-

gIl F Jamp u

n _ If

bull III

21

This measuring device is in reality a spectrogram with horishy

zontal markings The first line on the chart represents a

frequency of 0 hertz (hz) Each line above the first repshy

resents a multiple of 500 hz The device is used to locate

th~ center of formants 1 and 2 Since it is graduated in

500 hz it is necessary to interpolate when the center ofmiddot

power for a particular formant falls between two of these

lines This is done by dividing the area between the two

lines in half then dividing one of the halves in half which

gives a range of 125 hz within which the measurement falls

and an estimate is made of the precise measurement within

the 125 hz range This should give formant positions with

an accuraci of greater than plusmn25 hz

When visual location of the formant centers becprnes

difficult a section of the formant can be made cf exshy

ample below Such difficulties with visual location usually

arise when two weak formants overlap Such overlapping

produc~s what appears to the naked eye to be a band of modeshy

rately dark grey bands The sectioner is a built in mech-

IshyfL__---

tete we tt

~

I

1 I

22

anism capable of handling such problems In the preceding

I example the amplitude of each harmonic is proportional

to the length of the line representing that harmonic I

This makes it possible to locate formant centers when vi-

I sual location is difficult

The measurements were then transferred to formant

charts cf Chart 1 on the following page

6

23

CHART I

~

t

1+

t5

1amp

Ie

z~ 2t 2p 16 12 la 8 Iii

I ~

~

I S

l I

I I

~

V V

V T

l( FORMANT V CHART

Vi ~ CcdiOrate4 ift luutdnM I V ~ cycle ~ concf

V 10 eeentl~rsI~ V

V U 5millimctcrs - I $milton

2 zk2 lis ty

I

FOlWAlfT CHART

Placing a single point on this cha-t is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one fOrrUlt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant atmiddotthe frequency named along the top or bottom edge

ex Martin Joos~ Acoustic Phonetics (1948)

CHAPTER IV

FINDINGS

The data provided by the preceding methodology conshy

sisted of a series of scatter patterns on the vowel charts

Each of the dots within the pattern represented one occurshy

rence of a particular vowel To determine the range ofmiddot each

phoneme f the most divergent points in each pattern were con-

nected by a line These lines then circumscribe an area

which included the range of all the vowels in the sample

recognized ~y the informantmiddotas a particular phoneme

Verbal descriptions the actual charts of the phonemes

and the spectrograms utilized willbe found on the followshy

ing pages

25

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 1 range~ on the

vowel chart in a broad scattering from 300-500 hz for forshy

mant 1 and 1500-2100 hz for formant 2

CHART II

1

lid

13

bull

~

It

iA

Ml

ztr Zit zp 1 S lIZ middot1 I a r 8 6

I

f

I I

Ii 3

[7l I I V 1 I

) ~I I i I bull

V I I i bull r J

I V t I I I I I

i tt I

Kl7 I I I iI ~

I I I I I I I I I i I

I I I i I f I ltII

I I l7 I VI

I [7 1

1 I I I Va FORMANTc7 CHART

I

I I I I 173 CaEiIw-atd icw~[7 rf ltfer C0ItdI I I

j I I I i 7 10 e centlCMta1 oct4v

I V 5miU~ bull itonI

r I f 711 t14 j I I I Ik IV

FoiUlAhT CHRT

Placing asinge point on this chart is an assertion that fortcants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at tn(l frequerlcy nameu Slong the right or eft cdampe the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

26

l 1I I - -~

I I iI I

I

[bIs] [bIn]

lt-- -_- -1I

lt i

1 ~ i1_ -shy Ir ~ tmiddotmiddot lt

-- - - ---~--- - - - ----- --

-i -_~ ~ shyI 1

i I I

I I bullbullq_-

I ~~~-~--shyr ~~~~~ -~- I------------------------shy

-----I

[dIm] [sIh]

27

I -[blr]

i1 1 I I

i Ii I

I i I I

ii ___ -J

rmiddot I i

I 1 j

-~ ~~~ ~-~IIlIr~~~

I

1 ____~~l_~~--=~ _ ~--~~~~~~~~~- -

51 hI$ PiiB PD~ii~i

-~ - -- -- ----- ~------- - --- _-- - _ - shy [rIll) [klr]

28

1 I I I

---~S~ -~~~fi~ ~~~~~-~

~l_ middot~ ___

[klk]

I I I

r [dlk]

29

-------- --

-~- shy~--I~~

[tIll]

30

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lEI ranged on the

vowel chart in a thin oval shaped distribution from 400-625

hz for formant 1 and from 1400-2000 hz for formant 2

CHART III

lEI

i

I

1 I

1

1middot

II~~ 5 I~ I lOa I ~--~~~I-+--+-4-+--+---+--++-+-+-+-+--r--t-t--r--t--r--1

I

I I I I

t I

4

I I 1 I ~ I I I I

I t I ~

I I ~

-r--- r--- I V~~~-r~+-+-~~~+-+-~~~~~~~--T-~-r~-r~-r~-T---T--r~

V~~~++4-~~~-4-+-+~~~~~+-~-T-rV~7

~iA~~~~~I+-~~~~~I--~~~-r~~~~~8 FORMANT HHHH~~r+~~-r~+-~+-~I~-I~~rl7V CHART

I II 11I I V9 CaZiLrww 1ft huncirccLJ

-+-f-+-II-f-+-+-+-+--+-+--+--+----+-+--+-1--t-+-1---t---t--7 rtf eye 04 ~ I 11 V pq-+-+-I~-+--i--+I-t-t--+~i-I---t--+--tr -t--t-Tj-ri~middotltJ ecentimeters 1octGy

I V 5miU~ - aemiton ~~~~I~~+-~~l~-~-T~I~~~r~

t i lt~ I I IS I I liV

FolUlAn C1LBT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion T hat rormants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency namfu along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

CHAPTER III

METHODOLOGY

Phoneme Identification

In order to assess the phonetic quality of vowel phoshy

nemes one must first ascertain the number and relationshy

ship of sound contrasts in a language ie the phonemes

The visual representation of the actualization of the phoshy

neme ie the spectrogram can only be made on the basis

of a preceding decision of the linguist on the types and

number of phonemes in the l~nguage to be anaiyzed (Pulgram

1965)~ Phonemic analysis cannot be made with phonetic

data alone it must be made with phonetic data plus a sershy

ies of phonemic premises and procedures (Pike 1947) A

spectrogram conveys phonetic information which aids the

linguist in determining which phonetic features are consisshy

tently present in order to reach the most accurate phonetic

description

There are a variety of premises and procedures which

the investigator may utilize in order to discover the phoshy

nemic structure of a language Pike (1947) argues that the

investigator must have at hand observable native reaction

to native sounds andor know structural facts pertaining to

the phonetic nature of the sounds and their distribution

As stated before a phoneme is a bundle of sound f~atures

1

j

16

which when substituted for another bundle creates a difshy

ference in meaning Since the creation of a different morshy

pheme is the result of the substitution of a different sound

feature these sound features are said to be phonemes

A pair of words in which the first word is the same as the second except for the fact that one segment is replaced by a different but phonetic~lly similar segment in the second word constitutes proof that the two similar segments are phonemically distinct~ bullbullbull Word pairs of this type are said to be MINIMALshyLY DIFFERENJ because no smaller difference in the language can make a differ~nce in meahing in words (Pike 1947)

Hence minimal pairs of words were used to find phonemes

Minimal~y different word pairs prove to be the beginners

single most important tool for the analysis of phonemic difshy

ferences (Pike 1947)

Thus Echols and Shadilys An Indonesian-English Dicshy

tionarv (1968) was ut~lized to find three-phoneme words

containing two consonant sounds with a vowel in medial poshy

sition The process was simply to go through all the words

beginning with consonants and find minimally different t~ree

phoneme words This was done on a purely anthr~poscopic

basis on the part of the investigator If a different letshy

ter was employed to distinguish a different meaning it was

assumed to be a different phoneme The following ~ord pairs

and their meanings are examples of the words found in the

dictionary

ban--tire bin--son of

das-- a shot dos--small box carton

I

1 7

pal--pole pel--field

rang--rank position ring--ring

teh--tea toh--yet nevertheless

After having obtained the words from the dictionary

a native informant was called upon to verify ~he differshy

ance in meaning in the minimal pairs and to pronounce

them so that ~hey could be phonetically transcribed in

al1 impressionistic manner The informant employed was Kok

Djen Su a student at Portland State University from Yogshy

jakartai Indonesia He has been a student in the United

States for approximately two years and speaks broken al shy

though very understandable English Mr Su was horn to Mr

and Mrs Su Hendry Su who both speak Bahasa Indonesia Jashy

vanese and a small amount of Chinese Since his birth the

informant was exposed to a mixture of Javanese and Bahasa

Indonesia but has employed the national language of Indoshy

nesia since the age of three at school His bilingual upshy

bringing it seems to the author does not craate a subshy

stantial difference in the competence of Mr Su in Bahasa

Indonesia In fact he was able to distinguish the proshy

nunciation Qf words in both Javanese and in Bahasa Indoshy

nesia The utilization of one informant deletes any reshy

gional variation or individual variation between informshy

ants Since here we are attempting to ascertain the relashy

tive range of phonetic quality of vowel phonemes in Bahashy

sa Indonesia the informants bilingualism ahould cause

none or very few phonetic distortions

After-having verified the difference in meaning of

the word pairs Kok Djen ~u pronounced the word The

following impressionistic version of the Ihdonesian voshy

wel system was described

front central back

high

mid 1 I

I I low j

i I I

I

u-

E 0

A

1 Spectrograms

The phonemic entities symbolized in the preceding

section represent range-units of phonetic quality The

symbols and their position on the chart are based on the

aural perceptions of the investigator The purpose of the

spectrographic analysis of this data is to determine as

accurately as possible the actual phonetic range represenshy

ted by each of thephonemic symbols

I

i

1 9

In order to make spectrograms from which meani~gful

conclusions can be drawn one must have a native informant

of the language to be studied Spectrograms were made of

the speech of Mr Su the informant described earlier

In order to conserve the time of the informant a

sample of three-phoneme words were recorded The three-

phoneme words begin and end with consonants ahd contain a

vowel in medial position The list appears in Appendix A

The list of words was specifically selec~ed to eliminate

in so far as possible all variatiqn other than that which

is specifically caused by the preceding and following consoshy

nants This is true because by utilizing a single informant

the influence of dialects both regional and social are eshy

liminated and by utilizing one sy~lable words under primary

1stress sequential influences such as the Markov Process

are eliminated since there is no sequence beyond one phoshy

neme preceding and following the vowel This being the case

one should be able to derive from a series of spectrograms

of those vowels both the range of free variation and the

specific influence of each particular consonant on the voshy

weI quality of each medial phoneme

The n~xt st~p in the procedure was to play the tape-

recordings into the spectrograph two or three wo~ds at a

1The Markoy Process is a mechanical way of handling enshytropy in sequential operations IQ linguistics this is stashyted in terms ofthe probability of the occurrence of a parshyticular phoneme morpheme etc in a precise sequence

20

time The machine can handle 24 seconds of speech on one

spectrogram thus two or three words could be analyzed at

the same time as one with no loss in quality or precision

Unfortunately the recordings had to be played into a

microphone which picks up some background noise but by

placing the microp~one of the spectrograph very close to

the loudspeaker of the tape recorder and turning the volume

up slightly this background was eliminated for all pracshy

tical purposes middotIt would have been better to have had a

direct connection between the recordar and the spectrograph

but unfortunately no such devce was available Background

noise shows up as very small specks scattered more or less

at random and unless the volume of such noise is exceedshy

ingly strong does not interfere with the reading of the

spectrograms

Once the machine had completed the analys~s and produced

the graphic record of the list of words a frequency measur~

ing device was produced by the machine cf example below

1 11amp II~ill c=

- n- HE to

11r -shy

bull b mmiddot 1 bull bull L

-

gIl F Jamp u

n _ If

bull III

21

This measuring device is in reality a spectrogram with horishy

zontal markings The first line on the chart represents a

frequency of 0 hertz (hz) Each line above the first repshy

resents a multiple of 500 hz The device is used to locate

th~ center of formants 1 and 2 Since it is graduated in

500 hz it is necessary to interpolate when the center ofmiddot

power for a particular formant falls between two of these

lines This is done by dividing the area between the two

lines in half then dividing one of the halves in half which

gives a range of 125 hz within which the measurement falls

and an estimate is made of the precise measurement within

the 125 hz range This should give formant positions with

an accuraci of greater than plusmn25 hz

When visual location of the formant centers becprnes

difficult a section of the formant can be made cf exshy

ample below Such difficulties with visual location usually

arise when two weak formants overlap Such overlapping

produc~s what appears to the naked eye to be a band of modeshy

rately dark grey bands The sectioner is a built in mech-

IshyfL__---

tete we tt

~

I

1 I

22

anism capable of handling such problems In the preceding

I example the amplitude of each harmonic is proportional

to the length of the line representing that harmonic I

This makes it possible to locate formant centers when vi-

I sual location is difficult

The measurements were then transferred to formant

charts cf Chart 1 on the following page

6

23

CHART I

~

t

1+

t5

1amp

Ie

z~ 2t 2p 16 12 la 8 Iii

I ~

~

I S

l I

I I

~

V V

V T

l( FORMANT V CHART

Vi ~ CcdiOrate4 ift luutdnM I V ~ cycle ~ concf

V 10 eeentl~rsI~ V

V U 5millimctcrs - I $milton

2 zk2 lis ty

I

FOlWAlfT CHART

Placing a single point on this cha-t is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one fOrrUlt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant atmiddotthe frequency named along the top or bottom edge

ex Martin Joos~ Acoustic Phonetics (1948)

CHAPTER IV

FINDINGS

The data provided by the preceding methodology conshy

sisted of a series of scatter patterns on the vowel charts

Each of the dots within the pattern represented one occurshy

rence of a particular vowel To determine the range ofmiddot each

phoneme f the most divergent points in each pattern were con-

nected by a line These lines then circumscribe an area

which included the range of all the vowels in the sample

recognized ~y the informantmiddotas a particular phoneme

Verbal descriptions the actual charts of the phonemes

and the spectrograms utilized willbe found on the followshy

ing pages

25

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 1 range~ on the

vowel chart in a broad scattering from 300-500 hz for forshy

mant 1 and 1500-2100 hz for formant 2

CHART II

1

lid

13

bull

~

It

iA

Ml

ztr Zit zp 1 S lIZ middot1 I a r 8 6

I

f

I I

Ii 3

[7l I I V 1 I

) ~I I i I bull

V I I i bull r J

I V t I I I I I

i tt I

Kl7 I I I iI ~

I I I I I I I I I i I

I I I i I f I ltII

I I l7 I VI

I [7 1

1 I I I Va FORMANTc7 CHART

I

I I I I 173 CaEiIw-atd icw~[7 rf ltfer C0ItdI I I

j I I I i 7 10 e centlCMta1 oct4v

I V 5miU~ bull itonI

r I f 711 t14 j I I I Ik IV

FoiUlAhT CHRT

Placing asinge point on this chart is an assertion that fortcants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at tn(l frequerlcy nameu Slong the right or eft cdampe the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

26

l 1I I - -~

I I iI I

I

[bIs] [bIn]

lt-- -_- -1I

lt i

1 ~ i1_ -shy Ir ~ tmiddotmiddot lt

-- - - ---~--- - - - ----- --

-i -_~ ~ shyI 1

i I I

I I bullbullq_-

I ~~~-~--shyr ~~~~~ -~- I------------------------shy

-----I

[dIm] [sIh]

27

I -[blr]

i1 1 I I

i Ii I

I i I I

ii ___ -J

rmiddot I i

I 1 j

-~ ~~~ ~-~IIlIr~~~

I

1 ____~~l_~~--=~ _ ~--~~~~~~~~~- -

51 hI$ PiiB PD~ii~i

-~ - -- -- ----- ~------- - --- _-- - _ - shy [rIll) [klr]

28

1 I I I

---~S~ -~~~fi~ ~~~~~-~

~l_ middot~ ___

[klk]

I I I

r [dlk]

29

-------- --

-~- shy~--I~~

[tIll]

30

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lEI ranged on the

vowel chart in a thin oval shaped distribution from 400-625

hz for formant 1 and from 1400-2000 hz for formant 2

CHART III

lEI

i

I

1 I

1

1middot

II~~ 5 I~ I lOa I ~--~~~I-+--+-4-+--+---+--++-+-+-+-+--r--t-t--r--t--r--1

I

I I I I

t I

4

I I 1 I ~ I I I I

I t I ~

I I ~

-r--- r--- I V~~~-r~+-+-~~~+-+-~~~~~~~--T-~-r~-r~-r~-T---T--r~

V~~~++4-~~~-4-+-+~~~~~+-~-T-rV~7

~iA~~~~~I+-~~~~~I--~~~-r~~~~~8 FORMANT HHHH~~r+~~-r~+-~+-~I~-I~~rl7V CHART

I II 11I I V9 CaZiLrww 1ft huncirccLJ

-+-f-+-II-f-+-+-+-+--+-+--+--+----+-+--+-1--t-+-1---t---t--7 rtf eye 04 ~ I 11 V pq-+-+-I~-+--i--+I-t-t--+~i-I---t--+--tr -t--t-Tj-ri~middotltJ ecentimeters 1octGy

I V 5miU~ - aemiton ~~~~I~~+-~~l~-~-T~I~~~r~

t i lt~ I I IS I I liV

FolUlAn C1LBT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion T hat rormants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency namfu along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

j

16

which when substituted for another bundle creates a difshy

ference in meaning Since the creation of a different morshy

pheme is the result of the substitution of a different sound

feature these sound features are said to be phonemes

A pair of words in which the first word is the same as the second except for the fact that one segment is replaced by a different but phonetic~lly similar segment in the second word constitutes proof that the two similar segments are phonemically distinct~ bullbullbull Word pairs of this type are said to be MINIMALshyLY DIFFERENJ because no smaller difference in the language can make a differ~nce in meahing in words (Pike 1947)

Hence minimal pairs of words were used to find phonemes

Minimal~y different word pairs prove to be the beginners

single most important tool for the analysis of phonemic difshy

ferences (Pike 1947)

Thus Echols and Shadilys An Indonesian-English Dicshy

tionarv (1968) was ut~lized to find three-phoneme words

containing two consonant sounds with a vowel in medial poshy

sition The process was simply to go through all the words

beginning with consonants and find minimally different t~ree

phoneme words This was done on a purely anthr~poscopic

basis on the part of the investigator If a different letshy

ter was employed to distinguish a different meaning it was

assumed to be a different phoneme The following ~ord pairs

and their meanings are examples of the words found in the

dictionary

ban--tire bin--son of

das-- a shot dos--small box carton

I

1 7

pal--pole pel--field

rang--rank position ring--ring

teh--tea toh--yet nevertheless

After having obtained the words from the dictionary

a native informant was called upon to verify ~he differshy

ance in meaning in the minimal pairs and to pronounce

them so that ~hey could be phonetically transcribed in

al1 impressionistic manner The informant employed was Kok

Djen Su a student at Portland State University from Yogshy

jakartai Indonesia He has been a student in the United

States for approximately two years and speaks broken al shy

though very understandable English Mr Su was horn to Mr

and Mrs Su Hendry Su who both speak Bahasa Indonesia Jashy

vanese and a small amount of Chinese Since his birth the

informant was exposed to a mixture of Javanese and Bahasa

Indonesia but has employed the national language of Indoshy

nesia since the age of three at school His bilingual upshy

bringing it seems to the author does not craate a subshy

stantial difference in the competence of Mr Su in Bahasa

Indonesia In fact he was able to distinguish the proshy

nunciation Qf words in both Javanese and in Bahasa Indoshy

nesia The utilization of one informant deletes any reshy

gional variation or individual variation between informshy

ants Since here we are attempting to ascertain the relashy

tive range of phonetic quality of vowel phonemes in Bahashy

sa Indonesia the informants bilingualism ahould cause

none or very few phonetic distortions

After-having verified the difference in meaning of

the word pairs Kok Djen ~u pronounced the word The

following impressionistic version of the Ihdonesian voshy

wel system was described

front central back

high

mid 1 I

I I low j

i I I

I

u-

E 0

A

1 Spectrograms

The phonemic entities symbolized in the preceding

section represent range-units of phonetic quality The

symbols and their position on the chart are based on the

aural perceptions of the investigator The purpose of the

spectrographic analysis of this data is to determine as

accurately as possible the actual phonetic range represenshy

ted by each of thephonemic symbols

I

i

1 9

In order to make spectrograms from which meani~gful

conclusions can be drawn one must have a native informant

of the language to be studied Spectrograms were made of

the speech of Mr Su the informant described earlier

In order to conserve the time of the informant a

sample of three-phoneme words were recorded The three-

phoneme words begin and end with consonants ahd contain a

vowel in medial position The list appears in Appendix A

The list of words was specifically selec~ed to eliminate

in so far as possible all variatiqn other than that which

is specifically caused by the preceding and following consoshy

nants This is true because by utilizing a single informant

the influence of dialects both regional and social are eshy

liminated and by utilizing one sy~lable words under primary

1stress sequential influences such as the Markov Process

are eliminated since there is no sequence beyond one phoshy

neme preceding and following the vowel This being the case

one should be able to derive from a series of spectrograms

of those vowels both the range of free variation and the

specific influence of each particular consonant on the voshy

weI quality of each medial phoneme

The n~xt st~p in the procedure was to play the tape-

recordings into the spectrograph two or three wo~ds at a

1The Markoy Process is a mechanical way of handling enshytropy in sequential operations IQ linguistics this is stashyted in terms ofthe probability of the occurrence of a parshyticular phoneme morpheme etc in a precise sequence

20

time The machine can handle 24 seconds of speech on one

spectrogram thus two or three words could be analyzed at

the same time as one with no loss in quality or precision

Unfortunately the recordings had to be played into a

microphone which picks up some background noise but by

placing the microp~one of the spectrograph very close to

the loudspeaker of the tape recorder and turning the volume

up slightly this background was eliminated for all pracshy

tical purposes middotIt would have been better to have had a

direct connection between the recordar and the spectrograph

but unfortunately no such devce was available Background

noise shows up as very small specks scattered more or less

at random and unless the volume of such noise is exceedshy

ingly strong does not interfere with the reading of the

spectrograms

Once the machine had completed the analys~s and produced

the graphic record of the list of words a frequency measur~

ing device was produced by the machine cf example below

1 11amp II~ill c=

- n- HE to

11r -shy

bull b mmiddot 1 bull bull L

-

gIl F Jamp u

n _ If

bull III

21

This measuring device is in reality a spectrogram with horishy

zontal markings The first line on the chart represents a

frequency of 0 hertz (hz) Each line above the first repshy

resents a multiple of 500 hz The device is used to locate

th~ center of formants 1 and 2 Since it is graduated in

500 hz it is necessary to interpolate when the center ofmiddot

power for a particular formant falls between two of these

lines This is done by dividing the area between the two

lines in half then dividing one of the halves in half which

gives a range of 125 hz within which the measurement falls

and an estimate is made of the precise measurement within

the 125 hz range This should give formant positions with

an accuraci of greater than plusmn25 hz

When visual location of the formant centers becprnes

difficult a section of the formant can be made cf exshy

ample below Such difficulties with visual location usually

arise when two weak formants overlap Such overlapping

produc~s what appears to the naked eye to be a band of modeshy

rately dark grey bands The sectioner is a built in mech-

IshyfL__---

tete we tt

~

I

1 I

22

anism capable of handling such problems In the preceding

I example the amplitude of each harmonic is proportional

to the length of the line representing that harmonic I

This makes it possible to locate formant centers when vi-

I sual location is difficult

The measurements were then transferred to formant

charts cf Chart 1 on the following page

6

23

CHART I

~

t

1+

t5

1amp

Ie

z~ 2t 2p 16 12 la 8 Iii

I ~

~

I S

l I

I I

~

V V

V T

l( FORMANT V CHART

Vi ~ CcdiOrate4 ift luutdnM I V ~ cycle ~ concf

V 10 eeentl~rsI~ V

V U 5millimctcrs - I $milton

2 zk2 lis ty

I

FOlWAlfT CHART

Placing a single point on this cha-t is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one fOrrUlt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant atmiddotthe frequency named along the top or bottom edge

ex Martin Joos~ Acoustic Phonetics (1948)

CHAPTER IV

FINDINGS

The data provided by the preceding methodology conshy

sisted of a series of scatter patterns on the vowel charts

Each of the dots within the pattern represented one occurshy

rence of a particular vowel To determine the range ofmiddot each

phoneme f the most divergent points in each pattern were con-

nected by a line These lines then circumscribe an area

which included the range of all the vowels in the sample

recognized ~y the informantmiddotas a particular phoneme

Verbal descriptions the actual charts of the phonemes

and the spectrograms utilized willbe found on the followshy

ing pages

25

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 1 range~ on the

vowel chart in a broad scattering from 300-500 hz for forshy

mant 1 and 1500-2100 hz for formant 2

CHART II

1

lid

13

bull

~

It

iA

Ml

ztr Zit zp 1 S lIZ middot1 I a r 8 6

I

f

I I

Ii 3

[7l I I V 1 I

) ~I I i I bull

V I I i bull r J

I V t I I I I I

i tt I

Kl7 I I I iI ~

I I I I I I I I I i I

I I I i I f I ltII

I I l7 I VI

I [7 1

1 I I I Va FORMANTc7 CHART

I

I I I I 173 CaEiIw-atd icw~[7 rf ltfer C0ItdI I I

j I I I i 7 10 e centlCMta1 oct4v

I V 5miU~ bull itonI

r I f 711 t14 j I I I Ik IV

FoiUlAhT CHRT

Placing asinge point on this chart is an assertion that fortcants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at tn(l frequerlcy nameu Slong the right or eft cdampe the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

26

l 1I I - -~

I I iI I

I

[bIs] [bIn]

lt-- -_- -1I

lt i

1 ~ i1_ -shy Ir ~ tmiddotmiddot lt

-- - - ---~--- - - - ----- --

-i -_~ ~ shyI 1

i I I

I I bullbullq_-

I ~~~-~--shyr ~~~~~ -~- I------------------------shy

-----I

[dIm] [sIh]

27

I -[blr]

i1 1 I I

i Ii I

I i I I

ii ___ -J

rmiddot I i

I 1 j

-~ ~~~ ~-~IIlIr~~~

I

1 ____~~l_~~--=~ _ ~--~~~~~~~~~- -

51 hI$ PiiB PD~ii~i

-~ - -- -- ----- ~------- - --- _-- - _ - shy [rIll) [klr]

28

1 I I I

---~S~ -~~~fi~ ~~~~~-~

~l_ middot~ ___

[klk]

I I I

r [dlk]

29

-------- --

-~- shy~--I~~

[tIll]

30

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lEI ranged on the

vowel chart in a thin oval shaped distribution from 400-625

hz for formant 1 and from 1400-2000 hz for formant 2

CHART III

lEI

i

I

1 I

1

1middot

II~~ 5 I~ I lOa I ~--~~~I-+--+-4-+--+---+--++-+-+-+-+--r--t-t--r--t--r--1

I

I I I I

t I

4

I I 1 I ~ I I I I

I t I ~

I I ~

-r--- r--- I V~~~-r~+-+-~~~+-+-~~~~~~~--T-~-r~-r~-r~-T---T--r~

V~~~++4-~~~-4-+-+~~~~~+-~-T-rV~7

~iA~~~~~I+-~~~~~I--~~~-r~~~~~8 FORMANT HHHH~~r+~~-r~+-~+-~I~-I~~rl7V CHART

I II 11I I V9 CaZiLrww 1ft huncirccLJ

-+-f-+-II-f-+-+-+-+--+-+--+--+----+-+--+-1--t-+-1---t---t--7 rtf eye 04 ~ I 11 V pq-+-+-I~-+--i--+I-t-t--+~i-I---t--+--tr -t--t-Tj-ri~middotltJ ecentimeters 1octGy

I V 5miU~ - aemiton ~~~~I~~+-~~l~-~-T~I~~~r~

t i lt~ I I IS I I liV

FolUlAn C1LBT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion T hat rormants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency namfu along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

1 7

pal--pole pel--field

rang--rank position ring--ring

teh--tea toh--yet nevertheless

After having obtained the words from the dictionary

a native informant was called upon to verify ~he differshy

ance in meaning in the minimal pairs and to pronounce

them so that ~hey could be phonetically transcribed in

al1 impressionistic manner The informant employed was Kok

Djen Su a student at Portland State University from Yogshy

jakartai Indonesia He has been a student in the United

States for approximately two years and speaks broken al shy

though very understandable English Mr Su was horn to Mr

and Mrs Su Hendry Su who both speak Bahasa Indonesia Jashy

vanese and a small amount of Chinese Since his birth the

informant was exposed to a mixture of Javanese and Bahasa

Indonesia but has employed the national language of Indoshy

nesia since the age of three at school His bilingual upshy

bringing it seems to the author does not craate a subshy

stantial difference in the competence of Mr Su in Bahasa

Indonesia In fact he was able to distinguish the proshy

nunciation Qf words in both Javanese and in Bahasa Indoshy

nesia The utilization of one informant deletes any reshy

gional variation or individual variation between informshy

ants Since here we are attempting to ascertain the relashy

tive range of phonetic quality of vowel phonemes in Bahashy

sa Indonesia the informants bilingualism ahould cause

none or very few phonetic distortions

After-having verified the difference in meaning of

the word pairs Kok Djen ~u pronounced the word The

following impressionistic version of the Ihdonesian voshy

wel system was described

front central back

high

mid 1 I

I I low j

i I I

I

u-

E 0

A

1 Spectrograms

The phonemic entities symbolized in the preceding

section represent range-units of phonetic quality The

symbols and their position on the chart are based on the

aural perceptions of the investigator The purpose of the

spectrographic analysis of this data is to determine as

accurately as possible the actual phonetic range represenshy

ted by each of thephonemic symbols

I

i

1 9

In order to make spectrograms from which meani~gful

conclusions can be drawn one must have a native informant

of the language to be studied Spectrograms were made of

the speech of Mr Su the informant described earlier

In order to conserve the time of the informant a

sample of three-phoneme words were recorded The three-

phoneme words begin and end with consonants ahd contain a

vowel in medial position The list appears in Appendix A

The list of words was specifically selec~ed to eliminate

in so far as possible all variatiqn other than that which

is specifically caused by the preceding and following consoshy

nants This is true because by utilizing a single informant

the influence of dialects both regional and social are eshy

liminated and by utilizing one sy~lable words under primary

1stress sequential influences such as the Markov Process

are eliminated since there is no sequence beyond one phoshy

neme preceding and following the vowel This being the case

one should be able to derive from a series of spectrograms

of those vowels both the range of free variation and the

specific influence of each particular consonant on the voshy

weI quality of each medial phoneme

The n~xt st~p in the procedure was to play the tape-

recordings into the spectrograph two or three wo~ds at a

1The Markoy Process is a mechanical way of handling enshytropy in sequential operations IQ linguistics this is stashyted in terms ofthe probability of the occurrence of a parshyticular phoneme morpheme etc in a precise sequence

20

time The machine can handle 24 seconds of speech on one

spectrogram thus two or three words could be analyzed at

the same time as one with no loss in quality or precision

Unfortunately the recordings had to be played into a

microphone which picks up some background noise but by

placing the microp~one of the spectrograph very close to

the loudspeaker of the tape recorder and turning the volume

up slightly this background was eliminated for all pracshy

tical purposes middotIt would have been better to have had a

direct connection between the recordar and the spectrograph

but unfortunately no such devce was available Background

noise shows up as very small specks scattered more or less

at random and unless the volume of such noise is exceedshy

ingly strong does not interfere with the reading of the

spectrograms

Once the machine had completed the analys~s and produced

the graphic record of the list of words a frequency measur~

ing device was produced by the machine cf example below

1 11amp II~ill c=

- n- HE to

11r -shy

bull b mmiddot 1 bull bull L

-

gIl F Jamp u

n _ If

bull III

21

This measuring device is in reality a spectrogram with horishy

zontal markings The first line on the chart represents a

frequency of 0 hertz (hz) Each line above the first repshy

resents a multiple of 500 hz The device is used to locate

th~ center of formants 1 and 2 Since it is graduated in

500 hz it is necessary to interpolate when the center ofmiddot

power for a particular formant falls between two of these

lines This is done by dividing the area between the two

lines in half then dividing one of the halves in half which

gives a range of 125 hz within which the measurement falls

and an estimate is made of the precise measurement within

the 125 hz range This should give formant positions with

an accuraci of greater than plusmn25 hz

When visual location of the formant centers becprnes

difficult a section of the formant can be made cf exshy

ample below Such difficulties with visual location usually

arise when two weak formants overlap Such overlapping

produc~s what appears to the naked eye to be a band of modeshy

rately dark grey bands The sectioner is a built in mech-

IshyfL__---

tete we tt

~

I

1 I

22

anism capable of handling such problems In the preceding

I example the amplitude of each harmonic is proportional

to the length of the line representing that harmonic I

This makes it possible to locate formant centers when vi-

I sual location is difficult

The measurements were then transferred to formant

charts cf Chart 1 on the following page

6

23

CHART I

~

t

1+

t5

1amp

Ie

z~ 2t 2p 16 12 la 8 Iii

I ~

~

I S

l I

I I

~

V V

V T

l( FORMANT V CHART

Vi ~ CcdiOrate4 ift luutdnM I V ~ cycle ~ concf

V 10 eeentl~rsI~ V

V U 5millimctcrs - I $milton

2 zk2 lis ty

I

FOlWAlfT CHART

Placing a single point on this cha-t is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one fOrrUlt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant atmiddotthe frequency named along the top or bottom edge

ex Martin Joos~ Acoustic Phonetics (1948)

CHAPTER IV

FINDINGS

The data provided by the preceding methodology conshy

sisted of a series of scatter patterns on the vowel charts

Each of the dots within the pattern represented one occurshy

rence of a particular vowel To determine the range ofmiddot each

phoneme f the most divergent points in each pattern were con-

nected by a line These lines then circumscribe an area

which included the range of all the vowels in the sample

recognized ~y the informantmiddotas a particular phoneme

Verbal descriptions the actual charts of the phonemes

and the spectrograms utilized willbe found on the followshy

ing pages

25

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 1 range~ on the

vowel chart in a broad scattering from 300-500 hz for forshy

mant 1 and 1500-2100 hz for formant 2

CHART II

1

lid

13

bull

~

It

iA

Ml

ztr Zit zp 1 S lIZ middot1 I a r 8 6

I

f

I I

Ii 3

[7l I I V 1 I

) ~I I i I bull

V I I i bull r J

I V t I I I I I

i tt I

Kl7 I I I iI ~

I I I I I I I I I i I

I I I i I f I ltII

I I l7 I VI

I [7 1

1 I I I Va FORMANTc7 CHART

I

I I I I 173 CaEiIw-atd icw~[7 rf ltfer C0ItdI I I

j I I I i 7 10 e centlCMta1 oct4v

I V 5miU~ bull itonI

r I f 711 t14 j I I I Ik IV

FoiUlAhT CHRT

Placing asinge point on this chart is an assertion that fortcants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at tn(l frequerlcy nameu Slong the right or eft cdampe the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

26

l 1I I - -~

I I iI I

I

[bIs] [bIn]

lt-- -_- -1I

lt i

1 ~ i1_ -shy Ir ~ tmiddotmiddot lt

-- - - ---~--- - - - ----- --

-i -_~ ~ shyI 1

i I I

I I bullbullq_-

I ~~~-~--shyr ~~~~~ -~- I------------------------shy

-----I

[dIm] [sIh]

27

I -[blr]

i1 1 I I

i Ii I

I i I I

ii ___ -J

rmiddot I i

I 1 j

-~ ~~~ ~-~IIlIr~~~

I

1 ____~~l_~~--=~ _ ~--~~~~~~~~~- -

51 hI$ PiiB PD~ii~i

-~ - -- -- ----- ~------- - --- _-- - _ - shy [rIll) [klr]

28

1 I I I

---~S~ -~~~fi~ ~~~~~-~

~l_ middot~ ___

[klk]

I I I

r [dlk]

29

-------- --

-~- shy~--I~~

[tIll]

30

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lEI ranged on the

vowel chart in a thin oval shaped distribution from 400-625

hz for formant 1 and from 1400-2000 hz for formant 2

CHART III

lEI

i

I

1 I

1

1middot

II~~ 5 I~ I lOa I ~--~~~I-+--+-4-+--+---+--++-+-+-+-+--r--t-t--r--t--r--1

I

I I I I

t I

4

I I 1 I ~ I I I I

I t I ~

I I ~

-r--- r--- I V~~~-r~+-+-~~~+-+-~~~~~~~--T-~-r~-r~-r~-T---T--r~

V~~~++4-~~~-4-+-+~~~~~+-~-T-rV~7

~iA~~~~~I+-~~~~~I--~~~-r~~~~~8 FORMANT HHHH~~r+~~-r~+-~+-~I~-I~~rl7V CHART

I II 11I I V9 CaZiLrww 1ft huncirccLJ

-+-f-+-II-f-+-+-+-+--+-+--+--+----+-+--+-1--t-+-1---t---t--7 rtf eye 04 ~ I 11 V pq-+-+-I~-+--i--+I-t-t--+~i-I---t--+--tr -t--t-Tj-ri~middotltJ ecentimeters 1octGy

I V 5miU~ - aemiton ~~~~I~~+-~~l~-~-T~I~~~r~

t i lt~ I I IS I I liV

FolUlAn C1LBT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion T hat rormants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency namfu along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

sa Indonesia the informants bilingualism ahould cause

none or very few phonetic distortions

After-having verified the difference in meaning of

the word pairs Kok Djen ~u pronounced the word The

following impressionistic version of the Ihdonesian voshy

wel system was described

front central back

high

mid 1 I

I I low j

i I I

I

u-

E 0

A

1 Spectrograms

The phonemic entities symbolized in the preceding

section represent range-units of phonetic quality The

symbols and their position on the chart are based on the

aural perceptions of the investigator The purpose of the

spectrographic analysis of this data is to determine as

accurately as possible the actual phonetic range represenshy

ted by each of thephonemic symbols

I

i

1 9

In order to make spectrograms from which meani~gful

conclusions can be drawn one must have a native informant

of the language to be studied Spectrograms were made of

the speech of Mr Su the informant described earlier

In order to conserve the time of the informant a

sample of three-phoneme words were recorded The three-

phoneme words begin and end with consonants ahd contain a

vowel in medial position The list appears in Appendix A

The list of words was specifically selec~ed to eliminate

in so far as possible all variatiqn other than that which

is specifically caused by the preceding and following consoshy

nants This is true because by utilizing a single informant

the influence of dialects both regional and social are eshy

liminated and by utilizing one sy~lable words under primary

1stress sequential influences such as the Markov Process

are eliminated since there is no sequence beyond one phoshy

neme preceding and following the vowel This being the case

one should be able to derive from a series of spectrograms

of those vowels both the range of free variation and the

specific influence of each particular consonant on the voshy

weI quality of each medial phoneme

The n~xt st~p in the procedure was to play the tape-

recordings into the spectrograph two or three wo~ds at a

1The Markoy Process is a mechanical way of handling enshytropy in sequential operations IQ linguistics this is stashyted in terms ofthe probability of the occurrence of a parshyticular phoneme morpheme etc in a precise sequence

20

time The machine can handle 24 seconds of speech on one

spectrogram thus two or three words could be analyzed at

the same time as one with no loss in quality or precision

Unfortunately the recordings had to be played into a

microphone which picks up some background noise but by

placing the microp~one of the spectrograph very close to

the loudspeaker of the tape recorder and turning the volume

up slightly this background was eliminated for all pracshy

tical purposes middotIt would have been better to have had a

direct connection between the recordar and the spectrograph

but unfortunately no such devce was available Background

noise shows up as very small specks scattered more or less

at random and unless the volume of such noise is exceedshy

ingly strong does not interfere with the reading of the

spectrograms

Once the machine had completed the analys~s and produced

the graphic record of the list of words a frequency measur~

ing device was produced by the machine cf example below

1 11amp II~ill c=

- n- HE to

11r -shy

bull b mmiddot 1 bull bull L

-

gIl F Jamp u

n _ If

bull III

21

This measuring device is in reality a spectrogram with horishy

zontal markings The first line on the chart represents a

frequency of 0 hertz (hz) Each line above the first repshy

resents a multiple of 500 hz The device is used to locate

th~ center of formants 1 and 2 Since it is graduated in

500 hz it is necessary to interpolate when the center ofmiddot

power for a particular formant falls between two of these

lines This is done by dividing the area between the two

lines in half then dividing one of the halves in half which

gives a range of 125 hz within which the measurement falls

and an estimate is made of the precise measurement within

the 125 hz range This should give formant positions with

an accuraci of greater than plusmn25 hz

When visual location of the formant centers becprnes

difficult a section of the formant can be made cf exshy

ample below Such difficulties with visual location usually

arise when two weak formants overlap Such overlapping

produc~s what appears to the naked eye to be a band of modeshy

rately dark grey bands The sectioner is a built in mech-

IshyfL__---

tete we tt

~

I

1 I

22

anism capable of handling such problems In the preceding

I example the amplitude of each harmonic is proportional

to the length of the line representing that harmonic I

This makes it possible to locate formant centers when vi-

I sual location is difficult

The measurements were then transferred to formant

charts cf Chart 1 on the following page

6

23

CHART I

~

t

1+

t5

1amp

Ie

z~ 2t 2p 16 12 la 8 Iii

I ~

~

I S

l I

I I

~

V V

V T

l( FORMANT V CHART

Vi ~ CcdiOrate4 ift luutdnM I V ~ cycle ~ concf

V 10 eeentl~rsI~ V

V U 5millimctcrs - I $milton

2 zk2 lis ty

I

FOlWAlfT CHART

Placing a single point on this cha-t is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one fOrrUlt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant atmiddotthe frequency named along the top or bottom edge

ex Martin Joos~ Acoustic Phonetics (1948)

CHAPTER IV

FINDINGS

The data provided by the preceding methodology conshy

sisted of a series of scatter patterns on the vowel charts

Each of the dots within the pattern represented one occurshy

rence of a particular vowel To determine the range ofmiddot each

phoneme f the most divergent points in each pattern were con-

nected by a line These lines then circumscribe an area

which included the range of all the vowels in the sample

recognized ~y the informantmiddotas a particular phoneme

Verbal descriptions the actual charts of the phonemes

and the spectrograms utilized willbe found on the followshy

ing pages

25

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 1 range~ on the

vowel chart in a broad scattering from 300-500 hz for forshy

mant 1 and 1500-2100 hz for formant 2

CHART II

1

lid

13

bull

~

It

iA

Ml

ztr Zit zp 1 S lIZ middot1 I a r 8 6

I

f

I I

Ii 3

[7l I I V 1 I

) ~I I i I bull

V I I i bull r J

I V t I I I I I

i tt I

Kl7 I I I iI ~

I I I I I I I I I i I

I I I i I f I ltII

I I l7 I VI

I [7 1

1 I I I Va FORMANTc7 CHART

I

I I I I 173 CaEiIw-atd icw~[7 rf ltfer C0ItdI I I

j I I I i 7 10 e centlCMta1 oct4v

I V 5miU~ bull itonI

r I f 711 t14 j I I I Ik IV

FoiUlAhT CHRT

Placing asinge point on this chart is an assertion that fortcants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at tn(l frequerlcy nameu Slong the right or eft cdampe the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

26

l 1I I - -~

I I iI I

I

[bIs] [bIn]

lt-- -_- -1I

lt i

1 ~ i1_ -shy Ir ~ tmiddotmiddot lt

-- - - ---~--- - - - ----- --

-i -_~ ~ shyI 1

i I I

I I bullbullq_-

I ~~~-~--shyr ~~~~~ -~- I------------------------shy

-----I

[dIm] [sIh]

27

I -[blr]

i1 1 I I

i Ii I

I i I I

ii ___ -J

rmiddot I i

I 1 j

-~ ~~~ ~-~IIlIr~~~

I

1 ____~~l_~~--=~ _ ~--~~~~~~~~~- -

51 hI$ PiiB PD~ii~i

-~ - -- -- ----- ~------- - --- _-- - _ - shy [rIll) [klr]

28

1 I I I

---~S~ -~~~fi~ ~~~~~-~

~l_ middot~ ___

[klk]

I I I

r [dlk]

29

-------- --

-~- shy~--I~~

[tIll]

30

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lEI ranged on the

vowel chart in a thin oval shaped distribution from 400-625

hz for formant 1 and from 1400-2000 hz for formant 2

CHART III

lEI

i

I

1 I

1

1middot

II~~ 5 I~ I lOa I ~--~~~I-+--+-4-+--+---+--++-+-+-+-+--r--t-t--r--t--r--1

I

I I I I

t I

4

I I 1 I ~ I I I I

I t I ~

I I ~

-r--- r--- I V~~~-r~+-+-~~~+-+-~~~~~~~--T-~-r~-r~-r~-T---T--r~

V~~~++4-~~~-4-+-+~~~~~+-~-T-rV~7

~iA~~~~~I+-~~~~~I--~~~-r~~~~~8 FORMANT HHHH~~r+~~-r~+-~+-~I~-I~~rl7V CHART

I II 11I I V9 CaZiLrww 1ft huncirccLJ

-+-f-+-II-f-+-+-+-+--+-+--+--+----+-+--+-1--t-+-1---t---t--7 rtf eye 04 ~ I 11 V pq-+-+-I~-+--i--+I-t-t--+~i-I---t--+--tr -t--t-Tj-ri~middotltJ ecentimeters 1octGy

I V 5miU~ - aemiton ~~~~I~~+-~~l~-~-T~I~~~r~

t i lt~ I I IS I I liV

FolUlAn C1LBT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion T hat rormants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency namfu along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

I

i

1 9

In order to make spectrograms from which meani~gful

conclusions can be drawn one must have a native informant

of the language to be studied Spectrograms were made of

the speech of Mr Su the informant described earlier

In order to conserve the time of the informant a

sample of three-phoneme words were recorded The three-

phoneme words begin and end with consonants ahd contain a

vowel in medial position The list appears in Appendix A

The list of words was specifically selec~ed to eliminate

in so far as possible all variatiqn other than that which

is specifically caused by the preceding and following consoshy

nants This is true because by utilizing a single informant

the influence of dialects both regional and social are eshy

liminated and by utilizing one sy~lable words under primary

1stress sequential influences such as the Markov Process

are eliminated since there is no sequence beyond one phoshy

neme preceding and following the vowel This being the case

one should be able to derive from a series of spectrograms

of those vowels both the range of free variation and the

specific influence of each particular consonant on the voshy

weI quality of each medial phoneme

The n~xt st~p in the procedure was to play the tape-

recordings into the spectrograph two or three wo~ds at a

1The Markoy Process is a mechanical way of handling enshytropy in sequential operations IQ linguistics this is stashyted in terms ofthe probability of the occurrence of a parshyticular phoneme morpheme etc in a precise sequence

20

time The machine can handle 24 seconds of speech on one

spectrogram thus two or three words could be analyzed at

the same time as one with no loss in quality or precision

Unfortunately the recordings had to be played into a

microphone which picks up some background noise but by

placing the microp~one of the spectrograph very close to

the loudspeaker of the tape recorder and turning the volume

up slightly this background was eliminated for all pracshy

tical purposes middotIt would have been better to have had a

direct connection between the recordar and the spectrograph

but unfortunately no such devce was available Background

noise shows up as very small specks scattered more or less

at random and unless the volume of such noise is exceedshy

ingly strong does not interfere with the reading of the

spectrograms

Once the machine had completed the analys~s and produced

the graphic record of the list of words a frequency measur~

ing device was produced by the machine cf example below

1 11amp II~ill c=

- n- HE to

11r -shy

bull b mmiddot 1 bull bull L

-

gIl F Jamp u

n _ If

bull III

21

This measuring device is in reality a spectrogram with horishy

zontal markings The first line on the chart represents a

frequency of 0 hertz (hz) Each line above the first repshy

resents a multiple of 500 hz The device is used to locate

th~ center of formants 1 and 2 Since it is graduated in

500 hz it is necessary to interpolate when the center ofmiddot

power for a particular formant falls between two of these

lines This is done by dividing the area between the two

lines in half then dividing one of the halves in half which

gives a range of 125 hz within which the measurement falls

and an estimate is made of the precise measurement within

the 125 hz range This should give formant positions with

an accuraci of greater than plusmn25 hz

When visual location of the formant centers becprnes

difficult a section of the formant can be made cf exshy

ample below Such difficulties with visual location usually

arise when two weak formants overlap Such overlapping

produc~s what appears to the naked eye to be a band of modeshy

rately dark grey bands The sectioner is a built in mech-

IshyfL__---

tete we tt

~

I

1 I

22

anism capable of handling such problems In the preceding

I example the amplitude of each harmonic is proportional

to the length of the line representing that harmonic I

This makes it possible to locate formant centers when vi-

I sual location is difficult

The measurements were then transferred to formant

charts cf Chart 1 on the following page

6

23

CHART I

~

t

1+

t5

1amp

Ie

z~ 2t 2p 16 12 la 8 Iii

I ~

~

I S

l I

I I

~

V V

V T

l( FORMANT V CHART

Vi ~ CcdiOrate4 ift luutdnM I V ~ cycle ~ concf

V 10 eeentl~rsI~ V

V U 5millimctcrs - I $milton

2 zk2 lis ty

I

FOlWAlfT CHART

Placing a single point on this cha-t is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one fOrrUlt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant atmiddotthe frequency named along the top or bottom edge

ex Martin Joos~ Acoustic Phonetics (1948)

CHAPTER IV

FINDINGS

The data provided by the preceding methodology conshy

sisted of a series of scatter patterns on the vowel charts

Each of the dots within the pattern represented one occurshy

rence of a particular vowel To determine the range ofmiddot each

phoneme f the most divergent points in each pattern were con-

nected by a line These lines then circumscribe an area

which included the range of all the vowels in the sample

recognized ~y the informantmiddotas a particular phoneme

Verbal descriptions the actual charts of the phonemes

and the spectrograms utilized willbe found on the followshy

ing pages

25

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 1 range~ on the

vowel chart in a broad scattering from 300-500 hz for forshy

mant 1 and 1500-2100 hz for formant 2

CHART II

1

lid

13

bull

~

It

iA

Ml

ztr Zit zp 1 S lIZ middot1 I a r 8 6

I

f

I I

Ii 3

[7l I I V 1 I

) ~I I i I bull

V I I i bull r J

I V t I I I I I

i tt I

Kl7 I I I iI ~

I I I I I I I I I i I

I I I i I f I ltII

I I l7 I VI

I [7 1

1 I I I Va FORMANTc7 CHART

I

I I I I 173 CaEiIw-atd icw~[7 rf ltfer C0ItdI I I

j I I I i 7 10 e centlCMta1 oct4v

I V 5miU~ bull itonI

r I f 711 t14 j I I I Ik IV

FoiUlAhT CHRT

Placing asinge point on this chart is an assertion that fortcants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at tn(l frequerlcy nameu Slong the right or eft cdampe the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

26

l 1I I - -~

I I iI I

I

[bIs] [bIn]

lt-- -_- -1I

lt i

1 ~ i1_ -shy Ir ~ tmiddotmiddot lt

-- - - ---~--- - - - ----- --

-i -_~ ~ shyI 1

i I I

I I bullbullq_-

I ~~~-~--shyr ~~~~~ -~- I------------------------shy

-----I

[dIm] [sIh]

27

I -[blr]

i1 1 I I

i Ii I

I i I I

ii ___ -J

rmiddot I i

I 1 j

-~ ~~~ ~-~IIlIr~~~

I

1 ____~~l_~~--=~ _ ~--~~~~~~~~~- -

51 hI$ PiiB PD~ii~i

-~ - -- -- ----- ~------- - --- _-- - _ - shy [rIll) [klr]

28

1 I I I

---~S~ -~~~fi~ ~~~~~-~

~l_ middot~ ___

[klk]

I I I

r [dlk]

29

-------- --

-~- shy~--I~~

[tIll]

30

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lEI ranged on the

vowel chart in a thin oval shaped distribution from 400-625

hz for formant 1 and from 1400-2000 hz for formant 2

CHART III

lEI

i

I

1 I

1

1middot

II~~ 5 I~ I lOa I ~--~~~I-+--+-4-+--+---+--++-+-+-+-+--r--t-t--r--t--r--1

I

I I I I

t I

4

I I 1 I ~ I I I I

I t I ~

I I ~

-r--- r--- I V~~~-r~+-+-~~~+-+-~~~~~~~--T-~-r~-r~-r~-T---T--r~

V~~~++4-~~~-4-+-+~~~~~+-~-T-rV~7

~iA~~~~~I+-~~~~~I--~~~-r~~~~~8 FORMANT HHHH~~r+~~-r~+-~+-~I~-I~~rl7V CHART

I II 11I I V9 CaZiLrww 1ft huncirccLJ

-+-f-+-II-f-+-+-+-+--+-+--+--+----+-+--+-1--t-+-1---t---t--7 rtf eye 04 ~ I 11 V pq-+-+-I~-+--i--+I-t-t--+~i-I---t--+--tr -t--t-Tj-ri~middotltJ ecentimeters 1octGy

I V 5miU~ - aemiton ~~~~I~~+-~~l~-~-T~I~~~r~

t i lt~ I I IS I I liV

FolUlAn C1LBT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion T hat rormants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency namfu along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

20

time The machine can handle 24 seconds of speech on one

spectrogram thus two or three words could be analyzed at

the same time as one with no loss in quality or precision

Unfortunately the recordings had to be played into a

microphone which picks up some background noise but by

placing the microp~one of the spectrograph very close to

the loudspeaker of the tape recorder and turning the volume

up slightly this background was eliminated for all pracshy

tical purposes middotIt would have been better to have had a

direct connection between the recordar and the spectrograph

but unfortunately no such devce was available Background

noise shows up as very small specks scattered more or less

at random and unless the volume of such noise is exceedshy

ingly strong does not interfere with the reading of the

spectrograms

Once the machine had completed the analys~s and produced

the graphic record of the list of words a frequency measur~

ing device was produced by the machine cf example below

1 11amp II~ill c=

- n- HE to

11r -shy

bull b mmiddot 1 bull bull L

-

gIl F Jamp u

n _ If

bull III

21

This measuring device is in reality a spectrogram with horishy

zontal markings The first line on the chart represents a

frequency of 0 hertz (hz) Each line above the first repshy

resents a multiple of 500 hz The device is used to locate

th~ center of formants 1 and 2 Since it is graduated in

500 hz it is necessary to interpolate when the center ofmiddot

power for a particular formant falls between two of these

lines This is done by dividing the area between the two

lines in half then dividing one of the halves in half which

gives a range of 125 hz within which the measurement falls

and an estimate is made of the precise measurement within

the 125 hz range This should give formant positions with

an accuraci of greater than plusmn25 hz

When visual location of the formant centers becprnes

difficult a section of the formant can be made cf exshy

ample below Such difficulties with visual location usually

arise when two weak formants overlap Such overlapping

produc~s what appears to the naked eye to be a band of modeshy

rately dark grey bands The sectioner is a built in mech-

IshyfL__---

tete we tt

~

I

1 I

22

anism capable of handling such problems In the preceding

I example the amplitude of each harmonic is proportional

to the length of the line representing that harmonic I

This makes it possible to locate formant centers when vi-

I sual location is difficult

The measurements were then transferred to formant

charts cf Chart 1 on the following page

6

23

CHART I

~

t

1+

t5

1amp

Ie

z~ 2t 2p 16 12 la 8 Iii

I ~

~

I S

l I

I I

~

V V

V T

l( FORMANT V CHART

Vi ~ CcdiOrate4 ift luutdnM I V ~ cycle ~ concf

V 10 eeentl~rsI~ V

V U 5millimctcrs - I $milton

2 zk2 lis ty

I

FOlWAlfT CHART

Placing a single point on this cha-t is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one fOrrUlt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant atmiddotthe frequency named along the top or bottom edge

ex Martin Joos~ Acoustic Phonetics (1948)

CHAPTER IV

FINDINGS

The data provided by the preceding methodology conshy

sisted of a series of scatter patterns on the vowel charts

Each of the dots within the pattern represented one occurshy

rence of a particular vowel To determine the range ofmiddot each

phoneme f the most divergent points in each pattern were con-

nected by a line These lines then circumscribe an area

which included the range of all the vowels in the sample

recognized ~y the informantmiddotas a particular phoneme

Verbal descriptions the actual charts of the phonemes

and the spectrograms utilized willbe found on the followshy

ing pages

25

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 1 range~ on the

vowel chart in a broad scattering from 300-500 hz for forshy

mant 1 and 1500-2100 hz for formant 2

CHART II

1

lid

13

bull

~

It

iA

Ml

ztr Zit zp 1 S lIZ middot1 I a r 8 6

I

f

I I

Ii 3

[7l I I V 1 I

) ~I I i I bull

V I I i bull r J

I V t I I I I I

i tt I

Kl7 I I I iI ~

I I I I I I I I I i I

I I I i I f I ltII

I I l7 I VI

I [7 1

1 I I I Va FORMANTc7 CHART

I

I I I I 173 CaEiIw-atd icw~[7 rf ltfer C0ItdI I I

j I I I i 7 10 e centlCMta1 oct4v

I V 5miU~ bull itonI

r I f 711 t14 j I I I Ik IV

FoiUlAhT CHRT

Placing asinge point on this chart is an assertion that fortcants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at tn(l frequerlcy nameu Slong the right or eft cdampe the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

26

l 1I I - -~

I I iI I

I

[bIs] [bIn]

lt-- -_- -1I

lt i

1 ~ i1_ -shy Ir ~ tmiddotmiddot lt

-- - - ---~--- - - - ----- --

-i -_~ ~ shyI 1

i I I

I I bullbullq_-

I ~~~-~--shyr ~~~~~ -~- I------------------------shy

-----I

[dIm] [sIh]

27

I -[blr]

i1 1 I I

i Ii I

I i I I

ii ___ -J

rmiddot I i

I 1 j

-~ ~~~ ~-~IIlIr~~~

I

1 ____~~l_~~--=~ _ ~--~~~~~~~~~- -

51 hI$ PiiB PD~ii~i

-~ - -- -- ----- ~------- - --- _-- - _ - shy [rIll) [klr]

28

1 I I I

---~S~ -~~~fi~ ~~~~~-~

~l_ middot~ ___

[klk]

I I I

r [dlk]

29

-------- --

-~- shy~--I~~

[tIll]

30

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lEI ranged on the

vowel chart in a thin oval shaped distribution from 400-625

hz for formant 1 and from 1400-2000 hz for formant 2

CHART III

lEI

i

I

1 I

1

1middot

II~~ 5 I~ I lOa I ~--~~~I-+--+-4-+--+---+--++-+-+-+-+--r--t-t--r--t--r--1

I

I I I I

t I

4

I I 1 I ~ I I I I

I t I ~

I I ~

-r--- r--- I V~~~-r~+-+-~~~+-+-~~~~~~~--T-~-r~-r~-r~-T---T--r~

V~~~++4-~~~-4-+-+~~~~~+-~-T-rV~7

~iA~~~~~I+-~~~~~I--~~~-r~~~~~8 FORMANT HHHH~~r+~~-r~+-~+-~I~-I~~rl7V CHART

I II 11I I V9 CaZiLrww 1ft huncirccLJ

-+-f-+-II-f-+-+-+-+--+-+--+--+----+-+--+-1--t-+-1---t---t--7 rtf eye 04 ~ I 11 V pq-+-+-I~-+--i--+I-t-t--+~i-I---t--+--tr -t--t-Tj-ri~middotltJ ecentimeters 1octGy

I V 5miU~ - aemiton ~~~~I~~+-~~l~-~-T~I~~~r~

t i lt~ I I IS I I liV

FolUlAn C1LBT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion T hat rormants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency namfu along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

21

This measuring device is in reality a spectrogram with horishy

zontal markings The first line on the chart represents a

frequency of 0 hertz (hz) Each line above the first repshy

resents a multiple of 500 hz The device is used to locate

th~ center of formants 1 and 2 Since it is graduated in

500 hz it is necessary to interpolate when the center ofmiddot

power for a particular formant falls between two of these

lines This is done by dividing the area between the two

lines in half then dividing one of the halves in half which

gives a range of 125 hz within which the measurement falls

and an estimate is made of the precise measurement within

the 125 hz range This should give formant positions with

an accuraci of greater than plusmn25 hz

When visual location of the formant centers becprnes

difficult a section of the formant can be made cf exshy

ample below Such difficulties with visual location usually

arise when two weak formants overlap Such overlapping

produc~s what appears to the naked eye to be a band of modeshy

rately dark grey bands The sectioner is a built in mech-

IshyfL__---

tete we tt

~

I

1 I

22

anism capable of handling such problems In the preceding

I example the amplitude of each harmonic is proportional

to the length of the line representing that harmonic I

This makes it possible to locate formant centers when vi-

I sual location is difficult

The measurements were then transferred to formant

charts cf Chart 1 on the following page

6

23

CHART I

~

t

1+

t5

1amp

Ie

z~ 2t 2p 16 12 la 8 Iii

I ~

~

I S

l I

I I

~

V V

V T

l( FORMANT V CHART

Vi ~ CcdiOrate4 ift luutdnM I V ~ cycle ~ concf

V 10 eeentl~rsI~ V

V U 5millimctcrs - I $milton

2 zk2 lis ty

I

FOlWAlfT CHART

Placing a single point on this cha-t is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one fOrrUlt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant atmiddotthe frequency named along the top or bottom edge

ex Martin Joos~ Acoustic Phonetics (1948)

CHAPTER IV

FINDINGS

The data provided by the preceding methodology conshy

sisted of a series of scatter patterns on the vowel charts

Each of the dots within the pattern represented one occurshy

rence of a particular vowel To determine the range ofmiddot each

phoneme f the most divergent points in each pattern were con-

nected by a line These lines then circumscribe an area

which included the range of all the vowels in the sample

recognized ~y the informantmiddotas a particular phoneme

Verbal descriptions the actual charts of the phonemes

and the spectrograms utilized willbe found on the followshy

ing pages

25

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 1 range~ on the

vowel chart in a broad scattering from 300-500 hz for forshy

mant 1 and 1500-2100 hz for formant 2

CHART II

1

lid

13

bull

~

It

iA

Ml

ztr Zit zp 1 S lIZ middot1 I a r 8 6

I

f

I I

Ii 3

[7l I I V 1 I

) ~I I i I bull

V I I i bull r J

I V t I I I I I

i tt I

Kl7 I I I iI ~

I I I I I I I I I i I

I I I i I f I ltII

I I l7 I VI

I [7 1

1 I I I Va FORMANTc7 CHART

I

I I I I 173 CaEiIw-atd icw~[7 rf ltfer C0ItdI I I

j I I I i 7 10 e centlCMta1 oct4v

I V 5miU~ bull itonI

r I f 711 t14 j I I I Ik IV

FoiUlAhT CHRT

Placing asinge point on this chart is an assertion that fortcants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at tn(l frequerlcy nameu Slong the right or eft cdampe the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

26

l 1I I - -~

I I iI I

I

[bIs] [bIn]

lt-- -_- -1I

lt i

1 ~ i1_ -shy Ir ~ tmiddotmiddot lt

-- - - ---~--- - - - ----- --

-i -_~ ~ shyI 1

i I I

I I bullbullq_-

I ~~~-~--shyr ~~~~~ -~- I------------------------shy

-----I

[dIm] [sIh]

27

I -[blr]

i1 1 I I

i Ii I

I i I I

ii ___ -J

rmiddot I i

I 1 j

-~ ~~~ ~-~IIlIr~~~

I

1 ____~~l_~~--=~ _ ~--~~~~~~~~~- -

51 hI$ PiiB PD~ii~i

-~ - -- -- ----- ~------- - --- _-- - _ - shy [rIll) [klr]

28

1 I I I

---~S~ -~~~fi~ ~~~~~-~

~l_ middot~ ___

[klk]

I I I

r [dlk]

29

-------- --

-~- shy~--I~~

[tIll]

30

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lEI ranged on the

vowel chart in a thin oval shaped distribution from 400-625

hz for formant 1 and from 1400-2000 hz for formant 2

CHART III

lEI

i

I

1 I

1

1middot

II~~ 5 I~ I lOa I ~--~~~I-+--+-4-+--+---+--++-+-+-+-+--r--t-t--r--t--r--1

I

I I I I

t I

4

I I 1 I ~ I I I I

I t I ~

I I ~

-r--- r--- I V~~~-r~+-+-~~~+-+-~~~~~~~--T-~-r~-r~-r~-T---T--r~

V~~~++4-~~~-4-+-+~~~~~+-~-T-rV~7

~iA~~~~~I+-~~~~~I--~~~-r~~~~~8 FORMANT HHHH~~r+~~-r~+-~+-~I~-I~~rl7V CHART

I II 11I I V9 CaZiLrww 1ft huncirccLJ

-+-f-+-II-f-+-+-+-+--+-+--+--+----+-+--+-1--t-+-1---t---t--7 rtf eye 04 ~ I 11 V pq-+-+-I~-+--i--+I-t-t--+~i-I---t--+--tr -t--t-Tj-ri~middotltJ ecentimeters 1octGy

I V 5miU~ - aemiton ~~~~I~~+-~~l~-~-T~I~~~r~

t i lt~ I I IS I I liV

FolUlAn C1LBT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion T hat rormants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency namfu along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

~

I

1 I

22

anism capable of handling such problems In the preceding

I example the amplitude of each harmonic is proportional

to the length of the line representing that harmonic I

This makes it possible to locate formant centers when vi-

I sual location is difficult

The measurements were then transferred to formant

charts cf Chart 1 on the following page

6

23

CHART I

~

t

1+

t5

1amp

Ie

z~ 2t 2p 16 12 la 8 Iii

I ~

~

I S

l I

I I

~

V V

V T

l( FORMANT V CHART

Vi ~ CcdiOrate4 ift luutdnM I V ~ cycle ~ concf

V 10 eeentl~rsI~ V

V U 5millimctcrs - I $milton

2 zk2 lis ty

I

FOlWAlfT CHART

Placing a single point on this cha-t is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one fOrrUlt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant atmiddotthe frequency named along the top or bottom edge

ex Martin Joos~ Acoustic Phonetics (1948)

CHAPTER IV

FINDINGS

The data provided by the preceding methodology conshy

sisted of a series of scatter patterns on the vowel charts

Each of the dots within the pattern represented one occurshy

rence of a particular vowel To determine the range ofmiddot each

phoneme f the most divergent points in each pattern were con-

nected by a line These lines then circumscribe an area

which included the range of all the vowels in the sample

recognized ~y the informantmiddotas a particular phoneme

Verbal descriptions the actual charts of the phonemes

and the spectrograms utilized willbe found on the followshy

ing pages

25

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 1 range~ on the

vowel chart in a broad scattering from 300-500 hz for forshy

mant 1 and 1500-2100 hz for formant 2

CHART II

1

lid

13

bull

~

It

iA

Ml

ztr Zit zp 1 S lIZ middot1 I a r 8 6

I

f

I I

Ii 3

[7l I I V 1 I

) ~I I i I bull

V I I i bull r J

I V t I I I I I

i tt I

Kl7 I I I iI ~

I I I I I I I I I i I

I I I i I f I ltII

I I l7 I VI

I [7 1

1 I I I Va FORMANTc7 CHART

I

I I I I 173 CaEiIw-atd icw~[7 rf ltfer C0ItdI I I

j I I I i 7 10 e centlCMta1 oct4v

I V 5miU~ bull itonI

r I f 711 t14 j I I I Ik IV

FoiUlAhT CHRT

Placing asinge point on this chart is an assertion that fortcants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at tn(l frequerlcy nameu Slong the right or eft cdampe the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

26

l 1I I - -~

I I iI I

I

[bIs] [bIn]

lt-- -_- -1I

lt i

1 ~ i1_ -shy Ir ~ tmiddotmiddot lt

-- - - ---~--- - - - ----- --

-i -_~ ~ shyI 1

i I I

I I bullbullq_-

I ~~~-~--shyr ~~~~~ -~- I------------------------shy

-----I

[dIm] [sIh]

27

I -[blr]

i1 1 I I

i Ii I

I i I I

ii ___ -J

rmiddot I i

I 1 j

-~ ~~~ ~-~IIlIr~~~

I

1 ____~~l_~~--=~ _ ~--~~~~~~~~~- -

51 hI$ PiiB PD~ii~i

-~ - -- -- ----- ~------- - --- _-- - _ - shy [rIll) [klr]

28

1 I I I

---~S~ -~~~fi~ ~~~~~-~

~l_ middot~ ___

[klk]

I I I

r [dlk]

29

-------- --

-~- shy~--I~~

[tIll]

30

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lEI ranged on the

vowel chart in a thin oval shaped distribution from 400-625

hz for formant 1 and from 1400-2000 hz for formant 2

CHART III

lEI

i

I

1 I

1

1middot

II~~ 5 I~ I lOa I ~--~~~I-+--+-4-+--+---+--++-+-+-+-+--r--t-t--r--t--r--1

I

I I I I

t I

4

I I 1 I ~ I I I I

I t I ~

I I ~

-r--- r--- I V~~~-r~+-+-~~~+-+-~~~~~~~--T-~-r~-r~-r~-T---T--r~

V~~~++4-~~~-4-+-+~~~~~+-~-T-rV~7

~iA~~~~~I+-~~~~~I--~~~-r~~~~~8 FORMANT HHHH~~r+~~-r~+-~+-~I~-I~~rl7V CHART

I II 11I I V9 CaZiLrww 1ft huncirccLJ

-+-f-+-II-f-+-+-+-+--+-+--+--+----+-+--+-1--t-+-1---t---t--7 rtf eye 04 ~ I 11 V pq-+-+-I~-+--i--+I-t-t--+~i-I---t--+--tr -t--t-Tj-ri~middotltJ ecentimeters 1octGy

I V 5miU~ - aemiton ~~~~I~~+-~~l~-~-T~I~~~r~

t i lt~ I I IS I I liV

FolUlAn C1LBT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion T hat rormants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency namfu along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

6

23

CHART I

~

t

1+

t5

1amp

Ie

z~ 2t 2p 16 12 la 8 Iii

I ~

~

I S

l I

I I

~

V V

V T

l( FORMANT V CHART

Vi ~ CcdiOrate4 ift luutdnM I V ~ cycle ~ concf

V 10 eeentl~rsI~ V

V U 5millimctcrs - I $milton

2 zk2 lis ty

I

FOlWAlfT CHART

Placing a single point on this cha-t is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one fOrrUlt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant atmiddotthe frequency named along the top or bottom edge

ex Martin Joos~ Acoustic Phonetics (1948)

CHAPTER IV

FINDINGS

The data provided by the preceding methodology conshy

sisted of a series of scatter patterns on the vowel charts

Each of the dots within the pattern represented one occurshy

rence of a particular vowel To determine the range ofmiddot each

phoneme f the most divergent points in each pattern were con-

nected by a line These lines then circumscribe an area

which included the range of all the vowels in the sample

recognized ~y the informantmiddotas a particular phoneme

Verbal descriptions the actual charts of the phonemes

and the spectrograms utilized willbe found on the followshy

ing pages

25

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 1 range~ on the

vowel chart in a broad scattering from 300-500 hz for forshy

mant 1 and 1500-2100 hz for formant 2

CHART II

1

lid

13

bull

~

It

iA

Ml

ztr Zit zp 1 S lIZ middot1 I a r 8 6

I

f

I I

Ii 3

[7l I I V 1 I

) ~I I i I bull

V I I i bull r J

I V t I I I I I

i tt I

Kl7 I I I iI ~

I I I I I I I I I i I

I I I i I f I ltII

I I l7 I VI

I [7 1

1 I I I Va FORMANTc7 CHART

I

I I I I 173 CaEiIw-atd icw~[7 rf ltfer C0ItdI I I

j I I I i 7 10 e centlCMta1 oct4v

I V 5miU~ bull itonI

r I f 711 t14 j I I I Ik IV

FoiUlAhT CHRT

Placing asinge point on this chart is an assertion that fortcants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at tn(l frequerlcy nameu Slong the right or eft cdampe the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

26

l 1I I - -~

I I iI I

I

[bIs] [bIn]

lt-- -_- -1I

lt i

1 ~ i1_ -shy Ir ~ tmiddotmiddot lt

-- - - ---~--- - - - ----- --

-i -_~ ~ shyI 1

i I I

I I bullbullq_-

I ~~~-~--shyr ~~~~~ -~- I------------------------shy

-----I

[dIm] [sIh]

27

I -[blr]

i1 1 I I

i Ii I

I i I I

ii ___ -J

rmiddot I i

I 1 j

-~ ~~~ ~-~IIlIr~~~

I

1 ____~~l_~~--=~ _ ~--~~~~~~~~~- -

51 hI$ PiiB PD~ii~i

-~ - -- -- ----- ~------- - --- _-- - _ - shy [rIll) [klr]

28

1 I I I

---~S~ -~~~fi~ ~~~~~-~

~l_ middot~ ___

[klk]

I I I

r [dlk]

29

-------- --

-~- shy~--I~~

[tIll]

30

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lEI ranged on the

vowel chart in a thin oval shaped distribution from 400-625

hz for formant 1 and from 1400-2000 hz for formant 2

CHART III

lEI

i

I

1 I

1

1middot

II~~ 5 I~ I lOa I ~--~~~I-+--+-4-+--+---+--++-+-+-+-+--r--t-t--r--t--r--1

I

I I I I

t I

4

I I 1 I ~ I I I I

I t I ~

I I ~

-r--- r--- I V~~~-r~+-+-~~~+-+-~~~~~~~--T-~-r~-r~-r~-T---T--r~

V~~~++4-~~~-4-+-+~~~~~+-~-T-rV~7

~iA~~~~~I+-~~~~~I--~~~-r~~~~~8 FORMANT HHHH~~r+~~-r~+-~+-~I~-I~~rl7V CHART

I II 11I I V9 CaZiLrww 1ft huncirccLJ

-+-f-+-II-f-+-+-+-+--+-+--+--+----+-+--+-1--t-+-1---t---t--7 rtf eye 04 ~ I 11 V pq-+-+-I~-+--i--+I-t-t--+~i-I---t--+--tr -t--t-Tj-ri~middotltJ ecentimeters 1octGy

I V 5miU~ - aemiton ~~~~I~~+-~~l~-~-T~I~~~r~

t i lt~ I I IS I I liV

FolUlAn C1LBT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion T hat rormants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency namfu along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

CHAPTER IV

FINDINGS

The data provided by the preceding methodology conshy

sisted of a series of scatter patterns on the vowel charts

Each of the dots within the pattern represented one occurshy

rence of a particular vowel To determine the range ofmiddot each

phoneme f the most divergent points in each pattern were con-

nected by a line These lines then circumscribe an area

which included the range of all the vowels in the sample

recognized ~y the informantmiddotas a particular phoneme

Verbal descriptions the actual charts of the phonemes

and the spectrograms utilized willbe found on the followshy

ing pages

25

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 1 range~ on the

vowel chart in a broad scattering from 300-500 hz for forshy

mant 1 and 1500-2100 hz for formant 2

CHART II

1

lid

13

bull

~

It

iA

Ml

ztr Zit zp 1 S lIZ middot1 I a r 8 6

I

f

I I

Ii 3

[7l I I V 1 I

) ~I I i I bull

V I I i bull r J

I V t I I I I I

i tt I

Kl7 I I I iI ~

I I I I I I I I I i I

I I I i I f I ltII

I I l7 I VI

I [7 1

1 I I I Va FORMANTc7 CHART

I

I I I I 173 CaEiIw-atd icw~[7 rf ltfer C0ItdI I I

j I I I i 7 10 e centlCMta1 oct4v

I V 5miU~ bull itonI

r I f 711 t14 j I I I Ik IV

FoiUlAhT CHRT

Placing asinge point on this chart is an assertion that fortcants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at tn(l frequerlcy nameu Slong the right or eft cdampe the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

26

l 1I I - -~

I I iI I

I

[bIs] [bIn]

lt-- -_- -1I

lt i

1 ~ i1_ -shy Ir ~ tmiddotmiddot lt

-- - - ---~--- - - - ----- --

-i -_~ ~ shyI 1

i I I

I I bullbullq_-

I ~~~-~--shyr ~~~~~ -~- I------------------------shy

-----I

[dIm] [sIh]

27

I -[blr]

i1 1 I I

i Ii I

I i I I

ii ___ -J

rmiddot I i

I 1 j

-~ ~~~ ~-~IIlIr~~~

I

1 ____~~l_~~--=~ _ ~--~~~~~~~~~- -

51 hI$ PiiB PD~ii~i

-~ - -- -- ----- ~------- - --- _-- - _ - shy [rIll) [klr]

28

1 I I I

---~S~ -~~~fi~ ~~~~~-~

~l_ middot~ ___

[klk]

I I I

r [dlk]

29

-------- --

-~- shy~--I~~

[tIll]

30

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lEI ranged on the

vowel chart in a thin oval shaped distribution from 400-625

hz for formant 1 and from 1400-2000 hz for formant 2

CHART III

lEI

i

I

1 I

1

1middot

II~~ 5 I~ I lOa I ~--~~~I-+--+-4-+--+---+--++-+-+-+-+--r--t-t--r--t--r--1

I

I I I I

t I

4

I I 1 I ~ I I I I

I t I ~

I I ~

-r--- r--- I V~~~-r~+-+-~~~+-+-~~~~~~~--T-~-r~-r~-r~-T---T--r~

V~~~++4-~~~-4-+-+~~~~~+-~-T-rV~7

~iA~~~~~I+-~~~~~I--~~~-r~~~~~8 FORMANT HHHH~~r+~~-r~+-~+-~I~-I~~rl7V CHART

I II 11I I V9 CaZiLrww 1ft huncirccLJ

-+-f-+-II-f-+-+-+-+--+-+--+--+----+-+--+-1--t-+-1---t---t--7 rtf eye 04 ~ I 11 V pq-+-+-I~-+--i--+I-t-t--+~i-I---t--+--tr -t--t-Tj-ri~middotltJ ecentimeters 1octGy

I V 5miU~ - aemiton ~~~~I~~+-~~l~-~-T~I~~~r~

t i lt~ I I IS I I liV

FolUlAn C1LBT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion T hat rormants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency namfu along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

25

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 1 range~ on the

vowel chart in a broad scattering from 300-500 hz for forshy

mant 1 and 1500-2100 hz for formant 2

CHART II

1

lid

13

bull

~

It

iA

Ml

ztr Zit zp 1 S lIZ middot1 I a r 8 6

I

f

I I

Ii 3

[7l I I V 1 I

) ~I I i I bull

V I I i bull r J

I V t I I I I I

i tt I

Kl7 I I I iI ~

I I I I I I I I I i I

I I I i I f I ltII

I I l7 I VI

I [7 1

1 I I I Va FORMANTc7 CHART

I

I I I I 173 CaEiIw-atd icw~[7 rf ltfer C0ItdI I I

j I I I i 7 10 e centlCMta1 oct4v

I V 5miU~ bull itonI

r I f 711 t14 j I I I Ik IV

FoiUlAhT CHRT

Placing asinge point on this chart is an assertion that fortcants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at tn(l frequerlcy nameu Slong the right or eft cdampe the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

26

l 1I I - -~

I I iI I

I

[bIs] [bIn]

lt-- -_- -1I

lt i

1 ~ i1_ -shy Ir ~ tmiddotmiddot lt

-- - - ---~--- - - - ----- --

-i -_~ ~ shyI 1

i I I

I I bullbullq_-

I ~~~-~--shyr ~~~~~ -~- I------------------------shy

-----I

[dIm] [sIh]

27

I -[blr]

i1 1 I I

i Ii I

I i I I

ii ___ -J

rmiddot I i

I 1 j

-~ ~~~ ~-~IIlIr~~~

I

1 ____~~l_~~--=~ _ ~--~~~~~~~~~- -

51 hI$ PiiB PD~ii~i

-~ - -- -- ----- ~------- - --- _-- - _ - shy [rIll) [klr]

28

1 I I I

---~S~ -~~~fi~ ~~~~~-~

~l_ middot~ ___

[klk]

I I I

r [dlk]

29

-------- --

-~- shy~--I~~

[tIll]

30

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lEI ranged on the

vowel chart in a thin oval shaped distribution from 400-625

hz for formant 1 and from 1400-2000 hz for formant 2

CHART III

lEI

i

I

1 I

1

1middot

II~~ 5 I~ I lOa I ~--~~~I-+--+-4-+--+---+--++-+-+-+-+--r--t-t--r--t--r--1

I

I I I I

t I

4

I I 1 I ~ I I I I

I t I ~

I I ~

-r--- r--- I V~~~-r~+-+-~~~+-+-~~~~~~~--T-~-r~-r~-r~-T---T--r~

V~~~++4-~~~-4-+-+~~~~~+-~-T-rV~7

~iA~~~~~I+-~~~~~I--~~~-r~~~~~8 FORMANT HHHH~~r+~~-r~+-~+-~I~-I~~rl7V CHART

I II 11I I V9 CaZiLrww 1ft huncirccLJ

-+-f-+-II-f-+-+-+-+--+-+--+--+----+-+--+-1--t-+-1---t---t--7 rtf eye 04 ~ I 11 V pq-+-+-I~-+--i--+I-t-t--+~i-I---t--+--tr -t--t-Tj-ri~middotltJ ecentimeters 1octGy

I V 5miU~ - aemiton ~~~~I~~+-~~l~-~-T~I~~~r~

t i lt~ I I IS I I liV

FolUlAn C1LBT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion T hat rormants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency namfu along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

26

l 1I I - -~

I I iI I

I

[bIs] [bIn]

lt-- -_- -1I

lt i

1 ~ i1_ -shy Ir ~ tmiddotmiddot lt

-- - - ---~--- - - - ----- --

-i -_~ ~ shyI 1

i I I

I I bullbullq_-

I ~~~-~--shyr ~~~~~ -~- I------------------------shy

-----I

[dIm] [sIh]

27

I -[blr]

i1 1 I I

i Ii I

I i I I

ii ___ -J

rmiddot I i

I 1 j

-~ ~~~ ~-~IIlIr~~~

I

1 ____~~l_~~--=~ _ ~--~~~~~~~~~- -

51 hI$ PiiB PD~ii~i

-~ - -- -- ----- ~------- - --- _-- - _ - shy [rIll) [klr]

28

1 I I I

---~S~ -~~~fi~ ~~~~~-~

~l_ middot~ ___

[klk]

I I I

r [dlk]

29

-------- --

-~- shy~--I~~

[tIll]

30

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lEI ranged on the

vowel chart in a thin oval shaped distribution from 400-625

hz for formant 1 and from 1400-2000 hz for formant 2

CHART III

lEI

i

I

1 I

1

1middot

II~~ 5 I~ I lOa I ~--~~~I-+--+-4-+--+---+--++-+-+-+-+--r--t-t--r--t--r--1

I

I I I I

t I

4

I I 1 I ~ I I I I

I t I ~

I I ~

-r--- r--- I V~~~-r~+-+-~~~+-+-~~~~~~~--T-~-r~-r~-r~-T---T--r~

V~~~++4-~~~-4-+-+~~~~~+-~-T-rV~7

~iA~~~~~I+-~~~~~I--~~~-r~~~~~8 FORMANT HHHH~~r+~~-r~+-~+-~I~-I~~rl7V CHART

I II 11I I V9 CaZiLrww 1ft huncirccLJ

-+-f-+-II-f-+-+-+-+--+-+--+--+----+-+--+-1--t-+-1---t---t--7 rtf eye 04 ~ I 11 V pq-+-+-I~-+--i--+I-t-t--+~i-I---t--+--tr -t--t-Tj-ri~middotltJ ecentimeters 1octGy

I V 5miU~ - aemiton ~~~~I~~+-~~l~-~-T~I~~~r~

t i lt~ I I IS I I liV

FolUlAn C1LBT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion T hat rormants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency namfu along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

27

I -[blr]

i1 1 I I

i Ii I

I i I I

ii ___ -J

rmiddot I i

I 1 j

-~ ~~~ ~-~IIlIr~~~

I

1 ____~~l_~~--=~ _ ~--~~~~~~~~~- -

51 hI$ PiiB PD~ii~i

-~ - -- -- ----- ~------- - --- _-- - _ - shy [rIll) [klr]

28

1 I I I

---~S~ -~~~fi~ ~~~~~-~

~l_ middot~ ___

[klk]

I I I

r [dlk]

29

-------- --

-~- shy~--I~~

[tIll]

30

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lEI ranged on the

vowel chart in a thin oval shaped distribution from 400-625

hz for formant 1 and from 1400-2000 hz for formant 2

CHART III

lEI

i

I

1 I

1

1middot

II~~ 5 I~ I lOa I ~--~~~I-+--+-4-+--+---+--++-+-+-+-+--r--t-t--r--t--r--1

I

I I I I

t I

4

I I 1 I ~ I I I I

I t I ~

I I ~

-r--- r--- I V~~~-r~+-+-~~~+-+-~~~~~~~--T-~-r~-r~-r~-T---T--r~

V~~~++4-~~~-4-+-+~~~~~+-~-T-rV~7

~iA~~~~~I+-~~~~~I--~~~-r~~~~~8 FORMANT HHHH~~r+~~-r~+-~+-~I~-I~~rl7V CHART

I II 11I I V9 CaZiLrww 1ft huncirccLJ

-+-f-+-II-f-+-+-+-+--+-+--+--+----+-+--+-1--t-+-1---t---t--7 rtf eye 04 ~ I 11 V pq-+-+-I~-+--i--+I-t-t--+~i-I---t--+--tr -t--t-Tj-ri~middotltJ ecentimeters 1octGy

I V 5miU~ - aemiton ~~~~I~~+-~~l~-~-T~I~~~r~

t i lt~ I I IS I I liV

FolUlAn C1LBT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion T hat rormants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency namfu along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

28

1 I I I

---~S~ -~~~fi~ ~~~~~-~

~l_ middot~ ___

[klk]

I I I

r [dlk]

29

-------- --

-~- shy~--I~~

[tIll]

30

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lEI ranged on the

vowel chart in a thin oval shaped distribution from 400-625

hz for formant 1 and from 1400-2000 hz for formant 2

CHART III

lEI

i

I

1 I

1

1middot

II~~ 5 I~ I lOa I ~--~~~I-+--+-4-+--+---+--++-+-+-+-+--r--t-t--r--t--r--1

I

I I I I

t I

4

I I 1 I ~ I I I I

I t I ~

I I ~

-r--- r--- I V~~~-r~+-+-~~~+-+-~~~~~~~--T-~-r~-r~-r~-T---T--r~

V~~~++4-~~~-4-+-+~~~~~+-~-T-rV~7

~iA~~~~~I+-~~~~~I--~~~-r~~~~~8 FORMANT HHHH~~r+~~-r~+-~+-~I~-I~~rl7V CHART

I II 11I I V9 CaZiLrww 1ft huncirccLJ

-+-f-+-II-f-+-+-+-+--+-+--+--+----+-+--+-1--t-+-1---t---t--7 rtf eye 04 ~ I 11 V pq-+-+-I~-+--i--+I-t-t--+~i-I---t--+--tr -t--t-Tj-ri~middotltJ ecentimeters 1octGy

I V 5miU~ - aemiton ~~~~I~~+-~~l~-~-T~I~~~r~

t i lt~ I I IS I I liV

FolUlAn C1LBT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion T hat rormants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency namfu along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

29

-------- --

-~- shy~--I~~

[tIll]

30

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lEI ranged on the

vowel chart in a thin oval shaped distribution from 400-625

hz for formant 1 and from 1400-2000 hz for formant 2

CHART III

lEI

i

I

1 I

1

1middot

II~~ 5 I~ I lOa I ~--~~~I-+--+-4-+--+---+--++-+-+-+-+--r--t-t--r--t--r--1

I

I I I I

t I

4

I I 1 I ~ I I I I

I t I ~

I I ~

-r--- r--- I V~~~-r~+-+-~~~+-+-~~~~~~~--T-~-r~-r~-r~-T---T--r~

V~~~++4-~~~-4-+-+~~~~~+-~-T-rV~7

~iA~~~~~I+-~~~~~I--~~~-r~~~~~8 FORMANT HHHH~~r+~~-r~+-~+-~I~-I~~rl7V CHART

I II 11I I V9 CaZiLrww 1ft huncirccLJ

-+-f-+-II-f-+-+-+-+--+-+--+--+----+-+--+-1--t-+-1---t---t--7 rtf eye 04 ~ I 11 V pq-+-+-I~-+--i--+I-t-t--+~i-I---t--+--tr -t--t-Tj-ri~middotltJ ecentimeters 1octGy

I V 5miU~ - aemiton ~~~~I~~+-~~l~-~-T~I~~~r~

t i lt~ I I IS I I liV

FolUlAn C1LBT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion T hat rormants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency namfu along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

30

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lEI ranged on the

vowel chart in a thin oval shaped distribution from 400-625

hz for formant 1 and from 1400-2000 hz for formant 2

CHART III

lEI

i

I

1 I

1

1middot

II~~ 5 I~ I lOa I ~--~~~I-+--+-4-+--+---+--++-+-+-+-+--r--t-t--r--t--r--1

I

I I I I

t I

4

I I 1 I ~ I I I I

I t I ~

I I ~

-r--- r--- I V~~~-r~+-+-~~~+-+-~~~~~~~--T-~-r~-r~-r~-T---T--r~

V~~~++4-~~~-4-+-+~~~~~+-~-T-rV~7

~iA~~~~~I+-~~~~~I--~~~-r~~~~~8 FORMANT HHHH~~r+~~-r~+-~+-~I~-I~~rl7V CHART

I II 11I I V9 CaZiLrww 1ft huncirccLJ

-+-f-+-II-f-+-+-+-+--+-+--+--+----+-+--+-1--t-+-1---t---t--7 rtf eye 04 ~ I 11 V pq-+-+-I~-+--i--+I-t-t--+~i-I---t--+--tr -t--t-Tj-ri~middotltJ ecentimeters 1octGy

I V 5miU~ - aemiton ~~~~I~~+-~~l~-~-T~I~~~r~

t i lt~ I I IS I I liV

FolUlAn C1LBT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion T hat rormants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency namfu along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

31

I I

I ~_ f __

~~~ - - ---~ _-shy

I -- shyI - _v-- _ l

i _~~E~~~~middotmiddotmiddot ~---~--~~-it--_ ~_~ 1gt_ bullbull bull -_gt-~~~ ~ bullI

P~J r_i~=~~~ ~-~~~- - -1 I -----~ -~-~ _ ---_

~~Wa~~Ji~~L ____ __ _____ _

[PEs]

I __ shy

-- --shy

~~ ~ -Qt-shy

-~=-=----

~~~7=~~ L___ __ __ ____ _ ______~

[rFm]

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

32

[PEt]

bull - -IIot-__

- ---~~--

[dEk]

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

---

33

f ~

I

) I I

I

I I

I 1 I

I I

I

1

__ -~_~i~~-yen-=-- ~~-~= --

------------------------

[dEn] [sEn]

i

~ ----shybull __ ~

[cEr)]

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

34

1J i i

~

--~~ ~-

~~

-~- ~ -~ ~~ ~gt-- ~- ~~

I ~IJItt- F ~ 111 i~-~_~--- ~--- - _ =-- 4e -~~~-~_-_~-- _~

bull vf middotmiddot~~tmiddotmiddotl____________________~____ j

[sEp] [bEk]

[bEl]

~ shy~~--_o-

J -~~~

~~t~-~~J~ r~~7~ _

I middot---=i---=-~_4~ __ ~~~~~___I _ _~

~g_i$fj bull - ~-~~~z~ir~~ ~~~ leal -~I_ iiIB

L_________ __~________ _____~

[lEs]

I f

I

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

35

- --- ---- - ---- ----------

~-------- shy

bull

j

i

[tEll][dan]

[dEp]

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

36

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme A range~ on the

vowel chart from 600-750 hz for formant 1 and from 1600-2300

hz for formant 2

CHART IV

A

i6

i I I

I I

I I

I I

1 0

I

I I I

I I

I I

s

It

i j I Ii i I

I I

6

~ I 1 I I I I ~

I I I V~ FORMANT ~~~~~I~1~4-+-~~~--~1-+~~I~-~-r17 CHART

~~~~~~l~~~~I~i~~~~I~+I~~lr_I~I~~~$ ~U~~~h~~ ~ I I I I I ~ 7 J eye ptI -cony

1f4-i--~--+---I----t--I-4--~1--+---+--+---+---1-~i7-to e cVltJte1 oct4v

i I I I 1 5miU~ - bull iton ~~~~~~~~~middot~~~~4-~I~I--~+~middoti i

2~ I I

F01UlANT CiLlT

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion tnlt rorreints have bE-en obsered at two frequencies one formant at the frlquerJcy nSleU aiong he right 01 eft edge the other formant nt the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

37

I I i

-shy

I

I

I

~1iI

p~~~~==~~~~i~~~~

I I

[lAs]

_7 -~

-- -shy

L _ _ _ ____________ --- -- ----_~____J

[nAn]

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

--------

38

I I

------------------~----I I 11 I I

II1

flt~

I

IJ

L

i

______________________

[sAk]

f

~~ ~--r

1 shy

~~-

-- shy[sAn]

I r 1I I I

t

t

I l I

I I I

I i

I

[sAt)] [sAp]

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

39

~]

I

I I

[rArl][bAk]

I

-shy ---==-_____lshy___

[lAp ]

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

40

~----------------------------~-------------~

1 bull -l----1-shy

~middot-~-~t-=-- -

~r-shy -shy t~ III M -~ ~~---shy~t-= ~r=_ _shy

C z---=-

L______________________----- [dAs]

[dAr]

l _

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

41

v 1

I I

i

I

I -tc - bull ~ 1t iCSi4 _ -

-~~-r~middot- 1 ____ ~~~~ ~ ~ I

1 I ~=~j3~middot7-__ ~~

[kArl

---------------------~------

[dAin]l

I I

-I

I

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

42

I gt1 tmiddot

I

[bAm]

bull

~ I 1 I

gt1

-- - ___ _ N ____ ~--shy---- shy

[bAn]

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde

43

[lAh]

==III

I Imiddot

__~_--_middotfI_~__ ~ ennee ~ S

LL-

[JAk]

--------- ---------

44

---------

I i Ir I

I I j

i

I i

~ --_ -- ~

~~fb-~~~~~~ ----- shycshy7FiIf Elii=s FUP WRmiddot 75t3~ n JIilIeia

~------------

[JAs]

-II

I J

[dAnl

45

~ I 1shy

I

iI shyi t

- - - Imiddot--- ~p -~--~= roc - I

I II i

I I I

~ middot1 I

------J

j I

I I i

i I

1_____ --- I ---------------~

[kAs]

I

I I

I t

I I i

j poundiampl d

rshyl

I i

I

1

I I I

I Il

[bAl]

I~

[bAl)]

I

47

L---------------------- --------------~

[kAp] shy

t

I-- I ~ I i

I

ji I

I -I

I 1 I 1

i

)

~~

~L~--~~---~ - ~ ~

~ -shyY- r i

I

-

1

I I

)

----~ -shy- -- _ ~ ----shy

1 I i i I I

1 I

L ~~~~-~~-~-~~~-~~-gt-= rn~ J ___fi ~ 7 7TZ r~ 5UZs=j -~ l ____-------- _____ __ _ ___________ ________ I

[kAk]

i

I t r ~

--~~ -shy

~~~c~_=--_u ce4 we

I r bull

[gAr)]

~-~ shy

- -~ -~~

~P ~-~~

I ~~

-- bull ~ I - ~~-~~

~-~~~--~ shymiddotT _i

48

-----------------------------l

I I

I I

[rAk]

~_

~ ~--- ~~~-~

j ~~ ~ ~ ~7

~ bull~~middote ri~-is~~~l-IIII-middotlIIIIn---I~-- 41~~~~~ ~

1--=-_---- - - -===--------shy

[sAil]

I

49

_- I I

I -- ----------------shy

~2~~~ ~~

i i I I ~~~~~~~~b ~-

middot_- _ ~~------

j

i ~ at -== l - -- ~-~~it I ax I C1 bullbull~~- shy

I

I i

I I

I 1 I II r I I

-r- --shy

~~-~-~- -~-

-1 l I

I I

[bAs] [PAs]

r-------------------~------------___

[pAl]

I

50

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme 0 ranged on the

vowel ~ha~t from 400-525 hz for formant 1 and from 700~1000

hz for formant 2

CHART V

0

III

t5

lot

S

6

Ie

to

Z7 Zit 9 I 1 I a I z I a 6 6

I

I ~ I

I i II I

j i bull I I

I I I i I

I ~ t

~ ~I I

f I

I ~ f A I I I

j [- V I 1 I I I II ~ I 1 I I

At I

I t I I

V V

V 7

i I Vi( FORMANT I 1 I 1 CHARTI I

I V 3 C41iotc4 ill lUjn~ 01 eycpr ~0It4

i I f I IV

I ) I V IO 6 centltcrs 1 octcv1 I I I 5miU~ -Istmi-toneI

I I VII 2 I ltQshy t 116 IV

FOlUlUfT CRBT

Placing a single point Oll this chart is ampn assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies (me iormant at the frequency nametl ~ong the right or left edge the other tonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

Ishy

51

r--- -_-__ - --------shy

-- ~--- --shy~ -

--f -~-

[tOll][pOn]

~ ---- -11lt1 ~

~-- - -~ P---~Amiddot_

t _ __ _

1 r I

--1 i I

I

I ~~~J L____ _ 1 rshy

[dOs] [b0s]

i Imiddot

52

---------------------~---

i I r -------- --------shy

r~~middot-~ [

I V I ~~

I - shy

~~~middottdmiddot~~-~-middot~-

S~~i~~-~ ~- bmiddotmiddotmiddotL _____middot_ ~_

[bOr] [rOk]

I

1 I

i i

j

I

[dOpJ[pOl]

53

Ii --~ --~--- -~~~~--=- I r

~ ~- ~ - ~ - shyI - -~ ~~ -~~ I

-1bullbull - h ~~~

~~~ ~ ~~~~----- ~~-~~~-~- ~--~~~~L- ~bullbull

I middot~-~middotdf r scr ~~~~~

~-laquo~~-==~~~-~~--~~~~ ~~

I

[lOs]

I

I

r I

i 1

i 1

I I J_____~ __ _-_M___J

[bOn]

54

i -~----

I I I r r

~-~ -shy

[bOn][sOp]

jI ----II I J

i

I I I

I I I i

I~~~==it shy

[jOk][tQr)]

55

1 I

I

II I I I

I c ~~~~~~~~ ~~OOWJI~~=U

[lOh]

i I

I

I ~~~-

I ~- -- shyl - _- ~ shy

I ~n=~~-~middot ~FlR T =Iti 1amp11 dill_

__-J

[pOt]

__J pOs]

1

- =xu

[bOk]

I

56

The distribution for the sounds which the informant

produced and recognized as the phoneme lUI range~ on the

vowel

hz for foimant

chart in an

1

almost square-like pattern from

and from 700-1000 hz for formant

250-350

2

CHART VI

lui fIG

3

t

ts

~

la

Il

IT zt 20 IS

I I

I I

i j

I

I j

I I

I

I I I

I t I I I1

I J I I I

~ i I LJ J I~

I

I

I

la -I

10

I

I I I 1

t I I i

I

I

I I

I

I I I

I ~ 1 v I)

V V

qV

FOlUfANT atRT lt

8 6

I t lt

~

I

l --~ I--- ~I I

i

I I

I I I i ltiI I

I i ~

I t

V

V V l( FORMANT I V CHART V

V Caiote4 iramp 1umb_ ef cycipampf on4

6 CelItlmctcrs bull octclv SmiUitoctamprs -I a~i-tonl

PlaciDg a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along ~he right or eft ede the other fonnant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

I

57

I

I

I -I

I

j _-

~~ -

-

bull I -

[dUp]

t I ~

~

I middot1

f

IshyIj II

I i

-------=shyI ~~-- -

L ~~-=-r--~~-III--=---

58

i middot1 I

I

i j I Imiddot

I~1 middotU~ _ s

I ~~~~~_-_-~--~ --_ I

L~ __________~_____________~ [CUll]

I

I

[dUr]

I

I J

I

I I

II

1

-yen ~ L___________ ~__ ~=~

I [kUs][pUn]

59

I

I

i L ~ -----------~-

____---shy______---2

~~~ -~ _

j ~---

I~~~-~-~ ~~ ~~

[nUn] [lUp]

I 1

~-=-~ ~~ -

[rlhn]

I

60

l

- _ ~~-----

~~~~~ JlCIIPrl fue rm ad I II

L ~ [gUI)] [kUk]

e_

__ ~ e-

~-d~~~~

[lUs] [jUs]

61

shy

I

Iii lEI and A Compa~ed

In comparing the distributions of the vowels III lEI

and IA( cf Chart VII on p 62 it is evident from the plots

that the front-back tongue position is for all practical

purposes identical ie the core distribution for all

three phonemes ranges between 1600-2000 hz This demonshy

strates conclusively that the significant phonetic differshy

ence is tongue h~igth ie t~e position of formant 1

The fact of phonemi~overlap is illustrated by the

crosshatching on Chart VII The cross-hatched area represhy

sents a r~nge of phonetic quality that is identified in one

instance as an III and in another instance as an IE or in

one instance as an lEI and in another instance as an IA

bullbullbull the sounds which follow one another in a changing sequence constitute the signals of speech and these sounds are produced by movements of the vocal apparashytus i e by movements of the lips tongue throat lungs and so on It is therefore important to understand that these vocal movements caused by the various muscles involved tend to slur into one anothshyer Since each variation of movement gives a varishyation in sound the slurring of movements produces a slurring of sounds Furthermore since specific sound will have different slurs of moveme~t depend~ ing upon the movement which it precedes or folloItJs each sound type resul tant from the productive moveshyments will vary somewhat according to the sounds which it precedes or follows (Pike 1947)

In line with this the next logical step would be to

look for environmental influences which would enable a listshy

ener to determine which phoneme was represented when phones

were recorded in the overlap area

62

CHART VII

lIlt lEI and A Compared

~ 2[7

t5

lot

5

ft

fA

Ie

Zit I zp 16 I a la 8 6

t I

~

II V I I I I +

r l~ ~ ~ I

I I ~ ~ V I I 1shy fZ I I t s

) I I j I I I

i ~ I 1 1 I I _lgt

V ~R R-r--~ I V

ItV l(

I I---I-

V~ j shy ~

I I I I FORMANTI I

I I VV CHARTI II I V S CaliL-tcd I Uut

I I I l of fIelc F- 0114

I I I I I j i I 10 ecentImeters 1oct4v

I

I ~ V Smillimctus Iumrton_ j VII

2f1 2~ 16 ltv

FOlUlANT ClIABl

Placing single point on this chart is an assertion that io-rnants have been observed at wo frequencies one formant at the frequency named ~ong the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

63

A fairly thorough study of the positions of various

vowel sounds in specific environments did not indicate any

consistent variations of a particular type For example

the vowel in dim is in the lower range for the vowelIII

but the EI in dem is in the upper range -of the vowel lEI

Thus it seems probable that those sounds in the overlap area

are qualities for which minimal contrasts do not exist For

example the II in sih is in the overlap area but appar-middot

ently is clearly recognizable by a native sp~aker because

there is no seh at least no such word was known to the

informaht nor could one be found in the dictionary (Echols

and Shadily 1968)

IU and 0 Compared

In contrast with the front vowels III IE and IAI

the back vowels Iu and 0 have aconsiderable gap plusmn50

hz between the1r two distributions cf Chart VIII on

p 64 The distributions appear directly above one another

on the chart In comparing the two ranges it is appa~ent

that the front-ba~k position formant 1 is identical ie

the core distribution for the phoneme ranges from 700-1000

hz This demonstrates that ~he position of formant 1 ie

tongue height is the significant phonetic difference

64

CHART VI I I

U and 0 Compared

I I

i

5

~

5

6

til

~

2[1

I

Zit zp 15 IZ la a 6

~ I -~

1 ~ ~ ~

~

I V 1

V

I V ~

JIll ~

I I 1 6

1 middotV V l(

vI( FORMANT CHART

9 CalLOt-ctc4 ift 1awuutb of cyc14 p ICCOftI

I~ I V 6 eentllMtcrs 1 octo

I V 5mmi~ - ampImitenI VII

214 I 210 16 IV FOlUfANT CE1ART

PJaciDc a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed at two frequencies one form3nt at the frequency named along the right or left edge the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

middotr I

65

II lEI IAI lUI and 101 Compared

In comparing all three phonemes in their respective

poJition on the vowel chart cf Chart IX an p 66 there I

se~ms to be no problem identifying between front and back

vowels There is a gap of approximately 400 hz between

th$ two back vowels and the three front vowels in terms of I

fotment 2 Also it would appear that there would be no

pr~blem in identifying specific vowel qualities so far as

fOfmant position is concerned for vowels in stressed position

with the exception of the phonemic overlapping discussed in

a preceding section ie III-lEI and IE-A

I

I

Imiddot I

CHART IX

I 1 E IA U and 0 Compared I

iM zr Ztt ap J 6 I Z 10 S 6

I I f ts I

~

tj1- ~

rL ~ ~

J 4- 1 ~ ~ i~ ~ V

Ii ~W~ V I ~~ ~ J

V I ~ ~

IS I ~ V 5 1 t

~

s ~ I I f

V R ~ r-~ I V

if~ V ~ ~

-- V 7

~ -~ [a ti I l( FORMANT

V CHART

V 0 cyclu on4 S CaULntte4 ilt hWldr_

I

Kl I jmiddotV I j V 10 6 centlrMtcll1 oct4v

V 5llIil(lCtampn ~ hl4Imiton

Vii 2~ zkgt 116 I IIyen

I

Forw~ CllABT I

Placing a single point on this chart is an assertion that formants have been observed I at two frequencies one formant at the frequency named along the rignt or left edgeI

the other formant at the frequency named along the top or bottom edge

~ ~ bull -

66

I

I I j

Cbull

I I

i

CHAPTER V I SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONI

I As is shown on Chart IX on p 66 there appears to I I

bela very discernable distribution for each of the vowel I

Phtnemes of Bahasa Indonesia This does not mean that the

ci cumscriptions of each of the various sounds indicate I

detinite border lines for each vowel Rather it shows i

th~ position o~ each vowel in relation to the other vowel

phbnemes The vowel charts show the position of the phonemes

i asl produceq by one native speaker of the language Thus

nJ conclusions can and should ~e made regarding the definite

oJter boundaries of the ranges of middotp~onemes As is implied I

b~ the term ranges the phonemes have no defined boundarshy

I i~s

i Bahasa Indonesia does not appear to have two front I

v~wels two back vowels and one central vowel as is implied

i+I

the traditional symbolization Rather it has three i

ftont vowels with a three-way contrast between high mid I

i a~d low and a two-way contrast of high vs mid in the back

a1ea of~he articulation chart If a traditional symbolshy

i~ation of the vowel phonemes of the language were now to

b~ dawn it would look like the following chart I I I

68

front central back

high

mid

low

I

U

E 0

A

Thus as has been demonstrated the impressionistic

sion of the vowel system was in error with regards to

central phoneme of the language investigated There

a ears to be no low-central phoneme in the language

r it is a low-front one Although the spectrograph

c nnot establish a phonemic system of a language on its

o n it can provide a yes or no answer about the phoneshy

t c qualities of the phonemes in question After a phoneshy

m c system has been established the spectrograph can proshy

v de phonetic data which distinguishes one phoneme from

a other

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sources Cited

Almiddotsjahbana Takdir The Indonesian Language - By-product of Nationalism Pacific Affairs XXII (1949)388-92

Am rican University Area Handbook for Indonesia Washingshyton DC ~S Government Printing Office 1970

Blch B and G Trager Outline of Linguistic Analysis Baltimore Waverly Press 1942

Du n H K Calculation of vowel resonances Journal of the Acoustic Society of America XXII (1950) 740-53

ols John M and Hassan Shadily An Indonesian-Enqlish Dictionary Ithaca Cornell University Press 1963

ner C Reserches sur la structure des voyelles orashyles Archives Neerlander Phonetic Experiments XX (1947) 40-77

obson Roman C Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle Prelimshyinaries of Speech Analysis Cambridge MIT Press shy1961

J s Martin Acoustic Phonetics Baltimore Linguistic Society of America 1948

L defoged Peter Three Areas of Experimental Phonetics London Oxford University Press 1967

P Mario Glossary of Linguistic Terminology New York Columbia University Press 1966

Perce Joe E The Spectrographic Study ~f Vocalic Nuclei Language Learning XII (1963) 241-247

- --- Phonemic Theory and the Analysis of English Syllashybic Nuclei Linguistics XVII (1965) 36-57

P ke Kenneth L Phonemics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press 1947

70

Pi e t Kenneth L Phonetics Ann Arbor University of Michigan Press t 1943

Pu gram Ernst Introduction to the Spectrography of Speech New York Dover Publications 1966

ir Edward Language An Introduction to the Study of Speech New York Harcourt Brace amp Co 1921

enbeck E M Indonesia and Malaysia 1I Current Trends in Linguistics IIX (1967) 55-111

dman Dorothy The Republic of Indonesia New York N Y Philosophical LibrarYt Inc 1955

Sources Consulted

r e j e v N D bull Some ProbIem s 0 f Baha s a In don e s i a Ph a nshyology Studia Linguistica XI (~1957) 44-46

lingmiddotC L Linguistic Units The Hague~ Mouton amp Co 1960

J obson t R Hague

and M Halle Mouton amp Co

Fundamentals 1956

of Language The

K nedy Raymond Bibliography of Indonesian Peoples and Cultures New Haven Yale University Press 1962

Perce Joe E Spectrographic Study of English Vowels Under Primary Stress Linguistics LXXXIV (1-972) 41-84

P ttert Ralph K George A Kopp and Harriet C Green Visible Speech New York Dover Publications t 1966

T euw A Critical Survey of Studies on Malay and Bahasa Indonesia The Hague Martinus Nyhoff 1961

-basin

-head of an area

-form of address

-ball bag

-bell

ba --bank I

bUr --you I

bi --beer

bomiddot--drill I

ba--bliJss

bi --bus i

I t

bo I

--bunch bun~le i I

ba--crossbeam

--bomb

--tire

--son of

--ration coupon bond

--garbage dump

--checkered design

--inch

--and plus

APPENDIX A

LIST OF WORDS

den~-abbrev of the title raden

dar--olace location

dur--pearl

das--a shot

dos--small box

dek--deck

dik--younger sibling

dep--to b~ shelved

dop--hubcap

dup-~to be baptized

djak--jug

djok--seat

djas--coat

djus--part of the Koran

gang--paBsageway hall

gung--gong

kak--form of address for elder

kik--handloom

kuk--collar harness

kar--map

kir--jo test

kas ~money supply i

kus -to hiss spit I

lahi-alreadY

loh-writing tablet

lapi -towel I

lup -magnifving glass or

last -IrJeld i oint

lesl -lessonI

lOs -shed I

I I

-to iron

-which who

nu -yonder

po

pa --pole

pa --to fit

pe --plague I

po --mail I

pel --cap

pOI --pot

--pound

--also

r --shelf

--shirt

g-o-rank position

g--ring

--brake

rum--cream

sah--valid legal

sih--an enclitic usedmiddotto soften what follows

san--form of address far sargeant

sen--cent

sang--superior

seng--zinc

sap--line row

sep--chief boss

sop--soup

sjak--suspicion doubt

sjok--attractive

tang--tongs pincer~

ting--sweet meat

tong--barrel vatmiddot

teh--tea

toh--yet nevertheless

tjeng--molasses

tjung--young boy

III 1

APPENDIX E

LINGUISTIC SYMBOLIZATION USED

IAI~high-front-openIi

II

~ r

E~-mid-front-~pen

III

AA-low-front-op~n t1

o1-mid-back-open

Uf-high~baCk-close III

I III

~~~vd bilabial stop

[dj~vd alveolar stop l

I I

[kt-Vl velar stop I

[g I-vd bull velar stop

[1 -lateral I

(n-vd alveolar nasal 1

(m~-vd bilabial nasal

~I-Vd velar nasal

I

III ~IJ

I

q

dl

I

Iil~

I

Vowels

Consonants

[p]-vl bilabial stop shy

[t]-vl alveolar stop

[rJ-vd alveolar flap

[jJ-vd palatal affricate

[CJ-vl palatal affricate

[S]~vl bull alveolar affricatmiddote

[s]-vl alveolar middotfricative

h]- vI velar aspirant

  • A Spectrographic Analysis of Bahasa Indonesia Vowel Phonemes Under Primary Stress in CVC Words
    • Let us know how access to this document benefits you
    • Recommended Citation
      • tmp1422474824pdfL9nde